Radio Ip Alcatel

9600LSY/LHR REL.1.0/2.
0 TECHNICAL HDBK
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRELIMINARY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HANDBOOK STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QUICK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 17 18 18 19 20
SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . .

11 INTRODUCTION TO THE 9600LSY RADIO SYSTEM FAMILY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 Main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 System usage in MW links and networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5 9600LSY basic configurations and Network Element types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 Introduction to system configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.2 Station types and configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.3 Channel configurations and protection schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 General block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4 Hardware components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.2 Rack and Top Rack Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.3 Transceiver subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.4 Baseband subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.5 ADM 1650SMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.6 FANS Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.7 System wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05 04 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
25
27 27 27 28 31 33 35 35 36 36 36 39 40 41 41 41 42 44 49 52 53
050208 040629 011115 DATE
S405011401 S404062101 validated CHANGE NOTE
S.SOLIMENA ITAVE V.RODELLA ITAVE G.CONSONNI ITACO APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
E.CORRADINI ITAVE E.CORRADINI ITAVE E.CORRADINI ITACO F.BUTORI, G.MAISTO ORIGINATOR
ED
9600LSY REL.1.0/2.0 LHR TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 1 / 542
12.4.8 Installation materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 Radio Transmission features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.2 Frequency reuse technique (CCDP) and XPIC Cross Polarization Canceller . . . . . 12.5.3 Transmitted power control: static and ATPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6 Signal Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6.2 STM0 & STM1 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6.3 SDH mapping adopted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6.4 SDH interface usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6.5 SOH bytes and service channel access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7.3 Synchronization in Regenerator station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7.4 Synchronization in WMSN station by means of 1650SMC ADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8 Equipment Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8.3 The NE architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8.4 The F interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8.5 The Qecc/QB3 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8.6 ECT and RECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2 System Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2.1 General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2.2 99% power channel bandwidth and Emission Designator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2.3 Power supply characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2.4 Mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3 Transceiver characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4 Regenerator and Modem characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4.1 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4.2 XPIC & Combiner (XPIC STM1 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4.3 Regenerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4.4 Power consumption (Regenerator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 Branching interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6 Protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7 Environmental characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7.1 General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7.2 Mechanically active substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8 Optical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8.1 Related Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8.2 Hazard Level classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8.3 Incorporated laser sources characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8.4 Labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8.5 Aperture and fiber connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8.6 Engineering design features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8.7 Safety instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.9 1650SMC characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53 54 54 54 57 60 60 60 61 62 63 72 72 72 72 72 77 77 77 78 80 80 81 83 83 83 84 90 91 92 93 95 95 97 98 99 100 100 101 101 101 102 102 102 102 103 104 104 104 104
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 2 / 542
SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

21 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2 Station configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3 Radio channel configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4 System configuration for network solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5 Branching configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6 Rack configurations for frequency reuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6.1 Interconnections in reused systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 121 121 126 134 135 140 143
22 EQUIPMENT PART LIST AND PROVISIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 22.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 22.2 Part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 22.3 Equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 22.3.1 Rack and shelves summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 22.3.2 Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 22.3.3 Base Band shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 22.3.4 Transceiver shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 22.3.5 FANS shelf and FANS assembled units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 23 OPERATIVE INFORMATION ON EQUIPMENT BOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 23.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 23.2 Cautions to avoid equipment damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 23.3 Boards of BaseBand shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 23.3.1 PSU and PSF units operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 23.3.2 SYSTEM CONTROLLER and FLASH CARD unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . 172 23.3.3 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 23.3.4 RRACHANNEL unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 23.3.5 RRASTANDBY unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 23.3.6 MODEM unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 23.4 TRANSCEIVER unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 23.4.1 Composition of transceiver units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 23.4.2 Assembly views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 23.4.3 Internal composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 23.4.4 Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 23.4.5 Internal interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 23.4.6 Front connectors usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 23.5 Branching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 23.5.1 Branching drawings and BranchingTransceivers connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 23.5.2 Branching Front Plate Kit (Rx branching area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 23.6 FANS SHELF and FANS assembled unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 23.7 Boards of TRU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 23.7.1 Top Rack Unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 23.7.2 Kit Loudspeaker operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 23.8 Additional Housekeeping unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 24 SYSTEM CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 24.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 24.2 Shelves connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 24.2.1 TRU connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 24.2.2 Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 24.2.3 Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST connector layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 24.2.4 Transceiver shelf connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 24.3 Cable kits and cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 3 / 542
SECTION 3: FREQUENCY PLANS, TRANSCEIVER P/N & HW SETTING . . . . 243

31 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 31.1 Channel plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 31.2 Transmitter specialization for a frequency plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 31.3 Transceiver hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 31.3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 31.3.2 Hardware setting dipswitches on transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 31.3.3 Frequency setting by HW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 31.3.4 Hardware setting of the transceiver Tx and Rx frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 31.3.5 Settings for reuse configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 31.3.6 Example of hardware setting of two transceivers in a radio link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 31.3.7 Propaedeutic explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 32 9640LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1 9640LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2 9640LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2.1 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR Recommendation F.635. fig.3/Annex 1 . . . . . . . . . . 32.2.2 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.635 recommends 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2.3 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR Recommendation F.382 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2.4 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR F. 382 (Extended) Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2.5 9640LSY Channel plan: DTI channel plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2.6 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR Recommendation F.635, Annex 1, fig.6 . . . . . . . . . . 32.2.7 9640LSY Channel plan: O.I.R.T. (Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 9647LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1 9647LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2 9647LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2.1 9647LSY Channel plan: ITUR Recommendation F.1099, Annex 1, fig. 2 . . . . . . . . 33.2.2 9647LSY Channel plan: Spain UN56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2.3 9647LSY Channel plan: Austria Defence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 9662LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1 9662LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2 9662LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.1 9662LSY Channel plan: ITUR F 383 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.2 9662LSY Channel plan: O.I.R.T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
259 259 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 267 267 268 269 270 271 271 271 272 273 275 275 275
35 9667LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.1 9667LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.2 9667LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 4 / 542
24.4 Power supply distribution connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.5 Connections between TRU and input housekeepings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6 Signal connections between shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.7 ModemTransceiverBranching connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.8 External interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.8.1 Power Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.8.2 SDH interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.8.3 Input / Output Unprotected WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.8.4 Input / Output Protected WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.8.5 Auxiliary Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.8.6 Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.8.7 Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.8.8 Summarizing / Housekeeping alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
218 218 219 221 230 230 230 230 230 231 235 236 236
35.2.1 9667LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.384, CEPT T/R 1402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.2.2 9667LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.384 IRAN STM1 6U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
276 277 279 279 279 280 281 283 284 286 288
36 9674LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.1 9674LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.2 9674LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.2.1 9674LSY Channel: ITUR F.385 Annex 3 L&H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.2.2 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Annex 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.2.3 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Annex 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.2.4 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.2.5 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.2.6 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37 9681LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 37.1 9681LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 37.2 9681LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 37.2.1 9681LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 37.2.2 9681LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 37.2.3 9681LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 POLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 37.2.4 9681LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 IRAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 37.2.5 9681LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 38 9610LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38.1 9610LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38.2 9610LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38.2.1 9610LSY Channel plan: MEDIASET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 9611LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.1 9611LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.2 9611LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.2.1 9611LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.387 rec. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.2.2 9611LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.387 ANNEX 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 9613LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310.1 9613LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310.2 9613LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310.2.1 9613LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.497 Rec.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310.2.2 9613LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.497 rec.1 IRAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 299 299 300 301 301 301 302 303 305 305 305 306 308
SECTION 4: MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

41 MAINTENANCE POLICY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.1 Classification of maintenance levels and operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.2 First Level Maintenance Personnel skill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.3 Second Level Maintenance Personnel skill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 311 312 312
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
42 SET AND USE OF EOW FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 42.1 Telephone kit and telephone set operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 42.2 EOW Channel use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 42.2.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 42.2.2 Call Setup/End by Telephone Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 42.2.3 Additional standard Party lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 42.3 TPH Channel use (Additional Voice) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 42.3.1 General Information and usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 42.3.2 Additional Party lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 5 / 542
44 FIRST LEVEL MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.2 Procedure summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.3 System state display by visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.3.1 Inspection of station alarm lamps on TRU (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.3.2 Inspection of alarm lamps on SYSCO unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.4 Checks by Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45.1 Preventive Maintenance every year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45.1.1 Preventive Maintenance for Fans Assembled Units (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
325 325 325 326 326 327 328 331 331 332
46 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 46.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 46.2 General flowchart of corrective maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 46.3 Alarm acknowledgment and attending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 46.3.1 Alarm acknowledgment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 46.3.2 Alarm Attending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 46.4 TroubleShooting starting with visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 46.4.1 Problems with the Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 46.4.2 CARD FAIL red led on SYSCO Unit turned on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 46.5 TroubleShooting via Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 46.5.1 Alarm Surveillance (1330AS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 46.5.2 Operators Controls of the protection switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 46.5.3 Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 46.5.4 TX mute function (local and remote) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 46.5.5 Not Intrusive BER measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 46.5.6 J0 Section Trace management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 46.5.7 Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 46.5.8 Radio Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 46.5.9 Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 46.5.10 Additional information on other handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 47 UNIT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 47.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 47.2 Summary information on FPGA upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 47.3 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 47.3.1 EMC norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 47.3.2 Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 47.3.3 Cautions to avoid equipment damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 47.3.4 PSU replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 47.3.5 PSF replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 47.3.6 SYSCO replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 47.3.7 FLASH CARD replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 6 / 542
43 MAINTENANCE TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.2 Instruments and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.2.1 Software tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.2.2 System and Maintenance Tool Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.3 Set of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.3.1 Types of Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.3.2 Number of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.3.3 General rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.3.4 Spare Flash Card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
317 317 317 317 318 322 322 324 324 324
47.3.8 SERVICE replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47.3.9 RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47.3.10 OPTICAL MODULE replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47.3.11 MODEM replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47.3.12 FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 TRANSCEIVER REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48.1 Choice of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48.1.1 Transmitter specialization for a frequency plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48.2 Transceiver replacement with a preassembled transceiver assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . 48.3 Transceiver repair and replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 FAULTY UNIT REPAIR AND REPAIR FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49.1 Faulty unit sending back to repair center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49.2 Repair Form filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
357 359 362 364 367 369 369 369 370 373 395 395 395
SECTION 5: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

51 SIGNAL MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51.1 STM1 frame structure and WST mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51.2 STM0 frame structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51.3 RFCOH services structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51.4 SOH management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51.5 DCCR Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51.6 ATPC Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51.7 Sub STM1 framing processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51.8 SOH handling in normal operation condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51.9 Alarms detected in RST section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51.10 Regenerator Section trace management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51.10.1 J0 management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51.10.2 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51.10.3 K0 management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.2 Power supply subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.3 Equipment Control Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.3.1 Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.3.2 System Controller unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.3.3 Flash Card description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.3.4 Additional Housekeeping unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.4 Baseband subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.4.1 Interconnection general block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.4.2 N+1 switch logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.4.3 1:N switch logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.4.4 RRACHANNEL STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.4.5 RRASTANDBY STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.4.6 STM1 optical module description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.4.7 MODEM STM1 1WST and STM0 0WST description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.4.8 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.5 Transceiver subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.5.1 Interconnection general block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.5.2 DC/DC converter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.5.3 Transmit and Service module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.5.4 Receive & IF Rx module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 399 399 401 402 406 409 410 416 417 420 421 422 423 425 425 426 430 430 435 441 442 443 443 445 452 454 456 459 460 464 469 469 471 472 476
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 7 / 542
52.5.5 Local Oscillator module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.6 Fans subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
477 479
53 ALARM MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 53.1 Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SYSCO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 53.2 Visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 53.2.1 Centralized Equipment Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 53.2.2 Alarm visual indications on units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 53.2.3 Status of radio protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 53.3 Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 53.4 Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
SECTION 6: APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

APPENDIX A : SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1 : Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2 : Compliance with International Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3 : Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3.1 : General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3.2 : Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3.3 : Dangerous Electrical Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3.4 : Harmful Optical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3.5 : Risks of Explosions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3.6 : Moving Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3.7 : Heatradiating Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3.8 : Equipment emitting RF power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3.9 : Specific safety rules in this handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.4 : Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.4.1 : EMC General Norms Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.4.2 : EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.4.3 : EMC General Norms Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.5 : Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.6 : Suggestions, notes and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.7 : Labels affixed to the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.7.1 : Label specific for 9600LSY Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.7.2 General use labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX B : INFORMATION ON FORMER VERSION TRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1 : T.R.U. connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2 : Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3 : Power supply distribution connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX C : DOCUMENTATION GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1 : Handbook guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1.1 : Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1.2 : Purpose of the handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1.3 : Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2 : Documentation set description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.1 : 9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0 productreleaseversion handbooks for LHR version . . . . . . C.2.2 : 9600LSY Rel.2.0 productreleaseversion handbooks for LHRC version . . . . . . . . . . C.2.3 : Documentation of 9600LSY for both LHR and LHRC versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.4 : Optional handbooks and CDROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3 : General on Alcatel Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3.1 : CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3.2 : Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 491 491 492 492 493 494 495 497 497 498 499 499 500 500 500 500 501 501 502 502 503 511 512 513 514 515 515 515 516 517 522 523 525 527 529 531 531 532
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 8 / 542
C.3.3 : Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D LIST OF SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
534 535
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 9 / 542
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

FIGURES Fig. 1. New radio infrastructures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 2. STMN ring closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 3. N x STM1 radio backbones and fibre optic backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 4. STM1/STM0 radio spurs of stmn backbones or rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 5. Regenerator and WMSN station rack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 6. LHR system (N+1 / N+0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 7. WMSN system (N+1 / N+0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 8. Transceiver subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 9. Single channel transceiver block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 10. Baseband subrack equipped for 7+1/8+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 11. Single channel regenerator block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 12. Baseband functional protection scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 13. Baseband board positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 14. WMSN terminal rack equipped with 1650SMC ADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 15. 1650SMC add drop multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 16. MST single channel functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 17. FANS Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 18. XPIC operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 19. Frequency reuse system architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 20. ATPC Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 21. General Multiplexing Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 22. General European Multiplexing Structure with addition of 45 Mbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 23. 1650SMC and unit SERGI front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 24. G.703 64 Kbit/s codirectional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 25. RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contradirectional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 26. RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 27. Synchronization Reference Source Priority Algorithm Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 28. SSM Algorithm Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 29. DCC management: Regenerator case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 30. DCC management: WMSN case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 31. ETSI Reference points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 32. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 33. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 34. STM1 128 QAM typical RF spectrum (measured at point C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 35. STM0 128 QAM typical RF spectrum (measured at point C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 36. STM1/STM0 128 QAM IF RX Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 37. Post demodulation filter STM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 38. Post demodulation filter STM0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 39. STM1 /STM0 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for cochannel interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 40. STM1 BER 1*103 and1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 40 MHz digital interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 41. STM1 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 28, 29, 29.65 and 30 MHz digital interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 42. STM0 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 14 MHz digital interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 43. Typical signature for 128QAM / STM1 capacity @ BER=1 X 10 E4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 44. Typical signature for 128QAM / STM1 capacity @ BER=1 X 10 E6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 45. Typical signature for 128QAM / STM0 capacity @ BER=1x10e4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 46. Typical signature for 128QAM / STM0 capacity @ BER=1x10e6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31 31 32 32 37 40 40 42 43 44 45 45 46 49 49 50 52 55 56 58 61 61 68 70 70 71 75 76 79 79 83 105 106 107 107 108 109 109 110 110 111 111 112 113 114 115
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 10 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 47. Typical and guarantee signature for 64QAM / STM1 capacity @ BER=106; t=6.3 ns . . Fig. 48. Typical and guarantee signature for 64QAM / STM1 capacity @ BER=104; t=6.3 ns . . Fig. 49. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0 regenerator configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 50. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0 WMSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 51. 9600LSY 7+1 Regenerator configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 52. 9600LSY WMSNOS 7x STM1 configuration with radio protection for 7+1 STM1 transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 53. 9600LSY WMSN Two Sides configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 54. Channel arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 55. 3+1 terminal basic station layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 56. Terminal station layout: extension starting from A) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 57. Terminal station layout: extension starting from B) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 58. Terminal station layout: extension starting from C) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 59. Terminal station layout: extension starting from D) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 60. Terminal station layout: extension starting from E) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 61. 4+0/4+1 EAST/WEST terminal basic station layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 62. Schematic diagram of transceiver to branching connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 63. 1 polar per rack branching version for 8 RF channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 64. Branching version for 8 RF channels, arranged in 2 polar per rack configuration . . . . . . . . Fig. 65. Branching version for 3+1 configuration with Space Diversity, arranged in 2 polar per rack version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 66. 7+1 reused terminal with single protection (ch. 1H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 67. 2 x (7+1) reused terminal with double protection (on ch. 1H and 1V) in 1PPR solution . . Fig. 68. Expansion from 7+1 single protection to 2 x (7+1) reused terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 69. Main / slave LO mutual protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 70. Branching interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 71. Rack and shelves layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 72. Layout of max 8 channels in single polarization configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 73. Layout of max 8 channels in double polarization configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 74. Single polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 75. Two polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with the H channels on the left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 76. 2 polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with V channel on the left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 77. Expansion procedure with reused channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 78. Unequipped Base Band shelf layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 79. Base Band shelf board equipment (slot numbering and board type and numbering) . . . . . Fig. 80. Transceiver shelf equipment (slot numbering and board types and numbering) . . . . . . . . . Fig. 81. Fan shelf (slot numbering and board types) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 82. PSU and PSF units front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 83. System Controller assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view . . . . . . . . . Fig. 84. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 85. System Controller front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 86. Service unit assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 87. Service unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 88. RRACHANNEL assembly view and front connector numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 89. RRACHANNEL unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 90. RRASTANDBY unit front view (particular) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 91. Modem unit assembly view and front connector numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 92. Modem unit assembly internal view and CANCCOMB equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 93. Modem unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 94. Transceiver assembly physical views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 95. Transceiver internal view: standard components and Main Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116 117 123 123 124 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 135 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 152 154 155 156 157 158 158 159 160 165 166 171 172 172 173 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 186 187
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 11 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 96. Transceiver internal view: without Diversity Receiver and with TR.Frequency Reuse Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 97. Transceiver internal view: with Diversity Receiver and without TR.Frequency Reuse Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 98. Transceiver internal view: with Diversity Receiver and with TR.Frequency Reuse Kit . Fig. 99. Transceiver internal connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 100. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR without Rx diversity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 101. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR with Rx diversity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 102. Transceiver front view meaning of access points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 103. Branching Front Plate Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 104. FANS SHELF, FANS ASSEMBLED and substitutive COVER assembly views . . . . . . . . . Fig. 105. Front view of FANS SHELF equipped with both FANS ASSEMBLED units . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 106. Top Rack Unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 107. Kit Loudspeaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 108. Additional Housekeeping unit assembly view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 109. Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 110. Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST front connector layout and numbering . . . . . Fig. 111. Transceiver shelf connector numbering at reartop side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 112. System cabling: types of used cables (A, B, C, D, E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 113. System cabling: types of used cables (F, G, H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 114. System cabling: types of used cables (K, N, P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 115. System cabling: types of used cables (KK, NN, PP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 116. System cabling: types of used cables (Q, R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 117. System cabling: types of used cables (S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 118. System cabling: types of used cables (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 119. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: without Reuse and without Diversity . . . . Fig. 120. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: without Reuse and with Diversity . . . . . . . Fig. 121. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: with Reuse and without Diversity . . . . . . . Fig. 122. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: with Reuse and with Diversity . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 123. Position of Hardware setting dip switches for transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 124. Choice of frequency setting by HW or SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 125. HW setting of go and return channel frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 126. HW setting of MASTER/SLAVE Rx Local Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 127. DTMF Telephone kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 128. Telephone set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 129. Special cord for PRx measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 130. Cord for use with SIBDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 131. Special extractors and holder bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 132. First Level Maintenance procedure summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 133. Station Alarms on TRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 134. System Controller front view (particular) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 135. Corrective Maintenance general flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 136. System Controller front view (particular) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 137. TroubleShooting starting with visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 138. Indications on SERVICE and RRASTANDBY for protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 139. RRA line loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 140. RRA internal loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 141. RFCOH Internal loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 142. PSU to be switched off/on for MODEM replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 143. General flow chart of Transceiver repair procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 144. Spare Local Oscillator subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 145. Spare Receiver subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 146. Spare Frequency Reuse kit module subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 147. Spare Transmitter + Main Receiver subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
188 188 189 190 193 194 195 196 197 198 200 202 203 206 208 209 212 213 214 215 216 217 217 223 225 227 229 249 250 252 253 313 314 320 320 321 325 326 327 334 335 336 338 342 342 342 364 375 377 379 382 383
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 12 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 148. Spare Frequency Reuse kit 3connector flat cable subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 149. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 1/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 150. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 2/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 151. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 3/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 152. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 4/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 153. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 5/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 154. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 6/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 155. Repair form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 156. SOH management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 157. Service channels functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 158. DCCR management (ADM towards RADIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 159. DCCR management (RADIO towards ADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 160. DCCR management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 161. ATPC management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 162. VC4 generation from 3 TUG3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 163. Sub STM1 terminal functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 164. TIM algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 165. The 16_BYTE machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 166. The 1_BYTE machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 167. Power Supply distribution from Top Rack Unit and Transceiver shelf Power Supply distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 168. Power Supply distribution in Baseband shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 169. LHR control subsystem architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 170. LHR communication interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 171. WMSN control subsystem architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 172. System Controller block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 173. DCCR and summarizing/housekeeping alarms management block diagram . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 174. Remote inventory subsystem architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 175. Additional Housekeeping block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 176. Block diagram of Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Tx side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 177. Block diagram of Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Rx side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 178. Switch logic at Tx section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 179. Switch logic at Rx section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 180. Rx section alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 181. Tx section alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 182. Switching criteria forwarding to switching logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 183. RRACHANNEL block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 184. RRA STANDBY block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 185. STM1 optical module block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 186. MODEM block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 187. SERVICE block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 188. DSI channel implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 189. Input/output command signals of the Switch logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 190. Functional block diagram of Transceiver without Rx Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 191. Functional block diagram of Transceiver with Rx Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 192. Signals exchanged among Transceiver internal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 193. Transmit and Service module block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 194. Block diagram of upconversion and amplification unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 195. Block diagram of Receive & IF Rx module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 196. Block diagram of Local Oscillator module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 197. Fan subsystem block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 198. FANS ASSEMBLED unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 199. Station Alarms on TRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 200. Antistatic protection device kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
386 391 392 393 393 394 394 396 402 404 406 407 408 409 411 414 422 423 423 426 428 431 432 434 436 438 440 442 443 444 445 446 448 449 450 455 458 459 463 466 467 468 470 470 471 472 474 476 477 479 480 482 501
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 13 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TABLES Tab. 1. Quick guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Tab. 2. 9600LSY radio family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Tab. 3. 9600LSY user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Tab. 4. LHR Terminal Regenerator System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Tab. 5. Couples of Radio Channels that can be used for protected service channels and WST . . 39 Tab. 6. OH bytes suitable for handling on MST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Tab. 7. OH bytes suitable for handling on RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Tab. 8. RFCOH byte structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Tab. 9. Reg. AUX/EOW user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Tab. 10. Hazard level classification of different optical interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Tab. 11. 9600LSY Part list Common parts (frequency independent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Tab. 12. Notes to Tab. 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Tab. 13. Rack and shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Tab. 14. System Controller card equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Tab. 15. Additional Housekeeping unit equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Tab. 16. Service card equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Tab. 17. RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Tab. 18. Modem cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Tab. 19. PSU cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Tab. 20. Dummy plates for RRAModem and PSU equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Tab. 21. PSF cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Tab. 22. Kit Loudspeaker equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Tab. 23. Transceiver units and substitutive dummy plates equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Tab. 24. Fans unit & cover equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Tab. 25. ESC DipSwitch Bank I4 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Tab. 26. ESC DipSwitch Bank I1 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Tab. 27. Branching Front Plate Kit equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Tab. 28. TRU breaker utilization in 9600 LSY/LHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Tab. 29. Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Tab. 30. Cable kits and cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Tab. 31. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Tab. 32. Signal connections: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT and FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Tab. 33. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL FOR WMSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Tab. 34. Signal connections: Cables belonging to ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Tab. 35. Summary of auxiliary channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Tab. 36. Aux channel G703 and RS232 BB shelfs M182 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Tab. 37. Out party line OW, TPH and loudspeaker BB shelfs M190 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . 233 Tab. 38. Aux channel V11 BB shelfs M191 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 14 / 542
Fig. 201. LSY equipment identification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 202. Largesubrack labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 203. Smallsubrack labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 204. Labels on units with standard cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 205. Modules label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 206. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 207. Back panels internal label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 208. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 209. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 210. Former version Top Rack Unit connector numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 211. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 212. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
502 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 510 512 532 533
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tab. 39. RJ45 Connector for 10baseT interface on System Controller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Tab. 40. RS232 for F interface connection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Tab. 41. Out Remote alarms (GA1GA20) BB shelfs M193 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Tab. 42. Out Remote alarms (GA21GA40) BB shelfs M183 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Tab. 43. Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms (GA41GA48) BB shelfs M192 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Tab. 44. Input Housekeeping BB shelfs M185 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Tab. 45. Input Housekeeping Additional Housekeeping units M1 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Tab. 46. Implemented radiofrequency channel arrangements and list of Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Tab. 47. 9640LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Tab. 48. 9647LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Tab. 49. 9662LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Tab. 50. 9667LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Tab. 51. 9674LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Tab. 52. 9681LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Tab. 53. 9610LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Tab. 54. 9611LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Tab. 55. 9613LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Tab. 56. LSY System Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Tab. 57. LSY Maintenance Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Tab. 58. Spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Tab. 59. Normal condition (no alarms) of LEDs on equipments units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Tab. 60. Indications on SERVICE for Rxside protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Tab. 61. Indications on RRASTANDBY for Txside protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Tab. 62. Relationship between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm severity terminology used for the System Controller unit remote alarm connector pins. . . . . . . . . 341 Tab. 63. FPGA list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Tab. 64. Transceiver internal cabling diagram according to configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Tab. 65. DCC Mapping & Interleaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Tab. 66. Channels protectable for RFCOH bytes and 2 x 2Mbit/s WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 Tab. 67. Relationship among remote alarms, housekeeping outputs and alarm primitives . . . . . . . 483 Tab. 68. Relationship between Remote and Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Tab. 69. Label references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Tab. 70. Station Alarms Connector pinout of former version TRU for LHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 Tab. 71. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS . . . . . . . . . 514 Tab. 72. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Tab. 73. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT . . 514 Tab. 74. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL FOR WMSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Tab. 75. Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 Tab. 76. 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 product release handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Tab. 77. Handbooks related to LHR version only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 Tab. 78. 9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 product release handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Tab. 79. Handbooks related to LHRC version only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 Tab. 80. Additional handbooks for installation, commissioning and maintenance purposes . . . . . . 527 Tab. 81. Handbooks related to the specific product SWP management and local product control . 527 Tab. 82. Documentation on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 Tab. 83. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Tab. 84. Documentation on CDROM for 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 Tab. 85. List Of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 Tab. 86. List Of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 15 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
16 / 542
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
a)
Warranty Any warranty must be referred exclusively to the terms of the contact of sale of the equipment this handbook refers to. ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
b)
Information The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the part of ALCATEL.
c)
Copyright Notification The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
d)
Safety recommendations The safety recommendations here below must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment: 1) Service Personnel Installation and service must be carried out by authorized people having appropriate technical training and experience necessary to be aware of hazardous operations during installation and service and of measures to avoid any danger to them, to any other people and to the equipment. Access to the Equipment Access to the Equipment in use must be restricted to Service Personnel only. Safety norms Recommended safety norms are indicated in this manual as described in para.A.3 on pages 492 on. Local safety regulations must be used if mandatory. Safety instructions in this handbook should be used in addition to the local safety regulations. In the case of conflict between safety instructions stated in this manual and those indicated in local regulations, mandatory local norms will prevail. Should not local regulations be mandatory, then safety norms in this manual will prevail.
2) 3)
e)
Service Personnel skill Service Personnel must have been an adequate technical training on telecommunications and in particular on the equipment this handbook refers to. Without an adequate training, reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in para.C.2 on page 522 is usually not enough to properly install, operate and maintain equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 17 / 542
HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY

Please refer to para.C.1 on page 515.
HANDBOOK STRUCTURE
Information in this handbook is divided into the following parts: a) FRONT MATTER TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES PRELIMINARY INFORMATION HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY HANDBOOK STRUCTURE SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING QUICK GUIDE It allows to access immediately the most frequently needed operative pieces of information contained in this handbook and in other related handbooks. SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS on page 25 This section provides the 1st level description of the equipment and sumsup its technical characteristics. SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATIONS on page 119 This section contains the whole logical and operative information for the equipment provisioning and system configuration, including the setting up of logical/physical connections. SECTION 3: FREQUENCY PLANS, TRANSCEIVER P/N & HW SETTING on page 243 This section gives the Part Numbers and the Remote Inventory Labels of the frequencydependent items (transceiver components), describes the envisaged channel plans utilized with 9600LSY radios and explains how to manage the transceiver hardware settings. SECTION 4: MAINTENANCE on page 309 This section contains the whole logical and operative information for the equipment maintenance. SECTION 5: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION on page 397 This section provides the 2nd level description of the equipment. SECTION 6: APPENDICES on page 489 In this section some additional information and instructions are given: Appendix A SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling Appendix B Information on former version TRU Appendix C Documentation guide Appendix D List of symbols and abbreviations
b)
c)
d)
e) f) g)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 18 / 542
SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING

a)
Please refer to Appendix A on page 491 to obtain details regarding following information: Compliance with European norms Safety rules: TOPIC General rules Dangerous Electrical Voltages WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT
Harmful optical signals
Risk of explosion
Moving mechanical parts
Heatradiating mechanical parts
Equipment emitting RF power
Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges: TOPIC WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT
Device sensitive to electrostatic discharges
b)
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) Other Labels affixed to the Equipment
Identical or similar information on Personal Computer, WorkStation etc., other than ALCATELs, loaded with software applications described in this or other Handbooks, is supplied in the Constructors technical documentation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 19 / 542
QUICK GUIDE
9600LSYLHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
Tab. 1. Quick guide If you need immediate operative information on how to: GENERAL TOPICS get information on system documentation have a very short description of the system read Appendix C on page 515 read para.12.4 on pages 41 thru 53 for: system as a whole, read chapter 21 on page 121 BaseBand and Transceiver shelves as a whole, read para.22.3.2 on page 154 units in BaseBand shelf, read para.22.3.3.1 on page 160 units in Transceiver shelf, read para.22.3.4.2 on page 165 units in FANS shelf, read para.22.3.5 on page 166 units in ADM shelf, refer to handbooks cited in para.C.2.4.2 on page 530
logically configure a station (or change its configuration) and logically provision equipment boards
have details on system cabling
read chapter 24 on page 205 for: common parts (frequency independent), read chapter 22 on page 145 frequency dependent items, refer to the specific chapter listed in Tab. 46. on page 246
get item P/Ns
read: choose channel plan or get information on channel plan used in your system Tab. 1. continues .. para.31.1 on page 245 para.31.2 on page 247
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 20 / 542
.. continues Tab. 1. If you need immediate operative information on how to: GENERAL TOPICS FOR INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE get information on safety, EMC, ESD norms and equipment labelling acknowledge cautions to avoid equipment damage read Appendix A on page 491 read para.23.2 on page 168 read following paragraph according to the unit / area type: get operative information regarding the units (connectors, leds, buttons, hardware setting) for: carry out unit hardware setting TRANSCEIVERS, read para.31.3 on page 248 other units, refer to hardware setting documents present in the handbook 9600LSY Hardware setting documents REF.[K] on page 527 read chapter 42 on page 313 PSU and PSF: para.23.3.1 on page 171 SYSCO and FLASH CARD: para.23.3.2 on page 172 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE: para.23.3.3 on page 176 RRACHANNEL: para.23.3.4 on page 178 RRASTANDBY: para.23.3.5 on page 180 MODEM: para.23.3.6 on page 181 TRANSCEIVER: para.23.4 on page 184 Branching: para.23.5 on page 196 FANS: para.23.6 on page 197 TRU: para.23.7.1 on page 200 Kit Loudspeaker: para.23.7.2 on page 202 Additional Housekeeping: para.23.8 on page 203
set and use the EOW functions of the equipment Tab. 1. continues ..
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 21 / 542
.. continues Tab. 1. If you need immediate operative information on how to:

INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING get: physically install and cable the equipment hardware LHR Installation Handbook (Ref.[C] on page 524) Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook (Ref.[L] on page 527)
and proceed as specified by them according to SWPversion used, get associated CT Operators Handbook: install or update Craft Terminals and/or equipments software for SWP 1.0 : Ref.[N] on page 527 for SWP 2.0 V.2.0.1 : Ref.[O] on page 527 for SWP 2.0 V.2.0. 2 on : Ref.[P] on page 527
and read read its QUICK GUIDE (same topics) according to SWPversion used, get associated Lineup Guide: commission equipment for SWP 1.0 : Ref.[D] on page 524 for SWP 2.0 : Ref.[E] on page 524
and proceed as specified by it expand the number of channels of a LHR system both from hardware and software points of view Tab. 1. continues .. get 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Expansion procedures (Ref.[F] on page 524) and proceed as specified by it
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 22 / 542
.. continues Tab. 1. If you need immediate operative information on how to:

MAINTENANCE provision and manage spare parts carry out First Level Maintenance (system state display) carry out Preventive Maintenance read para.43.3 on page 322 read chapter 44 on page 325 read chapter 45 on page 331 read: carry out Corrective Maintenance (troubleshooting and repair) chapter 46 on page 333 (troubleshooting) chapter 47 on page 347 (replacement of all units, except transceivers) chapter 48 on page 369 (transceiver repair and replacement) chapter 49 on page 395 (faulty unit repair and repair form)
To find any other kind of information not listed in the above table, please refer to the TABLE OF CONTENTS of this handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 23 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
24 / 542
SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

This section provides the 1st level description of the equipment and sumsup its technical characteristics.
SECTION CONTENT Chapter 11 Introduction to the 9600LSY radio system family It explains briefly the characteristics of the 9600LSY Radio System Family, for both LHR and LHRC configurations Chapter 12 System description It gives the firstlevel description of 9600LSY equipment in the LHR configuration It introduces the equipment network applications, the hardware components, the system and radio configurations. Moreover, it describes in detail the main radio Transmission features and the description of the Equipment Control. Chapter 13 Technical specifications It describes the technical characteristics of the 9600LSY, for both LHR and LHRC configurations
PAGE 27
35
83
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 25 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
26 / 542
11 INTRODUCTION TO THE 9600LSY RADIO SYSTEM FAMILY 11.1 Foreword

This chapter explains briefly the characteristics of the 9600LSY Radio System Family, for both LHR and LHRC configurations, and comprehends the following main paragraphs: para.11.2 herebelow para.11.3 on page 28 para.11.4 on page 31 para.11.5 on page 33 General Main Features System usage in MW links and networks 9600LSY basic configurations and Network Element types
11.2 General
The 9600LSY digital radio relay system belongs to the second generation of the Alcatel SDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy ) radio family that has been developed aiming to match the demand of high quality microwave transmission links and following the SDH standards defined by International Organizations as ITUT, ITUR and ETSI. Special attention concerning the network management standards and its integration into a SDH based network has been paid. Big efforts have been done to expand as much as possible the versatility of the new radio family and the full compatibility with the optical systems to ensure the utilization of the radio media as natural complement to the optical fibre transmission. A 9600LSY radio system can be in fact utilized either with multiplex section termination (MST) or regenerator section termination (RST) functionality, can be used for optical loop closures or for fibre optic backup, for spurs or for backbone links and, in general, in all the network interconnections where the advantages due to an easy installation, a fast commissioning operations and time and cost saving solution are requested. The family supports radio transmission of STM0 (51 Mbps) and STM1 (155 Mbps) signals as well STM4 (622 Mbps) or STM16 (2.4 Gbps) connections, using a proper number of radio frequency channels in various configurations. A full set of synchronous and plesiochronous interfaces is available. By means of the new 9600LSY family, Alcatel intends to answer the growing demand of transmission capacity either for traditional telephone services or for the new dataoriented services (including ATM + IP networks, LAN/WAN networks) or for the evolution of the cellular market. The Alcatel 9600LSY system architecture, based on a full indoor structure, covers all the frequency bands from 4 to 13 GHz in a complete set of equipment configurations from 2 to 8 channels in protected (N+1) or unprotected (N+0) radio configurations.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 27 / 542
11.3 Main features

Th Alcatel 9600LSY family exploits the experience gained with the previous SDH generations of radio equipment and provides an innovative answer to the most recent market requirements: Total interworking with other kinds of network elements present in the network aiming to make the network independent from transmission medium. Full integration in the Alcatel network management platform able to manage different types of network elements belonging to different technologies: OMSN, LT, OMSG, microwave radios, optical systems and submarine systems. 9600LSY is included in Alcatel network release plan, guaranteeing consistent feature support and allowing, in case of existing SDH NEs, not to change TMN platform, thus saving investments already done. Double identity of the equipment that can be inserted in the SDH network as: Radio regenerator to be easily introduced in transparent mode without affecting any modifications to the network. Wireless Multi Service Node (WMSN) One Side or Two Sides that can be considered as full performance OMSN or LT with different synchronous physical interface: radio instead of fibre.
Transmission capacity easily selectable between STM0 and STM1 according to the bandwidth availability and, if necessary, following an incremental approach. Bit rate capacity: the 9600LSY family allows the transmission of STM1 signals for all frequency bands from 4 to 13 GHz and STM0 for 7, 8 and 13 GHz bands, according to the customer needs. The system allows an easy migration from STM0 to STM1 (only hardware and software presettings are necessary) when the traffic and the band requirements are going to change. Auxiliary traffic can be added by means of RFCOH bytes corresponding to one 2 Mbit/s Way Side Traffic in STM1 case. Way Side Traffic in STM0 case is not available. Usage of: 128 QAM as standard modulation for all frequency bands. The high number of levels utilised allows to obtain a high spectrum efficiency that permits the utilisation of the following channel spacing : 28 MHz, 29 MHz, 29.65 MHz, 30 MHz and 40 MHz for STM1 capacity 14 MHz for STM0 capacity, 64 QAM modulation with 40 MHz channel spacing and STM1 capacity for some frequency bands, as depicted in Tab. 2. on page 30. Adoption of frequency reuse technique as option for all the supported frequency bands, allowing the transmission of 2x STM1 per channel: the way utilised to improve the spectrum efficiency is based on the CoChannel Dual Polarisation (CCDP) technique. This technique, consisting in transmitting two different STM1 channels on each radio channel utilising two different antenna polarisation, has been consolidated in the recent past by means of field proven results. In order to meet ITUR transmission quality objectives also in unfavourable propagation condition causing XPD degradation, Crosspolar Interface Canceller (XPIC) device is adopted to minimise the negative effects of the crosspolar interference signal, assuring an improvement factor of approx. 18 dB to the cross polar antenna discrimination. The function is implemented in an optional additional card to be plugged on each couple of demodulator boards of reused channel. Particular attention has been paid to the scalability of the system, allowing the extension of a deployed alternate polar (AP) system to a CCDP reused system only when necessary and consequently to a progressive investment. 05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 28 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Two possible ways of extension and configurations are available: CCDP configurations using 2 protection channels up to 2 x (8+1) CCDP configurations using only 1 protection channel up to 7 working channels plus 1 standby. The frequency reuse is applicable to STM1 streams in all the frequency bands and with all the channel spacing foreseen in the ITUR recommendations, while it is not available in case of STM0 transmission. Space Diversity reception as countermeasure against fading exploiting the new baseband combiner. Further powerful multipath countermeasures: multichannel hitless switch, transversal equaliser, configurable ATPC functionality, multileved coded modulation. High reliability in order to minimise field intervention. Fully software configurable terminals with software download capabilities. Protections: Different protection types are available for the 9600LSY systems: Radio Protection and Network Protection: Radio Protection (RPS). The high capacity long haul radio systems utilises, to perform the automatic protection of the radio channels, a multichannel switching device moving the channel to be protected on a spare bearer (standby channel). The function, implemented on the RX side is N+1 hitless type; it is transparent to other types of protection and in particular to network protection. The switch supplies the protection of the link either in case of failure of the equipment or for improving the quality performances of the link. In this last case the Early Warning criteria are utilised to achieve an error free changeover. Network Protection. For network protection the radio system in regenerator section configuration (RRA) will be fully transparent to APS channel and criteria allowing the OMSNs present in the network to perform the network protection activity. On the other hand the radio system in multiplex section configuration (WMSN) implements, as embedded function, network protection features like Trail protection and subnetwork protection (APS, SNCP etc.).
High integration of the full indoor structure with very compact size: configurations up to 8+0/7+1 terminal are housed inside a single N3 ETSI rack.
The characteristics Alcatel 9600LSY are compliant with current SDH standards defined within the International Organisations ITUT, ITUR and ETSI, with special attention to those standards concerning the network management and its integration into SDH based network.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 29 / 542
The 9600LSY series features the 128/64 QAM modulation offering excellent spectrum efficiency and covering the following frequency bands, according to following Tab. 2.
Tab. 2. 9600LSY radio family SYSTEM 9640 LSY (L4) 9647 LSY (U4) 9662 LSY (L6) 9667 LSY (U6) 9674 LSY 9681 LSY 9610 LSY 9611 LSY 9613 LSY N.B. FREQUENCY (GHz) 3.64.2 4.45.0 5.96.4 6.47.1 7.17.7 7.78.7 1010.7 10.711.7 12.75 13.25 MODULATION & CAPACITY 128QAM STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 / STM0 STM1 / STM0 STM1 STM1 STM1 / STM0 64QAM (N.B.) STM1 STM1 not available STM1 not available not available not available STM1 not available
64QAM is supported starting from SWP Version 2.0.2.
In general, the equipment of this family may work, in case of for STM1 stream, in cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP), utilizing the XPIC optional kit, allowing the transmission of 2 x STM1 signals on a single RF channel. Reused configurations are not foreseen for STM0 capacity. In the following Tab. 3. the available users interfaces are listed. Tab. 3. 9600LSY user interfaces INTERFACES STM1 ELECTRICAL G.708 STM1 OPTICAL S1.1 G.957 STM1 OPTICAL L1.1 G.957 STM1 OPTICAL L1.2 G.957 140 Mbit/s 3 x 45 Mbit/s 3 x 34 Mbit/s 63 x 2 Mbit/s G.703 G.703 G.703 G.703 REGENERATOR STM1 X X STM0 X X STM1 X X X X X X X X WMSN STM0 X X X (1 x 45 Mbit/s) X (1 x 34 Mbit/s) X (21 x 2 Mbit/s)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 30 / 542
11.4 System usage in MW links and networks

The new generation of radio transmission system Alcatel 9600LSY family is specifically designed to provide a radio solution suitable for a large number of applications, including: New full radio infrastructures Closure of STM1, STM4 and STM16 fiber optic rings Backup to fiber optic trunk links Radio spurs of fiber/radio at STMn level Utilization as backbone link in national trunk networks. Interconnection of cellular networks with public switched networks.
In the following , with the aid of a few figures , the most common applications of 9600LSY radios within different types of network exploiting radio technology are shown, together with examples of possible configurations and station types that can be used in the network nodes.
Fig. 1. New radio infrastructures
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 2. STMN ring closure
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 31 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q Fig. 3. N x STM1 radio backbones and fibre optic backup Fig. 4. STM1/STM0 radio spurs of stmn backbones or rings
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
32 / 542
11.5 9600LSY basic configurations and Network Element types

The 9600LSY Long Haul system is based on the following configurations:
a)
Regenerator (Network Element type LHR) This radio system is basically composed by a rack containing up to eight transceivers, eight modemodulators and eight RRA, and can be configured as follows: CONFIGURATION N+1 with/without occasional traffic N+0 MIN 1+1 2+0 MAX 7+1 8+0
b)
Regenerator Compact (Network Element type LHRC) This radio system is basically composed by one subrack containing up to two transceivers, two modemodulators and two RRA, and can be configured as follows: 1+0 Terminal Regenerator 1+1/2+0 Terminal Regenerator 1:1 (with occasional traffic) Terminal Regenerator 1+1 HST (Hot Stand By) Terminal Regenerator Wireless Multi Service Node (WMSN) This radio system consists of a Regenerator and operates together with the MUX of ALCATEL ADM family, named 1650SMC. The assembly is called WMSN (Wireless Multi Service Node).
c)
This handbook deals with the LHR and related WMSN configurations only. For
LHRC please make reference to the specific handbook (that has a different P/N, (see para.C.2.2 on page 525).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 33 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
34 / 542
12 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 12.1 Foreword

This chapter gives the firstlevel description of 9600LSY equipment in the LHR configuration, and comprehends the following main paragraphs: para.12.2 on page 36 Introduction to system configurations This paragraph introduces the system composition of the 9600LSY Radio System Family, LHR configuration. General block diagrams Hardware components This paragraph describes the different assemblies and shelves that can be used to compose the available configurations of 9600LSY family, LHR configuration. Radio Transmission features This paragraph describes in detail the Radio Transmission features of 9600LSY family. Signal Transmission This paragraph describes in detail the Signal Transmission features of 9600LSY family. Synchronization This paragraph describes in detail the Synchronization features of 9600LSY family. Equipment Control This paragraph introduces the Equipment control features of 9600LSY family.
para.12.3 on page 40 para.12.4 on page 41
para.12.5 on page 54
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 35 / 542
12.2 Introduction to system configurations

12.2.1 Foreword This paragraph introduces the system composition of the 9600LSY Radio System Family, and comprehends the following main paragraphs: para.12.2.2 herebelow para.12.2.3 on page 39 Station types and configurations Channel configurations and protection schemes
The handbook part that should be read before starting this paragraph is: chapter 11 on page 27 Introduction to the 9600LSY Radio System Family
12.2.2 Station types and configurations Station types A complete terminal station utilizing a maximum of 8 radio channels is housed inside a single ETSI rack that, depending on the customer request, can be 2200 or 2000 mm high. The 1800 mm rack cannot be utilized. The structure of the equipment has been developed aiming to obtain a very simple structure, with an integration as high as possible and reducing at the minimum the number of different functional blocks and, inside each of them, reducing the number of different units and cards. These concepts have led to obtain an equipment structure only composed by the following functional blocks (see Fig. 5. on page 37): a radio assembly containing all the radio frequency and medium frequency circuits (transceiver shelf) a baseband subrack containing all the unit devoted to the modulation and demodulation functions, RRA functions, services management, radio protection switching and system controlling. a branching unit deployed at the top and bottom sides of the transceiver subrack. a Top Rack Unit (T.R.U.) for D.C.. primary power distribution and battery protection. a fan subrack, foreseen for all the configurations. a compact ADM 1650SMC with its additional fan subrack, that , when required, can be installed into the rack to perform all the functionalities managed by a multiplex section.
The configurations are easily expansible, passing from a lower one to a higher one simply adding, inside each functional block, the units needed to support the new radio channels utilized. In particular, the branching unit is equipped in advance with the channel circulators needed for the expansion up to 7+1, to consent to expand the radio terminal just connecting the RF filters to the branching, without the necessity to disassemble the branching itself. Thanks to a new design of narrow RF filters , the frequency reuse, available in all the frequency bands, can be obtained avoiding the utilization of the 3 dB hybrids for all the bands and all the frequency spacings, including 28 MHz. Despite to the new high integration of the LSY systems and thanks to volume decrease obtained on the branching, the space diversity optional functionality is supplied in all the configuration up to 7+1/8+0.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 36 / 542
TRU
ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING (optional)
TRU 1650 SMC SHELF RRA/MODEM AND ACCESS AREA (BASEBAND SHELF) Rx BRANCHING
RRA/MODEM AND ACCESS AREA (BASEBAND SHELF) Rx BRANCHING
FANS FOR 1650SMC
FANS FOR RRA/MODEM
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
Tx BRANCHING REGENERATOR
Tx BRANCHING WMSN
Fig. 5. Regenerator and WMSN station rack configuration The Alcatel 9600LSY systems offer a full set of system configuration and protection schemes to meet any specific need in a network with a high degree of flexibility. Two are the envisaged station types, each supplying different functionality: Regenerator station (RST): is needed when the RSOH termination and MSOH transparency are requested. I/O network interface is STM1 electrical or optical. Multiplex station (MST): is necessary when a Wireless Multiservice Node (WMSN) (one side or two sides) has to be implemented. In this case the MST station is used at the terminal ends of the radio link and it gives the possibility to provide synchronous STM1 electrical and optical interfaces and plesiochronous 140 Mbit/s, 3x45 Mbit/s, 3x34 Mbit/s, 63x2 Mbit/s interfaces. It is possible to implement a full multiplex section features like synchronization, SOH termination, network protection (SNCP/I, SNCP/N and linear MSP), VCs cross connection, tributary adddrops.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 37 / 542
The maximum number of plesiochronous interfaces that are alternatively allowed by 1650SMC are as follows:
up to 3 cards 4x140 Mb/s. In this case the limitation is introduced by the LSY radio system that can transmit up to 8 x STM1 channels. up to 3 cards 3x34 Mb/s , utilizing 3x STM1 (or 3+1 STM1 in case of protection) channels radio side. up to 3 cards 3x34 Mb/s, utilizing 3x STM1 (or 3+1 STM1 in case of protection) channels radio side. up to 3 cards 21x2 Mb/s , utilizing 1x STM1 (or 1+1 STM1 in case of protection) channels radio side.
In the last three cases, if a single stream 34 Mb/s or 45 Mb/s or 21x2 Mb/s is required, an underequipped STM1 is utilized toward the radio baseband and a STM0 can be adopted for transmission on air. Station configurations The 9600LSY family allows the radio transmission of both STM1 and STM0 utilising protected and unprotected heterofrequency configurations N+0, N+1 type or 2x (N+1) CCDP. The basic configurations are named as follows: Long Haul extendible version N+1/N+2/N+0 terminal regenerator configuration (LHR) Long Haul extendible version N+1/N+2/N+0 terminal WMSN configuration (LHR + 1650SMC)
The high integration level allows to provide several types of configurations allowing to address different network applications : 7+1 8+0 7+1 8+0 Terminal regenerator Terminal regenerator Terminal WMSN Terminal WMSN in 1 ETSI rack in 1 ETSI rack in 1 ETSI rack in 1 ETSI rack
An already operating terminal regenerator can be reconfigured as a terminal WMSN simply adding a 1650SMC device to the radio regenerator equipment. Each configuration is easily expansible to a higher capacity just adding the foreseen expansion kits.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 38 / 542
12.2.3 Channel configurations and protection schemes The LHR system can interface from two up to eight channels (STM0/STM1 Electrical or Optical signals and the corresponding Radio parts) and up to eight WST channels. The system configurations allowed are with Radio Protection Switching (N+1 without/with Occasional Traffic) or without Radio Protection Switching (N+0), according to the following table: Tab. 4. LHR Terminal Regenerator System Configurations SYSTEM CONFIGURATION NR. of channels N+0 CH 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 unpr.= unprotected 2+0 3+0 4+0 5+0 6+0 7+0 8+0 N+1 CH 1+1 2+1 3+1 4+1 5+1 6+1 7+1 prot.= protected N+1 & Occasional (1:N) CH 1+1 & Occ. 2+1 & Occ. 3+1 & Occ. 4+1 & Occ. 5+1 & Occ. 6+1 & Occ. 7+1 & Occ. Occ.= occasional ALL max WST 2 unpr. or 1 prot. 3 unpr. or 1 prot.+1 unpr. 4 unpr. or 1 prot.+2 unpr. 5 unpr. or 1 prot.+3 unpr. 6 unpr. or 1 prot.+4 unpr. 7 unpr. or 1 prot.+5 unpr. 8 unpr. or 1 prot.+6 unpr.
In N+0 configurations, channels are without protection. In N+1 configurations, channel 0 is always the standby channel. In N+1 & Occasional configurations (also known as 1:N protection architecture), channel 0 carries the occasional traffic, that is cut off whenever it becomes the recovery channel for any (faulty) of the protected channels. As indicated in Tab. 4. above, the WST configuration is independent from N+0 / N + 1 / 1:N system configuration. The couple of radio channels which carry both the protected service channels and WST ones (if any) is defined via software. These channels can be chosen among the following five couples: Tab. 5. Couples of Radio Channels that can be used for protected service channels and WST CHx 0 0 1 1 8 N.B. CHy 1 9 2 9 9
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Further information regarding protection schemes is given in para.52.4.2 on page 445 and para.52.4.3 on page 452. 05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 39 / 542
ED
12.3 General block diagrams

The general block diagrams for LHR and WMSN configurations are respectively shown in following Fig. 6. and Fig. 7.
CMI 9 RRA
DCCR
SW
RFCOH
MD
TR
WST 2Mb/s SW RFCOH MD TR
RRA
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s CMI 1
RRA
DCCR
SW
RFCOH
MD
TR
DCCR EOW
ECT OS
QB3
SC
DCCR
SERVICE
64 Kb
WST 2Mb/s
DCCR
DCCR
CMI 0
RRA
DISTRIB.
RFCOH
MD
TR
RADIO PROTECTION
Fig. 6. LHR system (N+1 / N+0)
RRA CMI 7
DCCR
SW
RFCOH
MD
TR
WST 2Mb/s SW RFCOH MD TR
RRA
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s CMI 2 CMI 1 CMI 0

F QB3
1650SMC
RRA
DCCR
SW
RFCOH
MD
TR
DCCR EOW
SC
DCCR
SERVICE
64 Kb
WST 2Mb/s
Nx64 Kb
DCCR
DCCR
RRA
DISTRIB.
RFCOH
MD
TR
ECT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
OS
RADIO PROTECTION
Fig. 7. WMSN system (N+1 / N+0)
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 40 / 542
12.4 Hardware components

12.4.1 Foreword This paragraph describes the different assemblies and shelves that can be used to compose the available configurations of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the following main paragraphs: N.B. para.12.4.2 herebelow para.12.4.3 on page 42 para.12.4.4 on page 44 para.12.4.5 on page 49 para.12.4.6 on page 52 para.12.4.7 on page 53 para.12.4.8 on page 53 Rack and Top Rack Unit Transceiver subrack Baseband subrack ADM 1650SMC FAN Subrack System wiring Installation materials
As far as Branching configurations are concerned, refer to para.21.5 on page 135.
The handbook part that should be read before starting this paragraph is: para.12.2 on page 36 Introduction to system configurations
12.4.2 Rack and Top Rack Unit For all the foreseen system configurations the new WTD ETSI rack is available for both heights 2200 mm and 2000 mm and it is usable either with standard (LHR) or with compact version (LHRC) for both regenerator terminal and WMSN. The new WTD ETSI racks substitute in the item list the previously used Optinex rack, in order to have a standard rack solution for all WTD radio equipment (LSY, USY and also AWY radios). In the 9600LSYLHR application, WTD ETSI rack must be usually supplied with the TRU unit (see para.23.7.1 on page 200). The new WTD ETSI rack P/Ns do not include TRU, that must always be separately ordered for standard version (LHR) and could be unnecessary for compact version (LHRC). For particular cases, the OPTINEX 2200 mm and 2000 mm rack can also be utilized, however for new deliveries only the the new WTD racks are utilized. In general, both OPTINEX and ETSI WTD racks can house 19 and 21 subracks. They are compliant with ETSI 300 1193 standard. Using 19 subracks, they must be installed utilizing mechanical adapters. However, In the case of 9600LSY radios, the two main subracks (transceiver and baseband) of the standard version (LHR) and the unique subrack of the compact version (LHRC) are 21 wide, so they do not need adapters to be installed in the racks. All the racks (WTD ETSI and Optinex) for all the heights can host the terminals including the ADM 1650SMC and its fan unit, allowing their utilization also for WMSN configurations.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 41 / 542
12.4.3 Transceiver subrack 12.4.3.1 Mechanical assembly

The transceiver mechanical assembly has the following dimensions: 530 mm (w) x 470 mm (h) x 240 mm (d) A complete view of the structure, fully equipped with 8 transceivers, is shown in Fig. 8.
Fig. 8. Transceiver subrack Each transceiver module is inserted in a vertical dedicated slot. The coaxial connections with Rx and Tx branching units are located at the top and bottom positions of each transceiver. Each module is equipped with the following units: Transmitter Receiver Tx Local Oscillator Rx Local Oscillator DC/DC converter
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 42 / 542
12.4.3.2 Transceiver block diagram A simple block diagram, illustrating the main functions performed by transceiver module, is shown in the following Fig. 9.
Fig. 9. Single channel transceiver block diagram The transmitter includes an IF amplifier, a SSB up converter, a local oscillator and a RF power amplifier. The utilization of a high rejection SSB upconverter permits to avoid the use of a RF filter at the output, allowing a wideband utilization of the unit. The Automatic Transmitted Power Control (ATPC) function is included in the transceiver in order to decrease the Tx power output and dissipation in case of normal propagation and to push the maximum power up in deep fading conditions. This function may be disabled and the level of the transmitted RF power can be manually set by Craft Terminal configuration. The receiver includes a low noise RF preamplifier, an automatic imagine rejection down converter, an IF filter, a main amplifier with AGC and a local oscillator. A space diversity receiver, to be used in junction with a baseband signal combiner, is also available as countermeasure to the selective fading due to the multipath propagation of the signal. The advantages obtained by the baseband combiner utilization are mainly due to a higher reliability, thanks to the adopted digital technology, to the possibility of recovering very high delays between the two received signals and to the very reduced signature of the combined signal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 43 / 542
12.4.4 Baseband subrack The baseband subrack is used both in regenerator terminal stations and in WMSN stations. In the first case it is the sole baseband equipment installed in the rack; in the second it has to be associated with 1650SMC device that has to be installed in the upper right area of the rack just above the baseband subrack. It is mainly subdivided in three different areas: the upper area (access area) is devoted to host the interface connectors of WST , Service channels and remote alarms. in the centre of the subrack the channeldepending units (RRA and Modems, up to ten) are accommodated, together with the two common units : System Controller (SC) and the Service unit. in the bottom part, the DC/DC converters for supplying the d.c. voltages to the RRAModem units are allocated just under the relevant powered units. Two battery filters (including the DC/DC converters supplying the DC power for the common units ) are also installed in this area. 12.4.4.1 Mechanical assembly The physical dimensions of the subrack are: 490 mm (w) x 500 mm (h) x 250 mm (d). In the following Fig. 10. , the baseband subrack is shown.
Fig. 10. Baseband subrack equipped for 7+1/8+0 configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 44 / 542
12.4.4.2 Regenerator Terminal Block Diagram Hereafter, the block diagram relevant to a single channel is pointed out.
REGENERATOR
RRA BOARD MODEM BOARD
STM1
ELET./OPT. INTERFACE
RRA
HTL SW
TX RFCOH MODEM MODEM RX RT
AUX. SERV.
ATPC
DCCR
Aux.SERV. CH. 2x2 Mb/s V batt.
SERVICE & ATPC
WST
SERVICE UNIT
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
F QB3
DC/DC CONVERTER
ECT
OS
Fig. 11. Single channel regenerator block diagram The baseband subrack does not allow the protection neither of the physical interface (optical or electrical) of the channel, neither of the RRA function, because the embedded switching section, included inside each RRA unit is inserted between the RRA and modem function and therefore it protects only the radio section (modem and transceiver). See next Fig. 12.
BASEBAND SUBRACK
CH1
O/F int
RRA1
MODEM 1
TRANSCEIVER 1
CH2
HITLESS SWITCH
O/F int
RRA2
MODEM 2
TRANSCEIVER 2
CH3
O/F
RRA3
MODEM 3
TRANSCEIVER 3
CH0
O/F
RRA STBY
MODEM STBY
TRANSCEIVER STBY
(occasional)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 12. Baseband functional protection scheme
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 45 / 542
Fig. 13. herebelow indicates the slot position of the baseband subrack where the units can be installed in the various radio configurations.
CONNECTOR AREA
E RRA STBY
SERVICE CEC
NOT USED
RRA SYSTEM CONTROLLER MODEM
CONTROLLE R
NOT USED
MM
POWER SUPPLYSUPPL Y BATTERY FILTER
FILTER
Fig. 13. Baseband board positions In the following, the main characteristics of each unit is reported. 12.4.4.3 RRA board It performs the following main functions : STM1 bidirectional interface, electrical or optical selectable by means of interchangeable plugins Extraction/Insertion RSOH line side to/from Aux. Service Board Hitless Switch functionality. Just one unit has been developed for utilization with both STM1 and STM0 capacity. Each RRA unit is equipped with an embedded STM1 electrical interface. As an option, a S 1.1 STM1 optical interface can be used instead. This optical interface is realized by a plugin unit that can be installed in the RRA through the front panel. 12.4.4.4 RRA Standby board The unit performs the same functionalities of RRA board but, moreover, the hitless switch circuits (Tx/Rx distributors and a switching logic unit) are is installed on board and dedicated to the radio section protection. The protection supplied is N+1 type and it is also utilized in 1+1 configuration . Only one RRA STBY has been developed for utilization with both STM1 and STM0 capacity.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 46 / 542
12.4.4.5 Modem unit It performs the following main functions: Terminal modulator Terminal demodulator XPIC Baseband signal combiner Two different 128 QAM modems have been developed, according to the two capacities that can be transmitted: STM1 Modem with one 2 Mbit/s WST service stream: to be used in both alternate and copolar frequency arrangements with all the spacings including 28 MHz. The STM0 Modem without WST service stream: utilized in 7 , 8 and 13 GHz bands with 14 MHz channel spacing in both alternate and copolar frequency arrangements. One 64 QAM modem has been developed (it is supported starting from SWP version 2.0.2) with the capacity of STM1 with one 2 Mbit/s WST service stream, to be used in both alternate and copolar frequency arrangements with 40 MHz channel spacing. Each modem can be equipped with an optional plugin board . This board gives the access to the IF signals necessary to the demodulator for XPIC or for Space Diversity functionalities. In case of presence of both functions the modem must be equipped with two identical plugin boards. 12.4.4.6 Service Unit The Service board provides an external access to the auxiliary service channels, utilizing SUBD connectors in the subrack connector area. Moreover the unit manages the ATPC functionality. Service unit consents the terminal to transmit one WST 2 Mb/s service stream in Radio Frame Complementary OverHead in protected way on channels x and y (that can be chosen among the couples specified in Tab. 5. on page 39), and contains the logic switching unit. The WST interface is present on the unit front panel. The accesses to the other WST service streams that can be transmitted one for each channel in nonprotected way are in the connector area. 12.4.4.7 System Controller The System Controller is devoted to the equipment management. It exchanges alarms, commands and management information with the other units of the equipment and provides the following interfaces for local and remote management: Channel communication for TMN utilizing a QB3 interface (BNC connector) info model based F interface (RS232 toward the local PC) (SUBD 9 pin connector) towards Local Craft Terminal QECC interface for remote management through DCC channels. 12.4.4.8 Additional Housekeeping unit This optional unit (equipped as depicted in Fig. 5. on page 37) increases by 18 the number of Housekeeping inputs available.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 47 / 542
12.4.4.9 Power Supply PSU units are grouped in 2units groups (i.e. PSU0+PSU1, PSU2+PSU3, ...). Each PSU pair converts and then distributes, through the backpanel, power supply to the correspondent pair of RRA, whereas each PSU board supplies only the associated MODEM board (i.e. PSU0 supplies only MODEM0 board, etc.) If not utilized, the P.S. slots are provided with a front plate cover. Each P.S. gets the primary voltage from both batteries, connected in parallel. The P. S. units supply the secondary power voltage to all the units starting from the primary voltage: 48 to 60 Vdc ( 20%); The system can also be powered by batteries with different voltage: 24 Vdc ( 20%). In this case, onpurpose designed DC/DC converters are available and have to be installed in the lower area of the rack. 12.4.4.10 Battery filter Two battery filters, located in the lower side positions of the subrack, supply the DC power to the common units (System Controller, Service) in 1+1 protected way.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 48 / 542
12.4.5 ADM 1650SMC 12.4.5.1 WMSN rack configuration

When the Wireless Multi Service Node functionality is requested, an additional 1650SMC ADM has to be installed in the upper position of the LSY rack, just above the baseband regenerator subrack . WMSN provide the mapping functionality (STM1 frame creation), synchronization management and tributary adddrop, network protection and VCs crossconnection.
Fig. 14. WMSN terminal rack equipped with 1650SMC ADM 12.4.5.2 ADM 1650SMC mechanical assembly A detailed view of the 1650SMC adddrop multiplexer is shown in Fig. 15.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 15. 1650SMC add drop multiplexer
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 49 / 542
12.4.5.3 WMSN block diagram In Fig. 16. , the block diagram of the MST functionality, relevant to a single channel, is shown.
Fig. 16. MST single channel functional block diagram This configuration, in particular, gives the possibility to manage up to 8 STM1 channels lineside and to transmit them radio side with or without radio protection, in the following configurations: Up to 7+1 or 8+0 configuration in one direction (OS). The obtained functionality is the one corresponding to a Line Terminal (LT). Up to 4+0 or 4+1 configuration in two different directions (TS). The terminal is configured as a Wireless Add Drop Multiplexer . The 1650SMC equipment consist of the following subsystem units: Compact ADM Access module Auxiliary and overhead Power supply The Compact ADM is built upon a matrix that can accept, through an access module providing the physical interface for the asynchronous or synchronous signals, a maximum of 63x2 Mb/s, 3x34 Mb/s, 3x45 Mb/s, 140 Mb/s or 155 Mb/s streams. Inside the ADM, a synchronization unit provides the timing reference needed by all the components of the network element, with a max. daily drift of 0.37 ppm. A control subsystem realizes the Synchronous System Management Function (SEMF), according with ITUT G.783 recommendation. The subsystem operates with a double controlling system utilizing an Equipment Controller (EC) for DCC networking and a Shelf Controller (SC) for alarm detection and reporting, performance monitoring and equipment protection switching.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A wide range of auxiliary service channels is offered according to SDH standards utilizing SDH and POH bytes. These bytes are used for alignment word, parity check, network management operations, performance monitoring; some data and orderwire channels are available to the user.
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 50 / 542
The unit utilizes a power supply distributed architecture where the 48/60 V battery voltage is distributed to all the cards and here is DC/DC converted to the voltages necessary to each card.
Two batteries can be used at the input, with automatic selection on the one with higher voltage. The distribution is protected against single converter failure. This handbook gives no detailed information on 1650SMC equipment. For this purpose, please refer to 1650SMC specific documentation (see para.C.2.4.2 on page 530) with the following exception:
In the application for 9600LSY, the FAN SHELF used for 1650SMC is not that described in the 1650SMC documentation, but that described in this handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 51 / 542
12.4.6 FANS Subrack The usage of the fan unit inside the rack is mandatory to respect Safety international standards, either in regenerator and WMSN case (refer to para.22.3.5 on page 166 for further information on equipping rules). The FANS subrack is developed to be used both in regenerator and in WMSN configurations. In the first case it is installed only between the baseband subrack and the transceiver assembly, just above the receiving branching. In the second case a second fan subrack is moreover installed in the higher part of the rack, just under the 1650 MC unit. The subrack, 600mm wide and 50 mm high, can contain one or two subunits with 4 fans each as shown in the Fig. 17. herebelow.
SUBUNIT A
SUBUNIT B
Fig. 17. FANS Subrack
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 52 / 542
12.4.7 System wiring a)

Internal connections Four different connection kits have been designed to cover all the needed system configurations: Common kit This cable kit is utilized in all the configurations in quantity 1. It includes the cables for : Can bus Unit presence Rack lamps Battery cables Channel dedicated kit It includes all the connections among the units relevant to each single channel. It has to be foreseen with quantity equal to the total number of radio channels present in the terminal, including the spare channel. Two different codes are present in this category: one for channels without space diversity, a second one for channels with space diversity. Optional kit for reused channels It includes the cables needed for the frequency reuse operation. They are the IF cables and RF cables for the synchronization of the Rx local oscillators. One kit is used for one couple of reused channels. Two different codes are envisaged: one kit foresee short length cable needed for reused channels connection inside the same rack. The second must be used when the interconnections are relevant to two different racks. Interconnection cables to 1650SMC Three dedicated cable kits have been developed for the interconnection from the radio regenerator to the 1650SMC unit: Common part cable kit (including rack lamp cable) 1+1/2+0 basic cable kit (signal cables) 1 cable kit for one extension channel (signal cables, one for each added channel besides 1+1/2+0))
b)
External connections Main signal interfaces of the terminal are present on the front panel of each RRA unit. Alarm interconnections are directly present in the access area of baseband subrack and no distributor board is foreseen neither in baseband nor in TRU subrack.
12.4.8 Installation materials This handbook gives no detailed information on Installation materials, as well as on Installation procedures and Commissioning procedures and related Acceptance Test documents. For this purpose, please refer to the Installation Handbook and to the LineUp Guide (see Tab. 77. on page 524).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 53 / 542
12.5 Radio Transmission features

12.5.1 Foreword This paragraph describes in detail the Radio Transmission features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the following main paragraphs: para.12.5.2 herebelow para.12.5.3 on page 57 Frequency reuse technique (CCDP) and XPIC Cross Polarization Canceller Transmitted power control: static and ATPC
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this paragraph are: para.12.2 on page 36 para.12.4 on page 41 Introduction to system configurations Hardware components
12.5.2 Frequency reuse technique (CCDP) and XPIC Cross Polarization Canceller 12.5.2.1 Introduction Efficient bandwidth is a relevant issue in the digital radio application. Multilevel signalling is a standard mean to get high spectral efficiency. Unfortunately its sensitivity to channel impairments increases with the number of modulation levels. In radio links carrying several channels, additional bandwidth saving is usually achieved by using both horizontal and vertical polarization, with cross polarized adjacent channels to minimize interference. A further improvement of transmission capacity can be obtained by the simultaneous use of the RF channel for two independent digital transmissions on orthogonal polarization, which is commonly addressed to as Crosspolarized cochannel frequency reuse technique. Frequency reuse systems actually result in doubling the spectral efficiency of conventional transmissions. However this is paid in terms of additional signal distortion, because of inevitable crosscoupling of dual polarized channels. This is due both to propagation conditions (notably rain and ground reflections) and imperfections in the antennae and waveguide feeders. The result of reduced cross polarization discrimination (XPD) is cross polarization interference (XPI) , which sums up with intersymbol interference generated by channel dispersions and give rise to potentially serious impairments in detection. XPI and intersymbol interference can be jointly contrasted by resorting to adaptive processing techniques. Baseband equalizations together with cross polarization interference canceller (XPIC) allow signal distortion to be kept within tolerable limits, thus making frequency reuse a viable option.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 54 / 542
12.5.2.2 XPIC Operating principle and receiver architecture The idea behind the XPIC operation is that of adjusting the amplitude and phase of the received signal samples of the opposite polarization, so as to provide an estimate of the XPI corrupting the desired copol signal. This estimate can then be subtracted from the main signal, producing crosspol interference cancellation. Taking into account the timevarying nature of the channel, the XPIC operation must be adaptively adjusted according to a proper rule to track the variation in both copolar and crosspolar channels parameters. To counteract both XPI and multipath fading, the joint use of XPIC and adaptive equalization is advised. Following this approach, the adopted crosspol cofrequency receiver structure results in an arrangement of four adaptive bandspaced transverse filters, as show in Fig. 18.
H pol. received signal EQUALIZER H data
XPIC H error signal
V error signal XPIC
V pol. received signal EQUALIZER V data
Fig. 18. XPIC operating principle In the same figure the XPIC updating criterion is also addressed. The XPIC tapweights are adjusted so as to minimize the correlation between crosspol received signal and copol error signal. This operation minimizes the correlation between error signal and cross polarization interference. A fundamental issue in a frequency reuse system design is the receiver recover capability. As a matter of fact, deep fading occurrences, which can produce a system loss of lock, are usually of short duration, so that also moderate hysteresis effects on system lockin can severely increase the total outage time (C/I typical values 2 5 dB). Therefore, care must be taken in the choice of the receiver synchronization strategies, in order to avoid any interaction between dualpol sections of receiver during the recovery process. The adopted frequency reuse system architecture is sketched in Fig. 19. on page 56.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 55 / 542
H IF LO RX H DATA
UP
DOWN CONV
IF
DEM + XPIC
H DATA
MOD
CONV
TX
LO
master
.
V DATA LO
synchr. slave
MOD
UP
CONV
TX RX
DOWN CONV
IF
DEM + XPIC V IF
V DATA
LO
Fig. 19. Frequency reuse system architecture The only design constraint is that a common RF local oscillator is used for both dualpol signals, while two independent decision directed carrier recovery loops are employed for the demodulation from IF to baseband for each equalizer canceller pair input signals. This approach preserves the precise phase and frequency relationship between the received signal and the crosspol signal used for XPI cancellation. And this is true even when the carrier associated with the received signal is out of lock. Such coherence has very important implications because without cancellation, when the terminal is out of lock, XPI distortion will be so severe that the terminal will not easily regain lock. Another advantage of such an arrangement is that no constraints are imposed on Tx oscillators. In addition, a joint recovery process of crosspol carriers is avoided. The equalizer/canceller system operation is based on dualpol received signal samples. Therefore, a critical point of receiver design is to devise the proper signal sampling strategy. We chose to employ a separate symbol synchronizer for each crosspol branch of the receiver. As indicated in Fig. 19. , the same clock is used to sample the input signal of an equalizer and of the associated XPI canceller. This makes the XPIC operation independent of the synchronization of dual polarized transmitted data streams. It is of great importance to observe that the above synchronization strategies result in a complete independence of operation of the receiver branches on opposite polarization. This allows operation even when the receiving digital terminal on the opposite polarization is out of service. 12.5.2.3 XPIF Factor The receiver performance can be assessed in term of the XPI rejection capability of the canceller. This is quantified by the crosspolarization improvement factor (XPIF), which is the difference of the carrier to XPI ratio (C/XPIs) corresponding to a predefined error performance in a dual polarized system with and without XPIC, respectively. Typical values (optimum phase) for a 128 MLC system is 22 dB. 12.5.2.4 XPIC Card The XPIC card is a daughter board that has to be inserted in both modem units of the main and reused channel of each bearer that is reused. This unit is installed in the system only if the reuse of frequency is implemented. It can be also added to the modem in second step if a expansion of the system utilizing the reuse of a frequency is required after the first installation. The unit has a second utilization, again as daughter board, as baseband combiner when the space diversity functionality is implemented in the link. In case of both functionality presence (XPIC and Space diversity), two units are necessary and both must be installed inside the modems.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 56 / 542
12.5.3 Transmitted power control: static and ATPC The product allows two ways to adjust the transmitted power: the first one in a static way, the second one under automatic control loop (ATPC function). 12.5.3.1 Transmit power static adjustment The capability to adjust transmitted power in a static and fixed way has been introduced for those countries where, due to internal rules, the ATPC function is not accepted or for those hops in which, due the short length and interface problems, a fixed reduced transmitted power is preferred. The range of the possible attenuation depends on the frequency band involved and is detailed in chapter Technical Specifications. The step for adjustment is 1 dB, with an accuracy of 0.5 dB. The setting of the transmitted power can be performed locally by means of ECT. 12.5.3.2 ATPC function The automatic control of the transmitted power (ATPC) function allows to regulate the transmitted power in order to supply a reduced power in situation of normal propagation and the maximum power in conditions of fading. In synchronous radio link systems, the ATPC device is considered a very important function taking into account the following advantages: reduction of the internal interferences of the radio system and with other systems reduction of the average consumption of the transmitter considering that the maximum power is supplied for small percentages of time improvement of the averages conditions of the transmitter about the linearity and consequent reduction of phenomena of background error due to non linear distortion that with ATPC could be revealed only in conditions of fading possibility to increase the System Gain as a consequence to the reduction of the Backoff on the power transmitted taking into account what above mentioned substitution of a possible microwaves attenuator to realize different range of power.
As far as concern the values relative to the operating range of the ATPC, refer to chapter Technical Specifications. [1] ATPC working principle The ATPC system is based on a control loop of the power transmitted between a TX transmitter and a RX receiver connected in a radio link. With reference to Fig. 20. on page 58, the receiver furnishes through the AGC voltage the information of the received power to the ATPC controller; it compares the voltage with threshold values (presettable) and according to the obtained result send through to the ATPC controller on the remote station of the link the orders of increase/ decrease of transmitted power. These orders are processed and therefore transferred to the associated transmitter.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 57 / 542
STATION A
PRX
STATION B
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. RX IF
MOD
IF VATPC COMATPC
DEM
ATPC CONTROL
AGC
RFCOH INSERT
RFCOH EXTRACT
RX FAILURE ATPC DATA PRX ATPC
ATPC DATA
DEM
IF
RX
PRX
PTX
TX
IF
MOD
N.B.
ATPC regulation shown in one direction of transmission only and valid for each channel Fig. 20. ATPC Functionality The information of control of the transmitted power is exchanged between the two stations of a link utilizing service channel at 64 Kbit/s inserted in RFCOH bytes (avoiding to touch standard SOH bytes). In the protected configurations these information are transmitted 1+1 protected. The information regarding the ATPC functionality can be resumed in the following (for each channel): received power (absolute digital value to be transmitted towards the remote station in order to move the Tx output power). Rx failure (for remote Tx inhibition with reused system configuration) ID_channel (for identification of ATPC channel, in order to avoid problems in case of crosstalk/interference). These information are organized in registers of SPRI (Serial Peripheral Register Interface) where the PRx and ID_ch information are transmitted with higher priority than Rx fail. The information for each channel received in remote station is sent to the relevant transmitter where the PRx information received is compared to the thresholds set and it is decided to send up or down or hold commands to the RF transmitter. The Rx failure received in the Tx remote station is used to switch off the relevant transmitter in case of frequency reuse or to set the Tx at low Pout in case of standard configuration (no frequency reuse application). The service channel above mentioned is a point to point type and in the SDH systems is terminated in each RRA/Modemodulator.
[2]
Organization of the control system The ATPC control system is replied for each channel without any centralized function. The system control is organized in two parts for each channel and for each direction: the Rx system control implementing PRx detection, eventual Rx failure detection and insertion of the above data in RFCOH bytes the Tx system control implementing extraction of data from RFCOH bytes and PTx drive.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 58 / 542
[3]
ATPC Threshold management The transmitter is able to change the output power in the range MAX TL (max level) and MIN TL (min level). The transceiver has an its own default value for MAX TL, MIN TL and NOM TL (nominal level). It is possible to set the following values: A MAX TL A MIN TL with the constrain: MIN TL x A MIN TL x NOM TL A MIN TL x A MAX TL x MAX TL The extreme thresholds MAX TL and MIN TL are reported in the data sheet (see par. 3.3.2) It means that: the ATPC range is not fixed but variable according to the values set for A MAX TL and A MIN TL the max ATPC output power can be different from the max output power of the transmitter and the ATPC functionality can be maintained with reduced range The receiver has an its own default value (not changeable) for a receive power threshold called EXTRA POWER threshold depending on the signal (STM1 or STM0) corresponding to guaranteed threshold 10E6. On the receiver it is possible to set a received power Low threshold for loop activation within the following limits: LOW threshold: in the range from 40 dBm to EXTRA POWER threshold dBm When the received signal decreases and overcomes the LOW threshold the transmitter increases the output power up to the nominal value. Only if the received signal overcomes the EXTRA POWER threshold the transmitter increases the output power reducing its backoff (if LMA>LN only). The hysteresis for both thresholds is 3dB. The PRx value sent to the transmitter is refreshed with 10ms time interval. In case of loss of Tx_Rx ATPC signal, exchanged between Tx and Rx, the output power is frozen and an ATPC loop alarm must be activated (no other actions are taken); when the communication is restored the ATPC loop alarm is disactivated after an hysteresis to be defined. It is possible to enable or to disable ATPC function: when ATPC is disabled the output power can be driven normally according to 3.3.2. Every power change, from manual to automatic and viceversa, is performed at the speed of 1dB/20ms. To be sure that a decreasing of Rx power of one receiver corresponds to a PTx increasing of the relevant Tx in remote station an identifier station code must be used. The same identifier station code should be set on the two station involved in the ATPC functionality avoiding that in crosstalk/interference or RFCOH bypass in repeater the Tx in one station can be driven by a not relevant Rx. (max level ATPC) (min level ATPC) where where A MAX TL x MAX TL A MIN TL y MIN TL
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 59 / 542
12.6 Signal Transmission

12.6.1 Foreword This paragraph describes in detail the Signal Transmission features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the following main paragraphs: para.12.6.2 herebelow para.12.6.3 on page 61 para.12.6.4 on page 62 para.12.6.5 on page 63 STM0 & STM1 Transmission SDH mapping adopted SDH interface usage SOH bytes and service channel access
12.6.2 STM0 & STM1 Transmission One of the most important peculiarity of the 9600LSY family is to allow the selection of the system capacity according to the customer needs (and allowing band saving utilizing STM0 capacity, if it can be useful). In particular, this feature can be applied to 7, 8 and 13 GHz bands, utilizing well defined channel arrangements for medium capacity transmission. Please refer to section FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS to analyze the frequency arrangements and the channel steps foreseen for the various frequencies in case of STM0. Of course, the STM0 transmission is suitable to transport also plesiochronous signals with capacity 21x2 Mbit/s, 1 x 34 Mbit/s or 1 x 45 Mbit/s and the systems have been studied to allow an easy migration from STM0 to STM1 (or viceversa) when the traffic and the band requirements are going to change. As far as concerns the Way Side Traffic capacity, it is possible to transmit a single 2 Mbit/s WST stream for each channel carrying STM1, whether in case of STM0 it is not possible to transmit any WST. It is necessary to underline that no direct interfaces at STM0 level are foreseen. In case of STM0, the interface user side is always at STM1 level but only the first VC3 is mapped ; in this way it is possible to maintain the same electrical or optical interface (part numbers) independently from the signal capacity. The real transformation between STM1 interface and STM0 signal takes place inside the RRA/Modem unit before modulation (or after demodulation) function. In case of migration from one capacity to the other, no RRA change is necessary. Only the modem has to be substituted inside the baseband assembly; simple hardware and software presettings (with a new software configuration) are sufficient to upgrade the system.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 60 / 542
12.6.3 SDH mapping adopted Generalized Multiplexing structure

Fig. 21. shows the more generalized multiplexing structure obtained merging the ITUT G.707 multiplexing figure with the correspondent figure of ITUR F.750 (that shows also the RRRP functional reference point for STM0 transmission). Note that in European Standard only a subset of the generalized multiplexing structure is adopted, where only plesiochronous interfaces at 2, 34 and 140 Mbit/s are used, but also the multiplexing of 3xAU3 into AUG is forbidden (see Fig. 22. ).
Fig. 21. General Multiplexing Structure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 22. General European Multiplexing Structure with addition of 45 Mbit/s
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 61 / 542
12.6.4 SDH interface usage The system can provide several kinds of user interfaces that may be synchronous (SDH) or plesiochronous (PDH) and depend on the type of stations involved (Regenerator or WMSN) and the type of transmitted bit rate (STM1 or STM0) All the available interfaces are summarized, according to the different possible situations In Tab. 3. on page 30. Details about electrical characteristic of each interface are reported in chapter Technical Characteristics. It is important to point out that in case of WMSN station (obtained coupling a 9600LSY Regenerator with a 1650SMC device) inside the same rack), the interface between 9600LSY Regenerator and 1650SMC is electrical and the equipment is represented by two separated N.Es . Some general information that are valid for each version (line rate, physical interface) of the SDH and PDH traffic interfaces are herewith outlined: a) general rules for SDH unit: b) SOH/POH bytes management according to the standard TTP or CTP rules (see also NERM) Optical interfaces according to the standard G.957 short and long haul (see also NERM) Automatic Laser Shutdown in compliance with G.958
general rules for PDH unit: POH bytes management according to the standard TTP rules: (see also NERM) Asynchronous bit mode mapping into the relevant VC payload. Structure and /or notstructured PDH signals are transparently transported. The frame structure information (e.g. : CRC,E,A,S bits) are neither handled nor monitored: bidirectional passthrough at the PDH/SDH interfaces; furthermore, any potential PDHAIS condition is transparently forwarded into the relevant VC. Detection of VC signal fail conditions set to all 1 the outgoing PDH stream.
Detection of the incoming PDHAIS conditions (G.706 standard, detection time = 4 frames) can be enabled/disabled, without consequent actions at VC layer.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 62 / 542
12.6.5 SOH bytes and service channel access 12.6.5.1 Overview

In the SDH system some SOH bytes (of SDH frame) are used to transmit the service channels. So we can distinguish: c) RSOH bytes, that can be inserted/extracted both in multiplex and in regenerator station, and d) MSOH bytes that can be inserted/extracted only in multiplex station.
Moreover, radio side, the transmission of 1 Way Side Traffic service stream (only in case of STM1 transmission) is performed mapping it on the bytes of two columns of the RFCOH. The AUX/EOW bytes handled by the Regenerator and by the WMSN support two types of applications: 1) Local access as termination: the auxiliary bytes of a trail termination can be bidirectionally interconnected to the voice/data interfaces of the local service unit embedded in the equipment itself. Crossconnection: the auxiliary bytes of two different trail terminations can be bidirectionally interconnected providing an auxiliary channel passthrough between every couple of STM1 ports or different OH sections; it means each single byte can be configured to be passedthrough from one direction (i.e. line side) to another one (i.e. radio side).
2)
The auxiliary bytes connections are always unprotected and the selection of the bytes and the ports are performed by CT/OS. The dashed cells in Tab. 6. herebelow show the set of potential OH bytes suitable to be processed as auxiliary channels at the section or the path terminations, with the associated meaning. RFCOH is a proprietary function implemented to transmit radio specific information (DSI, ATPC, MC, WST) and to reroute over radio hop a few RSOH byte terminated. Tab. 6. OH bytes suitable for handling on MST 1 A1 RSOH 2 A1 d d 3 A1 D D 4 A2 E1 5 A2 d d 6 A2 f f 7 J0 F1 8 n n f 9 n n f 1 2 3 4 f f f f n 5 6 7 8 9 1 J1 B3 C2 G1 F2 H4 F3 K3 N1 VC4/3 OH
D1
D2
B2
B2 f f f f
B2 f f f f
K1
f f f f f
f f f f M1
D4 D7
D5 D8
MSOH
D10 S1
D11 f
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 63 / 542

D3 K2 D6 D9 D12 E2
B1
f f f f
Tab. 7. OH bytes suitable for handling on RST 1 A1 RSOH B1 D1 2 A1 d d 3 A1 d d 4 A2 E1 D2 5 A2 d d 6 A2 f f 7 J0 F1 D3 8 n n f 9 n n f 1 2 3 4 5 6 MSOH PASS THROUGH 7 8 9
Tab. 8. RFCOH byte structure Column 1 DSI ATPC D1 D2 D3 E1 F1 d,n,f d,n,f MC MC MC MC MC FAIL serv + K0 d,n,f d,n,f d,n,f Column 2
where the meaning of the bytes is summarized as follows: for RSOH bytes: A1A2: J0: d: n: f: B1: E1: F1: D1D2D3: 6 bytes: A1= (11110110) A2=(00101000) for frame alignment; RS Trace for STM identification; 6 bytes for media specific usage; 4 bytes reserved for National Use; 4 bytes reserved for Future international standardization; RS Error checking (BIP8) for regeneration section. RS Voice for order wire channel; data channel as user channel; RS DCC data communication channel [192 Kb/s (TMN bytes for regenerator section)];
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 64 / 542
for MSOH bytes: B2: E2: n: f: K1K2: MS Error checking (BIP24) for terminal station. MS Express channel. 2 bytes reserved for National Use; 26 bytes reserved for Future international standardization; MPS channel K1(b1..b8) and K2(b1..b5), MSFERF/AIS K2(b6..b8): 110 indicates that the receive end is detecting a section failure or is receiving MSAIS; MS DCC data communication channel [576 Kb/s (TMN bytes for multiplex section)]; SDH Synchronization Quality Level: S1 (b5..b8) Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication
D4..D12: S1: M1: for POH bytes: J1: B3: C2: G1: F2: F3: H4: K3: N1: for RFCOH bytes:
Path trace (check end to end path connection) Performance monitoring (BIP8 of VC4) Signal label (full or empty VC) Path status (FERF,FEBE) backward to the origin Path user service channel Path user service channel Multiframe alignment (indicates tributary location) 4 bits for APS channel, 4 bits spare Network operator byte for Tandem Connection Monitoring (TCM) function
Proprietary channels MC: k0: DSI: ATPC: Monitoring channel:EWL, EWH, HBER, RTF, FAIL SERV. Proprietary radio channel identifier Digital Switching Information channel for RPS Data channel for automatic transmitting power control
RSOH bytes rerouted over radio hop E1: F1: D1D2D3: radio Order Wire radio data channel RS DCC data communication channel [192 Kb/s (TMN bytes for regenerator section)];
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 65 / 542
12.6.5.2 Regenerator Case As far as the 9600LSY Regenerator, it allows the management of:
Termination of RSOH or RFCOH bytes to auxiliary ports RSOH RFCOH bytes cross connection
The following Tab. 9. shows for the Regenerator the possible AUX/EOW user interfaces suitable to access the terminated channels: Tab. 9. Reg. AUX/EOW user interfaces USER INTERFACES 9600 baud with interface V24/V28 (selectable) 64 Kb/s G.703 (one is 64/128Kb/s selectable) 64 Kb/s V11 64/128 Kb/s V11 (SW configurable) 64 Kb/s G.703 (Party line) Voice frequency (E1) (EOW) Voice frequency (E1) (Party line) Voice frequency (point to point between adjacent radio sections) QUANTITY 1 3 3 1 1 1 3 1
Among them it is possible to choose, by software presetting, up to six 64 Kbit/s channels plus one voice frequency channel (EOW), to be transmitted radio side in 1+1 protected way and to be dropped and inserted in every radio station. With reference to Tab. 7. on page 64, the RSOH bytes terminated line side may be in principle mapped upon software configuration control in the following interfaces as summarized in the following table: USER INTERFACES RFCOH bytes (line side) [1] E1 F1 d,f,n [2] Notes: [1] [2] V.11 X X X V.24 X X X G.703 X X X EOW (Q 23) X
For the DCCR (D1D3) and J0 the interfaces is towards SC max 14 bytes d,n,f.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 66 / 542
With reference to Tab. 8. on page 64, the RSOH bytes terminated radio side through the RFCOH function may be in principle mapped upon software configuration control in the following interfaces as summarized in the following table:
USER INTERFACES RFCOH bytes (radio side) [1] V.11 X X X V.24 X X X G.703 X X X EOW (Q 23) X
E1 F1 5 bytes out of d,f,n
Note: [1] For the DCCR (D1D3) and k0 the interface is towards SC Practically common usage of user interfaces and possible mapping is: E1 always terminated on the EOW two ways (line side and radio side) F1 plus max 3 bytes accessible (normally radio side) through the user interfaces 2 x 64 Kb/s, 1 x V11 and 1 x V24. Each interface (with the exception of the voice type ) supports only one direction; the same byte can be assigned to different direction (for example line side and radio side) using 2 interfaces.
Way Side Traffic (WST) Additionally, the regenerator allows the transmission, radio side, of one 2 Mb/s Way Side Traffic (WST) that represents a service traffic in addition to the main one. Both the WST and service channels are transmitted using the radio frame complementary overhead (RFCOH, an arbitrary and unstandardized extra SDH frame overhead). The main features of the 2 Mbit/s WST Channels management are the following: STM1 capacity: One 2 Mbit/s Way Side Traffic can be inserted in each STM1 channel whatever is the channel spacing (28, 29, 29,65, 30, 40 MHz) used in the channel plans. STM0 capacity: No 2 Mbit/s Way Side Traffic can be inserted. WST protection: WST can be transmitted in unprotected way, one for each radio channel, by means of the interfaces (1.0/2.3 75 Ohm coax male connectors) allocated in the access area of the subrack. The possibility to transmit one 2Mb/s WST stream in protected way (on channels 0 and 1 ) is also given. In this case the access is located on the front panel of Service unit that hosts the WST switching functionality. Automatic switching criteria are : Signal Fail (SF), HBER, LBER and EW.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 67 / 542
12.6.5.3 WMSN Case WMSN functionality is realized utilizing a1650SMC adddrop multiplexer . When WMSN functionality is implemented, all the accesses to services are located on the 1650SMC unit, and the ones located on the regenerator section no longer are no longer utilized. For the description of the available service channels relevant to this unit, please refer to 1650SMC Technical Handbook. For an easy clarification about the service accesses, hereafter the front view of the 1650SMC view is reported in Fig. 23. herebelow. The service access ports are located on the SERGI card: for the DCCR (D1D3) and J0 the interfaces is towards SC for the DCCM (D4D12) , S1 and M1 the interface is towards SC. POH bytes of terminated VC4
In particular, the SERGI unit supplies the access to the auxiliary channels (A) and to the 2 Mb/s Service stream (B) . Moreover, the connection for the telephone jack is present (C).
(A)
(B)
(C)
1650SMC SERGI Fig. 23. 1650SMC and unit SERGI front view
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 68 / 542
12.6.5.4 Engineering Order Wire characteristic The EOW Channel allows the access to the phone services of the system. It is interfaced with the telephone set with DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) Tones and with association circuits, branching, exchange and receiving of the phone signal. The EOW Channel allows the following types of linking: between two station (selective call) between one station and all the others (omnibus call) between one and more stations called in selective mode (multi selective call).
Numbering System The compatibility with the actual generation of devices is guaranteed by the type of numbering used, with the two digits that identify the actual The above statement, limited the max number of devices linked in 90. Is important to remember that the numbers available are from 10 to 99. The omnibus call number is identify in the number 00, as in the actual boards. The multiselective call can be utilized connecting in conference mode up to the maximum number of available telephone numbers (90). This new release is full compatible with the current systems, except few new features here below described: Introduction of the time checks during a phones call. Automatic ring management (Routing)
A second voice channel is also available for voice transmission in point to point link between adjacent regenerator terminals. The interface is present on the connector area of the baseband equipment and the channel can be addressed on one byte of RFCOH . In case of WMSN configuration it is possible also to connect by cable the service to 1650SMC unit to be inserted in MSOH and to be available in MST sections.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 69 / 542
12.6.5.5 Data Channel Characteristics a) In case of G.703 64 Kbit/s codirectional interface the timing signals (64 KHz and 8 KHz) are derived from the data stream.
Fig. 24. G.703 64 Kbit/s codirectional interface b) In case of RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contradirectional interface the timing signal (64 KHz and 8 KHz) are directed towards the user. The code is NRZ.
Fig. 25. RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contradirectional interface
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 70 / 542
c)
In case of RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous up to 9600 baud no timing signals are required. The signal is internally over sampled up to 64 KHZ. The code is NRZ.
Fig. 26. RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous interface
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 71 / 542
12.7 Synchronization
12.7.1 Foreword This paragraph describes in detail the Synchronization features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the following main paragraphs: para.12.7.2 herebelow para.12.7.3 herebelow para.12.7.4 herebelow Introduction Synchronization in Regenerator station Synchronization in WMSN station by means of 1650SMC ADM
12.7.2 Introduction SDH transmission operates on general principles that implies the existence of timing devices that form part of a synchronizing network. Different behaviors for synchronization are present depending from the type of station either Regenerator or WMSN. 12.7.3 Synchronization in Regenerator station In this case each incoming STM1 stream takes the network synchronization that is recovered by the equipment and forwarded to the radio hop or to the line retiming the transmitted signal by means of the recovered clock. The regenerator does not need any other synchronization circuit. 12.7.4 Synchronization in WMSN station by means of 1650SMC ADM The synchronization requirements implies that a WMSN equipment must include a synchronization subsystem for a slave clock which functions are specified in ITUT Rec. G.783 as the Synchronous Equipment Timing Source (SETS). The Alcatel 9600LSY radio families are provided with 1650SMC ADM unit that supplies such functionalities. By selecting the external or internal reference source, the equipment works synchronized to the reference. The 1650SMC unit can automatically change the reference involved if the selected one is not correct or can holdover the operation mode if no input reference is available. 1650SMC supplies the synchronizing and timing signals to all the equipment units (N.B.) by selecting the synchronizing signal among the available input references. To this purpose the unit can: select the reference source involved; change the reference (or mode) when it losses synchronism; lock the Local Oscillator to the reference available; work in Hold Over/Free Running LO mode when all references are lost. N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In a radio terminal only the ADM takes directly the synchronism from the internal synchronization path, while units of other subracks take indirectly the synchronism by means of its own phase locked oscillators (e.g. modemodulators). Finally there are units that do not need synchronism at all (e.g. units of transceiver).
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 72 / 542
The Compact ADM unit also provides an output synchronization signal at 2.048 MHz with an interface according G.703 (T4 signal in G783) This signal is squelched when the unit is working in Free Running or in Hold Over modes. A maximum of 6 independent references can be defined by mixing type and PDH/SDH parts (the selection is accomplished by means of craft terminal). The selection may happen between: timing reference signals coming from the TTF blocks on CompactADM (T1 signal in G783) timing reference signals coming from the SDH ports (T1 signal in G783) 2.048 MHz signal coming from the PDH ports (T2 signal) 2.048 MHz clock coming from external source (T3 signal in G783) The choice of the sources can be made in independent manner for the internal clock reference output and for the external 2 MHz output. By Craft Terminal it is also possible either to enable or to disable the Timing Marker algorithm. The automatic selection of one of the possible synchronization sources is performed on the base of quality (SSM algorithm) or priority criteria: a) Priority Algorithm See flow chart in Fig. 27. on page 75. The reference source choice is performed checking the signal quality by detecting for every STM1 synchronization source: LOS (= LOS + MSAIS + LOF + EXCBER) DRIFT
and for every 2 Bit/s interface or synchronous tributary selected as source: b) LOS (= LOS + AIS + LOF) DRIFT LOF (+ LOM + CRC4 MISMATCH) For 2 Mbit/s interface only
SSM Algorithm See flow chart in Fig. 28. on page 76. If the Timing Marker procedure is enabled, the CRU checks the S1 Bytes from the synchronous frame of the selected sources and the preset value of the 2 Mbit/s sources then, by the SSM algorithm, chooses the better source to be used. The SSM algorithm is in compliance with ETSI DE/TM 10156. The two Algorithms define synchronization source, by switching the reference. The switch between the source is hitless. The switch from one reference to the other one occurs without passing through the Holdover mode. The reference, sent to the PLL circuits, generates the 622 MHz signal used for internal synchronization. The PLL can operates in these following different modes: Normal The PLL output is frequency locked to one of the selected references. Holdover In absence of an external reference, the clock stored the frequency difference to the last reference. This information is used to fix the oscillator frequency value. The holdover mode guarantees .37 ppm of frequency drift within the first 24 h 05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 73 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Lock out The command allows to disable/enable a timing input from being considered as possible source of timing. Forced switch The command allows to force the selection of a timing input. If the source forced becomes unavailable, the internal oscillator will be selected. Manual selection of timing source The command allows to force the selection of a timing input. If the source manual selected becomes unavailable, the manual mode is terminated and automatic selection algorithm is initiated.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 74 / 542
Free running Without any reference and information stored in memory, the VCO oscillates at its natural frequency. Frequency variations can be due to temperature variations, components degradation etc. The free running stability is 4.6 ppm. The following setting can also be managed by Craft Terminal:
The allowable timing references, pointing by S, must be arranged according to decreasing priority level (i.e. priority level of timing reference pointing by Sj is y than priority level of Sj+1) Fig. 27. Synchronization Reference Source Priority Algorithm Flow Chart
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 75 / 542
The allowable timing references, pointing by S, must be arranged according to decreasing priority level (i.e. priority level of timing reference pointing by Sj is >= than priority level of Sj+1). Fig. 28. SSM Algorithm Flow Chart
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 76 / 542
12.8 Equipment Control

12.8.1 Foreword This paragraph introduces the Equipment control features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the following main paragraphs: para.12.8.2 para.12.8.3 para.12.8.4 para.12.8.5 para.12.8.6 herebelow on page 78 on page 80 on page 80 on page 81 Introduction The NE architecture The F interface The Qecc/QB3 interface ECT and RECT
12.8.2 Introduction 9600LSY Digital Radio Relay Systems cannot operate correctly without Control and Management Functions which are usually partially embedded as Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF) and Message Communication Function (MCF) in the involved Network elements.. Equipment control may be performed locally through an Equipment Craft Terminal (1320 CT) or remotely through a Craft Terminal in a remote site. External control units may be dedicated to a Radio subnetwork or may be the Control Elements of an SDH Network including Radio Links, Fiber Optic Lines, Synchronous Multiplexers and CrossConnect Equipment. Inside an overall Managed Telecommunication Network, SDH Digital Radio Relay Systems are part of a Managed Synchronous Network. The 9600LSY DRRS equipment interfaces the TMN according to ETSI Standard and ITUT Rec G.784, G.773 and ITUR Rec 750. The architecture of the management process, which is intrinsically a distributed process based on Manager and Agent Functions, may influence in the design, the Equipment Control Architecture and the identification of the Network Elements to be managed. To connect SDH Radio Equipment to a TMN System Qtype Interfaces are used, adopting the standard Infomodel based QType Interfaces Qecc and QB3 for a full integration in a multivendor environment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 77 / 542
12.8.3 The NE architecture A Digital Radio Relay Link identified as a Radio Switching Section is composed of two Radio Relay Terminals (RRT). Each physical entity RRT is a SDH NEs and therefore according to ITUT Rec G.784 they must have TMN Q3 and Qecc Interfaces. All the SDH NE must be able to terminate the Regenerator Section (RS). Two types of RRT are available depending on the ability to terminate a Multiplex Section (MS) or a Regenerator Section (RS) only. This ability is required when the RRT having PDH tributaries (140 Mb/s, 2, 34 or 45 Mb/s) behaves like an SDH Multiplexer (i.e. WMSN station composed at least by two NEs: 1650SMC + LHR). When the RRT has SDH tributaries this ability is not strictly required and therefore the RRT may be equipped with an RRA (Radio Regenerator Adaptation) Assembly (Regenerator station equal to the NE LHR/LHRC). Associated to the RS and the MS there are in the SOH of the SDH frame two Embedded Control Channels (having as physical interfaces the D1D3 bytes in the RSOH and D4D12 bytes in the MSOH) carrying the management information between the ends of the RS and MS respectively. These channels are terminated in the Message Communication Function (MCF), located in the Equipment Controller of the NE, which behaves like a Packet Switching Node. The communication interface of these channels on the physical interfaces D1D3 and D4D12 is a 7layer full OSI protocol stack as defined in ITUT Rec G.784 named Qecc. While the intersite or interoffice communications links between SDH NEs will normally be formed from the SDH ECCs, within a particular site (intrasite connections) or when the SDH NE is acting as Gateway Network Element (GNE) towards a Data Communication Network connecting the NE with an Operation System (OS) a 7layer full OSI protocol stack named QBX is used. QBX is a Q3 type interface and with reference to the foreseen protocol suites: QB1 is a Connection oriented over X.25 (CONS1) interface, QB2 is a Connectionless Mode over X.25 (CLNS2) interface and QB3 is a Connectionless Mode over ISO 8802 LAN interface. The previous Qtype interfaces in their standardized versions implies the use of a Management Application Software based on an objectoriented Information Model and the use at the 7th layer of the OSI stack of protocols as CMISE, ROSE and ACSE. The availability on the NE of all these QType TMN interfaces do not imply the contemporary use of all of them. Their use and the criteria for selecting them is the TMN network designer responsibility according to the management traffic load and the network layout. The only limitation imposed by standards is that in the RRRs (and obviously in the RRTs equipped with RRA) the only RSOH has to be terminated whereas the MSOH has to be passedthrough. As far as the QB3 and Qecc interfaces is concerned the following criteria in their use have been adopted. In the WMSN station equipped with the Mux assembly, on the line side the DCC bytes of the MSOH and the RSOH are transferred to the MCF and then processed by the SEMF or rerouted by the MCF to their destination. While the DCCM bytes of the MSOH are reinserted in the SDH frame, the DCCR bytes of the RSOH are reinserted in the SDH frame through the RFCOH and MODEM units with 1+1 protection (Radio Channel 1 and 0). In the Regenerator station, while the DCCR of the RSOH are processed in the same way as previously described, the MSOH remains untouched and is carried transparently.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 78 / 542
STATION A
STATION B
TR
radio channels x,y (N.B.)

D1D3
TR
MD
MD

D4D12 D1D3
RPS
radio channels x,y D4D12
RPS

D4D12 D1D3
RRA SEMF
RRA SEMF
MCF
MCF
1320CT
QB3
QB3
ECT for Station A RECT for Station B Fig. 29. DCC management: Regenerator case
STATION A (REG.)
TR
STATION B (WMSN)
TR

D1D3
MD
MD
RPS
D4D12 D1D3

D4D12
RPS
D4D12 D1D3
RRA SEMF
RRA SEMF MCF
D1D3
MUX SEMF MCF
MCF
F
1320CT QB3 1320CT QB3
ECT for Station A RECT for Station B
ECT for Station B RECT for Station A Fig. 30. DCC management: WMSN case
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
The couple of radio channels (x,y in Fig. 29. and Fig. 30. above) which carry the protected service channel (as well as the WST channels, if any) is defined via software. These channels can be chosen among the five couples defined in Tab. 5. on page 39.
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 79 / 542
12.8.4 The F interface The F interface is the control interface connecting a Craft Terminal to a Equipment Controller. The F interface is not a standard interface since in TMN there is only the F interface as reference point between WSF (Work Station Function) and OSF (Operation System Function) and the F interface is not yet standardized. An F interface has been standardized for all the ALCATEL equipment and is using the following protocols: Physical Layer: Standard: EIA RS232C/ITUT V24V28 Type: Pointtopoint, Asynchronous full Duplex Transmission rate: 38600 bit/s Connector: 9 pin female Sub D Data Link Layer: Asynchronous HDLC standard protocol ISO 3309 ISO 4335 ISO 7809
In 9600LSY terminal regenerator, F interface is located on the front panel of the System Controller unit. In case of WMSN configuration, F interface available on 1650SMC unit is the one to be utilized as terminal interface and represents the unique access to the terminal. In this case, by means of RECT software it is possible to control, besides all the other terminals, also the functionality of the regeneration section of the WMSN terminal. For this reason, the RECT option has to be always foreseen in case of WMSN functionality. 12.8.5 The Qecc/QB3 interface In the TMN (Telecommunication Management Network) Architecture, while Qecc is the communication interface on the DCCs (Data Communication Channel) used as ECCs (Embedded Control Channel) in a SDH Subnetwork, the QB3 interface is used to interface the SDH Subnetwork to the OSs, usually through a DCN (Data Communication Network). The Gateway Function performing the protocol conversion (from Qecc to QB3 and vice versa) is carried out by the GNE (Gateway Network Element) of the subnetwork.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 80 / 542
12.8.6 ECT and RECT [1]

ECT ALCATEL TMN management products 1320 CT called Craft Terminals (CT) consists of a compatible personal computer and application software specially developed for monitoring transmission equipment. The CT designed to monitor a single transmission equipment is called Equipment Craft Terminal (ECT) or 1320 CT. For each station an ALCATEL proprietary Software Package (SWP) is to be employed: SWP REG. 9600LSY for the Regenerator station and, additionally, SWP 1650SMC for the WMSN station. The Equipment Craft Terminal, connected to the F interface of the Equipment Controller, enable an operator to perform locally the following Element Management functions: Equipment Management Transmission Management Test management External points management Alarm (fault) management Synchronization management Radio Management Performance Monitoring Management Event log manager Overhead Management Connection Management Software Management Communication and Routing Management Security Management Support Management
[2]
RECT The Remote Equipment Craft Terminal is a feature only present in the Single NE Link architecture which allows the local operator, using an ECT connected to the F interface of the Equipment Controller, to zoom and perform a complete set of management operations on all the reachable SDH NEs in the SDH. The Remote NE can be physically reached through QB3/Qecc. The Remote Craft Terminal feature applies in NR5 to both Q3 and QB3* NEs, with the exception of DXC. The feature is basically the same as for NR3 NEs, with the usual difference related to the support of TSDIM interface for the management of Q3 NEs. Despite the fact that this is supposed to be a NE related feature, it becomes a network feature considering that the network can be composed of both Q3 and QB3* NEs and that an harmonization is necessary between the two technologies. The IMCT is able to manage both Q3 and QB3* NEs (in the sense that both QB3* and Q3 application are working simultaneously), but it shall be connected to a Q3 NE. Viceversa Nectas CT will keep on being able to manage only QB3* NEs, and it shall obviously be connected to a QB3* NE. Its worth reminding that RECT can be connected to any NE pertaining to the same area of the local NE and to any NE pertaining to different areas (assuming that the DCN network has been correctly designed and hence interarea communication is possible from networking viewpoint). As far as DXC is concerned, the RECT feature is not supported, i.e. a DXC CT can be connected to only one DXC at a time.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 81 / 542
The RECT features and limitations are briefly the following: 1) 2) The RECT function provides a remote login facility similar to those offered by an OS to manage several configured NEs, included the local one. The contemporaneous presence of the RECT function and an OS is possible. The access disable flag avoids access conflict between the OS and both RECT and ECT on some operations as configuration modification and remote control with access filtering. The NE which may be remotely controlled by a RECT must be configured and must be loaded with the same SW version supporting the RECT function. A NE not supporting RECT function shall refuse the incoming association issued by a RECT and the ECT displays only local information. Only three RECTs shall be active at a time over one NE. The coexistence of ECTs and RECTs in the whole network is guaranteed since the conflict in configuring the QB3 NEs is solved locally by the NE itself. The operator, through the RECT function, is able to see the alarm synthesis of the whole network . In a SDH network the maximum number of QB3 NEs equipped with the RECT function are 32 and the maximum number of NEs (QB3* NEs and QB3 NEs) manageable by the RECT function are 64. These figures identify what it is understood as small SDH network for which the RECT function may substitute the Element Manager.
3)
4)
5) 6)
[3]
Security management The security management allows to define the profile operator in order to access to all the Craft Terminal functionality according to four different profiles: Administrator Constructor Operator Viewer: no modification are allowed
N.B.
Refer to CT Operators Handbooks listed in Tab. 81. on page 527, Tab. 83. on page 529, and para.C.2.4.2 on page 530 for further information on: HW and SW requirement of the PC to be used as ECT and RECT detailed description of ECT and RECT functionalities and operations allowed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 82 / 542
Of course, due to the limitation of the physical resources in the Equipment Controller of the NE, some network design constraints must be taken into account as the total number of managed NEs (64), the number of the QB3 NEs (32), the number of the QB3* NEs (32), the number of associations permanently open (31) between the CT and the remote NEs.
13 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 13.1 Introduction

This chapter describes the technical characteristics of the 9600LSY. If not differently specified, characteristics are common to standard version 9600LSYLHR and compact version 9600LSYLHRC. Data indicated in the handbook must be considered as standard values Data indicated in the contract must be considered as guaranteed values This chapter is organized as follows: System characteristics on page 83, including: General Characteristics on page 84 99% power channel bandwidth and Emission Designator on page 90 Power supply characteristics on page 91 Mechanical characteristics on page 92 Transceiver characteristics Regenerator and Modem characteristics Modem XPIC & Combiner (XPIC STM1 only) Regenerator Power consumption (Regenerator only) Branching interfaces Protections Environmental characteristics General characteristics Mechanically active substances Optical Safety on page 93 on page 95, including: on page 95 on page 97 on page 98 on page 99 on page 100 on page 100 on page 101, including: on page 101 on page 101 on page 102
13.2 System Characteristics

GENERAL NOTES ON FOLLOWING TABLES: Points A A and C C according to what defined in the relevant ETSI specification: A
TX RF TX FILTER
TX BRANCHING
TX FEEDER
A
RX
RF RX FILTER
RX BRANCHING
RX FEEDER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 31. ETSI Reference points
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 83 / 542
13.2.1 General characteristics [1] Characteristics applicable fully to 128QAM systems and partially to 64QAM systems
Refer to point [2] on page 89 for characteristics of 64QAM systems.

9640 LSY LSYC 9647 LSY LSYC 9662 LSY LSYC 9667 LSY LSYC 9674 LSY LSYC INDOOR See Hardware Components in chapter SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Regenerator Terminal Wireless Multiservice Node 9600LSY :N+0 / N+1 9600LSYC : 1+0, 1+1 HST, 1+1/2+0 heterofrequency, 1+1/2+0 CCDP. YES 1x STM1 2x STM1 (with freq. reuse) 1x STM1 2x STM1 (with freq. Reuse) 1x STM1 2x STM1 (with freq. reuse) 1x STM1 2x STM1 (with freq. reuse) 1x STM1 2x STM1 (with freq. reuse) 1x STM0 1x STM1 2x STM1 (with freq. reuse) 1x STM0 1x STM1 2x STM1 (with freq. reuse) 1x STM1 2x STM1 (with freq. reuse) 1x STM1 2x STM1 (with freq. reuse) 1x STM0 9681 LSY LSYC 9610 LSY LSYC 9611 LSY LSYC 9613 LSY LSYC
EQUIPMENT
Version Mechanical practice Station type Configurations Space diversity Transmission capacity
(2x STM1 with frequency reuse with STM1 only)
User Interface
155.520 Mb/s (STM1) 139.264 Mb/s (PDH) 3 x 34.368 Mbit/s 3 x 44.736 Mbit/s 63 x 2.048 Mbit/s 155.520 Mb/s (STM1) STM 1 : STM0 :
Electrical ITUT Rec. G.703 Electrical ITUT Rec: G.703 Electrical ITUT Rec:. G.703 Electrical ITUT Rec. G.703 Electrical ITUT Rec. G.703 Optical ITUT Rec. G.957 G. 958
Auxiliary channels Service channels
1X2 Mbit/s WST in RFCOH no WST
Omnibus voice channel (E1) DTMF (rec. Q23) 600 Ohm Tx 0 Db, Rx4 selective call. 3 x 64 Kb/s V11 or 2x64 Kb/s + 1 x 128 Kb/s (SW configurable contradirectional) 1 x 9.6 Kb/s RS 232 TMN channel (D1 D3 regenerator terminal D4 D12 WMSN Voice frequency party line (E1) (Four wire bal., 600 Ohm, level 3Db 1 voice frequency (point to point only) Digital party line extension 64 kb/s, G.703 code Output loudspeaker 400 mW, 4 Ohm Telephone set driver for TPH desk 600 Ohm, Tx 0 dB, Rx 4dB
LHR Transit time STM1 STM0 Tx Spectrum (C) Spectrum Scrambler/ Descr. STM1 STM0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RRA + MODEM : 56 microsec. ; TRANSCEIVER : 300 nanosec. tbd STM 1 : STM0 : see Fig. 34. page 107 see Fig. 35. page 107
221.31 2201
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 84 / 542
EQUIPMENT MODULATION FREQUENCY BAND [GHz] (Channel plan)
9640 LSY LSYC
9647 LSY LSYC
9662 LSY LSYC
9667 LSY LSYC
9674 LSY LSYC 128 QAM
9681 LSY LSYC
9610 LSY LSYC
9611 LSY LSYC
9613 LSY LSYC
3.64.2 (F.635)
4.45.0 (F.1099)
5.96.4 (F.383)
6.47.1 (F.384)
7.47.7 F.385 annex1) (**) 7.17.7 (F.385 annex3) (**) 7.47.9 (F.385 annex4) (**)B 7.27.6 (F.385 rec.1) (**) B
7.78.3 (F. 386)
10.010. 7 GHz (**)
10.7 11.7 (F.387)
12.75 13.25 (F.497) B (**)
3.64.2 (F.382)
4.45.0 (Spain Defence) (**) 4.45.0 (F.746) Austria (**)
5.66.2 (OIRT) (**)
8.28.5 (F.386 annex3) B (***) 7.98.4 (OIRT Annex4) B (**)
3.64.2 (DTI) (**)
3.64.2 (F.635)
3.43.9 (OIRT) (**) TRANSMITTER OUTPUT POWER (With ATPC) * [dBm] (A) TRANSMITTER OUTPUT POWER (Without ATPC) * [dBm] (A) 1x103 BER
32,0
32,0
32,0
32,0
32,0
32,0
30,0
30,0
28,0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
28.0
28.0
27.0
Threshold (A) (Received power) [dBm]

STM1 1x103 BER
74,0 typ 73,0 gua (**)
74,0 typ 73,0 gua (**)
74,0 typ 73,0 gua (**)
74,0 typ 73,0 gua
73,5 typ 72,5 gua (**)
73,5 typ 72,5 gua (***)
73,5 typ 72,5 gua (**)
73,5 typ 72,5 gua
73.0 typ 72.0 gua (**)
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
Threshold (A) (Received power) [dBm]

STM0 1x106 BER Threshold (A) (Received power) [dBm] STM1 1x106 BER TH 72,0 typ 71,0 gua (**) N.A. 72,0 typ 71,0 gua (**) N.A. 72,0 typ 71,0 gua (**) N.A. 72,0 typ 71,0 gua
78,5 typ 77,5 gua
78,5 typ 77,5 gua
N.A.
N.A.
78.0 typ 77.0 gua
71,5 typ 70,5 gua (**)
71,5 typ 70,5 gua (***) 76,5 typ 75,5 guar
71,5 typ 70,5 gua (**) N.A.
71,5 typ 70,5 gua
71,0 typ 70.0 gua (**) 76.0 typ 75.0 guar
N.A.
(A) (Received power) [dBm]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
STM0
76,5 typ 75,5 guar
N.A.
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 85 / 542
EQUIPMENT Net Syst. Gain (CC) dB (*) (with branching losses and with ATPC) STM1 1x103 (Standard version) 1+1 Heterofreq. 3+1 Heterofreq.
9640 LSY LSYC
9647 LSY LSYC
9662 LSY LSYC
9667 LSY LSYC
9674 LSY LSYC
9681 LSY LSYC
9610 LSY LSYC
9611 LSY LSYC
9613 LSY LSYC All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
98.5 97.5 (**)
98.0 97.0 (**)
100.5 99.5 (**)
101.0 100.5
98.0 97.0 (**)
99.0 98.0 (***)
95.5 94.5 (**)
97.0 96.5
92.0 91.5 (**)
Net Syst. Gain (CC) dB (*) (with branching losses and with ATPC) STM1 106 (Standard version) 1+1 Heterofreq. 3+1 Heterofreq.
96.5 95.5 (**)
96.0 95.0 (**)
98.5 97.5 (**)
99.0 98.5
96.0 95.0 (**)
97.0 96.0 (***)
93.5 92.5 (**)
95.0 94.5
90.0 89.5
Dispersive Fade Margin [dB] STM1 1x103 STM1 1x106 STM0 1x103 STM0 1x106 Max input power at antenna port (Received Field) [dBm] 103 /1010 Background BER (at nominal PRx level)
49.3 47.2 63.8 61.2
16.0 /21.0
1 x 1013
May support both STM1 and STM0 transmission Tolerance: + 0.5 dB at ambient temperature; + 1.5 dB in temperature range 55C P 555C Points A A and C C according to what defined in the relevant ETSI specification Note: in case of channel plan with homopolar channel space 28 MHz, threshold value is 0.5 dB higher and system gain is 0.5 dB less. Note: for Channel plans 28 MHz and 8.2 8.5 GHz, frequency band, threshold value is 0.5 dB higher and System Gain is 2 dB lower (due to higher branching losses).
(*) Note: (**) (***)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 86 / 542
EQUIPMENT All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. Frequency reuse (XPIC) NFD one adjacent channels (guar) STM1 [dB] NFD one adjacent channels (guar) STM0 dB XPD antenna for CCDP application [dB] XPIC filters XPI ratio lockin [dB] XPI ratio lockout [dB] Behavior vs modulated digital channel interference: cochannel STM1 1*106
9640 LSY LSYC
9647 LSY LSYC
9662 LSY LSYC
9667 LSY LSYC YES
9674 LSY LSYC
9681 LSY LSYC
9610 LSY LSYC
9611 LSY LSYC
9613 LSY LSYC
(STM1 only) >45 @ 28 MHz >50 @ 29.65 MHz >45 @ 28 MHz >50 @ 40 MHz >45 @ 28 MHz
>50 @ 40 MHz >45 @ 29 MHz N.A.
>50 @ 40 MHz
>50 @ 29.65 MHz
>50 @ 40 MHz
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
>35 @ 14 MHz
>35 @ 14 MHz
N.A.
N.A.
>35 @ 14 MHz
30
19 taps 7 4
1*103 and
Fig. 39. page 110
cochannel STM0 1*103 and 1*106 adj.channel STM1 40 MHz 1*103 and 1*106 adj.channel STM1 30 MHz1*103 and 1*106 adj.channel STM0 14 MHz1*103 and 1*106
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
Fig. 39. page 110
Fig. 39. page 110
N.A.
N.A.
Fig. 39. page 110
Fig. 40. page 110
Fig. 40. page 110
N.A.
Fig. 40. page 110
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
Fig. 40. page 110
N.A.
Fig. 41. page 111
Fig. 41. page 111
N.A.
Fig. 41. page 111
N.A.
N.A.
Fig. 41. page 111
Fig. 41. page 111
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
Fig. 42. page 111
Fig. 42. page 111
N.A.
N.A.
Fig. 42. page 111
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 87 / 542
EQUIPMENT C/I for 1 dB threshold degrad. @ 1x103 [dB] cochannel STM1/STM0 adjacent ch. mono lateral STM1 40MHz adjacent ch. mono lateral STM1 30MHz adjacent ch. mono lateral STM0 14 MHz
9640 LSY LSYC
9647 LSY LSYC
9662 LSY LSYC
9667 LSY LSYC
9674 LSY LSYC
9681 LSY LSYC
9610 LSY LSYC
9611 LSY LSYC
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
50
50
N.A.
50
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
50
N.A.
26
26
26
N.A.
26
26
26
N.A.
26
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
C/I for 1 dB threshold degrad. @ 1x106 [dB] cochannel STM1/STM0 adjacent ch. mono lateral STM1 40MHz adjacent ch. mono lateral STM1 30MHz adjacent ch. mono lateral STM0 14 MHz
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
48
48
N.A.
48
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
48
N.A.
24
24
24
N.A.
24
24
24
N.A.
24
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
10
10
N.A.
N.A.
10
C/I dB for Error Free : cochannel STM1/STM0 BER Curve: STM1
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
Fig. 32. page 105 N.A.
Fig. 32. page 105 Fig. 33. page 106
STM0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 88 / 542
[2]
Characteristics applicable to 64QAM systems The following table points out characteristics applicable to 64QAM systems that are different from those stated in point [1] on page 84: 9640 LSY LSYC 9647 LSY LSYC 64 MLC 5/6 (24,23) 5.29/6 (redund 13.4 %) 3.64.2 GHz 32 dBm 34 dBm 4.45 GHz 32 dBm 34 dBm 6.47.2 GHz 32 dBm 34 dBm 10.711.7 GHz 30 dBm 30 dBm 9667 LSY LSYC 9611 LSY LSYC
EQUIPMENT Modulation: QAM states Coding FEC Redundancy RF channel Transmitter output power Max nominal power Transmitter output power Max available power (overdrive) Minimum Transmitter output power Symbol rate Gross bit rate 10E3 BER Threshold @RX input module Gar. (ETSI point A) 10E6 BER Threshold @RX input module Gar. (ETSI point A) 10E3 BER Threshold @RX input module Gar (ETSI point C) 10E6 BER Threshold @RX input module Gar. (ETSI point C) XPIF @10E6 C/I Lockout C/I Lockin NFD @ 40 MHZ (one side)
15 dBm 30.04 MHz 180.2 Mbit/s 76,7 74,9 74,8 73 76,7 74,9 74,7 72,9 >17 dB < 4 dB > 6 dB >50 dB 76,5 74,7 74,9 73,1 76 74,2 73,9 72,1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 89 / 542
13.2.2 99% power channel bandwidth and Emission Designator ITUR/CEPT Rec. Channel bandwidth [MHz] 29 40 40 40 29.65 40 40 28 14 29.65 14 28 40 40 28 14 99% power channel bandwidth [MHz] 25.49 35.88 25.49 35.88 25.49 25.49 35.88 25.49 8.50 25.49 8.50 25.49 25.49 35.88 25.49 8.50 Emission Designator 29M0D7W 40M0D7W 40M0D7W 40M0D7W 29M6D7W 40M0D7W 40M0D7W 28M0D7W 14M0D7W 29M6D7W 14M0D7W 28M0D7W 40M0D7W 40M0D7W 28M0D7W 14M0D7W
9640LSY / 128QAM155 9640LSY / 64QAM155 9647LSY / 128QAM155 9647LSY / 64QAM155 9662LSY / 128QAM155 9667LSY / 128QAM155 9667LSY / 64QAM155 9674LSY / 128QAM155 9674LSY /128QAM51 9681LSY / 128QAM155 9681LSY / 128QAM51 9610LSY / 128QAM155 9611LSY / 128QAM155 9611LSY / 64QAM155 9613LSY / 128QAM155 9613LSY / 128QAM51
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 90 / 542
Equipment
13.2.3 Power supply characteristics

9640 LSY LSYC 9647 LSY LSYC 9662 LSY LSYC 9667 LSY LSYC 9674 LSY LSYC 9681 LSY LSYC 9610 LSY LSYC 9611 LSY LSYC 9613 LSY LSYC
EQUIPMENT
Input battery source
48 to 60 Vdc
TERMINAL POWER CONSUMPTION (all frequencies) Standard version

POWER CONSUMPT. from battery (W) Without Sp. Div. Without XPIC 1+1 / 2+0 heterofrequency 2+1 / 3+0 3+1 / 4+0 4+1 / 5+0 5+1 / 6+0 6+1 / 7+0 7+1 / 8+0 200 280 360 460 540 620 700 With XPIC 207 290 374 477 561 644 728 With SP. Div. Without XPIC 217 305 393 501 589 677 765 With XPIC 224 315 07 518 10 701 793
Compact version
POWER CONSUMPT. from battery (W) Without Sp. Div. Without XPIC 1+0 1+1 / 2+0 heterofrequency 1+1 HST 100 180 180 187 With XPIC With SP. Div. Without XPIC 108 197 180 204 With XPIC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 91 / 542
13.2.4 Mechanical characteristics

Rack dimensions [mm] 9600LSY (all configurations) Subrack dimen. [mm] 9600LSYC Weight 9600LSY 1+1 Regen. 3+1 Regen. Weight 9600LSYC 1+1 Regen.
(Width x Depth x Height) 600 x 300 x 2200 mm (Width x Depth x Height) 475 x 275 x 490 mm TBD 35 Kg
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 92 / 542
EQUIPMENT
13.3 Transceiver characteristics

[1]
Characteristics applicable fully to 128QAM systems and partially to 64QAM systems Refer to point [2] on page 94 for characteristics of 64QAM systems.
9640 LSY LSYC +15 to +32 9647 LSY LSYC +15 to +32 9662 LSY LSYC +15 to +32 9667 LSY LSYC +15 to +32 9674 LSY LSYC +15 to +32 9681 LSY LSYC +15 to +32 9610 LSY LSYC +15 to +30 9611 LSY LSYC +15 to +30 9613 LSY LSYC +15 to +28
EQUIPMENT Tx output range with ATPC guaranteed. ( A) ( * ) [dBm] Tx output range w/o ATPC (1dB step by SW preset) guaranteed.(A) ( * ) [dB] Max. ATPC Range With STD Amp. [dB] NF guaranteed [dB] NF Typical [dB] IF freq.[MHz] Nominal Received level [dBm] IF Nominal input/ output level [dBm] L.O. freq. stability (p.p.m.) AGC range [dB] AGC response time [dB/sec.] Transmitted spectrum (Typical) (C)
+15 to
+30
+15 to +30
+15 to +30
+15 to +30
+15 to +30
+15 to +30
+15 to +28
+15 to +28
+15 to +27
17
2.3 2.0
17 2.3 2.0
17 2.5 2.2
17 2.5 2.2
17 2.8 2.5
17 2.8 2.5
15 3.0 2.7
15 3.0 2.7
13 3.5 3.2
140 30 5 1 dB 10 > 60 50
STM1 STM0
ETSI normatives Referred to spectrum mask Referred class STM1 Referred class STM0 Spectral lines at symbol rate (dBm)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ETSI EN 300234, EN 301127, EN 301461 ETSI EN 301216 Compliant with the relevant ETS (EN) specification according to the freq. arrangement Compliant with the relevant ETS (EN) specification according to the freq. arrangement
Tx and Rx spurious signals emission
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 93 / 542
EQUIPMENT IF filter selectivity STM1/STM0 Transceiver power consumption [W] (N+1 version , without Space Div.)
9640 LSY LSYC
9647 LSY LSYC
9662 LSY LSYC
9667 LSY LSYC
9674 LSY LSYC
9681 LSY LSYC
9610 LSY LSYC
9611 LSY LSYC
See Fig. 36. page 108
1+1 / 2+0 2+1 / 3+0 3+1 / 4+0 4+1 / 5+0 5+1 / 6+0 6+1 / 7+0 7+1 / 8+0 [2] Characteristics applicable to 64QAM systems
126 189 252 315 378 441 504
The following table points out characteristics applicable to 64QAM systems that are different from those stated in point [1] on page 93: 9640 LSY LSYC 9647 LSY LSYC 17 dB 2 dB 9667 LSY LSYC 9611 LSY LSYC t.b.d t.b.d
EQUIPMENT ATPC down range ATPC overdrive Branching filter RX loss between AC ETSI point Gar. (dB) RX loss between AC ETSI point Typ (dB)
Tchebyshev BW=32MHz @26dB equiripple 6 Cavity 1,7 1,9 1,8 2,0 1,4 1,6 2 2,1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 94 / 542
13.4 Regenerator and Modem characteristics

13.4.1 Modem
[1]
Characteristics applicable fully to 128QAM systems and partially to 64QAM systems Refer to point [2] on page 96 for characteristics of 64QAM systems.
EQUIPMENT Modulation type Coding MLC Error corrector Coding gain Radio scrambler/ descrambler Equivalent roll off factor Gross symbol rate [Mbit/s] STM1 STM0 Intermediate mod . frequency [MHz] IF impedance (all modem ports) IF nominal modulator output level [dBm] IF input/output Return Loss (all modem ports) Shaping filter (Tx side) Shaping filter and equalizer (Rx side) Digital filter Demodulation IF demodulator nominal input level [dBm] Post demodulation filter STM1 STM0 Demodulator bandwidth recovery [MHz] Clock recovery time after IF interruption [msec.] Synchronism recovery [msec.]
128 QAM CROSS 2/3 7/8 2423 MLC 6.5/7 (7.69 % redundancy) TBD
2 7,3 1
0.21 24.458 8.153 140 +/ 50 ppm 75 Ohm
5 +/ 1 dB
25 dB in the band 140 MHz + 15 MHz Raised cosine T/2 equaliser ( 19 taps ) 36 taps coherent 5 (+1 6 dB) Butterworth 9 poles Fig. 37. page 109 Fig. 38. page 109 +/ 0.8 < 100 0.1 Kn gua. = 0.9 ; Kn typ.= 0.4 9 Kn gua. =1 ; Kn typ.= 0. 55 Kn gua. = 1.3 ; Kn typ.= 0.55 Kn gua. = 1.5 ; Kn typ.= 0.65 (6.3 nsec.) (6.3 nsec.) (6.3 nsec.) (6.3 nsec.) see also Fig. 43. page 112 see also Fig. 44. page 113 see also Fig. 45. page 114 see also Fig. 46. page 115
Signature STM1 BER =1*10E4 BER =1*10E6 Signature STM0 BER =1*10E4 BER =1*10E6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 95 / 542
EQUIPMENT
9640 LSY LSYC
9647 LSY LSYC
9662 LSY LSYC
9667 LSY LSYC
9674 LSY LSYC
9681 LSY LSYC
9610 LSY LSYC
9611 LSY LSYC
C/N STM1 [dB] BER =1*10E3 BER =1*10E4 BER =1*10E6 C/N STM0 [dB] BER =1*10E3 BER =1*10E4 BER =1*10E6 RRA+Modem Transit time Absolute delay Interleave block length Carrier recovery (after RF interruption) msec.
24.5 Guar 23.7 Typ 25.2 Guar 24.3 Typ 26.5 Guar 25.5 Typ 24.5 Guar 23.7 Typ 25.2 Guar 24.3 Typ 26..5 Guar 25.5 Typ 56 microsec. 120 symbols 500 (STM1) T.B.D. (STM0)
[2]
Characteristics applicable to 64QAM systems The following table points out characteristics applicable to 64QAM systems that are different from those stated in point [1] on page 95: 9640 LSY LSYC 9647 LSY LSYC 9667 LSY LSYC 9611 LSY LSYC
EQUIPMENT Signature @10E4 Signature @10E6 equivalent Rolloff factor C/N @10E3 C/N @10E4 C/N @10E6
Kn=0.25 (Kn=0.37 guar) ; see also Fig. 48. on page 117 Kn=0.27 (Kn=0.42 guar) ; see also Fig. 47. on page 116 0,33 19.5 dB ( 20.2 dB guar.) 20 dB ( 20.7 dB guar.) 21 dB (22 dB guar.)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 96 / 542
13.4.2 XPIC & Combiner (XPIC STM1 only)

EQUIPMENT
Intermediate frequency [MHz] IF Nominal input [dBm] IF impedance IF input Return loss Post demodulation filter Adaptive equalizer Base Band static delay equalization [ns] XPIF Guar [dB] @ 1x106
140 + 1 5 (+1 6 dB) 75 Ohm 25 dB in the band 140 MHz + 15 MHz Butterworth 9 poles T/2 19 taps 0 to 140 step T/2 17 for symmetrical degradation ( 3 dB less for unbalanced degradation )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 97 / 542
13.4.3 Regenerator
Input/output signal
155.520 Mb/s 4.6 p.p.m. (standard payload ) 155.520 Mb/s 20 p.p.m. (AIS payload ) 271 Electrical Optical 75 Ohm 1V pp 12.7 dB at 78 MHz as vf NRZ+CK 155.520 Mb/s ITUT G.703 (Siemens 1.0/2.3 connector) CMI 75 ohm unbal. 1 Vpp 15 dB from 8 to 240 MHz 12.7 dB at 78 MHz as vf ITUT G.825 ITUT G.958 ITUT G.958 ITUT G.957 (S1.1 type FCPC and SC connectors) 12601360 nm 28 8 8 (max.) ; 15 (min.) ITUT G.825 ITUT G.958 ITUT G.958 192 Managed internally by the System Controller The entire MSOH is not managed and passedthrough 576 Not managed by pass condition From backpanel access area 1.02.3 Siemens connectors 75 Ohm 2048 Kb/s G 703 2.37 V p HDB3
Line Scrambler/ Desc. User interface Impedance Level Cable equalizer Optical input Bit rate
I/O signal elect. Interf. Code Impedance Signal level Return loss Input cable equalizer
Max. input jitter Max. output jitter Jitter transfer function I/O signal optical inter. Operating wavelength. Min. Sensitivity dBm Min. overload dBm Output mean launched power dBm Max. input jitter Max. output jitter Jitter transfer function
DCCr (D1 to D3) bit rate Kbit/s interface DCCm (D4 to D12) bit rate Kbit/s interface Unprotected 2Mbit/s I/O access I/O signal bit rate I/O level Signal Code
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 98 / 542
EQUIPMENT
EQUIPMENT All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
9640 LSY LSYC
9647 LSY LSYC
9662 LSY LSYC
9667 LSY LSYC
9674 LSY LSYC
9681 LSY LSYC
9610 LSY LSYC
9611 LSY LSYC
9613 LSY LSYC
Protected 2Mbit/s I/O access I/O signal bit rate I/O level Signal Code
AIS management Regenerator Tx and/or Rx side 64 Kbit/s channels Tx/Rx Alarms detection/removal [msec].
From Service unit front panel 1.02.3 Siemens connectors 75 Ohm 2048 Kb/s G 703 2.37 V p HDB3
MSAIS (Contains a valid RSOH and an all1 pattern on MSOH and payload in case of LOS,LOF) All 1 Loss Of Frame : 3/1 (24 frames/8 frames) Loss Of Signal : 0.625/0.250 (5 frames/2 frames) Out Of Frame Detection : >1000 ones or zero s consecutively 64 Kbit/s channel in RFCOH 1+1 protected
ATPC channel
13.4.4 Power consumption (Regenerator only)

REGENERATOR POWER CONSUMPTION (W) 9640 LSY LSYC 9647 LSY LSYC 9662 LSY LSYC 9667 LSY LSYC 9674 LSY LSYC 9681 LSY LSYC 9610 LSY LSYC 9611 LSY LSYC 9613 LSY LSYC
1+1/2+0 Hetero 2+1/3+0 Hetero 3+1/4+0 Hetero 4+1/5+0 Hetero 5+1/6+0 Hetero 6+1/7+0 Hetero 7+1/8+0 Hetero Note: Above power consumptions include fans.
74 91 108 145 162 179 196
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 99 / 542
13.5 Branching interfaces

EQUIPMENT 9640 LSY LSYC UDR 40 9647 LSY LSYC UDR 48 9662 LSY LSYC UDR 70 9667 LSY LSYC UDR 70 9674 LSY LSYC UDR 70 9681 LSY LSYC UDR 84 9610 LSY LSYC UDR 100 9611 LSY LSYC UDR 100 9613 LSY LSYC UDR 120
RF feeder interface Tx/Rx Antenna circulator common port input return loss [dB] (C, C)
x 26
13.6 Protections
PROTECTION 9640 LSY LSYC 9647 LSY LSYC 9662 LSY LSYC 9667 LSY LSYC 9674 LSY LSYC 9681 LSY LSYC 9610 LSY LSYC 9611 LSY LSYC 9613 LSY LSYC
Radio Protection Switching (RPS) type
9600LSY: N+1 9600LSYC: 1+1 (no occasional traffic ) 1:1 (it is N+1 used for only 2 channels and includes occasional traffic possibility)
Occasional traffic RPS Switching Method
Optional, available only in N+1 and 1:1
Hitless revertive and not revertive in 1+1 Hitless revertive in N+1

RRA/MODEM Failure RRA/MODEM Missing unit HBER: detection 7 ms ; restore 100 micros LBER: detection 5 ms ; restore 100 micros EW: detection 5 ms ; restore 100 micros
9600LSYC : 9600LSY & 9600LSYC (*) : 1 (from alarm detection) 13 (from alarm detection)
RPS Criteria / Switching Time [ms]
RPS Switching time [msec.] 1+1 N+1 (and 1:1) Transfer time Tx/Rx Static delay equalization bits Max. dynamic recoverable delay bits Regenerator user interface protection
<< 1 bit 0256 ( 1 bit step ) 10 Not available
(*) N+1 protection system can be used also with 9600LSYC version, obviously reduced to only two channels (1:1).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 100 / 542
13.7 Environmental characteristics

13.7.1 General characteristics
EQUIPMENT
Environment: Stationery use EMIEMC Safety Temperature:
Compliant to EN 300 019 13 , EN 300 01923 class 3.2 Compliant to EN 3014891 EN 3014894 EN 55022 Class A Compliant with IEC 60950 add. IV and IEC 215 9600LSY: 5/+55C (with fans) 9600LSYC: 5/+50C (without fans) 5/+55C (with fans) 5 to 95 % compliant with ETS 300 019 class 2.3 compliant with ETS 300 019 class 1.2
Humidity Transportation Storage
13.7.2 Mechanically active substances The following environmental parameters are recommended: Environmental Parameter a) Sand b) Dust (suspension) c) Dust (sedimentation) Value 30 mg/m3 0.2 mg/m3 1.5 mg/ (m2 h)
Overcoming these values could affect Fans Assembled Unit operation. For further information, see para.45.1.1 on page 332.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 101 / 542
13.8 Optical Safety

N.B. This paragraph applies to LHR and LHRC systems only. As far as 1650SMC is concerned, please refer to relevant Technical Documentation (para.C.2.4 on page 529).
13.8.1 Related Units The Optical Safety characteristics and related precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser radiation given herein, are relevant to the optical modules that can be housed on the equipment units with STM1 interfaces: in LHR and LHRC system: RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY units.
13.8.2 Hazard Level classification The HAZARD LEVEL classification of the different optical interfaces of LHRC system is given in Tab. 10. herebelow. The hazard level was assigned in accordance with the requirements of IEC 608251 (1993) and IEC 608252 (1993). Tab. 10. Hazard level classification of different optical interfaces
UNIT/PORT
STM1
OPTICAL INTERFACE
S1.1 (short haul)
HAZARD LEVEL
1
13.8.3 Incorporated laser sources characteristics Output optical interfaces data: the wavelength and the maximum optical power at the output connector of incorporated laser sources is given in para.13.4.3 on page 98.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 102 / 542
13.8.4 Labelling The labels reproduced below are affixed during factory settings, except those (explanatory) concerning the STM1 ports. In this case the labels are placed in a plastic bag and provided together with the optical module. The customer shall affix the label on the fibre protection cover of the involved card, depending on the particular interface of the module (STM1 port). In the following description it is specified when the label shall be affixed by the customer. [1] Standard label for all modules
The label is put on the fibre protection cover of all the involved card (see para.13.8.1 on page 102). According to stated norms, the presence of this label is not mandatory (for hazard level 1). [2] Multilanguage Label Kit The multilanguage label kit, for STM1 ports, is placed in the same plastic bag provided together with the module where explanatory labels (in English language), above mentioned, are put. The multilanguage label kit contains a set of labels that reproduce the same (explanatory) above depicted in the following languages: Italian French Spanish German The customer, to its own discretion, may stick the labels with appropriate language upon the preexisting ones or, in case of STM1 ports, directly on the fibre protection cover of the involved card (see para.13.8.1 on page 102)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 103 / 542
13.8.5 Aperture and fiber connectors The locations of apertures and fibre connectors are reported on topographical drawings of units front view and access cards front view: in para.23.3.4 on page 178 (RRACHANNEL unit) in para.23.3.5 on page 180 (RRASTANDBY unit) 13.8.6 Engineering design features In normal operating conditions, unless intentional manumission, the laser radiation is never accessible. The laser beam is launched in optical fibre through an appropriate connector that totally shuts up the laser radiation. Moreover a plastic cover is fitted upon optical connectors by means of screws. In case of cable fibre break, to minimize exposure times, ALS procedure according to ITUT G.958 Rec. is implemented either on STM1 ports. ALS timing are not longer than maximum specified in G.958. 13.8.7 Safety instruction The safety instructions for proper assembly, maintenance, and safe use including clear warning concerning precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser radiation, are reported in para.A.3 on page 492.
13.9 1650SMC characteristics

Please refer to relevant Technical Documentation (para.C.2.4.2 on page 530).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 104 / 542
9600 LSY STM1

1,E 02
1,E 03
1,E 04
1,E 05
B E R
1,E 06
STM1 TYP STM1 GUAR
1,E 07
1,E 08
1,E 09
1,E 10
1,E 11
x5 x4 x3 x2 x1 x x+1 x+2 x+3 x+4 x+5
PRx (dBm)
Fig. 32. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 105 / 542
1,E 02
1,E 03
1,E 04
1,E 05
B E R
1,E 06
STM GUAR 0 STM TYP 0
1,E 07
1,E 08
1,E 09
1,E 10
1,E 11
x5
x4
x3
x2
x1
x+1
x+2
x+3
x+4
x+5
PRx (dBm)
Fig. 33. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM0)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 106 / 542
9600 LSY STM0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q Fig. 34. STM1 128 QAM typical RF spectrum (measured at point C)
Fig. 35. STM0 128 QAM typical RF spectrum (measured at point C)
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
107 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Fig. 36. STM1/STM0 128 QAM IF RX Filter
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
108 / 542
STM1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. 0
LSY : postdem
filter
10
20
[dB]
30
40
50
60 60 40 20 0 [MHz] 20 40 60
Fig. 37. Post demodulation filter STM1
STM0
0
LSY : postdem
filter
10
20
[dB]
30
40
50
60 20 10 0 [MHz] 10 20
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 38. Post demodulation filter STM0
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 109 / 542
Fig. 39. STM1 /STM0 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for cochannel interference
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 40. STM1 BER 1*103 and1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 40 MHz digital interference
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 110 / 542
Fig. 41. STM1 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 28, 29, 29.65 and 30 MHz digital interference
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 42. STM0 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 14 MHz digital interference
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 111 / 542
Mask for signature shape only

Fs=24.46 MHz ; T= 6.3 ns Typical signature: DF = 25.4 MHz ; Bc = 22.7 dB Guaranteed signature: Kn = 0.9
(Kn = 0.49)
Fig. 43. Typical signature for 128QAM / STM1 capacity @ BER=1 X 10 E4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 112 / 542
STM1/128QAM
BER = 1 x 10 4
STM1/128QAM
BER = 1 x 10 6

Fs=24.46 MHz ; T= 6.3 ns Typical signature: DF = 26 MHz ; Bc = 22 dB Guaranteed signature: Kn = 1.0
(Kn = 0.55)
Fig. 44. Typical signature for 128QAM / STM1 capacity @ BER=1 X 10 E6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 113 / 542
Fs=8.15 MHz ; T= 6.3 ns Typical signature: DF = 8.2 MHz ; Bc = 31 dB Guaranteed signature: Kn = 1.3
(Kn = 0.55)
Fig. 45. Typical signature for 128QAM / STM0 capacity @ BER=1x10e4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 114 / 542
STM0/128QAM
BER = 1 x 10 4
STM0/128QAM
BER = 1 x 10 6
Fs=8.15 MHz ; T= 6.3 ns Typical signature: DF = 8.2 MHz ; Bc = 29.3 dB Guaranteed signature: Kn = 1.5
(Kn = 0.65)
Fig. 46. Typical signature for 128QAM / STM0 capacity @ BER=1x10e6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 115 / 542
STM1/64QAM
BER = 1 x 10 6
10 15 20 dB 25 30 35 40 125 130 135 140 145 150 155

125 40 35 30 dB dB 25 20 15 10
130
135
140
145
150
155
Fig. 47. Typical and guarantee signature for 64QAM / STM1 capacity @ BER=106; =6.3 ns
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 116 / 542
STM1/64QAM
BER = 1 x 10 4
10 15 20 25 dB 30 35 40 125 130 135 140 145 150 155
125 40 35 30 dB 25 20 15 10
130
135
140
145
150
155
Fig. 48. Typical and guarantee signature for 64QAM / STM1 capacity @ BER=104; =6.3 ns
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 117 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
118 / 542
SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATION

This section contains the whole logical and operative information for the equipment provisioning and system configuration, including the setting up of logical/physical connections. SECTION CONTENT Chapter 21 System configurations It describes in detail the different configurations of 9600LSYLHR version taking into account the various peculiar aspects: Station configurations, Radio channel configurations, System configuration for network solutions, Branching configurations, Rack configurations for frequency reuse Chapter 22 Equipment part list and provisioning It gives detailed information regarding the 9600LSYLHR equipments items (P/Ns, equipping rules, labels for remote inventory) and their physical and logical position in the system Chapter 23 Operative information on equipment boards It gives detailed operative information regarding the 9600LSYLHRs unit assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, with the usage description of the access points (connectors, visual indicators, buttons) and hardware setting description. Chapter 24 System cabling It describes the 9600LSYLHR system cabling: location of access points for cabling, types of cables used for internal connections, pointtopoint cabling of internal connections, description of pinout of connectors for external connections. PAGE
121
145
167
205
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 119 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
120 / 542
21 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS 21.1 Foreword

This chapter describes in detail the different configurations of 9600LSYLHR version taking into account the various peculiar aspects, and comprehends the following main paragraphs: para.21.2 herebelow para.21.3 on page 126 para.21.4 on page 134 para.21.5 on page 135 para.21.6 on page 140 Station configurations Radio channel configurations System configuration for network solutions Branching configurations Rack configurations for frequency reuse
As far as Fan subrack configurations are concerned, refer to para.12.4.6 on page 52. The handbook parts that should be read before starting this paragraph are: para.12.2 on page 36 para.12.4 on page 41 Introduction to system configurations Hardware components
21.2 Station configurations

The 9600LSY family allows the radio transmission of both STM1 and STM0 utilizing protected and unprotected heterofrequency configurations N+0, N+1 or 2x (N+1) CCDP type. Several types of configurations are available, allowing to address different network applications . Referred to the maximum rack implementation, the list shows the widest allowed configurations: 7+1 8+0 7+1 8+0 2x(7+1) Terminal regenerator Terminal regenerator Terminal WMSN Terminal WMSN Terminal regenerator or WMSN CCDP in 1 ETSI rack in 1 ETSI rack in 1 ETSI rack in 1 ETSI rack in 2 ETSI racks
The complete list of the possible configurations foreseen for the 9600LSY family is hereafter indicated, subdivided in several blocks: a) Regenerator configuration utilizing copolar branching solution: CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
9600LSY REG. 1+1 9600LSY REG. 2+1 9600LSY REG. 3+1 9600LSY REG. 4+1 9600LSY REG. 5+1 9600LSY REG. 6+1 9600LSY REG. 7+1 9600LSY REG. 2+0 9600LSY REG. 3+0 9600LSY REG. 4+0 9600LSY REG. 5+0 9600LSY REG. 6+0 9600LSY REG. 7+0 9600LSY REG. 8+0
1 RACK 1 NETWORK ELEMENT 1 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNEL (only in N+1) 1 POLARIZATION PER RACK
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 121 / 542
b)
Regenerator configuration utilizing alternatepolar branching solution: AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP
1 RACK 1 NETWORK ELEMENT 1 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNEL (only in N+1) 4 CHANNELS MAX ON H POLARIZATION 4 CHANNELS MAX ON V POLARIZATION
c)
Regenerator configuration utilizing single protection channel, installed into a single rack and with alternatepolar branching solution: 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY
9600LSY REG. 1+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 2+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 3+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 4+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 5+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 6+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 7+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 2+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 3+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 4+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 5+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 6+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 7+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 8+0 FREQUENCY REUSE d)
1 RACK 1 NETWORK ELEMENT 1 PROTECTION CHANNEL 4 CHANNELS MAX ON H POLARIZATION 4 CHANNELS MAX ON V POLARIZATION 4 DIFFERENT FREQUENCIES MAX 8 CHANNELS MAX
Regenerator configuration utilizing double protection, installed into two racks and copolar branching solution: CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
9600LSY REG. 2x(1+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(2+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(3+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(4+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(5+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(6+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(7+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(2+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(3+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(4+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(5+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(6+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(7+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(8+0)
2 RACKS 2 NETWORK ELEMENTS 2 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNELS (only in N+1) SECOND RACK ONLY FOR REUSED CHANNELS 1 POLARIZATION PER RACK 8 CHANNELS MAX PER EACH RACK
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 122 / 542
9600LSY REG. 1+1 9600LSY REG. 2+1 9600LSY REG. 3+1 9600LSY REG. 4+1 9600LSY REG. 5+1 9600LSY REG. 6+1 9600LSY REG. 7+1 9600LSY REG. 2+0 9600LSY REG. 3+0 9600LSY REG. 4+0 9600LSY REG. 5+0 9600LSY REG. 6+0 9600LSY REG. 7+0 9600LSY REG. 8+0
e)
Regenerator configuration utilizing double protection, installed into two racks and alternatepolar branching solution: AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP
9600LSY REG. 2x(1+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(2+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(3+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(4+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(5+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(6+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(7+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(2+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(3+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(4+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(5+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(6+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(7+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(8+0)
2 RACKS 2 NETWORK ELEMENTS 2 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNELs (only in N+1) SECOND RACK ONLY FOR REUSED CHANNELS 2 POLARIZATIONS PER RACK 4 CHANNELS MAX ON H POLARIZATION PER EACH RACK 4 CHANNELS MAX ON V POLARIZATION PER EACH RACK
NOTE: The rack and the subracks have been designed to host up to 10 channels, even if the normal maximum configuration is limited to 8 channels. In fact, the expansion of the systems without traffic interruption is available only for this last maximum configuration. However, it could be possible , for particular customer requirements or utilizing some channel plans, to foresee even the possibility to get 10 channels per rack. A terminal can be configured as a WMSN simply adding a 1650SMC device to the radio regenerator equipment . Each configuration is easily expansible to higher capacities just adding the foreseen expansion kits. In Fig. 49. and Fig. 49. , a view of a 8 channel regenerator terminal and 8 channel WMSN are respectively shown
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 49. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0 regenerator configuration
Fig. 50. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0
WMSN
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 123 / 542
In the next Fig. 51. , the block diagram of a 7+1 regenerator is shown.
RADIO PROTECTION SWITCHING STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 USER INT/RST USER INT/RST USER INT/RST USER INT/RST USER INT/RST USER INT/RST USER INT/RST MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Fig. 51. 9600LSY 7+1 Regenerator configuration Next Fig. 52. shows a block diagram illustrating a Wireless Multiservice Node for 7 x STM1 channels transmitted in only one direction (OS) and configured with radio protection implementing a 7+1 radio configuration.
7X STM1or 140 or 3x45 or 3x34or 63x2 Mb/s
OMSN
TRAF.PORT TRAF.PORT TRAF.PORT TRAF.PORT TRAF.PORT TRAF.PORT TRAF.PORT AGGREG. AGGREG. AGGREG. AGGREG. AGGREG. AGGREG. AGGREG. RST RADIO PROTECTION SWITCHING RST RST RST RST RST RST
REGENERATOR
MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER
Fig. 52. 9600LSY WMSNOS 7x STM1 configuration with radio protection for 7+1 STM1 transmission.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 124 / 542
In the next Fig. 53. a Wireless Multiservice Node (eastwest) two sides configuration (WMSNTS) with four STM1 streams for each direction is presented with possibility to drop/insert each STM1 signal.
Fig. 53. 9600LSY WMSN Two Sides configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 125 / 542
21.3 Radio channel configurations

Channel arrangement The following Fig. 54. shows the configurations supported according to the frequency arrangement.
.....
V (H) H (V)
.....
Alternate channel dualpolarized, up to (7+1) / (8+0) (ACDP operation)
.....
V (H)
H (V)
.....
Cochannel dualpolarized, up to (7+1) / (8+0) (CCDP operation)
Fig. 54. Channel arrangement
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 126 / 542
Frequency Channel assignment according to station layouts In the following the possible station layouts will be analyzed with the relevant evolutions.
Fig. 55. shows an example of basic configurations from which the possible evolutions are depicted in following Fig. 56. thru Fig. 60.
channels 1357 BB
A)
O n e p o la r p e r r a c k (3 + 1)
channels 1234 BB
1 2 3 4
B)
One polar per rack (3 + 1)
channels 13 13 REUSED BB REUSED channels 12 REUSED BB
C)T w o
p o l a r p e r rack
(3 + 1 ) f r e q. R e u s e
12
1 2
D)
Two polar per rack ( 3 +1) f r e q. R e u s e
channels 13 24 BB
1 2
3 4
E )Two
(3 + 1)
polar per rack
Fig. 55. 3+1 terminal basic station layouts
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 127 / 542
Fig. 56. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case A) of previous Fig. 55. on page 127.
channels 1357
channels 1357 1357
reused
BB
BB
One polar per rack
3+1
T w o p o l a r p e r rack (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
channels 1357 2468
channels 1357 1357
reused
channels 2468 2468
reused
BB
BB
BB
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k (7+1 )
T w o p o l a r p e r rack 2* (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
channels 1357 2468 BB
channels 1357 2468
reused
BB
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k 2 * (7+1 ) f r e q. R e u s e
Fig. 56. Terminal station layout: extension starting from A) basic layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 128 / 542
Fig. 57. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case B) of previous Fig. 55. on page 127.
channels 1234
channels 12345678
BB
BB
One polar per rack
3+1
O n e p o l a r p e rr a c k (7+1)
channels 1234 1234
channels 12345678
channels 12345678
reused
BB
reused
BB
BB
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k (7+1) F r e q. R e u s e
O n e p o l a r p e r rack 2 x (7+1) Freq.Reuse
channels 1234 1234
channels 5678 5678
reused
BB
reused
BB
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k 2 * (7+1) f r e q. R e u s e
Fig. 57. Terminal station layout: extension starting from B) basic layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 129 / 542
Fig. 58. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case C) of previous Fig. 55. on page 127.
channels 13 13
channels 1324 1324
reused
BB 3
reused
BB
Two polar per rack (3+1) Freq.Reuse
channels 1357 1357
channels 1324 1324
channels 5768 5768
reused
BB
reused
reused
BB
BB
Two polar per rack (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
Two polar per rack 2* (8+0) Freq.Reuse
channels 1357 1357
channels 2468 2468
reused
BB
reused
BB
Two polar per rack 2* (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
Fig. 58. Terminal station layout: extension starting from C) basic layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 130 / 542
Fig. 59. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case D) of previous Fig. 55. on page 127.
channels channels 12 12 1234 1234
reused
BB
reused
BB
channels 1234 1234
reused
channels 5678 5678
reused
BB
BB
Fig. 59. Terminal station layout: extension starting from D) basic layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 131 / 542
Fig. 60. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case E) of previous Fig. 55. on page 127.
channels 13 24
channels 1324 2413
reused
BB
BB
Two polar per rack (3+1)
channels 1357 2468
channels 1324 2413
channels 5768 6857
reused
reused
BB
BB
BB
Two polar per rack (7+1)
channels 1357 2468
channels 1357 2468
reused reused
BB
BB
Two polar per rack 2* (7+1) Freq.Reuse
Fig. 60. Terminal station layout: extension starting from E) basic layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 132 / 542
Fig. 61. shows an example of 4+0/4+1 EAST/WEST terminal basic configurations.

channels 135 135 24 BB 24
1 2
3 4
A)
T w o p o la r e a s tw e s t p e r r a c k 2*(4 + 1)
reused
channels 135 135 13 13

reused BB
B)
T w o p o la r e a s tw e s t p e r r a c k 2*(4 + 1) f r e q. R e u s e
channels 123 123 12

reused
12 BB
1 2 3
C) T w o
p o la r e a s tw e s t p e r r a c k
reused
2*(4 + 1) f r e q. R e u s e
12345
channels 12345 BB
1 2 3 4 5
D) O n e
p o l a r e a s tw e s t p e r r a c k
2*(4 +1)
Fig. 61. 4+0/4+1 EAST/WEST terminal basic station layouts
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 133 / 542
21.4 System configuration for network solutions

Besides the radio configurations presented previously, the 9600LSY family supplies an answer to various transmission problems supplying particular functional solutions. The purpose of this paragraph is to describe these functionalities giving some simple system block diagrams and/or short comments. Space Diversity All the available configurations in all the frequency bands of 9600LSY family may include the Space Diversity protection. This feature is obtained adding to the system a second receiver connected, through a dedicated branching, to the Space diversity second antenna. This second receiver, exactly equal to the main one, is installed inside the transceiver unit, in the dedicated area just aside the main one. The two IF signals (coming from the main and diversity receivers) are sent to the modem, where are processed by two demodulators and summed by a new designed baseband combiner. To achieve this function, one plugin IF module with A/D converters must be added to the modem unit. Expansion procedure 9600LSY is a fully expansible radio system. It means that, starting from the minimum 1+1 / 2+0 configuration, it is possible to increase the traffic capacity adding to the station the units necessary to increase the number of radio channels up to the maximum allowed by the configuration. The expansion procedure is reported in para.22.3.2.2 on page 156.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 134 / 542
21.5 Branching configurations

The branching for N+0 or N+1 configurations is realized in two different ways to be connected to a single or double polarized antenna (1 or 2 polarizations per rack versions) and can manage up to 8 RF channels. In both cases, Tx and Rx filters and channel circulators are accommodated in two horizontal lines respectively at the bottom side and at the upper side of the transceiver subrack. They are connected to the antenna circulators sited over the top of the rack by means of branching connections installed along one or both rack side walls. Depending on the frequency band, the branching is realized utilizing coaxial connection (4 and 5 GHz bands) or using waveguides (from 6 GHz to 13 GHz). The branchings connected to the space diversity receiver (this function is foreseen in all the bands and for all the configurations) follow the technological choice utilized for the main branching. The utilization of narrow band RF branching filters allows to avoid the use of 3 dB hybrids ( 3dB couplers previously used for CCDP application) in all the frequency plans and for all the frequency spacings including 28 MHz. In all configurations, the connections among transceivers and relevant channeldepending branching units are realized by vertical parallel coaxial cables without any cross connection. This realization permits to simplify the installation operations (see Fig. 62. herebelow). Rx Diversity branching
Rx branching Coaxial interconnections
Branching H or V
Branching V or H
Tx branching
Channel circulator block + RF filter Channel circulator block without RF filter Fig. 62. Schematic diagram of transceiver to branching connections
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 135 / 542
Branching extension without traffic interruption More and more often customers require to expand installed systems without causing traffic interruption. Following this requirement, a particular branching solution has been developed. This solution consists in having all the channel circulators needed for the maximum rack configuration installed in advance, even if , at first, only a few of them are really utilized. Dedicated codes including four circulators have been inserted in the catalogue. These blocks, one code for each frequency band, are usable for all the terminal configurations. The unused circulator port that will be connected to the filter branching in the future when expanding of the system, is closed by a short circuit device. This device consents the signal to flow toward the antenna in transmission side or toward the first active receiver in receiving side. During the expansion operation, the short circuits devices are removed and the branching filters are connected to the open circulator port, with easy and very short operation. In such a way the traffic interruption can be minimized at minimum. Taking in account that operating in TX side the expansion is performed adding the new channels as last respect to the existing ones, this operation could be considered safe from the traffic interruption point of view. In Rx side the new channel are inserted between the antenna circulator and the first existing channels. For this reason removing the short circuit device and leaving open the antenna port can lead to a lack of signal to the following Rx channels until the new filter in installed. Moreover, if in the receiving side the space diversity functionality is present, operating the expansion in separated time on the main receiver branching and on the diversity receiver branching , the traffic interruption can be completely avoid. The circulators blocks are available in the bands from 6 to 13 GHz included. At these frequences, the additional cost due to the presence of all the circulators even not utilized can be supported by the systems, even in case of simple configurations. At 4 and 5 GHz, on the contrary, the cost of the circulators is much heavier. For this reason the described solution is not applied, and the traditional method (addition of the needed circulators at the moment of the expansion) is still utilized. Whatever is the number of working channels present in the rack, the number of the circulator blocks to be used is 4 if the space diversity is not present, and 6 if it is implemented. This rule is valid both with copolar and alternate polar branching solution. Balanced branchings The so called balanced branchings consents to get a constant attenuation of the branching for all the channels relevant to the same terminal. So, also the system gain is constant whatever channel it is referred to. To get this performance the rule that has been followed is to insert the successive transmitters to the first following the first and , on the contrary, to insert the added receiver before the existing ones. The next figures give an exemplification of the balanced branching connections in the two cases of one polarization per rack and two polarization per rack. Solution for branching in 6L band ( 9662LSY) ITUR F. 383 channel plan foresees a frequency distance between the innermost channel of 44.49 MHz. This narrow distance between channels 8 and 1 has obliged to insert, inside the branching in transmission side, a dedicated wideband filter to avoid local interference between said channels that supplies an additional filtering to the residual spectrum power generated by the transmitter 8 or 1 at the frequency of the receiver 1 or 8 . This filter is always installed in the branching, in all configurations (copolar and alternate polar) and in independent way respect to the channels effectively installed in the link. It means that even if channels 8 and 1 are not utilized, the branching contains the filter. In such a way, we are free to install successively the channels 8 and 1 for expansions of the link, without necessity to add the filter and , at last, without causing traffic interruption.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 136 / 542
One polarization per rack branching In Fig. 63. herebelow, the branching version for 8 RF channels arranged in 1 polar per rack configuration is shown. The picture include the space diversity optional branching. MAIN SP.DIV.
SP.DIV.Rx
MAIN Rx BRANCHING
RX 0 TX 0
RX 1 TX 1
RX 2 TX 2
RX 3 TX 3
RX 4 TX 4
RX 5
RX 6 TX 6
RX 7 TX 7
TX 5
Tx BRANCHING
Fig. 63. 1 polar per rack branching version for 8 RF channels The first slot on the left of the transceiver subrack is used for the spare transceiver (TR 0). All the transceivers present in this configuration are connected to the single polarized branching and are housed utilizing the slots in sequence starting from left side. Please note the branching positions utilized for transmitter and receiver filters in the balanced branching solutions.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 137 / 542
Two polarizations per rack branching In Fig. 64. herebelow, the branching version for 8 RF channels arranged in 2 polar per rack configuration is shown. The example here reported includes the space diversity option.
SP.DIV. ANTENNA
MAIN ANTENNA
SP.DIV. Rx BRANCHING
MAIN Rx BRANCHING
RX 0 TX 0
RX 1 TX 1
RX 2 TX 2
RX 3 TX 3
RX 6 TX 6
RX 7 TX 7
RX 8 TX 8
RX 9 TX 9
Tx BRANCHING
Fig. 64. Branching version for 8 RF channels, arranged in 2 polar per rack configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 138 / 542
In Fig. 65. herebelow, a 3+1 configuration, again with 2 polarization per rack, is reported, in this case including the space diversity functionality. Note that the expansion of the system is obtained progressively filling the transceiver subrack (and the branching, as consequence) adding new units starting from the left and right external sides of the subrack.
Diversity Rx Branching
Main Rx branching
RX0
RX1
RX8
RX9
TX0
TX1
TX8
TX9
Tx branching
Fig. 65. Branching version for 3+1 configuration with Space Diversity, arranged in 2 polar per rack version The first slot on the left of the transceiver subrack is reserved to the transceiver utilized for protection (TR0). It can work either on H or V polarization, depending on the RF channel utilized . As a consequence, the branching installed in the left part of the rack can be connected either to the H antenna polarization or the V one. Once that the polarization (H or V) of the left side branching has been chosen, all the units that must be connected to this antenna polarization will be installed on the left side and connected to this branching . The others (connected to V or H polarization) will be installed and connected to the branching located on the right side.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 139 / 542
21.6 Rack configurations for frequency reuse

Frequency reuse technique allows to double the transmission capacity of each radio channel; a certain number of channels is then transmitted at the same frequency of the main one on the second antenna polarization. We can envisage two main different topologies of reused systems: with one spare channel and with two spare channels. a) Reused systems with a single protection channel Terminals with a single protection channel are installed in only one rack . The maximum number of channels is 8 and up to 4 different frequencies can be utilized. Each terminal is identified in the network as a single N.E.. Higher configurations are not allowed. Fig. 66. hereafter reported shows an example of a reused terminal . In the example all the channels are reused and the spare channel, transmitted by the first transceiver installed on the left side of the shelf, is channel 1H. The configuration obviously utilizes double antenna polarization.
TRU
CROSSCORRESPONDENCE OF HV CHANNELS CHANNELS
1 2 3 4 HHHH
4 3 2 1 VVVV
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Tx BRANCHING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 66. 7+1 reused terminal with single protection (ch. 1H)
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 140 / 542
b)
Reused systems with two protection channels Two protection channels are available when a complete 2x(n+1) system is installed in two racks. In this case there will be two n+1 systems , one for each rack, using n+1 frequencies. One spare channel for each rack is present. Maximum number of channels for each polarization is 8 (including the spare channel). A terminal, configured as above, always consists of two independent Network Elements, one for each rack. Two different solutions are available: each rack can be configured with alternate polarization and with only one polarization. If the tworack system is foreseen since the beginning, a solution with only one polarization per rack is recommended. In case of future expansion, in fact, there is no necessity to connect the branchings of the two racks, avoiding heavy mounting operations and long traffic interruptions. However, the with 2PPR solution is also available. Obviously if an 1PPR or 2PPR existing system has to be expanded with reused channels utilizing the second rack, the AP or CP solution, already adopted in the installed system has to be foreseen also in the second rack. In Fig. 67. below, a 7+1 reused terminal with double spare channels, with the 2 polar per rack recommended solution, is shown.
RACK 0 TRU
RACK 1 TRU
RRA/MODEM AND ACCESS AREA (BASEBAND SHELF) Rx BRANCHING CROSSCORRESPONDENCE OF HV CHANNELS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 HHHHHHHH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 VVVVVVVV
CHANNELS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Tx BRANCHING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tx BRANCHING
Fig. 67. 2 x (7+1) reused terminal with double protection (on ch. 1H and 1V) in 1PPR solution In the figure, two other slots are available in each rack for future expansion. The shown terminal layout foresees the side to side rack position, but the back to back solution is also possible.
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 141 / 542
c)
Expansion of a single protection reused system to double protection Fig. 68. herebelow shows the expansion of a single protection reused terminal to a higher configuration. Taking into account the limitation concerning the maximum allowed configuration in case of single protectionsingle rack terminal (7 working channels and 4 different frequencies), the expansion utilizes a second rack . In this case the system is modified into a double protection one. The second spare channel is housed in the second rack (in the shown case on ch. 2H) . The rack utilized for the expansion utilizes the 2PPR configuration used by the first rack. This solution consents to expand a single rack double polarized terminal up to 7+1/8+0 reused configuration. The new added rack will be identified as a second network element .
TRU
TRU
RRA/MODEM AND ACCESS AREA (BASEBAND SHELF) Rx BRANCHING CROSSCORRESPONDENCE OF HV CHANNELS
1 3 5 7 HHHH
7 5 3 1 VVVV
2 4 6 8 HHHH
8 6 4 2 VVVV
CHANNELS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Tx BRANCHING RACK 0
Tx BRANCHING RACK 1
Fig. 68. Expansion from 7+1 single protection to 2 x (7+1) reused terminal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 142 / 542
21.6.1 Interconnections in reused systems The specific connections needed for the terminals equipped for the frequency reuse technique are hereafter described: Local Oscillator Synchronization The two local oscillators connected to the two RF receivers (main and reused) working on each reused frequency must be together synchronized. This function is obtained by a phase lock loop system utilizing a 2 GHz reference signal transferred from the L.O. of the main receiver ( master local oscillator) to the L.O. of the reused receiver (slave local oscillator). This connection is performed by means of a coaxial cable between oscillators and a Frequency Reuse Kit (a special module and associated cabling) inside the Master Oscillator. In case of failure of the main local oscillator or lack of the synchronization signal due to whatever cause , the slave Rx L.O. of the reused channel utilizes its own RF signal , obviously unlocked to the main LO, to feed the Rx down converter and to maintain in service the reused channel. In case of failure of the master LO, The slave one can assume the master functionality and to be utilized as source of the reference signal to be used to feed the signal to the frequency multiplier contained in the main LO and allowing the protection of the master LO . Fig. 69. herebelow shows how the mutual protection between the two LOs can be obtained. MASTER LO SLAVE LO
2GHz oscillator
2GHz oscillator
FR module
Synch. signal coaxial cable
XN multiplier
XN multiplier
RF OUT
RF OUT
Fig. 69. Main / slave LO mutual protection If main and reused channels are located in different racks , cable interconnections between the two racks are needed . The maximum loss acceptable is 10 dB and the cable length is y 7 m . I.F. interconnection cables The XPIC unit, to perform the interference cancellation, must receive the IF signal from both main and reused receiver. For this reason, in addition to the standard cables (used in a nonreused systems), a IF cable for each XPIC unit must be utilized to connect the main receiver to the demodulator of the reused system and vice versa. Two dedicated cable kits, including both the LO and IF connections, are foreseen. They are available with different cable lengths depending on the connection necessity (inside the same rack or between the two racks). Only one kit is needed for a couple of reused channels.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 143 / 542
RF branching interconnection In case of single polarized rack used in two racks terminal, no branching interconnections are needed between the racks, each of them being connected directly and independently to one antenna port. On the contrary, in case of usage of alternate polarization on both racks, the transceivers utilizing the same antenna polarization must be connected to the same branching. It means that the some waveguides or cables (depending on the frequency band) will connect the two racks to send to the two antenna polarization all the H and all the V channels. Following Fig. 70. shows how this is carried out.
RX BRANCHING
RX BRANCHING
TX BRANCHING
TX BRANCHING
RACK 0
RACK 1
Fig. 70. Branching interconnections All the branching configurations do not include passive hybrids. Their utilization has been avoided thanks to the use of narrow channel filters that allows to transmit channels down to a minimum distance of 28 MHz on the same branching .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 144 / 542
22 EQUIPMENT PART LIST AND PROVISIONING 22.1 Introduction

This chapter gives detailed information regarding: the equipments items (P/Ns, equipping rules, labels for remote inventory) their physical and logical position in the system
and is organized as follows: Part list: on page 145
Equipment provisioning on page 152, including: Rack and shelves summary: on page 152 Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves on page 154 General equipping rules on page 154 Channel provisioning/expansion guideline on page 156 Base Band shelf on page 159 Base Band shelf unit layout and equipping rules on page 160 Transceiver shelf on page 165 Transceiver shelf unit layout on page 165 Equipping rules of Transceiver units or substitutive Dummy Plates on page 165 FANS shelf and FANS assembled unit on page 166 FANS shelf equipping rules on page 166 FANS assembled unit equipping rules on page 166
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 145 / 542
22.2 Part list

9600LSYLHR part list is given through the Tab. 11. herebelow, which: N.B. lists all items and their P/N indicates the max quantity envisaged for the item indicates the figure where the position of the item is indicated indicates the table or paragraph where detailed information regarding the equipping rules of the item is given This part list is relevant to the frequencyindependent items. For frequencydependent items please refer to part lists specific for each frequency (i.e. specific chapter listed in Tab. 46. on page 246).
Tab. 11. 9600LSY Part list Common parts (frequency independent) REF [x] is used in other parts of this handbook to refer to the item. For NB see Tab. 12. on page 150 REF NAME (NB) ANV P/N Factory P/N MAX Qty POS EQUIP. RULES
RACK AND TRU [1] [2] [3] ETSI RACK H 2200 ETSI RACK H 2000 TRU SUBRACK CIRCUIT BREAKER 2A 72VDC CIRCUIT BREAKER 4A 72VDC [4] CIRCUIT BREAKER 10A 72VDC CIRCUIT BREAKER 20A 72VDC KIT FUSERBREAKER Tab. 11. continues ... 3DB04656AA 282102003 3DB04657AA 282102004 3DB05652AA 593230046 1AB162710002 001791352 1AB162710003 001791353 1AB162710005 001791355 1AB162710007 001791357 3DB03114AA 299702945 para.23.7.1 page 200 1 1 1
(A) in Fig. 71. page 152
para. 12.4.2 page 41
(B) in Fig. 71. page 152
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 146 / 542
.. continues Tab. 11. REF

NAME (NB)
ANV P/N Factory P/N 3DB02143AA 593230033 3DB02294AA 593230034 3DB03242AA 593230036 3DB03238AA 411200559
MAX Qty
POS
EQUIP. RULES
SUBRACKS [5] [6] SUBRACK 2G LH RT SUBRACK 1 1 (D) in Fig. 71. page 152 (G) in Fig. 71. page 152 (E) , (L) in Fig. 71. page 152 (A) , (B) in Fig. 81. page 166
[7]
FANS SUBRACK H=50
[8]
FANS ASSEMBLED
para. 22.3.5 2 235 page 166
SYSTEM WIRING [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL NO SPACE DIV. CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL WITH SPACE DIV CABLE KIT FOR REUSE (1 RACK) CABLE KIT FOR REUSE (2 RACKS) CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL FOR WMSN 3DB02842AA 299702891 3DB02843AA 299702892 3DB02844AA 299702893 3DB02845AA 299702894 3DB02846AA 299702895 3DB03202AA 299702950 3DB03264AA 299702953 3DB03266AA 299702954 3DB03213AA 299702951 3DB03214AA 299702952 1 8 8 4 8 8 1 1 1 8
p para.24.3 on page 211
[15] FANS UNIT CABLE KIT [16] FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT PLUGS KIT COMMON PART (LSY) PLUGS KIT 1 CHANNEL EXTENSION (LSY) Tab. 11. continues ...
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 147 / 542
.. continues Tab. 11. REF NAME (NB) ANV P/N Factory P/N 3DB02147AA 411200537 3DB02151AA 411200538 3DB02136AA 411200535 3DB05190AA 411200607 3DB02140AA 411200536 3DB00829AA 487210334 3DB04860AA 487210959 3DB03373AA 487210822 3DB02155AA 411200539 3DB02158AA 483200156 3DB02162AA 411200540 1AB151770002 3DB02740AA 411200550 3DB00619AA 478200004 3DB01806AA 478200006 MAX Qty POS EQUIP. RULES
RSA/RRA [17] RRA CHANNEL [18] RRA STANDBY [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] MODEM LH STM1 1WST (128QAM) (NBa) (NBb) MODEM 32/64QAM LH (NBa) (NBc) MODEM LH STM0 0WST (NBa) (NBd) CANCCOMB 128QAM STM1 (NBb) (NBe) CANCCOMB 32/64 (NBc) (NBf) CANCCOMB STM0 (NBd) (NBg) 8 1 8 8 8 16 16 8 1 1 1 1 Tab. 18. pg 163 (D) in Fig. 79. page 160 Tab. 18. pg 163 & Fig. 92. pg 182 (C) in Fig. 79. page 160 (G) in Fig. 79. page 160 Tab. 17. pg 162
[25] SERVICE [26] ADDITIONAL VOICE [27] SYSTEM CONTROLLER [28] FLASH CARD ATA 48MB 40/+85C
(B) in Fig. 79. page 160 (A) in Fig. 79. page 160 Fig. 83. page 172 (H) in Fig. 71. page 152 (E) in Fig. 79. page 160 (F) in Fig. 79. page 160
Tab. 16. pg 161 Tab. 14. pg 161 Tab. 14. pg 161 Tab. 15. pg 161 Tab. 19. pg 163 Tab. 21. pg 164
[29] ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING [30] DC/DC CONVERTER BB 2G LH
1 8
[31] FILTER P.S.U. 5.3/3.4V OPTICAL MODULES [32] [33]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
S1.1 OPTIC.INTERF. FC/PC (NBh) S1.1 OPTIC. INTERF. SC/PC (NBh)
3AL78815AA 474166420 3AL78815AB 474166424
8 8
(C) , (G) in Fig 79 Fig. 79. page 160
Tab. 17. pg 162
Tab. 11. continues ...
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 148 / 542
.. continues Tab. 11. REF

NAME (NB) BRANCHING FRONT PLATE KIT
ANV P/N Factory P/N 3DB03382AA 299702965 3AN49589AA 299701212 3DB03010AA 299702912 3DB03190AA 299702947 3DB03609AA 261202666 3DB04125AA 299722014 3CY07335AA 299702019 3DB03008AA 299702910 3DB03007AA 299702909
MAX Qty
POS
EQUIP. RULES Tab. 27. pg 196
EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES [34] 1 (F) in Fig. 71. page 152 (C) + (D) in Fig. 79. page 160 (E) inFig. 79. page 160 (A) in Fig. 80. page 165 Fig. 104. page 197 (J) in Fig. 71. page 152
[35] DUMMY PLATE W40 (RRA) DUMMY PLATE L40 (DC/DC CONV.)
Tab. 20. pg 164
[36]
8 8 2 1 1 1 1
[37] RT FRONT PLATE KIT [38] COVER [39] KIT LOUDSPEAKER [40] TELEPHONE KIT (DTMF) [41] LSY SYSTEM TOOL KIT [42] LSY MAINTENANCE TOOL KIT
Tab. 23. pg 165 Tab. 24. pg 166 Tab. 22. pg 164
para.42.1 on page 313 para.4 3.2.2 para.43.2.2 on page 318
TRANSCEIVERS [43] xx GHZ TRANSMITTER [44] xx GHZ RECEIVER [45] 96xxLSY L.O [46] TR FREQUENCY REUSE KIT Refer to p lists part specific for each frequency (i.e. specific chapter Tab. 46. listed in Tab 46 on page 246). 8 8 16 8 para.2 3.4 para.23.4 on page 184 Tab. 23. pg 165
SOFTWARE AND SOFTWARE LICENCES: Refer to Operators Handbooks listed in Tab. 81. on page 527 INSTALLATION MATERIALS: Refer to Installation Handbook ref.[C] on page 524 DOCUMENTATION: Refer to para.C.2 on page 522. end of Tab. 11.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 149 / 542
Tab. 12. Notes to Tab. 11. NB a MODEM LH STM1 1WST and MODEM LH STM0 0WST and MODEM 32/64QAM LH in alternative MODEM LH STM1 1WST and CANCCOMB 128QAM STM1 can be used only in conjunction with frequency plans allowing 128QAM STM1 transmission (see Tab. 46. on page 246) MODEM 32/64QAM LH and CANCCOMB 32/64 can be used only in conjunction with frequency plans allowing 64QAM STM1 transmission (see Tab. 46. on page 246) MODEM LH STM0 0WST and CANCCOMB STM0 can be used only in conjunction with frequency plans allowing 128QAM STM0 transmission (see Tab. 46. on page 246) CANCCOMB 128QAM STM1 only with MODEM LH STM1 1WST CANCCOMB 32/64 only with MODEM 32/64QAM LH CANCCOMB STM0 only with MODEM LH STM0 0WST S1.1 OPTIC.INTERF. FC/PC and S1.1 OPTIC. INTERF. SC/PC in alternative
c d e f g h
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 150 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Page left intentionally blank
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
151 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
C J Legend on page 153 22.3.1 Rack and shelves summary
05 REGENERATOR F E H D G A B J C Fig. 71. Rack and shelves layout WMSN
22.3 Equipment provisioning
955.203.292 Q I L
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
152 / 542
Tab. 13. Rack and shelves

POS in Fig. 71. NAME
P/N (REF in Tab. 11. on page 146) [1]
DESCRIPTION
ETSI RACK H 2200 (A) ETSI RACK H 2000 (B) (C) (D) (E) (L) TRU SUBRACK ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING SUBRACK 2G LH FANS SUBRACK H=50 Area for Rx branching (F) BRANCHING FRONT PLATE KIT RT SUBRACK Area for Tx branching 1650SMC KIT LOUDSPEAKER
para.12.4.2 on page 41 For details refer to 9600LSY/LHR Installation Handbook REF.[C] on page 524 para.23.7.1 on page 200 para.23.8 on page 203 para.22.3.3 on page 159 para.22.3.5 on page 166 para.23.5.1 on page 196 para.23.5.2 on page 196 para.22.3.4.1 on page 165 para.23.5.1 on page 196 para.12.4.5 on page 49 para.23.7.2 on page 202
[2] [3] [29] [5] [7] [34] [6] [39]
(G) (H) (I) (J)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 153 / 542
22.3.2 Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves 22.3.2.1 General equipping rules
According to Fig. 72. herebelow and Fig. 73. on page 155: a) b) in Base Band shelf, units SYSCO, SERV, PSF1 and PSF2 are always equipped the number associated to RRA, MD and PSU groups is related to physical (but not necessarily also logical) channel (0 9). The same number identifies the associated TRI
PHYSICAL CHANNEL BASE BAND SHELF TR SHELF
0 1 .... 9 c)
RRA0 RRA1 .... RRA9
MD0 MD1 .... MD9
PSU0 PSU1 .... PSU9
TRI0 TRI1 .... TRI9
only 8 RRA, MD and PSU groups and the associated TRI can be equipped at most. The slot positions that must be used depend on the system configuration; in particular: 1) with single polarization configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups must be equipped in the logical number sequence 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 (see Fig. 74. on page 156). Thus, in these configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups 8 and 9 are never equipped, as depicted in Fig. 72. herebelow;
S Y
S R
R R E R D D S R D D A A A A 3 0 C V 1 2 2 1 3 0 O
R R
R M R M R M R D R D R D D A 5 A 6 A 7 A 4 5 7 4 6 R R M
P S F 1
P S U 0
P S U 1
P S U 2
P S U 3
P S U 4
P S U 5
P S U 6
P S U 7
T R I 0
T R I 1
T R I 2
T R I 3
T R I 4
T R I 5
T R I 6
T R I 7
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 72. Layout of max 8 channels in single polarization configurations
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 154 / 542

R M R M R D R D A 8 A 9 9 8 P S 8 P S 9 P S F 2 U U T I T I R 8 R 9
UNITS NEVER EQUIPPED
2)
with double polarization configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups must be equipped in the sequence 0, 8, .... (see Fig. 75. on page 157, Fig. 76. on page 158 and Fig. 77. on page 158). Thus, in these configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups 4 and 5 are never equipped, as depicted in Fig. 73. herebelow;
S Y
S R
R R R E R D D S R D D A A A A 3 0 C V 1 2 2 1 3 0 O
P S F 1
P S U 0
P S U 1
P S U 2
T R I 0
T R I 1
T R I 2
T R I 3
T I
T I
T R I 6
T R I 7
T R I 8
T R I 9
R 4
R 5
Fig. 73. Layout of max 8 channels in double polarization configurations d) in the unused slots, dummy plates mus be equipped to ensure EMC performance as well as equipment correct ventilation;
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 155 / 542

R M R M P S 3 P S 4 P S 5 U U U
R M R M R D R D R D A 5 A 6 A 4 5 4 6
R M R D A 7 7
R M R M R D R D A 8 A 9 9 8
P S U 6
P S U 7
P S U 8
P S U 9
P S F 2
UNITS NEVER EQUIPPED
22.3.2.2 Channel provisioning/expansion guideline 9600 LSY is a fully expansible radio system. It means that, starting from the minimum 1+1 / 2+0 configuration, it is possible to increase the traffic capacity adding to the station the units necessary to increase the number of radio channels up to the maximum allowed by the configuration. Hereafter the expansion procedure is reported with the help of some figures illustrating the slots to be used to house the added transceivers inside the mechanical assembly. Please, keep in mind that for the RRA/modem units the same procedure is still valid; it means that the Base Band shelfs slots corresponding to those utilized for the transceiver will host the associated RRA/modem units. In this way the connections between transceivers and relevant modem units is realized by vertical parallel coaxial cables, without cable crossconnections. a) If the branching unit utilizes a single polarization, the transceivers and the branching unit will be added using the slots starting from left and going toward the right side of the subrack, as shown in the next Fig. 74. The maximum channel number depends on the channel plan. In every case the maximum number of transceiver that can be housed in the subrack is 8. The slot used for the protection transceiver (slot 1) is fixed and it is the first on the left of the subrack. The example reported in the figure is limited to 4 channels. 1+1/2+0 configuration expansion to 2+1/3+0 expansion to 3+1/4+0
H (V)
Fig. 74. Single polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 156 / 542
b)
If the branching unit utilizes two antenna polarizations , the transceivers and the branching unit will be added installing them stating from the side walls and filling the subrack going toward the subrack centre, in position left or right depending on the polarization of each transceiver, as shown in the next figure. The slot used for the protection transceiver (slot 1) is fixed and it is the first on the left of the subrack. So, the antenna polarization of the radio channel used for protection (H or V) defines which branching (H or V) will be installed at the left side of the rack. For the above reason, it is important to keep in mind that H or V positions are not strictly associated to the left or right side of the subrack. The maximum channel number depends on the channel plan. The example reported in Fig. 75. is limited to 4 channels. It refers to a system with spare channel on H antenna polarization and, consequently, with transceivers and branching connected to H polarization on the left side of the subrack. 1+1/2+0 configuration expansion to 2+1/3+0 (adding 1 RT on V pol) expansion to 3+1/4+0 (adding 1 RT on H pol)
1 H H 2 1 V
2 V
1 H
4 V
2 V
1 H
5 H
2 4 V V
2 1
4 1
4 5
Fig. 75. Two polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with the H channels on the left side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 157 / 542
c)
The next Fig. 76. shows the other possibility, in which the spare channel (2) utilizes the V polarization and, consequently, the transceivers and branching are connected to V polarization and are installed on the left side of the subrack. 1+1/2+0 configuration (1 RT on H pol and 1 RT on V pol) expansion to 2+1/3+0 (adding 1 RT on V pol) expansion to 3+1/4+0 (adding 1 RT on V pol)
2 V
3 H
2 V
4 V
3 H
2 V
4 V
6 V
3 H
H V
2 3
2 3
2 3
Fig. 76. 2 polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with V channel on the left side The above figure shows only two of the possible expansions that depend on the mixing of (H) and (V) transceivers that must be utilized. d) The next Fig. 77. gives an example of the installation of the units in case of frequency reuse technique utilization in a 7+1 protected terminal. At first, the terminal utilizes the first 4 channels (with channel 4 V as spare channel). The successive expansion of the system is performed adding the channels working on the same frequencies but transmitted on the opposite antenna polarization. 3+1/4+0 configuration 7+1/8+0 configuration
4 V
2 V
3 H
1 H
4 V 1
2 V
1 3 V V 2
4 2 H H 3
3 1 H H 4
H V 1
2 3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 77. Expansion procedure with reused channels
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 158 / 542
22.3.3 Base Band shelf The following Fig. 78. shows the boardunequipped shelf layout.
SUBD CONNECTORS
2MB WST CONNECTORS
ACCESS AREA
BOARD EQUIPMENT AREA
Fig. 78. Unequipped Base Band shelf layout The board equipment area is described in para.22.3.3.1 on page 160. The access area is described in: para.24.2.2 on page 206 as far as SUBD connector area is concerned para.24.2.3 on page 208 as far as 2Mbit/s WST connector area is concerned
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 159 / 542
22.3.3.1 Base Band shelf unit layout and equipping rules Please refer to para.22.3.2 on page 154, for Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves
2 3
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
S Y S C O A
S E R V
R R A 0 C
R M R D A 0 1
M D 1
R M R D A 2 2
R M R D A 3 3
R M R D A 4 4
R M R D A 5 5
R R A 6
M D 6
R M R D A 7 7
R M R D A 8 8
R M R D A 9 9
B P S F 1 F
G P S U 0 E
C P S U 1 E 27
D P S U 2 E 28
C P S U 3 E 29
C P S U 4 E 30
C P S U 5 E 31
C P S U 6 E 32
C P S U 7 E 33
C P S U 8 E
C P S U 9 E 35
D P S F 2 F 36
24 25
26
34
Fig. 79. Base Band shelf board equipment (slot numbering and board type and numbering) For: slot (A) equipment, refer to para.22.3.3.1.1 on page 161 slot (B) equipment, refer to para.22.3.3.1.3 on page 161 slots (C) + (G) + (D) + (E) equipment, refer to para.22.3.3.1.4 on page 161 slot (F) equipment, refer to para.22.3.3.1.5 on page 164.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 160 / 542
22.3.3.1.1 System Controller card Tab. 14. System Controller card equipping rules
SLOT IN BASEBAND SHELF (see Fig. 79. on page 160) The SYStem COntroller (SYSCO) card contains the subunit ESCON (in its turn, housing the equipment configuration data memory device FLASH CARD) and the external connectors for the QB3 and F interfaces.
(A)
UNIT SYSCO FLASH CARD
P/N (REF in Tab. 11. on page 146) [27] [28]
Label for Remote Inventory SYSCO MEMDEV
N.B.
Refer to para.23.3.2 on page 172 for the unit physical views and operative information.
22.3.3.1.2 Additional Housekeeping unit Tab. 15. Additional Housekeeping unit equipping rules POSITION IN RACK (see Fig. 71. on page 152) The Additional Housekeeping unit is an optional module to expand the number of housekeeping (up to 40 input contacts in all).
(C)
UNIT ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING
Label for Remote Inventory HKDEV
N.B.
Refer to para.23.8 on page 203 for the unit physical views and operative information.
22.3.3.1.3 Service card Tab. 16. Service card equipping rules SLOT IN BASEBAND SHELF (see Fig. 79. on page 160) The SERVice (SERV) card contains the auxiliary AUX/EOW service channels, the protection of the WST channels and the service channels, the switch logic of the RPS protection (used only in case of 1+1 and N+1 configurations) and it can host (as option) a module (TPHDEV), adding a voice channel.
(B)
UNIT SERV
Label for Remote Inventory SERV TPHDEV
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ADDITIONAL VOICE N.B.
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 161 / 542
22.3.3.1.4 RRA, MD and PSU card groups and dummy plates a) RRA
Tab. 17. RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY cards equipping rules SLOT IN BASEBAND SHELF (see Fig. 79. on page 160) Read carefully General equipping rules on page 154. The RRA units are connected to the transmission line through one optical or electrical interface. The electrical interface is placed directly on RRA units, instead the optical one on a optical module placed inside the RRA unit itself (a drawer into the front panel). Slot 3 of Base Band shelf can be used as a standby radio channel in N+1 and 1+1 configurations; otherwise it is used as a main radio channel in N+0 configuration. In N+1 and 1+1 configurations, this slot can be equipped by a RRAS (RRA standby) unit and only in N+1, the same interface previously described for the RRA (optical) can be provided, if extra traffic is actuated; in N+0 configuration, this slot can be equipped by a RRA unit, in this case the optical interface module can be provided. Just one physical RRA unit exists both for transmission of STM1 signal or subSTM1 one. The same thing is applied to the RRAS unit. UNIT RRA CHANNEL all slots (C) RRA STANDBY slot (G) only S1.1 OPTIC. INTER.FC/PC S1.1 OPTIC. INTER.SC/PC N.B. P/N (REF in Tab. 11. on page 146) [17] [18] [32] [33] Label for Remote Inventory RRA RRAS IS1.1 IS1.1
(C) and (G)
For the unit physical views and operative information, refer to para.23.3.4 on page 178 for the RRACHANNEL, and to para.23.3.5 on page 180 for the RRASTANDBY.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 162 / 542
b)
MD
Tab. 18. Modem cards equipping rules

SLOT IN BASEBAND SHELF (see Fig. 79. on page 160) Read carefully General equipping rules on page 154. The MoDem (MD) card types contain the modulator and demodulator function units. 128QAM and 64QAM are supported according to Tab. 2. on page 30. For each type of MD (supporting STM1 or STM0 signal), an IF module is used in case of space diversity configuration as daughter board of the MD board. The same physical module is used also in case of frequency reuse configuration, always as a daughter board, but only for MD supporting STM1 signals. In case of space diversity with frequency reuse configuration with MD supporting STM1 signals, two of these daughter boards are used.
(D)
UNIT MODEM LHSTM11WST

CANCCOMB 128QAM STM1
P/N (REF in Tab. 11. on page 146) [21] [22] [19] [24] [20] [23]
Label for Remote Inventory RRAMD1280W0 IF1WCX RRAMD1281W1 IF0WC MD3264W1 IF3264CX
MODEM LHSTM00WST CANCCOMB STM0 MODEM 32/64QAM LH CANCCOMB 32/64 N.B. c) PSU
Tab. 19. PSU cards equipping rules SLOT IN BASEBAND SHELF (see Fig. 79. on page 160) Read carefully General equipping rules on page 154. The PSU boards power the Base Band shelf. Usually PSU units are equipped in pairs (PSU0 + PSU1, PSU2 + PSU3, etc.), because each PSU pair gives power supply in protected mode to a pair of MD and RRA, that are so protected from the failure of a single PSU: PSU0 + PSU1 PSU2 + PSU3 PSU4 + PSU5 PSU6 + PSU7 PSU8 + PSU9 UNIT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(E)
(MD0+RRA0) + (MD1+RRA1) (MD2+RRA2) + (MD3+RRA3) (MD4+RRA4) + (MD5+RRA5) (MD6+RRA6) + (MD7+RRA7) (MD8+RRA8) + (MD9+RRA9) P/N (REF in Tab. 11. on page 146) [30] Label for Remote Inventory PSL4860
DC/DC CONVERTER BB 2G LH N.B.
Refer to para.23.3.1 on page 171 for the unit physical views and operative information. 05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 163 / 542
ED
d)
Dummy plates
Tab. 20. Dummy plates for RRAModem and PSU equipping rules SLOT IN BASEBAND SHELF (see Fig. 79. on page 160) When a group of RRA, MD and PSU is not equipped, the corresponding slots must be closed by dummy plates, to ensure EMC performance as well as equipment correct ventilation. UNIT P/N (REF in Tab. 11. on page 146) Label for Remote Inventory
(C) + (D) (E)
DUMMY PLATE W40 (RRA + MD) DUMMY PLATE L40 (DC/DC CONV.)
[35]
[36]
22.3.3.1.5 PSF cards Tab. 21. PSF cards equipping rules SLOT IN BASEBAND SHELF (see Fig. 79. on page 160) The PSF boards contain the filter for the PSU boards and the DC/DC converter to supply System Controller and SERVICE boards; the two PSF boards are in protection between them.
(F)
UNIT FILTER P.S.U. 5.3/3.4V
Label for Remote Inventory PSF
N.B.
22.3.3.1.6 Kit Loudspeaker Tab. 22. Kit Loudspeaker equipping rules POSITION IN RACK (see Fig. 71. on page 152) The Kit Loudspeaker is an optional unit to be inserted inside TRU. The kit includes the cable for its connection to the system.
(J)
UNIT KIT LOUDSPEAKER
Label for Remote Inventory
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 164 / 542
22.3.4 Transceiver shelf 22.3.4.1 Transceiver shelf unit layout

The Transceiver shelf unit layout is depicted in the following Fig. 80. herebelow: T R I 0 T R I 1 T R I 2 T R I 3 T R I 4 T R I 5 T R I 6 T R I 7 T R I 8 T R I 9
10
Fig. 80. Transceiver shelf equipment (slot numbering and board types and numbering) 22.3.4.2 Equipping rules of Transceiver units or substitutive Dummy Plates Tab. 23. Transceiver units and substitutive dummy plates equipping rules SLOT IN TRANSCEIVER SHELF (see Fig. 80. on page 165)
TRANSCEIVER
Read carefully General equipping rules on page 154. Each Transceiver is an assembly made up by components that, from item provisioning and maintenance points of view, are independent items that are equipped, for types and number, according to the system configuration, as shown herebelow: DIVERSITY N N Y Y N.B. FREQUENCY REUSE N Y N Y COMPONENTS TYPES AND NUMBER TRI 1 1 1 1 LO 2 2 2 2 R 1 1 2 2 FR KIT 0 1 or 0 0 1 or 0
(A)
Refer to para.23.4.1 on page 185 for details. For the P/Ns and Remote Inventory Labels of TRI units and modules, please refer to the specific chapter between those listed in Tab. 46. on page 246.
DUMMY PLATE
When a transceiver is not equipped, the corresponding slot is closed by a dummy plate. UNIT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RT FRONT PLATE KIT
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 165 / 542
22.3.5 FANS shelf and FANS assembled units 22.3.5.1 FANS shelf equipping rules
Presently, there can be either one or two FAN shelves, see pos. (E) and (L) in Fig. 71. on page 152: FAN shelf pos. (E) is mandatory in all configurations FAN shelf pos. (L) is mandatory whenever the 1650SMC shelf is equipped.
22.3.5.2 FANS assembled unit equipping rules The FANS SHELF contains one or two independent FANS ASSEMBLED units, as depicted in following Fig. 81. : FANSL A 1 FANSL B 2
Fig. 81. Fan shelf (slot numbering and board types)
Tab. 24. Fans unit & cover equipping rules SLOT IN FAN SHELF (see Fig. 81. on this page) Each fan unit contains four fans, a DC/DC converter and an internal control unit. When one of the FANS ASSEMBLED is not equipped, the corresponding slot must be closed by COVER to guarantee correct ventilation.
(A) (B)
UNIT FANS ASSEMBLED COVER
N.B.
Refer to para.23.6 on page 197 for the unit physical views and operative information.
Rules and indications for fan utilization associated to different temperature ranges, terminal configurations and eventual ADM 1650 presence are hereafter reported: For temperature range 5C to +50C (standard temperature range): for radio regenerator cooling: for 1+1/2+0 copolar and heteropolar configurations: no fans are needed. for 2+1 and higher copolar and heteropolar configurations : one subrack with two fan plugins. for ADM cooling (if present): always one fan subrack with one fan plugin, installed just below the ADM (FANSL B, on the rack right side).
For temperature range 5C to +55C (extended temperature range): for radio regenerator cooling: all configurations : one subrack with two fan plugins. for ADM cooling (if present): always one fan subrack with one fan plugin, installed just below the ADM (FANSL B, on the rack right side).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 166 / 542

Label for Remote Inventory FANSL
23 OPERATIVE INFORMATION ON EQUIPMENT BOARDS

Please refer to chapter 24 on page 205 detailed operative information regarding: system cabling pinout description of connectors for Customer usage
23.1 Introduction
This chapter gives detailed operative information regarding: the unit assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, with the usage description of the access points (connectors, visual indicators, buttons) hardware setting description
for all installation, commissioning and maintenance purposes, and is organized as follows: Cautions to avoid equipment damage on page 168
Boards of BaseBand shelf on page 171, including: PSU and PSF units operative information on page 171 SYSTEM CONTROLLER and FLASH CARD unit operative information on page 172 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit operative information on page 176 RRACHANNEL unit operative information on page 178 RRASTANDBY unit operative information on page 180 MODEM unit operative information on page 181 TRANSCEIVER unit operative information on page 184
Branching on page 196, including: Branching drawings and BranchingTransceivers connections on page 196 Branching Front Plate Kit (Rx branching area) on page 196 FANS SHELF and FANS assembled unit operative information Boards of TRU shelf Top Rack Unit operative information Kit Loudspeaker operative information Additional Housekeeping unit operative information on page 197
on page 200, including: on page 200 on page 202 on page 203
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 167 / 542
23.2 Cautions to avoid equipment damage

a) Antistatic protection device kit When operating on boards out of the equipment shelf, this kit (see Fig. 200. on page 501) must be always warn and its termination must be connected to a grounded structure, to avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges. b) Boards extraction/insertion levers Most equipments boards are provided with levers to facilitate their extraction and insertion from/into the shelf. In turn, such levers are provided with screws that: must be loosened, before operating on levers for the unit extraction from the shelf; this prevents breakage of levers must be tightened, after the unit insertion in the shelf; this ensures the equipment EMIEMC performance. Please refer to pages 169170 for more information [ points h ) , i ) and j ) ]. c) Unit assemblies and transceiver subassemblies As a general rule, each unit assembly (main board + baby board(s) + front plate) must be considered an unique item from the service and maintenance points of view. Such an assembly is supplied by Alcatel as it is and must never be disassembled. Exceptions to this general rule are represented by transceiver assemblies each of which is composed by the following subassemblies (for more details, please refer to para.23.4 on page 184): TRI (Transmitter) LO (Local Oscillator module) R (Receiver module) FR KIT (Frequency Reuse kit) In this case the general rule becomes: each transceiver subassembly must be considered an unique item from the service and maintenance points of view. Such a subassembly is supplied by Alcatel as it is and must never be disassembled. d) Screw fixing All boards and dummy plates are provided with screws that, in normal operation conditions, must be always tightened onto the shelf to avoid their detachment and to ensure the equipment EMIEMC performance and correct ventilation. The screw tightening torque for fixing the units to the subrack must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) " 10 %
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 168 / 542
e)
PSU and Transceiver insertion/extraction Before to extract or insert a PSU or Transceiver unit from/into the shelf, verify that its ON/OFF switch is in O position.
f)
Craft Terminal connection To connect the CT cable (at IDUs F interface and/or PC side): verify that the PC is switched off (if switched on, close all running applications, then switch off it) connect suitable cable to IDUs F interface and PC side now the PC can be safely switched on.
g)
Craft Terminal disconnection To disconnect the CT cable (at IDUs F interface and/or PC side): perform the logoff, exiting from the CT applications close all other running applications, if any switch off the PC now the cable can be safely disconnected.
h)
Right operations for board insertion in the subrack
1) Open the levers before to plug the unit.
2) To mate the plastic body of the connectors: push on the front panel, balancing the strain without push on the levers.
3) Push on the levers in order to finish the connector mating.
4) Fix the unit to the subrack by means of screws (max tightening torque specified in point d ) on page 168
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 169 / 542
i)
Forbidden operations for board insertion in the subrack
NO
Dont push just on one lever only.
NO
Dont force the units.
NO
Avoid impact during the units handling.
j)
To populate an empty subrack 1 ) insert one unit at a time 2 ) fix the unit to the subrack by means of screws, before to insert another unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 170 / 542
23.3 Boards of BaseBand shelf

23.3.1 PSU and PSF units operative information
Refer to: para.12.4.4.9 on page 48 for a brief functional description of the PSU unit point c ) on page 163 for physical composition and P/Ns of the PSU unit para.12.4.4.10 on page 48 for a brief functional description of the PSF unit para.22.3.3.1.5 on page 164 for physical composition and P/Ns of the PSF unit chapter 52, and in particular para.52.2 on page 426, for the detailed functional description of the units
(1) ON/OFF switch
(3) Input Power Supply

A1
(2) PSU switched on (green)
(4) PSF powered on (green) PSF
PSU 23.3.1.1 Power supply connector pinout (on PSF unit) Pins A1 A2 A3 +BATT GND BATT Meaning +BATTERY Ground Battery
Fig. 82. PSU and PSF units front view 23.3.1.2 Front connector on PSF unit usage Refer to para.24.4 on page 218. 23.3.1.3 Hardware settings None
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 171 / 542
A3
23.3.2 SYSTEM CONTROLLER and FLASH CARD unit operative information Refer to: para.12.4.4.7 on page 47 for a brief functional description of the unit para.22.3.3.1.1 on page 161 for physical composition and P/Ns. chapter 52, and in particular: para.52.3.2 on page 435, for the detailed functional description of the SYSCO unit para.52.3.3 on page 441, for the detailed functional description of the Flash Card The following information is given hereafter: Fig. 83. herebelow shows the unit assembly view Fig. 84. herebelow shows the FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction Fig. 85. on page 173 depicts the unit front view : for the front connectors usage, please refer to para.24.8.6 on page 235. the usage of the pushbuttons Lamp Test (7) and Reset (9), is explained in para.24.8.6 on page 235 and section MAINTENANCE. the usage of the other pushbuttons and leds is explained in section MAINTENANCE.
para.23.3.2.2 on page 174 describes the hardware setting options dependent on SWP and system configuration. Subunit ESCON
J1 J3 J2 M1 M2 M3 System Controller main board (ESC)
Flash Card
Fig. 83. System Controller assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view
TOP SIDE
INSERTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 84. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 172 / 542
(9) Reset Button J1 I/O for QB3 10 BASE 2 (2 BNCs in parallel)
J2
J3
M1
I/O RJ45 for QB3 10 BASE T and DEBUGN or local EC debug
I/O RJ45 for CAN 0 BB and local EC debug
M2
M3
F interface for ECT
(1) OR of all URGENT alarms (red) (2) OR of all NOT URGENT alarms (red) (3) ATTENDED alarm (yellow) (4) OR of all ABNORMAL conditions (yellow) (5) OR of all INDICATIVE alarms (yellow) (7) Lamp Test Pushbutton (8) Alarm storing Pushbutton (Attended)
(6) bicolor led: red on: Card failure alarm green flashing: SW download in progress (internal or toward other boards) off: normal condition Fig. 85. System Controller front view
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 173 / 542
23.3.2.1 Lamp Test & Reset buttons With reference to Fig. 85. on page 173, the pushbuttons Lamp Test (7) and Reset (9) allow the following operations: Lamp test X X X X Reset Effect System lamp test of all the leds in all units of Baseband shelf (Transceivers not affected) EC (Equipment Controller) reset RC (Radio Controller) reset N.B. to perform this operation, hold Lamp Test pushed and contemporarily push Reset
For the meaning of EC and RC, make reference to para.52.3.1.1.2 on page 430.
23.3.2.2 Hardware settings Refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the System Controller unit for the TC and DipSwitch physical position on the board (refer to handbook 9600LSY Hardware setting documents REF.[K] on page 527). In the following, only the DipSwitch banks associated to software configurations are taken into consideration (for other DipSwitch banks and TC meaning, please refer to the above cited documents). a) on subunit ESCON (see Fig. 83. on page 172) : a Dipswitch bank allows to clear (erase) the System Configuration memory. The use of this dipswitch bank is explained in the 9600LSY Operators Handbook. ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) These dipswitches must be usually in OFF position. If unproperly set, these dipswitches will reset the FLASH CARD content, and you will loose all the software herein contained (programs and system configuration data) b) on main board ESC (see Fig. 83. on page 172) : 1) Equipment Type: EQTYPE field is fixed to 0110 (Dec. 6) to indicate Long Haul system (there are no Dipswitch banks to set).
continues..
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 174 / 542
N.B.
Before using Tab. 25. or Tab. 26. for configuration setting/change purposes, verify that the values correspond to those stated in the CT Operators Handbook associated to the Software Package (SWP) running on your system. In the case of conflict between the values stated in this manual and those indicated in CT Operators Handbook, these latter will prevail. 2) BKPV (BacKPanel Version) field according to following Tab. 25.
Tab. 25. ESC DipSwitch Bank I4 setting BKPV I4 switches 3 0 0 0 2 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 2 LHRC Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Compact LHR Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator LHRR Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Repeater Dec Description
DipSwitch I4 /45678 must be set to 1 (Open or Off). 3) SLOTID field for LHR according to following Tab. 26.
Tab. 26. ESC DipSwitch Bank I1 setting SLOTID I1 switches 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Dec 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Equip. Type
Subrack BB
Subrack TRI
STM0/ STM1 STM0 STM1 STM0 STM1 STM0 STM1 STM0 STM1 STM0 STM1 STM0 STM1
Space Diversity
SRTRI 1HET SRTRI1HET 1+1 HET SRBB 11 SRBB11 SRTRISD1HET SRTRISD 1HET
SD SD
SRTRI N SRTRIN N+1 SRBBN1 SRBB N1 SRTRISD N SRTRISDN
SD SD
SRTRIN SRTRI N N+0 SRBB N0 SRBBN0 SRTRISD N SRTRISDN
SD SD
DipSwitch I1 /78 must be set to 1 (Open or Off).
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 175 / 542
23.3.3 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit operative information Refer to: para.12.4.4.6 on page 47 for a brief functional description of the unit para.22.3.3.1.3 on page 161 for physical composition and P/Ns. chapter 52, and in particular para.52.4.8 on page 464, for the detailed functional description of the unit The following information is given hereafter: Fig. 86. herebelow shows the unit assembly view Fig. 87. on page 177 depicts the unit front view : N.B. for the front connectors (J1) (J2) usage, please refer to para.24.8.4 on page 230. the usage of the front connector (J5) and leds in LINE O.W. area is explained in para.42.2 on page 315. the usage of leds in LINE TPH area is explained in para.42.3 on page 316. the led (3) and pushbutton (4) are used only if the KIT LOUDSPEAKER is equipped (see para.23.7.2 on page 202) the other indications are selfexplaining. For hardware setting options, please refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the Service unit for the TC and DipSwitch physical position on the board and their meaning (refer to handbook 9600LSY Hardware setting documents REF.[K] on page 527). Optional subunit ADDITIONAL VOICE (TPHDEV)
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 SMA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 86. Service unit assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 176 / 542
J1 PROTECTED WST 2 Mbit/s N.B.1: in case of unprotected WST, these connectors must not be used, but those on Base Band shelf access panel (see Fig. 110. on page 208)
J2
J3 NOT OPERATIVE IN CURRENT RELEASE J4 (1) Indication of the No of the Rx protected channel (1 digit display) N.B.2 (2) Manual operation of N+1 logic (yellow led) N.B.2 J5 Telephone jack N.B.3
(6) line busy (yellow) (7) line free (green) (8) line busy (yellow) (*) (9) line free (green) (*) operative only with TPHDEV equipped
(3) Loudspeaker activated (green) (4) Pushbutton for loudspeaker activation/deactivation
N.B.3
(*)
(10) Card failure alarm (red)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.2 N.B.3
For details, refer to Tab. 60. on page 338. For usage, refer to para.42.2 on page 315 and para.42.3 on page 316. Fig. 87. Service unit front view
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 177 / 542
23.3.4 RRACHANNEL unit operative information Refer to: para.12.4.4.3 on page 46 for a brief functional description of the unit point a ) on page 162 for physical composition and P/Ns. chapter 52, and in particular: para.52.4.4 on page 454, for the detailed functional description of the unit para.52.4.6 on page 459, for the detailed functional description of the optical module The following Fig. 88. shows: the protection cap (fixed by a screw) that must be removed to access the unit front panel, and must be repositioned after having connected the cables the drawer (fixed by two screws) that must be removed only in case an optional a STM1 optical module has to be equipped.
J1 J2
Protection cap
Drawer extractable for the insertion of a STM1 optical module Fig. 88. RRACHANNEL assembly view and front connector numbering 23.3.4.1 Front connectors usage Refer to para.24.8.2 on page 230. Other information in Fig. 89. on page 179.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
23.3.4.2 Hardware settings None
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 178 / 542
STM1 ELECTR. INTRF.
J1 yellow marker OUTPUT green marker J2 INPUT
Hole for drawer extraction (present also in optical modules)
ALS restart key SC/PC
OPTIONAL STM1 OPTICAL MODULE
INPUT OUTPUT
ALS restart key FC/PC (1) Card failure alarm (red)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 89. RRACHANNEL unit front view
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 179 / 542
23.3.5 RRASTANDBY unit operative information Refer to: para.12.4.4.4 on page 46 for a brief functional description of the unit point a ) on page 162 for physical composition and P/Ns. chapter 52, and in particular para.52.4.5 on page 456, for the detailed functional description of the unit As far as the protection cap and extractable drawer are concerned, the assembly view is as in Fig. 88. on page 178. The front view is as in Fig. 89. on page 179, with a difference in the lower part, where there is the display shown in Fig. 90. herebelow:
Indication of the No of the Tx protected channel (1 digit display) N.B.
Tx
N.B.
For details, refer to Tab. 61. on page 338. Fig. 90. RRASTANDBY unit front view (particular)
23.3.5.1 Front connectors usage Refer to para.24.8.2 on page 230. 23.3.5.2 Hardware settings None
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 180 / 542
23.3.6 MODEM unit operative information Refer to: para.12.4.4.5 on page 47 for a brief functional description of the unit point b ) on page 163 for physical composition and P/Ns. chapter 52, and in particular para.52.4.7 on page 460, for the detailed functional description of the unit The following Fig. 91. shows the protection cap (fixed by a screw) that must be removed to access the unit front panel, and must be repositioned after having connected the cables:
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 MODEM mother board
Protection cap
Fig. 91. Modem unit assembly view and front connector numbering 23.3.6.1 Front connectors usage Refer to para.24.7 on page 221. Other information in Fig. 92. on page 182 and Fig. 93. on page 183. 23.3.6.2 Hardware settings They are on the mother board. Refer to MSZZQ documents (refer to handbook 9600LSY Hardware setting documents REF.[K] on page 527) relative to the Modem unit for the TC and DipSwitch physical position on the board and their meaning (choosing the unit type according to the P/N . WARNING: there are different Modem units).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 181 / 542
The following Fig. 92. : depicts the internal connections between IF2 and IF3 inputs and the corresponding CANCCOMB submodules describes the equipping rules of CANCCOMB submodules in the various configurations.
POS.A IF INPUT MAIN IF2 INPUT IF3 INPUT POS.B
STM0 CASE CONFIGURATION NO SPACE DIVERSITY SPACE DIVERSITY N.B. : XPIC not envisaged with STM0 POS.A UNEQUIPPED CANCCOMB STM0 POS.B UNEQUIPPED UNEQUIPPED
STM1 CASE CONFIGURATION NO SPACE DIVERSITY AND NO XPIC SPACE DIVERSITY OR XPIC SPACE DIVERSITY AND XPIC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
POS.A UNEQUIPPED CANCCOMB STM1 CANCCOMB STM1
POS.B UNEQUIPPED UNEQUIPPED CANCCOMB STM1
Fig. 92. Modem unit assembly internal view and CANCCOMB equipping rules
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 182 / 542
Modulator output blue marker
J1
Modulator output monitoring
J2
red marker
Main demodulator input
J3
IF2 input
J4
see Fig. 92. on page 182 IF3 input J5
(1) Card failure alarm (red)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 93. Modem unit front view
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 183 / 542
23.4 TRANSCEIVER unit operative information

Refer to: para.12.4.3.2 on page 43 for a brief functional description of the unit previous para.22.3.4.2 and 23.4.1 for physical composition and P/Ns. chapter 52, and in particular para.52.5 on page 469, for the detailed functional description of the unit
The following information is given hereafter: Composition of transceiver units Assembly views Internal composition Hardware settings Internal interconnection diagram Front connectors usage on page 185 on page 186 on page 187 on page 189 on page 190 on page 193
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 184 / 542
23.4.1 Composition of transceiver units a)

TRI (Transmitter) The transceiver units have different P/Ns for the following characteristics (N.B.): frequency range This P/N is comprehensive of the Transceiver box (see Fig. 94. on page 186) and the following internal components (see Fig. 95. on page 187): RT control Amplifier Up Converter Delay Line DC/DC Converter together with the associated internal cabling and the cabling relevant to the connection of Rx and Tx LOs. This P/N does not include the LO, R and FR KIT components, that are defined as separate items. Moreover, the transmitter (more precisely its RT control subunit) contains the fixed data that specialize the transceiver for a specific frequency plan (for details, see para.31.2 on page 247).
b)
LO (Local Oscillator module) There are always two Local Oscillators modules inside a transceiver, one for the Rx section, the other for the Tx section (see Fig. 95. on page 187). The Local Oscillator modules have different P/Ns for the following characteristics (N.B.): frequency range possible application for a particular channel plan Inside a TRI, these Local Oscillators must have the same P/N.
c)
R (Receiver module) There can be one or two receiver modules inside a transceiver: in the case the Transceiver is used without the Space Diversity configuration, there is only one Receiver (named Main Receiver) as shown in Fig. 95. on page 187 and Fig. 96. on page 188, and the unit front connectors are those depicted in Fig. 100. on page 193; in the case the Transceiver is used with the Space Diversity configuration, two Receivers (respectively named Main Receiver and Diversity Receiver) are equipped as shown in Fig. 97. on page 188 and Fig. 98. on page 189, and the unit front connectors are those depicted in Fig. 101. on page 194. The Receiver Modules have different P/Ns for the following characteristics (N.B.): frequency range The Receiver P/N includes the associated internal cabling. Inside a TRI, the Main Receiver and Diversity Receiver must have the same P/N.
d)
FR KIT (Frequency Reuse kit) Only in case of Frequency Reuse systems: one Frequency Reuse kit is equipped inside the transceiver housing the Rx Local Oscillator defined as Master, as depicted in Fig. 96. on page 188 and Fig. 98. on page 189. inside the transceiver housing the Rx Local Oscillator defined as Slave, the Frequency Reuse kit is not equipped . The Frequency Reuse kit has the same P/N for all frequency bands. The Frequency Reuse kit P/N includes the module and the associated internal cabling.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
The P/Ns of TRI units and modules must belong to the same Frequency Plan group: please refer to the specific chapter between those listed in Tab. 46. on page 246.
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 185 / 542
23.4.2 Assembly views
COVER PLATE A TO REMOVE FOR INTERNAL SERVICE (HARDWARE SETTING OR REPAIR). Arrows show screws for cover remove/fix.
COVER PLATE B NEVER TO BE REMOVED
TRI P/N and Remote Inventory
Fig. 94. Transceiver assembly physical views
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 186 / 542
23.4.3 Internal composition

DIVERSITY All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. FREQUENCY REUSE USAGE TR HOUSING
INTERNAL COMPONENTS Fig. 95. herebelow Fig. 96. on page 188, in addition to those shown in Fig. 95. Fig. 95. herebelow Fig. 97. on page 188, in addition to those shown in Fig. 95. Fig. 98. on page 189, in addition to those shown in Fig. 95. Fig. 97. on page 188, in addition to those shown in Fig. 95.
N N Y N Y Y
LO MASTER LO SLAVE
LO MASTER LO SLAVE
MAIN RECEIVER
PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER DC/DC CONVERTER
RX LOCAL OSCILLATOR DELAY LINE
TX LOCAL OSCILLATOR RT CONTROL
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
UP CONVERTER
AMPLIFIER
Fig. 95. Transceiver internal view: standard components and Main Receiver
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 187 / 542
TR.FREQUENCY REUSE KIT

Fig. 96. Transceiver internal view: without Diversity Receiver and with TR.Frequency Reuse Kit
DIVERSITY RECEIVER
MAIN RECEIVER (inside) N.B. The Diversity Receiver is mounted on the PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER (see Fig. 95. page 187)
Fig. 97. Transceiver internal view: with Diversity Receiver and without TR.Frequency Reuse Kit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 188 / 542
DIVERSITY RECEIVER
TR.FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
MAIN RECEIVER (inside) N.B. The Diversity Receiver is mounted on the PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER (see Fig. 95. page 187)
Fig. 98. Transceiver internal view: with Diversity Receiver and with TR.Frequency Reuse Kit 23.4.4 Hardware settings They are on subunit RT CONTROL (see Fig. 123. on page 249) and are accessible removing the cover plate A depicted in Fig. 94. on page 186. Please refer to para.31.3 on page 248 for detailed description of setting options.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 189 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED A I
23.4.5 Internal interconnection diagram
N.B.
05
955.203.292 Q
C B B
Letters denote particulars enlarged on following pages
Fig. 99. Transceiver internal connection diagram
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
D F
190 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
continues ..
05
955.203.292 Q
Enlarged particulars of Fig. 99. page 190
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
191 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
.. continues
05
955.203.292 Q
Enlarged particulars of Fig. 99. page 190
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
192 / 542
23.4.6 Front connectors usage DIVERSITY

DESCRIPTION Fig. 100. herebelow Fig. 101. on page 194 Fig. 102. on page 195 (meaning of access points)
N Y Y or N N.B.
For connection with Modem and Branching, refer to para.24.7 on page 221.
J9
J10 J11 J12 M2 J5 J6 J7 J8 I1
J13 J14
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 100. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR without Rx diversity)
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 193 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED J1 J2 J3 J6 J4 J7 J5 M1 J8 J13 J14 J9 J10
05
955.203.292 Q
Fig. 101. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR with Rx diversity)
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
J11 J12 M2 I1
194 / 542
Rx diversity section N.B.1

Rx main section Input RF Rx main J9
J1
Input RF Rx diversity
J2 J3 J4
Output 1 IF Rx divers. Output 2 IF Rx divers. Output IF Rx divers. monitoring M1 N.B.2
red marker Output 1 IF Rx main J10 Output 2 IF Rx main J11 Output IF Rx main monitoring N.B.2 M2 J12
blue marker J5 J6 Input IF Tx
ON/OFF switch (1) Unit switched on (green)
I1
LO Rx Remote (Input or Output)
J7 LO Rx monitoring J8 LO Tx monitoring (2) OR of internal alarms (red)
N.B.1 Rx diversity sections elements are present only in units equipped with Rx diversity (see Fig. 101. on page 194) N.B.2 Socket to connect a recording instrument, to monitor the Rx input field value (see Fig. 129. on page 320) RF Tx output monitoring RF Tx output J13 J14
Fig. 102. Transceiver front view meaning of access points

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 195 / 542
23.5 Branching
23.5.1 Branching drawings and BranchingTransceivers connections Detailed block diagrams of branching in the various configurations are given in chapter 21 starting on page 135. Detailed branching drawings, organized per frequency bands and type (with/without Frequency Reuse/Diversity) are given in the handbook 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Branching drawings REF.[B] on page 524. These drawings indicate also the connections among the branching and the Transceivers. As far as the number of channels are concerned, such drawings show only some of the possible configurations.
23.5.2 Branching Front Plate Kit (Rx branching area) Tab. 27. Branching Front Plate Kit equipping rules SLOT IN RACK (see Fig. 71. on page 152)
BRANCHING FRONT PLATE KIT

Equipping this kit, after having set up the connections involved in Rx branching area, is mandatory in operating conditions to ensure correct equipment ventilation.
(F)
UNIT BRANCHING FRONT PLATE KIT
Fig. 103. Branching Front Plate Kit

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 196 / 542
23.6 FANS SHELF and FANS assembled unit operative information

Please refer to para.22.3.5 on page 166 for equipping rules.
Fig. 104. herebelow and Fig. 105. on page 198 show the physical views of the FANS shelf and FANSL unit and substitutive COVER assemblies.
FANS SHELF
FRONT PLATE
COVER (must be equipped in not used FANS ASSEMBLED slots to guarantee correct ventilation) FANS ASSEMBLED Fig. 104. FANS SHELF, FANS ASSEMBLED and substitutive COVER assembly views
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 197 / 542
Hole for unit extraction
(1) LED
Power supply input
M1
M3
Can Bus Connector
DIPSWITCH
I O
O I
M2
Can Bus Connector
I1
I2
Power supply input
M4
Legend on page 199 Fig. 105. Front view of FANS SHELF equipped with both FANS ASSEMBLED units Hardware settings see point c ) on page 199
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 198 / 542
Legend for Fig. 105. : a)

(M1) (M4) Power supply connectors :

Usage and connection: in case your system is equipped with the: new enhanced TRU (P/N REF.[3] in Tab. 11. on page 146), please make reference to the: Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook (REF.[L] on page 527) former version TRU P/N 3DB00734AA (factory P/N 593.230.032), please make reference to the Appendix B on page 511.
Pinout: Pins A1 A2 A3 +BATT GND BATT Meaning +BATTERY Ground Battery
b)
(M2) (M3) CANBUS connectors:

see Tab. 32. on page 219
c)
(I1) (I2) DIPSWITCHES : to be set according to the position in the rack:

I1 I I O O I2 I O I O Subrack No 0 1 2 3 Usage Baseband shelf future use ADM shelf future use
d)
LED (red): indicating a failure in the FANS ASSEMBLED unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 199 / 542
23.7 Boards of TRU shelf

23.7.1 Top Rack Unit operative information The T.R.U. subrack is located at the rack top area of the rack and appears as follows: RED (1) RED (2) YELLOW GREEN 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B BREAKERS BATTERY A Fig. 106. Top Rack Unit front view The main functions are: a) Power supply distribution to all the functional blocks present in the rack. It is possible to distribute the two battery voltages up to 6 functional blocks installed into the rack. All the output voltages are protected by automatic circuit breakers (up to 12). In general, the choice of the breakers, existing also for lower current ranges, has to be chosen following the effective current consumption needed by the subracks. Maximum current supplied by each battery shall not exceed 60 A. Tab. 28. TRU breaker utilization in 9600 LSY/LHR BREAKER NUMBER 1A and 1B 2A and 2B 3A and 3B 4A and 4B 5A and 5B 6A and 6B USAGE transceiver slot 1 to 5 transceiver slot 6 to 10 baseband subrack ADM 1650 SMC FANS for BB subrack FANS for ADM subrack 40 MAX ABSORBED POWER (W) 340 340 135 NOMINAL ABSORBED CURRENT (A) 12.75 12.75 5.06 N.B. 1.5 N.B. 2 CIRCUIT BREAKER (A) 20 20 10 BREAKERS BATTERY B
N.B. refer to Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook REF.[L] on page 527 N.B. The value of circuit breakers is determined as follows:
Circuit Breaker (A) = [ (Max Absorbed Power (W)) / (Nominal Battery Voltage (48V)) * 1.5 * 1.2] For circuit breaker and Fuserbreaker P/Ns see REF.[4] in Tab. 11. on page 146
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 200 / 542
b)
Station alarm management A rack lamp unit is inserted in the TRU box to display the rack alarm general indications. For the lamp meaning description, please refer to para.53.3 on page 482. Breaker failure alarm management An alarm is embedded inside each breaker unit and is automatically activated in case of breaker failure. The notification to these alarms is obtained by utilization of housekeeping alarms that can be detected either in the local or remote stations on ECT or in the supervision centre. Extension Q2 bus unit or rack alarm distribution unit (optional units, in alternative).
c)
d)
Detailed information regarding TRU connectors, installation, connections with LHR shelves, please refer to the Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook REF.[L] on page 527
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 201 / 542
23.7.2 Kit Loudspeaker operative information 23.7.2.1 Installation

The Kit Loudspeaker is an optional unit to be inserted inside TRU and connected to the system as depicted in Fig. 107. herebelow. Refer to para.22.3.3.1.6 on page 164 for physical composition and P/Ns.
To equip the Kit, remove the TRU plate (4 screws) and fix the kit with the same screws
To be connected to BB connector M190 (see Fig. 109. on page 206)
Fig. 107. Kit Loudspeaker 23.7.2.2 Hardware settings None 23.7.2.3 Usage With reference to Fig. 87. on page 177 (Service unit front view): Pushbutton (4) activates/deactivates the loudspeaker Green led (3) on indicates the loudspeaker activation. For further information, please refer to the Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook REF.[L] on page 527
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 202 / 542
23.8 Additional Housekeeping unit operative information

Refer to: para.12.4.4.8 on page 47 for a brief functional description of the unit para.22.3.3.1.2 on page 161 for physical composition and P/Ns. chapter 52, and in particular para.52.3.4 on page 442, for the detailed functional description of the unit
M1
M2
(1) LED Fig. 108. Additional Housekeeping unit assembly view 23.8.1 Legend and connectors usage a) b) c)
(M1) SUBD25 pins female connector pinout: see Tab. 45. on page 241. (M2) SUBD9 pins male connector: see Tab. 34. on page 220. LED (red): indicates the failure of Additional Housekeeping unit
None
23.8.1.1 Hardware settings
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 203 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
204 / 542
24 SYSTEM CABLING 24.1 Introduction

This chapter describes the 9600LSYLHR system cabling with the following information: location of access points for cabling, with the exception of those present on the units front plates, that are described in chapter 23 on page 167. types of cables used for internal connections pointtopoint cabling of internal connections description of pinout of connectors for external connections. This chapter does not describe: the effective cable routing inside the equipment for internal connections. Notice that the internal connections must be done taking into account the need of extracting any board without removing cables not strictly relevant to it. the kinds of cables used for external connections For detailed installation information like cable P/Ns, connectors, cabling rules, etc., please refer to the: LHR Installation Handbook (REF.[C] on page 524) and Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook (REF.[L] on page 527) This chapter is organized as follows: Shelves connectors, on page 206, including: TRU connectors, on page 206 Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout, on page 206 Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST connectors layout, on page 208 Transceiver shelf connectors, on page 209 Cable kits and cable types, Power supply distribution connections, Connections between TRU and input housekeepings, Signal connections between shelves, ModemTransceiverBranching connections, External interfaces, Power Line Interface, SDH interfaces, Input / Output Unprotected WST, Input / Output Protected WST, Auxiliary Channels, Management interfaces, Station Alarms, Summarizing / Housekeeping alarms, General characteristics, Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms, Input Housekeeping alarms, on page 211 on page 218 on page 218 on page 219 on page 221 on page 230, including: on page 230 on page 230 on page 230 on page 230 on page 231 on page 235 on page 236 on page 236, including: on page 236 on page 237 on page 240
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 205 / 542
24.2 Shelves connectors

24.2.1 TRU connectors In case your system is equipped with the: new enhanced TRU (P/N REF.[3] in Tab. 11. on page 146), please make reference to the: Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook (REF.[L] on page 527) former version TRU P/N 3DB00734AA (factory P/N 593.230.032), please make reference to the Appendix B on page 511.
24.2.2 Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout
M179 M180
M194 M185 M193 M183 M186 M192 M190 M191 M182
M187
M188 M184
M189
Legend: see Tab. 29. on page 207 N.B. Dot in connector front view indicates Pin 1 Fig. 109. Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 206 / 542
Tab. 29. Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors usage CONN. CONN. TYPE SIGNALS Can 0 B.B Terminator M179 p SUBD9 pins female Additional Housekeeping M180 M182 M183 M184 M185 M186 M187 M188 M189 M190 M191 M192 M193 M194 SUBD25 pins female SUBD25 pins female SUBD25 pins female SUBD9 pins male SUBD25 pins female SUBD25 pins female SUBD9 pins female SUBD9 pins female SUBD9 pins female SUBD25 pins female SUBD25 pins female SUBD25 pins female SUBD25 pins female SUBD25 pins female Can Bus RT Aux channel G703 and RS232 Out Remote alarms (GA21GA40) Rack lamps Input Housekeeping RT missing connections Can 0 bus extension toward FAN Shelf 0 CAN 1 (Download) Terminator CAN 1 (Download) Terminator Out party line OW,TPH and loudspeaker Aux channel V11 Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms (GA41GA48) Out Remote alarms (GA1GA20) Rel command HST USAGE see Fig. 118. on page 217 or see Tab. 34. on page 220 see Tab. 31. on page 219 see Tab. 35. on page 231 and Tab. 36. on page 232 see Tab. 42. on page 238 see Tab. 31. on page 219 see Tab. 44. on page 240 see Tab. 31. on page 219 see Tab. 32. on page 219 see Fig. 118. on page 217 see Fig. 118. on page 217 see Tab. 35. on page 231 and Tab. 37. on page 233 see Tab. 35. on page 231 and Tab. 38. on page 234 see Tab. 43. on page 239 see Tab. 41. on page 237 for future use
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 207 / 542
24.2.3 Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST connector layout
green markers
OUT 1 IN OUT 2 IN CH0 yellow markers CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9
J1 J2 J3 J4
In current release only connectors (J1) and (J2) are used for the connection of the 2Mbit/s WST of the corresponding channel. Connectors (J3) and (J4) are not used. Fig. 110. Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST front connector layout and numbering
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 208 / 542
24.2.4 Transceiver shelf connectors
M2 M5 M7 M6
BATT.B FOR TRANCEIVERS 59 Legend on page 210 Fig. 111. Transceiver shelf connector numbering at reartop side BATT.A
M1
M4
M3
BATT.B
BATT.A
FOR TRANCEIVERS 04
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 209 / 542
Legend for Fig. 111. : a) Power supply connectors (M2)
(M3) (M5) (M6) :

Usage and connection: see para.24.4 on page 218 Pinout: Pins A1

A A3
Meaning +BATT +BATTERY
A2
A1
GND
Ground
A3
BATT
Battery
b) c)
(M1) (M4) connectors: for usage see Tab. 31. on page 219. (M7) connector: CAN RT bus terminated by a CAN bus terminator (see Fig. 118.
on page 217).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 210 / 542
24.3 Cable kits and cable types

The following Tab. 30. lists the cable kits envisaged for 9600LSY system and indicates the cable types used in such kits, the drawing of which are given in the associated figures. Notes for figures: a) b) the writings on cable connectors (like (A1) , (A2) , etc.) are used as CABLE SIDE information in the following paragraphs, to point out the correct cable connections; some labels are colored. In conjunction with the colored markers present on some units, this facilitates cabling, matching the colour on cable label with that of colored marker on the unit front plate; in the CannonCannon cables the pin connection is 1:1 (i.e. pin 1 left connected to pin 1 right, pin 2 left connected to pin 2 right, etc.).
c)
Tab. 30. Cable kits and cable types CABLE KIT CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL NO SPACE DIV. CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL WITH SPACE DIV CABLE KIT FOR REUSE (1 RACK) CABLE KIT FOR REUSE (2 RACKS) (N.B.1) CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL FOR WMSN FANS UNIT CABLE KIT FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING Canbus Terminator (N.B.2) N.B. 1 2 P/N (REF. in Tab. 11. on page 146) REF.[9] REF.[10] REF.[11] REF.[12] REF.[13] REF.[14] REF [14] REF.[15] REF [15] REF.[16] REF [16] REF.[29] CABLE TYPES A, B, C, D, E F, G H K, N, P KK, NN, PP A, D S B Q B R D T FIGURE Fig. 112. page 212 Fig. 113. page 213 Fig. 113. page 213 Fig. 114. page 214 Fig. 115. page 215 Fig. 112. page 212 Fig. 117. page 217 Fig. 112. page 212 Fig. 116. page 216 Fig. 112. page 212 Fig. 116. page 216 Fig. 112. page 212 Fig. 118. page 217
the use of this kit is not specified in current edition of this handbook. Each Can bus line must be terminated by a plug with two load resistors (120 ohm resistors mounted on SUBD9 pins male connectors inserted on female connectors).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 211 / 542
A: 3pins female for power supply

A1 N.B. A2
B: 3pins female 450 for power supply
B1
N.B.
B2
C: 9pins Cannon male / 9pins Cannon male

C1 N.B.
C2
D: 9pins Cannon female / 9pins Cannon male

D1
D2
N.B. E1
E: 25pins Cannon male / 25pins Cannon male
E2
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
Labelling depending on cable usage Fig. 112. System cabling: types of used cables (A, B, C, D, E)
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 212 / 542
F: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900

F1
RT n J10
blue label
signal flow
MODEM n J3
red label
F2
G: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
G1
RT n J5
red label
signal flow
MODEM n J1
blue label
G2
H: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
H1
RT n J2
white label
signal flow
MODEM n J4
white label
H2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 113. System cabling: types of used cables (F, G, H)
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 213 / 542
K: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900

K1
RT n J11 V (H)
white label
signal flow
MODEM n J4 H (V)
white label
K2
RT n J11 H (V)
white label
signal flow
MODEM n J4 V (H)
white label
P: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
P1
RT n J11 V (H)
white label
signal flow
MODEM n J5 H (V)
white label
P2
RT n J11 H (V)
white label
signal flow
MODEM n J5 V (H)
white label
N: SMA.M. 900 / SMA.M. 900
RT n J6 H (V)
N1 white label
signal flow
RT n J6 V (H)
white label N2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 114. System cabling: types of used cables (K, N, P)
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 214 / 542
KK: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900

KK1
RT n J11 V (H) (RACK1)

white label
signal flow
MODEM n J4 H (V) (RACK2)

white label
KK2
RT n J11 H (V) (RACK1)

white label
signal flow
MODEM n J4 V (H) (RACK2)

white label
PP: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
PP1

white label
signal flow
MODEM n J5 H (V) (RACK2)

white label
PP2

white label
signal flow
MODEM n J5 V (H) (RACK2)

white label
NN: SMA.M. 900 / SMA.M. 900
NN1 white label
signal flow
white label NN2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 115. System cabling: types of used cables (KK, NN, PP)
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 215 / 542
Q: 9pins Cannon male 300 / 9pins Cannon male

Q1
Q2
R: 9pins Cannon male 300 / 9pins Cannon male 300
R2
R1
Fig. 116. System cabling: types of used cables (Q, R)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 216 / 542
S: 1channel extension
S1
signal flow
S2
Sub.ADM STM n J1
yellow label
Sub.ADM STM n J2
green label
RRA n J2
yellow label S3
signal flow
RRA n J1
green label
S4 Fig. 117. System cabling: types of used cables (S)
T: CANbus terminator
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 118. System cabling: types of used cables (T)
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 217 / 542
24.4 Power supply distribution connections

In case your system is equipped with the: new enhanced TRU (P/N REF.[3] in Tab. 11. on page 146), please make reference to the: Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook (REF.[L] on page 527) former version TRU P/N 3DB00734AA (factory P/N 593.230.032), please make reference to the Appendix B on page 511.
24.5 Connections between TRU and input housekeepings

In case your system is equipped with the: new enhanced TRU (P/N REF.[3] in Tab. 11. on page 146), please make reference to the: Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook (REF.[L] on page 527) former version TRU P/N 3DB00734AA (factory P/N 593.230.032), no connections of this type are envisaged.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 218 / 542
24.6 Signal connections between shelves

N.B.
For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.24.3 on page 211.
Tab. 31. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS CABLE TYPE E C D CABLE 1st. SIDE N. 1 1 1 CABLE SIDE E1 C1 D1 LABEL & CONNECTION Sub. RT / M4 Sub. RT / M1 Sub. BB / M184 (N.B.1) (N.B.1) (N.B.2) CABLE SIDE E2 C2 D2 CABLE 2nd SIDE LABEL & CONNECTION Sub. BB / M186 Sub. BB / M180 (N.B.2) (N.B.2)
TRU Alarm ext. / M7 (N.B.3)
Tab. 32. Signal connections: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT and FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT a) Configuration: BB FAN shelf only CABLE 1st. SIDE N. CABLE SIDE Q1 T LABEL & CONNECTION Fans Unit down (up) / M2 (N.B.4) Fans Unit down (up) / M3 (N.B.4) CABLE 1st. SIDE N. CABLE SIDE Q1 R1 T LABEL & CONNECTION Fans Unit down (up) / M2 (N.B.4) Fans Unit down (up) / M3 (N.B.4) Fans Unit down (up) / M3 (N.B.5) CABLE SIDE Q2 R2 CABLE SIDE Q2 CABLE 2nd SIDE LABEL & CONNECTION Sub. BB / M187 (N.B.2)
CABLE TYPE Q T b)
1 1
Configuration: BB FAN shelf + ADM FAN shelf CABLE 2nd SIDE LABEL & CONNECTION Sub. BB / M187 (N.B.2)
CABLE TYPE Q R T N.B. 1 2 3 4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1 1 1
Fans Unit down (up) / M2 (N.B.5)
see Fig. 111. page 209 see Fig. 109. page 206 in case your system is equipped with the: new enhanced TRU (P/N REF.[3] in Tab. 11. on page 146), please make reference to the: Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook (REF.[L] on page 527) former version TRU P/N 3DB00734AA (factory P/N 593.230.032), please make reference to the Appendix B on page 511. connected to connectors M2/M3 (see Fig. 105. page 198) of BBs FANS shelf (see POS.(E) in Fig. 71. on page 152) connected to connectors M2/M3 (see Fig. 105. page 198) of ADMs FANS shelf (see POS.(L) in Fig. 71. on page 152)
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 219 / 542
Tab. 33. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL FOR WMSN CABLE TYPE D S N. 1 n CABLE SIDE D1 S1 S2 CABLE SIDE D2 S4 S3
CABLE 1st. SIDE LABEL & CONNECTION ADM CONGI / C3 (N.B.1)
CABLE 2nd SIDE LABEL & CONNECTION TRU Alarm ext. / M6 (N.B.2) RRAn / J2 RRAn / J1 (N.B.3) (N.B.3)
Sub.ADM STMn / J1 (N.B.1) Sub.ADM STMn / J2 (N.B.1)
N.B.
1 2 3
refer to 1650SMC documentation in case your system is equipped with the: new enhanced TRU (P/N REF.[3] in Tab. 11. on page 146), please make reference to the: Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook (REF.[L] on page 527) former version TRU P/N 3DB00734AA (factory P/N 593.230.032), please make reference to the Appendix B on page 511. see Fig. 89. on page 179
Tab. 34. Signal connections: Cables belonging to ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING CABLE TYPE D N.B. 1 2 CABLE 1st. SIDE N. 1 CABLE SIDE D1 LABEL & CONNECTION Housek. / M2 (N.B.1) CABLE SIDE D2 CABLE 2nd SIDE LABEL & CONNECTION Sub. BB / M179 (N.B.2)
see Fig. 108. on page 203 see Fig. 109. page 206
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 220 / 542
24.7 ModemTransceiverBranching connections

The connections among Modems, Transceivers and Branching depend on the following possible configurations: case a ) : without Reuse and without Diversity see page 222 case b ) : without Reuse and with Diversity see page 224 case c ) : with Reuse and without Diversity see page 226 case d ) : with Reuse and with Diversity see page 228
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 221 / 542
a)
Without Reuse and without Diversity See Fig. 119. on page 223.
In this figure, the writings near the arrows (that show the signal direction) on the cable indicate the CABLE TYPE and the CABLE SIDE information. E.g. G2 near MODEM J1 means that: cable type G is used and that its side G2 has to be connected to MODEMs connector J1 signal flows out from connector J1 N.B. For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.24.3 on page 211.
To locate the front connectors indicated in such figure, use: for MODEM unit: Fig. 93. on page 183 for TRANSCEIVER unit: Fig. 100. on page 193
For the connections between TRANSCEIVER unit and Rx / Tx Branching, refer to documents cited in para.23.5.1 on page 196. Requirements: MODEM does not need any CANCCOMB module (see Fig. 92. on page 182) TRANSCEIVER: internal components: standard configuration (see Fig. 95. on page 187).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 222 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
TRANSCEIVER SHELF RX BRANCHING BASE BAND SHELF G1 G2
J5 J6 J5 J1 J3 J4 J2
TX BRANCHING
05
J14 J9 J10 J11
955.203.292 Q F2 F1 TRANSCEIVER n
MODEM n
Fig. 119. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: without Reuse and without Diversity
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
223 / 542
b)
Without Reuse and with Diversity See Fig. 120. on page 225.
To locate the front connectors indicated in such figure, use: for MODEM unit: Fig. 93. on page 183 for TRANSCEIVER unit: Fig. 101. on page 194
For the connections between TRANSCEIVER unit and Rx / Tx Branching, refer to documents cited in para.23.5.1 on page 196. Requirements: MODEM needs one CANCCOMB module (see Fig. 92. on page 182) TRANSCEIVER: internal components: configuration with Diversity Receiver, in addition to standard components (see Fig. 97. on page 188).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 224 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
TRANSCEIVER SHELF BASE BAND SHELF RX BRANCHING H1 G1 G2 H2
J2 J1 J5 J6 J3 J5 J1 J3 J4 J2
TX BRANCHING
05
J14 J9 J10 J11
955.203.292 Q F2 F1 TRANSCEIVER n
MODEM n
Fig. 120. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: without Reuse and with Diversity
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
225 / 542
c)
With Reuse and without Diversity See Fig. 121. on page 227.
The connections must be done between two contiguous pairs of channels, i.e.: (MODEM 0 + TRANSCEIVER 0) connected to (MODEM 1 + TRANSCEIVER 1) (MODEM 2 + TRANSCEIVER 2) connected to (MODEM 3 + TRANSCEIVER 3) .... (MODEM 8 + TRANSCEIVER 8) connected to (MODEM 9 + TRANSCEIVER 9) To locate the front connectors indicated in such figure, use: for MODEM unit: Fig. 93. on page 183 for TRANSCEIVER unit: Fig. 100. on page 193
For the connections between TRANSCEIVER unit and Rx / Tx Branching, refer to documents cited in para.23.5.1 on page 196. Requirements: both MODEMs need one CANCCOMB module (see Fig. 92. on page 182) TRANSCEIVERs: the two transceivers are configured differently from each other: one Transceiver as follows: internal components: configuration with TR.Frequency Reuse Kit, in addition to standard components (see Fig. 96. on page 188) hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator must be configured as MASTER
the other Transceiver as follows: internal components: standard configuration (see Fig. 95. on page 187) hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator must be configured as SLAVE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 226 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
TRANSCEIVER SHELF RX BRANCHING BASE BAND SHELF K1 F1 G1 N1 G2 F2
J5 J6
TX BRANCHING
05 MODEM EVEN H (V)

J14 J5 J1 J3 J4 J2 J9 J10
955.203.292 Q TRANSCEIVER H (V) TRANSCEIVER V (H) K2

J5 J5 J1 J3 J4 J2 J6 J11
K2
MODEM EVEN +1 V (H)
J14 J9 J10 J11
F2
Fig. 121. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: with Reuse and without Diversity
3DB 02839 AA AA N2 G1 K1 F1
542
G2
227 / 542
d)
With Reuse and with Diversity See Fig. 122. on page 229.
The connections must be done between two contiguous pairs of channels, i.e.: (MODEM 0 + TRANSCEIVER 0) connected to (MODEM 1 + TRANSCEIVER 1) (MODEM 2 + TRANSCEIVER 2) connected to (MODEM 3 + TRANSCEIVER 3) .... (MODEM 8 + TRANSCEIVER 8) connected to (MODEM 9 + TRANSCEIVER 9) To locate the front connectors indicated in such figure, use: for MODEM unit: Fig. 93. on page 183 for TRANSCEIVER unit: Fig. 101. on page 194
For the connections between TRANSCEIVER unit and Rx / Tx Branching, refer to documents cited in para.23.5.1 on page 196. Requirements: both MODEMs need two CANCCOMB modules (see Fig. 92. on page 182) TRANSCEIVERs: the two transceivers are configured differently from each other: one Transceiver as follows: internal components: configuration with Diversity Receiver and with TR.Frequency Reuse Kit, in addition to standard components (see Fig. 98. on page 189) hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator must be configured as MASTER
the other Transceiver as follows: internal components: configuration with Diversity Receiver, in addition to standard components (see Fig. 97. on page 188) hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator must be configured as SLAVE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 228 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
TRANSCEIVER SHELF RX BRANCHING BASE BAND SHELF N1 H1 P1 F1 G1 G2 F2 H2
J2 J1 J5 J6 J3
TX BRANCHING
05 MODEM EVEN H (V)

J14 J5 J1 J3 J4 J2 J9 J10
955.203.292 Q TRANSCEIVER H (V) TRANSCEIVER V (H) P2

J2 J1 J5 J3 J6 J11
P2
J5 J1 J3 J4 J2
MODEM EVEN +1 V (H)
J14 J9 J10 J11
H2
F2
Fig. 122. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: with Reuse and with Diversity
3DB 02839 AA AA G1 H1 P1 F1 N2
542
G2
229 / 542
24.8 External interfaces

24.8.1 Power Line Interface The Power Line interface is located on the TRU unit; in case your system is equipped with the: new enhanced TRU (P/N REF.[3] in Tab. 11. on page 146), please make reference to the: Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook (REF.[L] on page 527) former version TRU P/N 3DB00734AA (factory P/N 593.230.032), please make reference to the Appendix B on page 511.
The main characteristics are reported in para.13.2.3 on page 91. 24.8.2 SDH interfaces The SDH interfaces (line side) can be electrical or optical. Their access is on the front panel of units RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY (1 channel per unit); see para.23.3.4 on page 178 (RRACHANNEL), and para.23.3.5 on page 180 (RRASTANDBY). Electrical interfaces The connector used is Siemens, 1.0/2.3 75ohm male coax. The main characteristics are reported in para.13.4.3 on page 98. Optical interfaces The connector used is SC/PC or FC/PC. The main characteristics are reported in para.13.4.3 on page 98. For Optical Safety refer to para.13.8 on page 102.
Maximum cables number: N.8 inputs and N.8 outputs. 24.8.3 Input / Output Unprotected WST The Subrack Access Area provides external access for WST channels by Siemens connectors, 1.0/2.3 75ohm male coax. The main characteristics are reported in para.13.4.3 on page 98. Maximum cables number: N.8 inputs and N.8 outputs on BaseBand Subrack access area; see para.24.2.3 on page 208. 24.8.4 Input / Output Protected WST Input /Output WST protected is available on Service unit (see para.23.3.3 on page 176) The connector used is Siemens 1.0/2.3 75ohm male coax. The main characteristics are reported in para.13.4.3 on page 98. Maximum cables number: N.1 input and N.1 output.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 230 / 542
24.8.5 Auxiliary Channels The Subrack Access Area provides external access for auxiliary channels by three SUBD 25 pins female connectors specified in the following. This table sums up the interfaces available: Tab. 35. Summary of auxiliary channels N. bit/s Format asynchronous V24/V28 (selectable) G703 inserted/ extracted RSOH/RFCOH RSOH/RFCOH RSOH/RFCOH V11 RSOH/RFCOH (128 K) only RFCOH Connector M182 on BB access area. See Tab. 36. on page 232 M191 on BB access area. See Tab. 38. on page 234 RJ11 Connector (J5) on Service Unit (Fig. 87. page 177) wires Notes
1 3
9600 64k 64k
2 12
3 or 2+1
64K/128K
24
(SW configurable) connected to 1 or 2 bytes
Speech
telephonic
RSOH/RFCOH
EOW
3 1 1
Speech Speech Speech
I/O 3dBm I/O 3dBm Out 400 mW 4 ohm
RSOH/RFCOH RFCOH EOW (only extract) M190 on BB access area. See Tab. 37. T b 37 on page 233
12 4 2
Analog Party line TPH Available on Remote Unit to loudspeaker
64k
G703
RFCOH or ADM
M182 on BB access area. See Tab. 36. on page 232
TPH to ADM
The main characteristics are reported in para.13.2.1 on page 84.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 231 / 542
Tab. 36. Aux channel G703 and RS232 BB shelfs M182 connector pinout M182 : SUBD25 pins female 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 9 14 10 11 12 13 14 13 25 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 N.B. Connector position in Fig. 109. on page 206. G703 TX TPH G703 RX TPH 64 kb data channel output for VOAD 64 kb data channel input for VOAD DATI 9600 RX 9.6 kb data channel input GND G703 TX (A) G703 RX (A) G703 TX (B) G703 RX (B) G703 TX (C) G703 RX (C) 64 kb data channel output port A 64 kb data channel input port A 64 kb data channel output port B 64 kb data channel input port B 64 kb data channel output port C 64 kb data channel input port C G703 TX+ TPH G703 RX+ TPH 64 kb data channel output for VOAD 64 kb data channel input for VOAD DATI 9600 TX 9.6 kb data channel output G703 TX+ (A) G703 RX+ (A) G703 TX+ (B) G703 RX+ (B) G703 TX+ (C) G703 RX+ (C) 64 kb data channel output port A 64 kb data channel input port A 64 kb data channel output port B 64 kb data channel input port B 64 kb data channel output port C 64 kb data channel input port C
PIN
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 232 / 542
Tab. 37. Out party line OW, TPH and loudspeaker BB shelfs M190 connector pinout M190 : SUBD25 pins female
PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 14 10 11 12 13 14 13 25 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 N.B.
SIGNAL NAME VF TX+ A VF TX+ B VF TX+ C VF RX+ A VF RX+ B VF RX+ C WIRE A TPH VF TX+ A TPH VF TX+ B TPH VF RX+ A TPH VF RX+ B TPH LOUDSPEAKER + GND VF TX A VF TX B VF TX C VF RX A VF RX B VF RX C WIRE B TPH VF TX A TPH VF TX B TPH VF RX A TPH VF RX B TPH LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION analog party line output path A analog party line output path B analog party line output path C analog party line input path A analog party line input path B analog party line input path C output telephone (TPH) analog party line output path B VOAD analog party line output path A VOAD analog party line input path B VOAD analog party line input path A VOAD output loudspeaker positive analog party line output path A analog party line output path B analog party line output path C analog party line input path A analog party line input path B analog party line input path C output telephone (TPH) analog party line output path A VOAD analog party line output path B VOAD analog party line input path A VOAD analog party line input path B VOAD output loudspeaker negative
Connector position in Fig. 109. on page 206.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 233 / 542
Tab. 38. Aux channel V11 BB shelfs M191 connector pinout M191 : SUBD25 pins female 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 9 14 10 11 12 13 14 13 25 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 N.B. DATI+ V11 TX (A) CK+ V11 TX (A) DATI+ V11 RX (A) DATI+ V11 TX (B) CK+ V11 TX (B) DATI+ V11 RX (B) DATI+ V11 TX (C) CK+ V11 X (C) DATI+ V11 RX (C) DATI+ V11 TX (D) CK+ V11 TX (D) DATI+ V11 RX (D) GND DATI V11 TX (A) CK V11 TX (A) DATI V11 RX (A) DATI V11 TX (B) CK V11 TX (B) DATI V11 RX (B) DATI V11 TX (C) CK V11 TX (C) DATI V11 RX (C) DATI V11 TX (D) CK V11 TX (D) DATI V11 RX (D) 64 kb data channel negative output port A TX clock negative port A 64 kb data channel negative input port A 64 kb data channel negative output port B TX clock negative port B 64 kb data channel negative input port B 64 kb data channel negative output port C TX clock negative port C 64 kb data channel negative input port C 64 kb data channel negative output port D TX clock negative port D 64 kb data channel negative input port D 64 kb data channel positive output port A TX clock positive port A 64 kb data channel positive input port A 64 kb data channel positive output port B TX clock positive port B 64 kb data channel positive input port B 64 kb data channel positive output port C TX clock positive port C 64 kb data channel positive input port C 64 kb data channel positive output port D TX clock positive port D 64 kb data channel positive input port D
PIN
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 234 / 542
24.8.6 Management interfaces The System Controller unit (see Fig. 85. on page 173) provides the following external access points:
I/0 for TMN (QB3) BNC connector 10BASE2 RJ45 connector 10BASET and EC Debug Network or EC local debug: Tab. 39. RJ45 Connector for 10baseT interface on System Controller unit Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GND TPRXN Signal TPTXP TPTXN TPRXP
Craft terminal interface (F) The connection for F interface (RS232 to local PC) is provided on ESC unit through a standard SUB 9pin female connector: Tab. 40. RS232 for F interface connection table PAIR 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 N.B. WIRE A B A B A B A B RS232 (SAM side) Not used Not used 5 Not used 3 2 Not used Not used RJ45 (PC side) Not used Not used 4 Not used 8 7 Not used Not used Blue White / Orange ring Orange White / Green ring Green White / Brown ring Brown COLOR White / Blue ring
The special cable needed to connect the CRAFT TERMINAL to the system is supplied with the equipment.
Can Bus and RC debug local access by RJ45 for Alcatel internal use only.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 235 / 542
24.8.7 Station Alarms Station alarm interface access is provided in TRU unit; in case your system is equipped with the:
new enhanced TRU (P/N REF.[3] in Tab. 11. on page 146), please make reference to the: Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook (REF.[L] on page 527)
former version TRU P/N 3DB00734AA (factory P/N 593.230.032), please make reference to the Appendix B on page 511.
For further information, please refer to para.53.3 on page 482. 24.8.8 Summarizing / Housekeeping alarms 24.8.8.1 General characteristics Standard Housekeeping I/O Input (station alarms) Output (station controls) N 22 48 Housekeeping external unit I/O Input (station alarms) N 18 (additional)
The interface characteristics here indicated apply both to summarizing alarms and housekeeping alarms: The presence of active alarm correspond to closed relay contact with a common wire available to the customer. Electrical characteristics (V is voltage between the warm and the common wires) are: open contact 72 p V p 2V closed contact 2 p V <= 0V I p 0.2mA I p 50mA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 236 / 542
24.8.8.2 Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms Summarizing and Out Housekeeping interface access is provided by means of three SUBD 25pins female connectors on Access area subrack specified in the following tables Tab. 41. thru Tab. 43. For the meaning of the signals, please refer to Tab. 67. on page 483.
Tab. 41. Out Remote alarms (GA1GA20) BB shelfs M193 connector pinout M193 : SUBD25 pins female PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 14 10 11 12 13 14 13 25 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 N.B. SIGNAL NAME OUTGA1 OUTGA3 OUTGA5 OUTGA6 OUTGA8 OUTGA10 OUTGA11 OUTGA13 OUTGA15 OUTGA16 OUTGA18 OUTGA20 GND OUTGA2 OUTGA4 COMA OUTGA7 OUTGA9 COMB OUTGA12 OUTGA14 COMC OUTGA17 OUTGA19 COMD SIGNAL DESCRIPTION output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm gnd output general alarm output general alarm common rele output general alarm output general alarm common rele output general alarm output general alarm common rele output general alarm output general alarm common rele
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 237 / 542
Tab. 42. Out Remote alarms (GA21GA40) BB shelfs M183 connector pinout M183 : SUBD25 pins female 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 14 10 11 12 13 14 13 25 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 N.B. OUTGA21 OUTGA23 OUTGA25 OUTGA26 OUTGA28 OUTGA30 OUTGA31 OUTGA33 OUTGA35 OUTGA36 OUTGA38 OUTGA40 GND OUTGA22 OUTGA24 COME OUTGA27 OUTGA29 COMF OUTGA32 OUTGA34 COMG OUTGA37 OUTGA39 COMH output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm gnd output general alarm output general alarm common rele output general alarm output general alarm common rele output general alarm output general alarm common rele output general alarm output general alarm common rele
PIN
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 238 / 542
Tab. 43. Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms (GA41GA48) BB shelfs M192 connector pinout
M192 : SUBD25 pins female PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 14 10 11 12 13 14 13 25 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 N.B. SIGNAL NAME OUTHK1 OUTHK3 OUTHK5 OUTHK6 OUTHK8 OUTHK10 OUTGA41 OUTGA43 TAND OUTGA45 OUTGA47 TOR GND OUTHK2 OUTHK4 COMI OUTHK7 OUTHK9 COML OUTHK42 OUTHK44 COMM OUTHK46 OUTHK48 COMN housekeeping output housekeeping output common rele housekeeping output housekeeping output common rele housekeeping output housekeeping output common rele housekeeping output housekeeping output common rele output general alarm output general alarm SIGNAL DESCRIPTION housekeeping output housekeeping output housekeeping output housekeeping output housekeeping output housekeeping output output general alarm output general alarm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 239 / 542
24.8.8.3 Input Housekeeping alarms Summarizing and Out Housekeeping interface access is provided by means of one SUBD 25pins female connector on Access area subrack specified in the following Tab. 44. herebelow. With the use of the Additional Housekeeping unit, it is possible to increase by 18 the HK Inputs. The access is on the same unit (see Tab. 45. on page 241). Tab. 44. Input Housekeeping BB shelfs M185 connector pinout M185 : SUBD25 pins female PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 14 10 11 12 13 14 13 25 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SIGNAL NAME INHK1 INHK3 INHK5 INHK7 INHK9 INHK11 INHK13 INHK15 INHK17 INHK19 INHK21 GND INHK2 INHK4 INHK6 INHK8 INHK10 INHK12 INHK14 INHK16 INHK18 INHK20 INHK22
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input
housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 240 / 542
Tab. 45. Input Housekeeping Additional Housekeeping units M1 connector pinout M1 : SUBD25 pins female
PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 14 9 10 11 12 13 13 25 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 N.B.
SIGNAL NAME INHK1EXT INHK2EXT INHK3EXT INHK4EXT INHK5EXT INHK6EXT INHK7EXT INHK8EXT INHK9EXT INHK10EXT INHK11EXT INHK12EXT INHK13EXT INHK14EXT INHK15EXT INHK16EXT INHK18EXT GND XX XX XX XX XX
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input internal use internal use internal use internal use internal use
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 241 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
242 / 542
SECTION 3: FREQUENCY PLANS, TRANSCEIVER P/N & HW SETTING

This section gives the Part Numbers and the Remote Inventory Labels of the frequencydependent items (transceiver components), describes the envisaged channel plans utilized with 9600LSY radios and explains how to manage the transceiver hardware settings. SECTION CONTENT Chapter 31 Introduction Chapter 32 9640LSY Chapter 33 9647LSY Chapter 34 9662LSY Chapter 35 9667LSY Chapter 36 9674LSY Chapter 37 9681LSY Chapter 38 9610LSY Chapter 39 9611LSY Chapter 310 9613LSY PAGE 245 259 267 271 275 279 291 299 301 305
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 243 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
244 / 542
31 INTRODUCTION 31.1 Channel plans

Main spectrum utilization characteristics for each frequency band of the 9600 LSY family are summarized in Tab. 46. on page 246. The criteria to be taken into account for the use of each specific one are described in following chapters of this section, according to the following general notes: the main parameters affecting the choice of radiofrequency channel arrangements, according to ITUR Rec. F.746, are : CS Channel Separation between two consecutive centre frequencies for the related alternated radiofrequency channel arrangement: it is also considered equal to the Channel Bandwidth. defined as the radiofrequency separation between the centre frequencies of adjacent radiofrequency channels on the same polarization and in the same direction of transmission: so XS is equal to twice the CS for the alternated radio frequency channel arrangement and is equal to the CS for the cochannel band reuse radio frequency channel arrangement (please consider that an alternated frequency channel arrangement may be further implemented with cochannel band reuse). Tx/Rx Duplex Spacing, defined as the radiofrequency separation between corresponding go and return channels, constant for each couple of ith and ith frequencies, within a given channel arrangement. defined as the frequency of the centre of the band of frequencies occupied. reference frequency of the homogeneous pattern.
XS
DS
f0 fr
In general, the equipment of this family may work, in case of for STM1 stream, in cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP), utilizing the XPIC unit, allowing the transmission of 2 x STM1 signals on a single RF channel. Reused configurations are not foreseen for STM0 capacity.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 245 / 542
Tab. 46. Implemented radiofrequency channel arrangements and list of Chapters

SYSTEM & chapter FREQUENCY (GHz) 3.64.2 3.64.2 9640 LSY (L4) chapter 32 on page 259 3.84.2 3.84.2 3.64.2 3.64.2 3.43.9 9647 LSY (U4) 33 chapter 3 3 on page 267 9662 LSY (L6) chapter 34 on page 271 9667 LSY (U6) chapter 35 on page 275 4.45.0 4.45.0 4.45.0 5.9256.425 5.6756.179 6.4257.11 6.447.11 7.117.44 7.447.75 9674 LSY chapter 36 on page 279 7.4287.897 7.4257.725 7.117.44 7.247.56 7.417.74 7.7258.275 9681 LSY chapter 37 on page 291 8.2758.5 8.2758.5 8.2758.5 7.98.4 9610 LSY
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ITUR F.635 ANNEX 1 fig.3 ITUR F.635 recommends 1 (Finland) ITUR F.382 ITUR F.382 extended DTI (United Kingdom) ITUR F.635 ANNEX 1 fig.6 OIRT ITUR F.1099 ANNEX 1 fig.2 Spain UN56 Austria Defence Department ITUR F.383, CEPT T/R 1401 OIRT ITUR F.384, CEPT T/R 1402 ITUR F.384 IRAN STM1 6U ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3 L ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3 H ITUR F.385 ANNEX 4 ITUR F.385 ANNEX 1 ITUR F.385 rec. 1L ITUR F.385 rec. 1M ITUR F.385 rec. 1H ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1 ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 ITUR F.386 ANNEX3 Poland ITUR F.386 ANNEX3 Iran ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4
40 40 29 29 28 30 28 40 28 28 29.65 28 40 20 28 28 14 28 28 14 28 14 28 14 28 29.65 14 28 28 14 28 14 28
STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM0 / STM1 STM1 STM0 / STM1 STM0 / STM1 STM0 / STM1 STM1 STM0 / STM1 STM1 STM0 STM0 / STM1
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
x x
x x
chapter 38 on page 299
10.02810.630
MEDIASET
28
STM1
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 246 / 542
ITUR FREQ. PLAN
CHANNEL SPACING (MHz)
SDH TRANSPORT
128
QAM
64 QAM
SYSTEM & chapter

FREQUENCY (GHz) 10.711.7 10.711.7 12.75 13.25 12.75 13.25
ITUR FREQ. PLAN ITUR F.387 rec. 1 ITUR F.387 ANNEX 2 ITUR F.497 rec. 1 ITUR F.497 rec. 1 Iran
CHANNEL SPACING (MHz) 40 40 14 28 28
SDH TRANSPORT STM1 STM1 STM0 / STM1 STM0
128
QAM
64 QAM
9611 LSY chapter 39 on page 301 9613 LSY chapter 310 on page 305
x x x x
x x
31.2 Transmitter specialization for a frequency plan

As explained in para.23.4.1 on page 185 a transceiver is composed by the following types of modules: TRI (Transmitter) LO (Local Oscillator module) R (Receiver module) FR KIT (Frequency Reuse kit) Each transmitter sent to the Customer is specialized for the frequency plan required by the Customer himself. This specialization, carried out by firmware settings inside TRIs subunit RT CONTROL not manageable by the Customer, includes: the value of the frequency of the first channel (channel 1 of the lower half of the frequency band) of the frequency plan the value of the channel spacing the value of the frequency shift between the go (Tx) and return (Rx) channels.
This means that a transmitter cannot be used for any other channel plan than that for which it has been set in factory. For further propaedeutic explanations , please refer to para.31.3.7 on page 255.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 247 / 542
31.3 Transceiver hardware settings

31.3.1 Introduction In general, a Customer who receives a system from Alcatel factory to be installed and put in service, does not need to change hardware settings, as they have been already set in factory according to Customer plant specifications. You must change hardware setting only in case you want to change the system configuration. With regard to the Tx/Rx frequency change for a transceiver, take into account that you can do it only inside the frequencies for which the transmitter has been set in factory (see para.31.2 on page 247 and para.31.3.7 on page 255). This paragraph describes in detail how to manage the transceiver dipswitches. Read all paragraphs 31.3.2 to 31.3.5 and understand them before doing anything. An example of hw setting regarding two transceivers in a link is given in para.31.3.6 on page 254. Propaedeutic explanations, if necessary, are given in para.31.3.7 on page 255. 31.3.2 Hardware setting dipswitches on transceiver The transceiver components have been introduced in Tab. 23. on page 165 and described in detail in para.23.4 on page 184. N.B. The quantity of these frequencydependent items depends on the configuration, according to Chapter 21 on page 121.
The transceiver dipswitches are on subunit RT CONTROL (see Fig. 123. on page 249) and are accessible removing the cover plate A depicted in Fig. 94. on page 186. The setting tables of these dipswitches are reported in following Fig. 124. , Fig. 125. and Fig. 126. and their meaning is explained in the following paragraphs. N.B. Fig. 123. on page 249 is reported here for reader convenience. To be sure to operate correctly, please refer to hardware setting documents (present in the handbook 9600LSY Hardware setting documents REF.[K] on page 527) relative to the Transceiver unit for the TC and dipswitch physical position on the board, choosing the unit type according to the P/N. WARNING: there are different Transceiver units.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 248 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q HARDWARE SETTING DIP SWITCHES
Fig. 123. Position of Hardware setting dip switches for transceivers
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
249 / 542
31.3.3 Frequency setting by HW Frequency setting by HW is the only modality to be used in this system. Then, according to Fig. 124. herebelow, the dipswitch [I2]2 must be always be set to 0.
Fig. 124. Choice of frequency setting by HW or SW N.B. The dipswitch bank [I2] contains also the switches [I2]1 and [I2]3, use of which is explained in para.31.3.5 on page 253
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 250 / 542
31.3.4 Hardware setting of the transceiver Tx and Rx frequencies As shown in Fig. 125. on page 252:
dipswitch bank [I5] is used for the frequency setting of go (Tx) channel dipswitch bank [I3] is used for the frequency setting of return (Rx) channel
The following points a ) , b ) and c ) describe their usage in detail. a) usage of dipswitch 6 (lower/upper half band) As explained in para.31.3.7.1 on page 255, Tx and Rx channels must lay: one in the lower half of the band, and the other in the upper half of the band, only the following two configurations are correct: 1st Configuration Half Band of: Tx channel lower set [I5]6 to 0 b) Rx channel upper set [I3]6 to 1 2nd Configuration Half Band of: Tx channel upper set [I5]6 to 1 Rx channel lower set [I3]6 to 0
usage of dipswitch dipswitch 7 (OL +/) Following the lower/upper half band setting described in previous point a ) , the standard setting of the OL+ / OL dip switch must be done as follows: Half Band of: Tx channel lower set [I5]7 to 1 (OL+) Rx channel upper set [I3]7 to 0 (OL) Half Band of: Tx channel upper set [I5]7 to 0 (OL) Rx channel lower set [I3]7 to 1 (OL+)
N.B.
for some (very rare) frequency plans, the OL+ / OL dip switches are set in the opposite way with respect to that depicted in the table above.
WORKAROUND AND SUGGESTION

When you receive your system, please verify how the setting of this switch has been done in factory, and write this information where you can retrieve it, if necessary. c) usage of dipswitches 5 to 1 (channel choice) As explained in para.31.3.7.1 on page 255, the # of the channel defined for Tx section must be equal to the # of the channel defined for Rx section. In fact, the definition of the lower/upper half band for them is defined by the settings explained in previous points a ) and b ) . The # of the channel chosen must be consistent with the possible numbers envisaged for the channel plan used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 251 / 542
d)
usage of dipswitch 8 This switch must be always set to 1, both in Tx and Rx sections.
Tx setting by dipswitch [I5]
Rx setting by dipswitch [I3]
Fig. 125. HW setting of go and return channel frequencies
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 252 / 542
31.3.5 Settings for reuse configurations Configurations with reuse are described in:
para.24.7 point c ) on page 226 (with Reuse and without Diversity) and:
para.24.7 point d ) on page 228 (with Reuse and with Diversity)
As described there: the transceiver equipped with the TR.Frequency Reuse Kit (and in case d ) with Diversity Receiver too) must be configured with Rx Local Oscillator set as MASTER the other transceiver must be configured with Rx Local Oscillator set as SLAVE.
As shown in Fig. 126. herebelow, this setting is performed through the dip switch [I2]3 that must be set as follows: Transceiver to be configured with Rx Local Oscillator set as MASTER set [I2]3 to 1 Transceiver to be configured with Rx Local Oscillator set as SLAVE set [I2]3 to 0
Fig. 126. HW setting of MASTER/SLAVE Rx Local Oscillator N.B. The dipswitch bank [I2] contains also the following switches: [I2]1 that must be always set to 1:
[I2]2 use of which is explained in para.31.3.3 on page 250
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 253 / 542
31.3.6 Example of hardware setting of two transceivers in a radio link Taking into account the example of frequency plan discussed in next para.31.3.7.1 on page 255, the following table shows how to set the dipswitches of Tx and Rx sections of the couple of transceivers, in order to use the channel #2 of the plan itself: 3660
3980
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
STATION A STATION A TRANSCEIVER SETTING OF HALFBAND OL +/ channel Tx section f=3660 lower set [I5]6 to 0 OL+ set [I5]7 to 1 2 [I5] Rx section f=3980 upper set [I3]6 to 1 OL set [I3]7 to 0 2 [I3]
STATION B STATION B TRANSCEIVER Tx section f=3980 upper set [I5]6 to 1 OL set [I5]7 to 0 2 [I5] Rx section f=3660 lower set [I3]6 to 0 OL+ set [I3]7 to 1 2 [I3]
set 5 4 3 2 1 set 5 4 3 2 1 set 5 4 3 2 1 set 5 4 3 2 1 to 0 1 0 0 0 fixed settings to 0 1 0 0 0 to 0 1 0 0 0 to 0 1 0 0 0
set [I5]8 to 1 set [I3]8 to 1 set [I2]1 to 1 set [I2]2 to 0
Note that the channel # is the same for both Tx/Rx sections of both transceivers.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 254 / 542
31.3.7 Propaedeutic explanations N.B.

Just for anybody who needs them.
31.3.7.1 Choice of go and return channel frequencies The following diagram shows an example of channel plan: LOWER HALF OF THE BAND
3620 3700 3780 3860 3940
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND

4020 4100 4180
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
3660
3740
3820
3980
4060
4140
f0 = 3900
In this example you can choose 1 out of 14 frequencies as goradio channel. The returnradio channel is always inside the opposite half of the band (with respect to the goradio channel) and fixed in factory in the following way: goradio channel (Tx) 1 2 .... 7 1 2 .... 7 returnradio channel (Rx) 1 2 .... 7 1 2 .... 7
This association between the goradio channel frequency and the returnradio channel frequency cannot be changed in field (because the frequency shift between go and return channels is fixed in factory, as explained in para.31.2 on page 247). This association is in accordance to ITUR recommendations.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 255 / 542
31.3.7.2 Alternative center band frequencies (normal and interleaved channels) Many frequency plans envisage normal and interleaved channels.
This choice depends on Customers specific requirement at the purchase order phase and cannot be changed in field. In fact, this corresponds to have different channel plans, each of which require a specific firmware settings inside TRIs subunit RT CONTROL (as explained in para.31.2 on page 247). a) First example refer to 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR Recommendation F.382 para.32.2.3 on page 262. The TRI that is ordered can be alternatively set in factory, according to Customer needs: NORMAL CHANNELS LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel for this usage 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 3824,5 3853,5 3882,5 3911,5 3940,5 3969,5 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 4037,5 4066,5 4095,5 4124,5 4153,5 4182,5
INTERLEAVED CHANNELS LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel or for this usage 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 3810 3839 3868 3897 3926 3955 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 4023 4052 4081 4110 4139 4168
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 256 / 542
b)
Second example refer to 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1L (STM1) para.36.2.4 on page 284. The TRI that is ordered can be alternatively set in factory, according to Customer needs: LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Freq. Channel [MHz] for this usage (normal channels) ( l h l ) 1 2 3 4 5 7128 7156 7184 7212 7240 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Freq. Channel [MHz] 1 2 3 4 5 7289 7317 7345 7373 7401
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Freq. Channel [MHz] or for this usage (interleaved channels 1) (i t l d h l 1int1 2int1 3int1 4int1 5int1 7135 7163 7191 7219 7247
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Freq. Channel [MHz] 1int1 2int1 3int1 4int1 5int1 7296 7324 7352 7380 7408
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 257 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
258 / 542
32 9640LSY 32.1 9640LSY part list

Tab. 47. 9640LSY Transceiver Part List NAME 9640LSY TRANSCEIVER N.B. Refer to Tab. 23. on page 165 and para.23.4 on page 184 for summary information on transceiver composition and equipping notes 3DB02524AA 411200543 3DB02513AA 474210265 3DB05441AA 474210463 3DB02668AA 474210292 3DB02667AA 474210291 3DB03830AA 299702973 ANV P/N Factory P/N Label for Remote Inventory
128 QAM 64 QAM
3,64,2 GHZ. TRANSMITTER N.B. Refer to para.31.2 on page 247 for explanations on transmitter specialization for a frequency plan 3,44,2 GHZ RECEIVER 3,64,2 GHZ RECEIVER 9640LSY L.O. 9640LSY OIRT L.O. TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
4L128T
4L128R 4L064R 4LLO 4LLOOIR
X X X X X X X
32.2 9640LSY frequency plans

The possible channel plans to be used with 9640LSY equipment, for the exploitation of the 3.6 to 4.2 GHz or 3.8 to 4.2 GHz bands, are shown on following pages: ITUR Recommendation F.635. fig.3/Annex 1 ITUR F.635 recommends 1 ITUR Recommendation F.382 ITUR F. 382 (Extended) Recommendation DTI channel plan ITUR Recommendation F.635, Annex I, fig.6 , O.I.R.T. (Russia) page 260 page 261 page 262 page 263 page 264 page 265 page 266
Please refer to Tab. 46. on page 246 for the possible use of each frequency plan with 128QAM and 64QAM.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 259 / 542
32.2.1 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR Recommendation F.635. fig.3/Annex 1 STM1 ITUR F 635 CS=40 DS=320 fn=f0320+40n fn=f0+40n, f0=3900, n : from 1 to 7 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Freq. [MHz] 3620 3660 3700 3740 3780 3820 3860 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Freq. [MHz] 3940 3980 4020 4060 4100 4140 4180
3620
3700
3780
3860
3940
4020
4100
4180
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
3660
3740
3820
3980
4060
4140
f0 = 3900
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 260 / 542
32.2.2 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.635 recommends 1
ITUR F 635 STM1 CS=40 DS=320 fn=f0320+40n fn=f0+40n, f0=3890, n : from 1 to 7 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Freq. [MHz] 3610 3650 3690 3730 3770 3810 3850 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Freq. [MHz] 3930 3970 4010 4050 4090 4130 4170
3610
3690
3770
3850
3970
4050
4130
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
1 2
3 4
5 6
3650
3730
3810
3930
4010
4090
4170
f0 = 3890
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 261 / 542
32.2.3 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR Recommendation F.382
ITUR F.382 STM1 CS=29 ; DS=213 fn=f0208+29n fn=f0+5+29n f0=4003.5 n : from 1 to 6 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 3824,5 3853,5 3882,5 3911,5 3940,5 3969,5
3810 3824.5
ITUR F.382 STM1 CS=29 ; DS=213 fn=f0208+29n fn=f0+5+29n f0=3989 n : from 1 to 6 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 3810 3839 3868 3897 3926 3955 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6
4139 4153.5
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6

3868 3882.5
Freq. [MHz] 4037,5 4066,5 4095,5 4124,5 4153,5 4182,5
Freq. [MHz] 4023 4052 4081 4110 4139 4168
3926 3940.5
4023 4037.5
4081 4095.5
H(V ) V( H ) 1
2 3
4 5
6
1
2 3
4 5
3839 3853.5
3897 3911.5
3955 3969.5
4052 4066.5
4110 4124.5
4168 4182.5
f0 = 4003.5 or 3989
N.B.
Note: Dotted arrows indicate interleaved channels. Each channel is 14.5 MHz lower than the correspondent main plan channel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 262 / 542
NORMAL CHANNELS
INTERLEAVED CHANNELS
32.2.4 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR F. 382 (Extended) Recommendation NORMAL CHANNELS
INTERLEAVED CHANNELS ITUR F.382 EXTENDED STM1 CS=29 ; DS=213 fn=f0208+29n fn=f0+5+29n f0=3989 n : from 1 to 6 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 3810,0 3839,0 3868,0 3897,0 3926,0 3955,0 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 4023,0 4052,0 4081,0 4110,0 4139,0 4168,0
ITUR F.382 EXTENDED STM1 CS=29 ; DS=213 fn=f0208+29n fn=f0+5+29n f0=4003.5 n : from 1 to 6 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 3824,5 3853,5 3882,5 3911,5 3940,5 3969,5 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 4037,5 4066,5 4095,5 4124,5 4153,5 4182,5
f0=3703,5 MHz fn=f0121+29n fn=f0+5+29n n : from 1 to 3 A B C 3611,5 3640,5 3669,5 f0 = 3689

3611.5 3669.5 3766.5 3824.5 3882.5
f0=3689 MHz; fn=f0121+29n fn=f0+5+29n n : from 1 to 3 3737,5 3766,5 3795,5 A B C 3597,0 3626,0 3655,0 f0 = 3989
3940.5 4037.5 4095.5 4153.5
A B C
A B C
3723,0 3752,0 3781,0
H (V) V (H) A
B C
A B
C 1
2 3
4 5
6 1
2 3
4 5
f0 = 3703.5 N.B.
f0 = 4003.5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Dotted arrows indicate interleaved channels. Each channel is 14.5 MHz lower than the correspondent main plan channel.
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 263 / 542
32.2.5 9640LSY Channel plan: DTI channel plan
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Freq. [MHz] 3633,0 3661,0 3689,0 3717,0 3745,0 3773,0 3801,0 3829,0 3857,0
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Freq. [MHz] 3941,0 3969,0 3997,0 4025,0 4053,0 4081,0 4109,0 4137,0 4165,0
3633
3689
3745
3801
3857
3941
3997
4053
4109
4165
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
3661
3717
3773
3829
3969
4025
4081
4137
f0 = 3899
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 264 / 542
DTI STM1 CS=28 DS=308 fn=f0294+28n fn=f0+14+28n, f0=3899 n : from 1 to 9
32.2.6 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR Recommendation F.635, Annex 1, fig.6
ITUR F 635 Annex1 fig.6. STM1 CS=30 DS=320 fn=f0310+30n fn=f0+10+30n, f0=3900 n : from 1 to 9 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Freq. [MHz] 3620 3650 3680 3710 3740 3770 3800 3830 2860 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Freq. [MHz] 3940 3970 4000 4030 4060 4090 4120 4150 4180
3620
3680
3740
3800
3860
3940
4000
4060
4120
4180
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
3650
3710
3770
3830
3970
4030
4090
4150
f0 = 3900
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 265 / 542
32.2.7 9640LSY Channel plan: O.I.R.T. (Russia)
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. [MHz] 3422,5 3450,5 3478,5 3506,5 3534,5 3562,5 3590,5 3618,5
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. [MHz] 3688,5 3716,5 3744,5 3772,5 3800,5 3828,5 3856,5 3884,5
3450.5
3506.5
3562.5
3618.5
3716.5
3772.5
3828.5
3884.5
H (V) V (H)
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
3422.5
3478.5
3534.5
3590.5
3688.5
3744.5
3800.5
3856.5
f0 = 3653.5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 266 / 542
O.I.R.T. STM1 CS=28 DS=266 fn=f0259+28n fn=f0+7+28n f0=3653,5 n : from 1 to 8

Tab. 48. 9647LSY Transceiver Part List NAME 9647LSY TRANSCEIVER N.B. Refer to Tab. 23. on page 165 and para.23.4 on page 184 for summary information on transceiver composition and equipping notes 3DB02526AA 411200545 3DB02512AA 474210264 3DB05442AA 474210464 3DB02669AA 474210292 3DB03830AA 299702973 ANV P/N Factory P/N Label for Remote Inventory
128 QAM 64 QAM
4,45,0 GHZ. TRANSMITTER N.B. Refer to para.31.2 on page 247 for explanations on transmitter specialization for a frequency plan 4,35,0 GHZ RECEIVER 4,35,0 GHZ RECEIVER 9647LSY L.O. TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
4U128T
4U128R 4U064R 4ULO
X X X X X X

The possible channel plans to be used with 9647LSY equipment, for the exploitation of the 4.4 to 5.0 GHz bands, are shown are shown on following pages: ITUR Recommendation F.1099, Annex 1, fig. 2 Spain UN56 Austria Defence page 268 page 269 page 270
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 267 / 542
33.2.1 9647LSY Channel plan: ITUR Recommendation F.1099, Annex 1, fig. 2
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Freq. [MHz] 4430 4470 4510 4550 4590 4630 4670
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Freq. [MHz] 4730 4770 4810 4850 4890 4930 4970
4430
4510
4590
4670
4770
4850
4930
H (V) (MHz) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
1 2
3 4
5 6
4470
4550
4630
4730
4810
4890
4970
f0 = 4700
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 268 / 542
STM1 ITUR F 1099 CS=40 DS=310 fn=f0310+40n fn=f010+40n, f0=4700, n : from 1 to 7
33.2.2 9647LSY Channel plan: Spain UN56
STM1 128 QAM SPAIN UN56 CS=28 DS=314 fn=f0307+28n fn=f0+7+28n f0=4700, n : from 1 to 9 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Freq. [MHz] 4421 4449 4477 4505 4533 4561 4589 4617 4645 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 7 Freq. [MHz] 4755 4783 4811 4839 4867 4895 4923 4951 4979
4421
4477
4533
4589
4645
4755
4811
4867
4923
4979
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
4449
4505
4561
4617
4783
4839
4895
4951
f0 = 4700 N.B. Channels 2, 8, 2, 8 are used for low capacity transmission only.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 269 / 542
33.2.3 9647LSY Channel plan: Austria Defence ITUR F.7464 STM1 CS=28; DS=312 fn=f0310+28n fn=f0+2+28n f0=4700 n : from 1 to 10 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Freq. [MHz] 4418 4446 4474 4502 4530 4558 4586 4614 4642 4670 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Freq. [MHz] 4730 4758 4786 4814 4842 4870 4898 4926 4954 4982
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. 10 9
STM1
f0 = 4700
H(V ) V( H )
1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 270 / 542

Tab. 49. 9662LSY Transceiver Part List NAME 9662LSY TRANSCEIVER N.B. Refer to Tab. 23. on page 165 and para.23.4 on page 184 for summary information on transceiver composition and equipping notes 3DB01264AA 411200518 3DB01268AA 474210145 3DB02670AA 474210294 3DB03830AA 299702973 6L128T ANV P/N Factory P/N Label for Remote Inventory
5,96,4 GHZ. TRANSMITTER N.B. Refer to para.31.2 on page 247 for explanations on transmitter specialization for a frequency plan 5,97,1 GHZ RECEIVER 9662LSY L.O. TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
6+128R 6LLO

The possible channel plans to be used with 9662LSY equipment, for the exploitation of the 5.925 to 6.425 GHz bands, are shown on following pages: ITUR F 383 O.I.R.T. page 272 page 273
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 271 / 542
34.2.1 9662LSY Channel plan: ITUR F 383
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

6197.24 6256.54
Freq. [MHz] 6197,24 6226,89 6256,54 6286,19 6315,84 6345,49 6375,14 6404,79
6315.84 6375.14
5945.20
6004.50
6063.80
6123.10
H(V) V(H) 1
2 3
5974.85
4 5
6034.15
6 7
6093.45
8 1
6152.75
2 3
4 5
6 7
6226.89
6286.19
6345.49
6404.79
f0 = 6175
5945.20 6004.50 6063.80 6123.10 6226.89 6286.19 6345.49 6404.79
H(V) V(H) 1
2 3
5974.85
4 5
6034.15
6 7
6093.45
1 2
3 4
6256.54
5 6
6315.84
7 8
6375.14
6152.75
6197.24
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 272 / 542
ITUR F 383 STM 1 STM1 fn=f0259.45+29.65n fn=f07.41+29.65n CS=29.65 DS=252.04 f0=6175 f0 6175 n: from 1 to 8
34.2.2 9662LSY Channel plan: O.I.R.T.
NORMAL CHANNELS O.I.R.T. STM1 fn=f0 259+28n fn=f0259+28n fn=f0+7+28n 036 CS=28 DS=266 f0=5920 n: f from 1 t 8 to LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. [MHz] 5689 5717 5745 5773 5801 5829 5857 5885 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. [MHz] 5955 5983 6011 6039 6067 6095 6123 6151
INTERLEAVED CHANNELS O.I.R.T. STM1 fn=f0 259+28n fn=f0259+28n fn=f0+7+28n CS=28 DS=266 f0=5934 n: f from 1 t 8 to LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. [MHz] 5703 5731 5759 5787 5815 5843 5871 5899 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. [MHz] 5969 5997 6025 6053 6081 6109 6137 6165
H (V) (MHz) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
f0 = 5920 N.B. Dotted arrows indicate interleaved channels. Each channel is 14 MHz higher than correspondent main channel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 273 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
274 / 542

128 QAM 64 QAM
6,47,1 GHZ. TRANSMITTER N.B. Refer to para.31.2 on page 247 for explanations on transmitter specialization for a frequency plan 5,97,1 GHZ RECEIVER 5,97,1 GHZ RECEIVER 9667LSY L.O. TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
6U128T
6+128R 6U064R 6ULO
X X X X X X

The possible channel plans to be used with 9667LSY equipment, for the exploitation of the 6.4 to 7.1 GHz bands, are shown on following pages: ITUR F.384, CEPT T/R 1402 ITUR F.384 IRAN STM1 6U page 276 page 277
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 275 / 542
35.2.1 9667LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.384, CEPT T/R 1402 ITUR F.384 STM1 CS=40 ; DS=340 fn=f0350+40n fn=f010+40n f0=6770 n : from 1 to 8 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Channel plan a)
6460 6540 6620 6700 6840 6920 7000 7080
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. [MHz] 6800 6840 6880 6920 6960 7000 7040 7080
Freq. [MHz] 6460 6500 6540 6580 6620 6660 6700 6740
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
6500
6580
6660
6740
6800
6880
6960
7040
f0 = 6770 Channel plan b)

6460 6540 6620 6700 6800 6880 6960 7040
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
6500
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
6580
6660
6740
6840
6920
7000
7080
f0 = 6770
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 276 / 542
35.2.2 9667LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.384 IRAN STM1 6U ITUR F.384
STM1 CS=40 ; DS=340 fn=f0350+20n fn=f010+20n f0=6770 n : from 1 to 16 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Freq. [MHz] 6440 6460 6480 6500 6520 6540 6560 6580 6600 6620 6640 6660 6680 6700 6720 6740 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Freq. [MHz] 6780 6800 6820 6840 6860 6880 6900 6920 6940 6960 6980 7000 7020 7040 7060 7080
6440
6480 2 4 3
6520 6 5
6560 8 7
6600
6640 10 12 11
6680 14 13
6720 16 15 6740
6780 2 1
6820 4 3
6860 6 5
6900 8 7 6920
6940 6980 7020 10 9 6960 12 11 13
7060 16 15 7080
H ( V) V (H )
1
14
9 6580 6620
6460
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
6500
6540
6660 6700
6800
6840 6880
7000 7040
f0 = 6770
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 277 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
278 / 542

Tab. 51. 9674LSY Transceiver Part List NAME 9674LSY TRANSCEIVER N.B. Refer to Tab. 23. on page 165 and para.23.4 on page 184 for summary information on transceiver composition and equipping notes 3DB02531AA 411200547 3DB02533AA 474210268 3DB02672AA 474210296 3DB03830AA 299702973 07128T ANV P/N Factory P/N Label for Remote Inventory
7,17,7 GHZ TRANSMITTER N.B. Refer to para.31.2 on page 247 for explanations on transmitter specialization for a frequency plan 7,18,5 GHZ RECEIVER 9674LSY L.O. TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
7+128R 07LO

The possible channel plans to be used with 9674LSY equipment, for the exploitation of the 7.1 to 7.9 GHz band, are shown on following pages: ITUR F.385 Annex 3 L&H ITUR F.385 Annex 4 ITUR F.385 Annex 1 ITUR F.385 Rec. 1L ITUR F.385 Rec. 1M ITUR F.385 Rec. 1H page 280 page 281 page 283 page 284 page 286 page 288
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 279 / 542
36.2.1 9674LSY Channel: ITUR F.385 Annex 3 L&H ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3 L STM1 CS=28 DS=196 fn=f0182+28n fn=f0+14+28n f0=7275 n: f from1 to 5 1t LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1i 1 2i 2 3i 3 4i 4 5i 5 Freq. [MHz] 7107 7121 7135 7149 7163 7177 7191 7205 7219 7233 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 i 1 2 i 2 3 i 3 4 i 4 5 i 5 Freq. [MHz] 7303 7317 7331 7345 7359 7373 7387 7401 7415 7429 ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3 H STM1 CS=28 DS=168 fn=f0168+28n fn=f0+28n f0=7597 n: f from1 to 5 1t LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1i 1 2i 2 3i 3 4i 4 5i 5 Freq. [MHz] 7443 7457 7471 7485 7499 7513 7527 7541 7555 7569 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 i 1 2 i 2 3 i 3 4 i 4 5 i 5 Freq. [MHz] 7611 7625 7639 7653 7667 7681 7695 7709 7723 7737
ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3L

7107 7121 7163 7177 7219 7233 7303 7317 7359 7373 7415 7429
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5 1
2 3
4 5
7135
7149
7191
7205
f0 = 7275
7331
7345
7387
7401
ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3H

7443 7457 7499 7513 7555 7569 7611 7625 7667 7681 7723 7737
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5 1
2 3
4 5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
7471
7485
7527
7541
f0 = 7597
7639
7653
7695
7709
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 280 / 542
36.2.2 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Annex 4
ITUR ITU R F.385 ANNEX 4 STM0 fn=f0241.5+14n f f0 241 5 14 fn=f0+3.5+14n fn=f0+3 5+14n CS=14 DS=245 f0=7662.5 n: from1 to 16 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 continues ... Freq. [MHz] 7435 7449 7463 7477 7491 7505 7519 7533 7547 7561 7575 7589 7603 7617 7631 7645 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Freq. [MHz] 7680 7694 7708 7722 7736 7750 7764 7778 7792 7806 7820 7834 7848 7862 7876 7890
ITU R ITUR F.385 ANNEX 4 STM1 fn=f0248.5+28n f f0 248 5 28 fn=f03.5+28n fn=f03 5+28n CS=28 DS=245 f0=7662.5 n: from1 to 8 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel Freq. [MHz] 7442 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel Freq. [MHz] 7687
7470
7715
7498
7743
7526
7771
7554
7799
7582
7827
7610
7855
7638
7883
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 281 / 542
... continues
STM0
7435 7463 7491 7519 7547 7575 7603 7631 7680 7708 7736 7764 7792 7820 7848 7876 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11
12 13
14 15
16 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11
12 13
14
16 15
7449 7477 7505 7533 7561 7589
7617
7645
7694 7722 7750 7778 7806 7834
7862 7890
f0 = 7662.5
STM1
7442 7498 7554 7610 7687 7743 7799 7855
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
7470
7526
7582
7638
7715
7771
7827
7883
f0 = 7662.5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 282 / 542
36.2.3 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Annex 1
ITUR F.385 ANNEX 1 STM 1 STM1 fn=f0161+28n fn=f07+28n CS=28 DS=154 f0=7575 f0 7575 n: from1 to 5 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1i 2 2i 3 3i 4 4i 5 5i Freq. [MHz] 7442 7456 7470 7484 7498 7512 7526 7540 7554 7568 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1 i 2 2 i 3 3 i 4 4 i 5 5 i Freq. [MHz] 7596 7610 7624 7638 7652 7666 7680 7694 7708 7722
7442
7456
7498
7512
7554
7568
7596
7610
7652
7666
7708
7722
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5 1
2 3
4 5
7470
7484
7526
7540
7624
7638
7680
7694
f0 = 7575
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 283 / 542
36.2.4 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1L
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1i 2 2i 3 3i 4 4i 5 5i 6 6i 7 7i 8 8i 9 9i 10 10 i continues ...

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1 i 2 2 i 3 3 i 4 4 i 5 5 i 6 6 i 7 7 i 8 8 i 9 9 i 10 10 i Freq. [MHz] 7289 7296 7303 7310 7317 7324 7331 7338 7345 7352 7359 7366 7373 7380 7387 7394 7401 7408 7415 7422
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1int1 1int2 1int3 2 2int1 2int2 2int3 3 3int1 3int2 3int3 4 4int1 4int2 4int3 5 5int1 5int2 5int3 Freq. [MHz] 7128 7135 7142 7149 7156 7163 7170 7177 7184 7191 7198 7205 7212 7219 7226 7233 7240 7247 7254 7261
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1int1 1int2 1int3 2 2int1 2int2 2int3 3 3int1 3int2 3int3 4 4int1 4int2 4int3 5 5int1 5int2 5int3 Freq. [MHz] 7289 7296 7303 7310 7317 7324 7331 7338 7345 7352 7359 7366 7373 7380 7387 7394 7401 7408 7415 7422
Freq. [MHz] 7128 7135 7142 7149 7156 7163 7170 7177 7184 7191 7198 7205 7212 7219 7226 7233 7240 7247 7254 7261
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 284 / 542
ITUR F.385 rec. 1 L STM 0 STM0 fn=f0161+14n fn=f0+14n CS=14 DS=161 f0=7275 f0 7275 n : from 1 to 10
ITUR F.385 rec. 1 L STM 1 STM1 fn=f0175+28n fn=f014+28nn CS=28 DS=161 f0=7275 f0 7275 n : from 1 to 5
... continues
STM0
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. 7128 7135 H (V) V (H) 7156 7184 7212 7163 7191 7219 7240 7247 7289 7296 7317 7345 7373 7324 7352 7380 7401 7408
7142 7149
7170 7198 7177 7205
7226 7233
7254 7261
7303 7310
7331 7359 7338 7366
7387 7394
7415 7422
STM1
7128 7135 7142 7149 H (V) V (H) 7184 7191 7198 7205 7240 7247 7254 7261 7289 7296 7303 7310 7345 7352 7359 7366 7401 7408 7415 7422
7156 7163 7170 7177
7212 7219 7226 7233
7317 7324 7331 7338
7373 7380 7387 7394
f0 = 7275
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 285 / 542
36.2.5 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1M

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Freq. [MHz] 7253 7260 7267 7274 7281 7288 7295 7302 7309 7316 7323 7330 7337 7344 7351 7358 7365 7372 7379 7386
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 286 / 542
ITUR F 385 rec. 1 M STM0 fn=f0161+14n fn=f0+14n CS=14 DS=161 f0=7400 n : from 1 to 10
ITUR F 385 rec. 1 M STM1 fn=f0175+28n fn=f014+28n CS=28 DS=161 f0=7400 n : from 1 to 5
... continues
STM0
7267 7274
7295 7323 7302 7330
7351 7358
7379 7386
7428 7435
7456 7484 7463 7491
7512 7519
7540 7547
STM1
7253 7260 7267 7274 H (V) V (H) 7309 7316 7323 7330 7365 7372 7379 7386 7414 7421 7428 7435 7470 7477 7484 7491 7526 7533 7540 7547
7281 7288 7295 7302
7337 7344 7351 7358
f0 = 7400
7442 7449 7456 7463
7498 7505 7512 7519
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 287 / 542
36.2.6 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1H

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Freq. [MHz] 7428 7435 7442 7449 7456 7463 7470 7477 7484 7491 7498 7505 7512 7519 7526 7533 7540 7547 7554 7561
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 288 / 542
ITUR F 385 rec. 1 H STM0 fn=f0161+14n fn=f0+14n CS=14 DS=161 f0=7575 n : from 1 to 10
ITUR F 385 rec. 1 H STM1 fn=f0175+28n fn=f014+28n CS=28 DS=161 f0=7575 n : from 1 to 5
... continues
STM0
7442 7449
7470 7477
7498 7526 7554 7505 7533 7561
7603 7610
7631 7659 7638 7666
7687 7694
7715 7722
STM1
7428 7435 7442 7449 H (V) V (H) 7484 7491 7498 7505 7540 7547 7554 7561 7589 7596 7603 7610 7645 7652 7659 7666 7701 7708 7715 7722
7456 7463 7470 7477
7512 7519 7526 7533
f0 = 7575
7617 7624 7631 7638
7673 7680 7687 7694
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 289 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
290 / 542

Tab. 52. 9681LSY Transceiver Part List NAME 9681LSY TRANSCEIVER N.B. Refer to Tab. 23. on page 165 and para.23.4 on page 184 for summary information on transceiver composition and equipping notes 3DB02532AA 411200548 3DB04243AA 411200589 3DB02533AA 474210268 3DB02673AA 474210297 3DB03830AA 299702973 08128T 08128T 7+128R 08LO ANV P/N Factory P/N Label for Remote Inventory
7,78,3 GHZ TRANSMITTER (N.B.1) (N.B.3) 8,28,5 GHZ TRANSMITTER (N.B.2) (N.B.3) 7,18,5 GHZ RECEIVER 9681LSY L.O. TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
N.B.1 N.B.2 N.B.3
For 7.78.3 GHz band both STM0 and STM1 capacity (F386 annex 1) all channels, and for OIRT (F386 annex 4) only lower halfband channels. For 8.28.5 GHz band both STM0 and STM1 capacity (F386 annex 3) all channels, and for OIRT (F386 annex 4) only upper halfband channels. Refer to para.31.2 on page 247 for explanations on transmitter specialization for a frequency plan

The possible channel plans for the 9681LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of the 7.7 to 8.5 GHz band are shown on following pages: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1 ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 POLAND ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 IRAN ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4 page 292 page 293 page 294 page 295 page 296
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 291 / 542
37.2.1 9681LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. [MHz] 8059,02 8088,67 8118,32 8147,97 8177,62 8207,27 8236,92 8266,57
7747.70
7807.00
7866.30
7925.60
8059.02
8118.32
8177.62
8236.92
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
7777.35
7836.65
7895.95
7955.25
8088.67
8147.97
8207.27
8266.57
f0 = 8000
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 292 / 542
ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1 STM1 fn=f0281.95+29.65n fn=f0+29.37+29.65n CS=29.65 DS=311.32 f0=8000 n : from 1 to 8
ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 STM0 fn=f0108.5+14n fn=f0+10.5+14n CS=14 DS=119 f0=8387.5 n : from 1 to 6 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 8293 8307 8321 8335 8349 8363 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 8412 8426 8440 8454 8468 8482
ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 STM1 fn=f0122.5+28n fn=f03,5+28n CS=28 DS=119 f0=8387.5 n : from 1 to 3 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1i 2 2i 3 Freq. [MHz] 8293 8307 8321 8335 8349 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1 i 2 2 i 3 Freq. [MHz] 8412 8426 8440 8454 8468
STM0
8293 8321 8349
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 1
8307
8335
8363
f0 = 8387.5
STM1
8293 8307 8349 8412 8426 8468
H (V) V (H) 1 1i
2i 3 1 1i
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
8321 8335
f0 = 8387.5
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 293 / 542

8412 8440 8468 2 3 4 5 6 8426 8454 8482 2 2i 3 8426 8454
37.2.3 9681LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 POLAND ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 STM1 fn=f0108.5+14n fn=f0+10.5+14n CS=14 DS=119
f0=8387.5 n : from 1 to 6 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 8293 8307 8321 8335 8349 8363 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 8412 8426 8440 8454 8468 8482
STM1
8293
8321
8349
8412
8440 2 4 3 8426 8454
8468
H (V ) V( H ) 1
2 3
8307
4 5
8335
6
1 8363
6 5
8482
f0 = 8387.5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 294 / 542
37.2.4 9681LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 IRAN ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 IRAN
STM0 CS=7 DS=126
f0=8387.5 n : from 1 to 12 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Freq. [MHz] 8286 8293 8300 8307 8314 8321 8328 8335 8342 8349 8356 8363 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Freq. [MHz] 8412 8419 8426 8433 8440 8447 8454 8461 8468 8475 8482 8489
STM0 8286 8300 8314 8328 8342 8356 8412 8426 8440 8454 8468 8482
2 1 3 8293
4 5 8307
6 7 8321
8 9 8335
10 11 8349
12 1 8363
2 3 8419
4 5 8433
6 7
8 9 8461
10 11
12
8447
8475
8489
f0 = 8387.5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 295 / 542
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 continues ... Freq. [MHz] 7912 7926 7940 7954 7968 7982 7996 8010 8024 8038 8052 8066 8080 8094 8108 8122
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Freq. [MHz] 8178 8192 8206 8220 8234 8248 8262 8276 8290 8304 8318 8332 8346 8360 8374 8388
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel Freq. [MHz] 7926
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel Freq. [MHz] 8192
7954
8220
7982
8248
8010
8276
8038
8304
8066
8332
8094
8360
8122
8388
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 296 / 542
ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4 STM0 fn=f0259+14n fn=f0+7+14n CS=14 DS=266 f0=8157 n : from 1 to 16
ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4 STM1 fn=f0259+28n fn=f0+7+28n CS=28 DS=266 f0=8157 n : from 1 to 8
... continues
STM0
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. 7912 77940 7968 7996 8024 8052 8080 8108 8178 8206 8234 8262 8290 8318 8346 8374
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11
12 13
14 15
16 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11
12 13
14 15
16
7926 7954 7982 8010 8038 8066
8094 8122
8192 8220 8248 8276 8304 8332
8360 8388
f0 = 8157
STM1
7996 7982 8038 8094 8192 8248 8304 8360
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
7954
8010
8066
8122
8220
8276
8332
8388
f0 = 8157
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 297 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
298 / 542

10128R 10LO

The possible channel plans to be used with 9610LSY equipment, for the exploitation of the 10.0 to 10.7 GHz band, are shown on following pages: MEDIASET page 300
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 299 / 542
38.2.1 9610LSY Channel plan: MEDIASET
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Freq. [MHz] 10028 10056 10084 10112 10140 10168 10196 10224 10252 10280
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Freq. [MHz] 10378 10406 10434 10462 10490 10518 10546 10574 10602 10630
10028
10084 10140 10196
10252
10378
10434 10490 10546
10602
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10
10056
10112
10168
10224 10280
10406
10462 10518
10574 10630
f0 = 10329
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 300 / 542
Channel plan for MEDIASET STM1 CS=28; DS=350 n : from 1 to 10

128 QAM 64 QAM
10,711,7 GHZ TRANSMITTER N.B. Refer to para.31.2 on page 247 for explanations on transmitter specialization for a frequency plan 10,711,7 GHZ RECEIVER 10,711,7 GHZ RECEIVER 9611LSY L.O. TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
11128T
11128R 11064R 11LO
X X X X X X

The possible channel plans to be used with 9611LSY equipment, for the exploitation of the 10.7 to 11.7 GHz band, are shown on following pages: ITUR F.387 rec. 1 ITUR F.387 ANNEX 2 page 302 page 303
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 301 / 542
39.2.1 9611LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.387 rec. 1
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Freq. [MHz] 10715 10755 10795 10835 10875 10915 10955 10995 11035 11075 11115 11155
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Freq. [MHz] 11245 11285 11325 11365 11405 11445 11485 11525 11565 11605 11645 11685
10715
10795 10875 10955
11035 11115
11245
11325
11405 11485
11565 11645
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11
12 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11
12
10755
10835 10915
10995 11075
11155
11285
11365
11445
11525 11606 11685
f0 = 11200
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 302 / 542
ITUR F.387 recomm.1 STM1 CS=40; DS=530 fn=f0525+40n fn=f0+5+40n f0=11200 n : from 1 to 12
ITUR F.387 ANNEX 2 STM1 CS=40; DS=490 fn=f0505+40n fn=f015+40n f0=11200 n : from 1 to 12 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Freq. [MHz] 10735 10775 10815 10855 10895 10935 10975 11015 11055 11095 11135 11175 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 11265 11305 11345 11385 11425 11465 11505 11545 11585 11625 11665 Freq. [MHz]
10735
10815 10895 10975
11055 11135
11225
11305
11385 11465
11545 11625
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11
12 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11
12
10775
10855 10935
11015 11095
11175
11265
11345
11425
11505 11585 11665
f0 = 11200
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 303 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
304 / 542

13128R 13LO

The possible channel plans for the 9613LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of the 13 GHz band are shown on following pages: ITUR Recommendation F.497 ITUR F.497 rec.1 IRAN page 306 page 308
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 305 / 542
310.2.1 9613LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.497 Rec.1
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 continues ... Freq. [MHz] 12758 12772 12786 12800 12814 12828 12842 12856 12870 12884 12898 12912 12926 12940 12954 12968
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 13038 13052 13066 13080 13094 13108 13122 13136 13150 13164 13178 13192 13206 13220 13234 Freq. [MHz]
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel Freq. [MHz] 12765
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel Freq. [MHz] 13031
12793
13059
12821
13087
12849
13115
12877
13143
12905
13171
12933
13199
12961
13227
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 306 / 542
ITUR F.497 rec.1 STM0 CS=14; DS=266 fn=f0252+14n fn=f0+14+14n f0=12996 n : from 1 to 16
ITUR F.497 rec.1 STM1 CS=28; DS=266 fn=f0259+28n fn=f0+7+28n f0=12996 n : from 1 to 8
... continues
STM0
12758 12786 12814 1284212870 12898 12926 12954
13024
13082 13080 1310813136 13164 13192 13220
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11
12 13
14 15
16 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11
12 13
14 15
16
12772 12800 12828 1285612884 12912 12940 12968
13038 13066 13094 1312213150 13178 13206 13234
f0 = 12996
STM1
12765 12821 12877 12933 13031 13087 13143 13199
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
12793
12849
12905
12961
13059
13115
13171
13227
f0 = 12996
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 307 / 542
310.2.2 9613LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.497 rec.1 IRAN ITUR F.497 rec.1 STM0 CS=28; DS=268 fn=f0259+28n fn=f0+7+28n f0=12996 n : from 1 to 8 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. [MHz] 12765 12793 12821 12849 12877 12905 12933 12961 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. [MHz] 13031 13059 13087 13115 13143 13171 13199 13227
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. 8 7 13171 13227
STM0
12765
12821
12877
12933
13031
13087 2
13143 4 3
13199 6
H(V ) V(H) 1
2 3
12793
4 5
12849
6 7
12905
8
1 12961
5
13115
13059
f0 = 12996
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 308 / 542
SECTION 4: MAINTENANCE
It contains the whole logical and operative information for the equipment maintenance.
SECTION CONTENT GENERAL Chapter 41 Maintenance Policy It introduces the basic concepts for the equipment maintenance. Chapter 42 Set and use of EOW functions It explains how to configure and use the Engineering OrderWire functions of the equipment. Chapter 43 Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts It describes the instruments, accessories and the equipment spare parts that are envisaged to carry out the routine and corrective maintenance of the equipment. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Chapter 44 First Level Maintenance It describes the First Level Maintenance (system state display) of the equipment. SECOND LEVEL MAINTENANCE (PREVENTIVE) Chapter 45 Preventive Maintenance SECOND LEVEL MAINTENANCE (CORRECTIVE) Chapter 46 Troubleshooting It describes how to perform troubleshooting. Chapter 47 Unit replacement It explains how to replace all units, except transceivers. Chapter 48 Transceiver repair and replacement It explains how to repair and replace transceivers. Chapter 49 Faulty unit repair and repair form It explains what to do in order to send faulty units to the authorized repair centers.
PAGE
311
313
317
325
331
333 347 369 395
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 309 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
310 / 542
41 MAINTENANCE POLICY
This chapter introduces the basic concepts for the equipment maintenance.
41.1 Classification of maintenance levels and operators

The maintenance procedures described in following chapters have been conceived taking into account the following considerations: The twostation layout typical of a radio link requires often that different operators can communicate with each other to solve problems. The EOW functions of this equipment give a simple way for this communication need. This matter is described in chapter 42 on page 313. The possibility of carrying out routine and corrective maintenance is based on the existence of: a suitable set of instruments and accessories a suitable set of spare parts These matters are described in chapter 43 on page 317. Maintenance can be classified as : First Level Maintenance : ROUTINE MAINTENANCE First level maintenance consists of a set of simple operations by means of which a First Level Maintenance Operator can acknowledge the state of the system and decide whether or not the intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is required in order to bring back the assembly to optimum operating conditions by troubleshooting and unit replacement, if necessary. In this philosophy:
First Level Maintenance Operator should not be authorized to change the equipment status; he should be only authorized to display it or to make some simple tests through the Craft Terminal, if expressly authorized by the Station Manager. These actions are described in chapter 44 on page 325. Second Level Maintenance can be classified as: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE Preventive maintenance is a periodic set of measurements and checks. This maintenance discovers those devices whose function has deteriorated with time and therefore need adjustment or replacement. These actions are described in chapter 45 on page 331. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (troubleshooting and repair) Corrective maintenance consists of a set of operations which bring back the assembly to optimum operating conditions in a very short time, with the aim of obtaining maximum operational availability. These actions are split as follows: chapter 46 on page 333 describes how to perform troubleshooting chapter 47 on page 347 explains how to replace all units, except transceivers chapter 48 on page 369 explains how to repair and replace transceivers chapter 49 on page 395 explains what to do in order to send faulty units to the authorized repair centers.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 311 / 542
Second Level Maintenance Operator is authorized to make all actions necessary to repair the system; moreover he only should be authorized to carry out preventive maintenance.
With regard to the access to the Craft Terminal functionalities, notice that, according to point [3] on page 82 (Security management) it is possible to use the following operator profiles: Viewer for the First Level Maintenance Operator Operator for the Second Level Maintenance Operator.
41.2 First Level Maintenance Personnel skill

First Level Maintenance Personnel must have got: an adequate technical training on telecommunications. Experience in first level maintenance activities is a must; an adequate presentation on the equipment this handbook refers to; detailed instructions on what to do and/or who must be contacted in the case he finds the equipment out of its normal conditions.
41.3 Second Level Maintenance Personnel skill

Second Level Maintenance Personnel must have been an adequate technical training on telecommunications. Experience in maintenance activities is a must. In particular, Second Level Maintenance Personnel must be familiar: with the equipment this handbook refers to and with the use of the Craft Terminal applications of the equipment this handbook refers to.
Without these prerequisites, reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in para.C.2 on page 522 is usually not enough to properly maintain equipment. Additional skills required for transceiver repair are specified in point a ) on page 374.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 312 / 542
42 SET AND USE OF EOW FUNCTIONS

Please refer to chapter 41 on page 311 for an introduction to the basic concepts of equipment maintenance. This chapter explains how to configure and use the EOW (Engineering OrderWire) function of the equipment.
42.1 Telephone kit and telephone set operative information

The DTMF telephone kit (P/N REF.[40] in Tab. 11. on page 146) allows to carry out EOW in/out calls. As shown in Fig. 127. herebelow, it is composed by a Telephone set (A) and its holder (B) to be mounted, through the accessories depicted in the figure, on the rack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 127. DTMF Telephone kit
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 313 / 542
Fig. 128. herebelow shows one of the possible versions of supplied Telephone sets. front rear
(4)
1 4 7 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 #
(2)
(3)
PAUSE FLASH REDIAL
(1)
if present, these keys have no use
(1) (2) (3) (4)
ON/OFF switch (must be set to ON when the Telephone is used) PULSE/TONE switch (must be set to TONE) DIAL/LOCK switch (must be set to DIAL when the Telephone is used) Led (lights on when the Telephone set jack is connected to TPH connector of SERVICE unit and switch (1) is set to ON) Fig. 128. Telephone set
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 314 / 542
42.2 EOW Channel use

42.2.1 General Information a) Connection diagram STATION A STATION B
TRANSCEIVER SERVICE Telephone set
TRANSCEIVER SERVICE Telephone set
Telephone kit/set drawings are given in Fig. 127. on page 313 and Fig. 128. on page 314. N.B. each Telephone set has its own phone number. Phone number can be in the range 10 to 99. Telephone sets must have phone numbers different from each other.
Physical connections on equipment: connect Telephone set jack to to the telephone jack of SERVICE unit (connector (J5) in Fig. 87. on page 177). b) Telephone set phone number display/change Display/setting is done by Craft Terminal by the following menus: display: Configuration Overhead OH Phone Parameters change:Configuration Overhead OH Phone Parameters phone number Apply
Refer to CT Operators Handbook for details c) Telephone set settings (on rear side) P = Pulse, T = Tone. Set to T prior to making a call. Set DIALLOCK switch to LOCK, and OFFON switch to ON prior to making a call.
P T
DIAL LOCK
OFF ON
d)
Ways of Calling : two different ways of calling are possible: SELECTIVE: a connection between two users (dial a number 10 to 99) OMNIBUS: a unidirectional connection with all the users (dial digits 00)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 315 / 542
e)
Leds indication: LINE O.W. area in Fig. 87. on page 177: (7) EOW (GREEN): (6) EOW (YELLOW: (6) Flashing YELLOW: free line busy line received and recognized call
f)
Telephone set keyboard

HANDSET MEANING
* #
Force unlocking of the line Engage line
42.2.2 Call Setup/End by Telephone Set a) To Call From Handset: 1. Check that line is free (EOWfree green LED on SERVICE is on). 2. Handset OFF/ON switch to ON. 3. On keypad, press # to engage line. 4. Check that EOWbusy yellow LED on SERVICE is on. 5. On keypad, dial twodigit number of station to be called (or 00 for omnibus call) To Answer Call At Handset: 1. SERVICE EOWbusy yellow LED flashes and audible tone is present. 2. Connect handset to SERVICE, set ON/OFF switch to ON, press # on keypad. To End Call From Handset: 1. On keypad, press *. 2. Move ON/OFF switch to OFF.
b)
c)
42.2.3 Additional standard Party lines Three PartyLine (VF TX/RX A,B and C) paths are available on BB shelfs connector M190 (see Tab. 37. on page 233).
42.3 TPH Channel use (Additional Voice)

42.3.1 General Information and usage It is possible only with subunit TPH equipped inside SERVICE board. The DTMF Telephone Kit (Ref.[40] in Tab. 11. on page 146) must be connected to the system through pins 7 and 20 of BB shelfs connector M190 (see Tab. 37. on page 233). The call procedure is equal to that explained in para.42.2 above but, in this case, the leds in LINE TPH area are used instead. 42.3.2 Additional Party lines
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Two PartyLine (VF TX/RX A and B TPH) paths are available on BB shelfs connector M190 (see Tab. 37. on page 233).
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 316 / 542
43 MAINTENANCE TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS 43.1 Introduction

Please refer to chapter 41 on page 311 for an introduction to the basic concepts of equipment maintenance. This chapter describes the instruments, accessories and the equipment spare parts that are envisaged to carry out the routine and corrective maintenance of the equipment, and and is organized as follows: Instruments and accessories Software tools System and Maintenance Tool Kits herebelow, including: herebelow on page 318
Set of spare parts on page 322, including: Types of Spare Parts on page 322 Number of Spare Parts on page 324 General rules on spare parts management on page 324 Spare Flash Card management on page 324
43.2 Instruments and accessories

43.2.1 Software tools There is a local terminal (PCECT) which permits to display all the alarms and manages the Equipment. The relative processing is described in the relevant Craft Terminal Operators Handbook (see Tab. 81. on page 527). When a TMN is implemented, an Operation System will display alarms and manage all the connected Equipment of the network. Refer to the relevant handbooks. With reference to Fig. 85. on page 173: connection with the PC is achieved through connector (M3) available on the System Controller unit through connectors (J1) to (J3), the same unit can be connected to an Operations System associated to the Transmission Management Network in order to execute operations similar to those carried out by the PC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 317 / 542
43.2.2 System and Maintenance Tool Kits The following Tab. 56. lists the items contained in the LSY SYSTEM TOOL KIT (for P/N see REF.[41] in Tab. 11. on page 146). Drawings and descriptions are given for special items. Tab. 56. LSY System Tool Kit ITEMS BAGS Tool bag Maintenance Tool bag Fixed spanner 8 x 10 Fixed spanner 6 x 1 Fixed spanner 12 x 13 Screwdriver 3 x 100 Screwdriver 3.5 x 100 Screwdriver 5.5 x 200 Crosshead Screwdriver 3 x 60 Crosshead Screwdriver 4.5 x 80 Crosshead Screwdriver 4.5 x 250 Socket wrench Socket wrench Special screwdriver Torque wrench Insulating plug with pliers Antistatic wristband Antistatic applications cord Plug with crocodile pliers Female button termination Cables 1.0/2.3 extractor Electrical/Optical module / Fans assembled extractor Extractors holder bracket LABELS Label for codebar Label for codebar
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FACTORY P/N 810.704.305 870.704.306
NOTES
STANDARD TOOLS & MISCELLANEOUS 870.952.110 870.952.106 870.952.119 870.959.130 870.959.140 870.959.166 870.959.530 870.959.540 870.959.565 870.952.800 870.952.995 870.959.815 870.952.302 041.720.010 COMPONENTS OF ANTISTATIC WRISTBAND 041.172.011 041.911.001 041.172.010 248.501.099 SPECIAL EXTRACTORS 245.701.842 241.901.305 241.901.306 268.001.431 268.001.702 see para. 43.2.2.2 4 3222 on page 321 see Fig. 200. on page 501
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 318 / 542
The following Tab. 57. lists the items contained in the LSY MAINTENANCE TOOL KIT (for P/N see REF.[42] in Tab. 11. on page 146). Drawings and descriptions are given for special items.
Tab. 57. LSY Maintenance Tool Kit ITEMS BAGS Maintenance Tool bag 870.704.306 FACTORY P/N NOTES
75ohm Transition Coax. transition75 plugplug Coax. transition 50 female Nmale SMA Coax. transition 75 male BNCfemale1.6/5.6 Coax. cord Coax. cord Coax. cord Cord Bipolar cord fitted with male connectors SPECIAL CORDS Special cord for PRx measurement Cord for use with SIBDL
018.860.001 018.860.002 040.198.018 040.198.103 041.962.184 041.962.264 041.962.276 041.997.010 049.911.081
041.992.608 041.992.617 SPECIAL EXTRACTORS
see Fig. 129. on page 320 see Fig. 130. on page 320
Cables 1.0/2.3 extractor Electrical/Optical module / Fans assembled extractor LABELS Label for codebar Label for codebar
245.701.842 241.901.305
see para. 43.2.2.2 4 3.2.2.2 on page 321
268.001.431 268.001.702
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 319 / 542
43.2.2.1 Special cords
plug M1 or M2 in Fig. 102. on page 195
Fig. 129. Special cord for PRx measurement
Fig. 130. Cord for use with SIBDL N.B. For the use of this cord to carry out the NE software download via SIBDL, according to the SWP used, please refer to the: 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 Line Up guide (REF.[D] on page 524) or: 9600LSY/LHR Rel.2.0 Line Up guide (REF.[E] on page 524) or: 9600LSY Rel.1.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0 (REF.[N] on page 527) from ED.07. or: 9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 from V2.0.2 (REF.[P] on page 527) from ED.03.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 320 / 542
43.2.2.2 Special extractors See Fig. 131. herebelow.

[1]
Positioning of the tools support Fasten the adhesive tools support (1) on a free surface near the subrack (for example on the rack mechanical structure or on the subrack connection flange). Special extractors usage Two extractors are available on the tools support: extractor (2) is used to remove the optical/electrical modules from the units housing them or to remove a Fans Assembled Unit from the Fans Shelf. To carry out remotion: unscrew the fixing screws of the module/unit to the front panel of the group/Fans Shelf insert and rotate the extractor (2) in the suitable hole of the optical/electrical module or Fans Assembled Unit pull out the module/unit extractor (3) is used to remove the coaxial cables.
[2]
2 1
Factory code 245.701.842

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Factory code 241.901.306 Factory code 241.901.305 Fig. 131. Special extractors and holder bracket
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 321 / 542
43.3 Set of spare parts

43.3.1 Types of Spare Parts The set of spare parts is inclusive of a minimum number of spares for each type of replaceable plugin unit, as detailed in following: para.43.3.1.1 herebelow (all units, with exception of Transceivers) para.43.3.1.2 on page 323 (Transceivers) N.B. The unit replacement procedures described in relevant chapters of this section Maintenance in this handbook presume that the units present in the sparepart stock correspond exactly to the plugin replaceable units that are equipped in the system, i.e.: with the same Part Numbers (N.B.1) and including the same babyboards (with the same Part Numbers) (N.B.2) with the aim of speedingup the corrective maintenance and to avoid complex unit manipulation (baby board mounting/dismounting on/from the main board) which could result in unit and/or babyboard damage.
43.3.1.1 All units, with exception of Transceivers Tab. 58. Spare parts list UNIT SYSCO FLASH CARD (see para.43.3.4 page 324) SERVICE RRA CHANNEL RRA STANDBY (if used) OPTICAL MODULE (if used) MODEM (STM0 or STM1) PSU PSF ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING (if used) FANS ASSEMBLED (if used) N.B.1 N.B.2 N.B.3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
BABY BOARDS N.B.3 ADDITIONAL VOICE (optional)
DETAILS FOR P/Ns AND EQUIPPING RULES Tab. 14. Tab 14 on page 161 Tab. 16. on page 161
Tab. 17. on page 162 1 or 2 CANCCOMB (STM0 or STM1) (optional)
Tab. 18. on page 163 Tab. 19. on page 163 Tab. 21. on page 164 Tab. 15. on page 161 Tab. 24. on page 166
As far as transmitters are concerned, take into account that they are also specialized for a particular frequency plan (see para.31.2 on page 247). According to the sparepart policy, Customers are supplied with spare units already equipped with front plates and baby boards, according to Customers System configuration. As spare part, SYSCO is shipped from factory always with its subunit ESCON already mounted. Customer is never allowed to dismount it from the main board. Conversely, the SYSCO spare part is usually shipped from factory without the Flash Card, that is available as individual item.
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 322 / 542
43.3.1.2 Transceivers Please refer to para.23.4.1 on page 185 for the detailed description of the Transceiver composition in the various possible configurations.
a)
Spare Transmitter subassembly Fig. 147. on page 383 shows the Transceiver assembly supplied as spare part. The assembly is shown with the cover plate removed (see Fig. 94. on page 186). There are two possibilities: 1) Transmitter + Main Receiver This assembly includes the following components: standard components: Transceiver box with covers (see Fig. 94. on page 186) RT control Amplifier Up Converter Delay Line DC/DC Converter The P/N of this assembly is frequency dependent. Main Receiver The P/N of this component is frequency dependent.
2)
Transmitter only This assembly includes the standard components cited above, but does not contain the Main Receiver, whose spare must be provisioned as individual item (see point c ) herebelow).
This assembly (Transmitter + Main Receiver or Transmitter only does not include the following subcomponents: b) RX Local Oscillator TX Local Oscillator Diversity Receiver Frequency Reuse kit module see point b ) herebelow see point c ) herebelow see point d ) herebelow
Spare Local Oscillator subassembly Fig. 144. on page 377 shows the Local Oscillator subassembly supplied as spare part. The P/N of this component is frequency dependent. (N.B.).
c)
Spare Main and Diversity Receiver subassembly The Main Receiver subassembly is necessary as spare part in the case the spare Transmitter subassembly is supplied without the Main Receiver already assembled inside. The Diversity Receiver subassembly is necessary as spare part only in Diversity configurations. Fig. 145. on page 379 shows the Receiver subassembly supplied as spare part. The P/N of this component is frequency dependent. (N.B.).
d)
Spare Frequency Reuse kit module subassembly This spare is necessary only in Frequency Reuse configurations. Fig. 146. on page 382 shows the Frequency Reuse kit module subassembly supplied as spare part. The P/N of this component is frequency independent. (N.B.).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
For the item P/Ns and other notes, please refer to section 3 on page 243, choosing the chapter relevant to your specific radio system.
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 323 / 542
43.3.2 Number of spare parts The overall number of spares depends on Customer requirements, and should be based on the average amount of transmission circuits available to be accounted for not only during MTBF but also during MTTR; the latter depending on the amount of spare parts available. 43.3.3 General rules on spare parts management Before storing the spare units make sure that they are working by inserting them in an operating equipment It is suggested to periodically check those spare units that have not been utilized for over a year. If the spare parts and the equipment are stored in the same environment, make sure that the spare parts are placed in cabinets to safeguard them from dust and damp. Moreover, they should also be well grounded to avoid electrostatic discharges. If the spare parts are stored in another room, or have to be moved from another place, building or site, make sure that the following is observed: the spare parts must be wrapped in antistatic and padded envelopes; the spare parts must not touch wet surfaces or chemical agents that might damage them (e.g. gas); if during transportation the temperature is lower than that of the room where they had been kept, make sure that before using them they pass a certain period in a climatic chamber to prevent thermal shocks and/or the possibility of steaming up. When replacing a unit/subunit, make sure that the spare unit/subunit is set exactly as the replaced one. 43.3.4 Spare Flash Card management Please refer to para.52.3.3 on page 441 for the Flash Card description. The Flash Card supplied as spare part is empty (i.e. without SW) and must be left as it is for its possible use as spare part. ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) Do not use a Flash Card already loaded with SW as spare part, unless you use the specific instructions (that include the Flash Card reset and the SW download through SIBDL application) given, according to the SWP used, in the: 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 Line Up guide (REF.[D] on page 524) or: 9600LSY/LHR Rel.2.0 Line Up guide (REF.[E] on page 524) or: 9600LSY Rel.1.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0 (REF.[N] on page 527) from ED.07. or: 9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 from V2.0.2 (REF.[P] on page 527) from ED.03. You must be aware that if a Flash Card with a SWP (different from that running in the system) is inserted as it is in the System Controller (and the System Controller is inserted in its shelfs slot), the software download will be automatically carried out from the Flash Card toward the Systems EC, RC and SUs, thus causing a complete system crash.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 324 / 542
44 FIRST LEVEL MAINTENANCE 44.1 Introduction

Please refer to chapter 41 on page 311 for an introduction to the basic concepts of equipment maintenance. This chapter describes the First Level Maintenance of 9600LSY equipment, and and is organized as follows: Procedure summary System state display by visual indications Checks by Craft Terminal herebelow on page 326 on page 328
44.2 Procedure summary

START SYSTEM STATE DISPLAY BY VISUAL INDICATIONS MAJOR ALARM CONDITION check TRU lamps, if equipped (para 44.3.1 page 326) perform system lamp test (para 44.3.2.1 page 327) check alarm leds on SYSCO unit (para 44.3.2.2 page 327) MINOR ALARM CONDITION
NO ALARM CONDITIONS IMMEDIATE intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is required END DELAYED intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is required END
CHECKS BY CRAFT TERMINAL if expressly authorized by the Station Manager (para 44.4 page 328) END Fig. 132. First Level Maintenance procedure summary
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 325 / 542
44.3 System state display by visual indications

44.3.1 Inspection of station alarm lamps on TRU (if equipped) RED (1) RED (2) YELLOW GREEN LED ON RED (1) MEANING Detection of an URGENT alarm: it means that there is at least one alarm (internal and/or external) for which traffic is affected. Detection of a NOT URGENT alarm: it means that there is at least one alarm (internal and/or external) for which traffic is not affected (e.g. something is wrong, but the traffic is recovered by an automatic protection switch). Alarm condition ATTENDED: it means that an Operator [by pushbutton (8) on SYSCO unit, see Fig. 134. on page 327 or by Craft Terminal] has attended the alarm (for details, see para.46.3.2 on page 335). YELLOW If also SYSCO units led ABN (4) [see Fig. 134. on page 327] is on, there is an ABNORMAL operative condition: usually it means that there is a condition forced by an Operator (e.g. a manual switch regarding the protection system), or a SW download is in progress. It is activated by the buzzer input. ACTION A
RED (2)
GREEN ACTION: A B C
The immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is required. Wait 10 minutes. If persists, the immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is required only if Red LED (1) URGENT is on The immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is not required Fig. 133. Station Alarms on TRU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 326 / 542
44.3.2 Inspection of alarm lamps on SYSCO unit 44.3.2.1 Lamp test

To be sure to have correct indications, carry out the lamp test, pushing pushbutton (7) in Fig. 134. below: while pushed, all leds of all units should be turned on, with the exception of those of the transceivers. (1) OR of all URGENT alarms (red) (2) OR of all NOT URGENT alarms (red) (3) ATTENDED alarm (yellow) (4) OR of all ABNORMAL conditions (yellow) (5) OR of all INDICATIVE alarms (yellow) (7) Lamp Test Pushbutton (8) Alarm storing Pushbutton (Attended)
(6) bicolor led: red on: Card failure alarm green flashing: SW download in progress (internal or toward other boards) off: normal condition
Fig. 134. System Controller front view (particular) 44.3.2.2 Check alarms lamps With reference to Fig. 134. above: LED ON (1) URG MEANING Detection of an URGENT alarm: it means that there is at least one alarm (internal and/or external) for which traffic is affected. Detection of a NOT URGENT alarm: it means that there is at least one alarm (internal and/or external) for which traffic is not affected (e.g. something is wrong, but the traffic is recovered by an automatic protection switch). Alarm condition ATTENDED: it means that an Operator (by pushbutton (8) or by Craft Terminal) has attended the alarm (for details, see para.46.3.2 on page 335). Detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition: usually it means that there is a condition forced by an Operator (e.g. a manual switch regarding the protection system), or a SW download is in progress. Detection of an INDICATIVE alarm: it means that the possible equipment alarmed condition can be due to an external alarm. SYSCO unit is faulty SW download in progress (internal or toward other boards) ACTION A
(2) NURG
(3) ATTD
(4) ABN
(5) IND (6) red (6) green flashing ACTION: A

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
B A B
The immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is required. Wait 10 minutes. If persists, the immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is required only if Red LED (1) URG is on The immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is not required
B C
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 327 / 542
44.4 Checks by Craft Terminal

This paragraph explains how to login the CT application and sums up the common used commands for system status display and checks. For screen details, please refer to the CT Operators Handbook. N.B. These operations can be done by the First Level Maintenance Operator only if expressly authorized by the Station Manager.
a ) Craft Terminal (CT) connection and startup

1) connect Craft Terminal (CT) to Equipment plug CT suitable cable to PC and to CRAFT TERM connector on SAM module (see (M3) in Fig. 85. on page 173). CT start power on CT and wait for PC startup Start 1320CTQ3CTP v.x.x.x ; notes: if choice 1320CTQ3CTP v.x.x.x is not available, PC is not configured as Craft Terminal: Software Package loading is necessary x.x.x depends on Software Package loaded after a while, the Network Element Synthesis screen will appear, showing all Network Elements that can be selected. After this Start operation, all NEs appear with symbol ? (it means they are not supervised)
2)
b ) Start supervision on a selected Network Element (NE)

From screen Network Element Synthesis ( see point a ) 2 ) ) : 1) 2) select interested Network Element (NE) clicking once left mouse button on it while NE selected, with right mouse button choose Start Supervision , and with left mouse button execute it (click once) wait until the symbol ? becomes colored (it means NE in supervised state)
c ) Alarm Surveillance
From screen Network Element Synthesis with NE in supervised state ( see point b ) 2 ) ): 1) 2) select interested Network Element (NE) clicking once left mouse button on it while NE selected, with right mouse button choose Show NE alarms , and with left mouse button execute it (click once) (note: if Show NE alarms does not appear, wait few seconds, then try again) after a while, alarm screen will appear showing alarms. At the end close all alarm screens.
d ) Network Element login

From screen Network Element Synthesis with NE in supervised state ( see point b ) 2 ) ): 1) 2) select interested Network Element (NE) clicking once left mouse button on it while NE selected, with right mouse button choose NE login , and with left mouse button execute it (click once) (if NE login does not appear, wait some seconds, then try again). The login screen appears. Type: in Login field: as communicated by the Station Manager in Password field: as communicated by the Station Manager Then click OK with left mouse button if the login is accepted, the USM screen appears. The following checks are now possible.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
3)
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 328 / 542
e ) Radio Frequency check

From USM screen of the NE ( see point d ) 3 ) ):
1)
menu: Radio Frequency after a while, Frequency screen will appear showing Transmitted and Received frequencies. At the end close the Frequency screen
f ) Transmitted and Received power levels

From USM screen of the NE ( see point d ) 3 ) ): 1) 2) menu: Radio Power Measurement Graphic Power Measurement after a while, Graphic Power Measurement screen will appear on Graphic Power Measurement screen, select channel to be measured with left mouse button, then click OK after a while, Measure screen will appear on Measure screen, click with left mouse button on j Show Details to see detailed power measures. At the end close all measure screens
3)
g ) Performance Monitoring
From USM screen of the NE ( see point d ) 3 ) ): 1) 2) 3) menu: Rack SubRack Board wait for Board screen opening select the circuit Regenerator Section Termination ( RST radio or RST line ) menu: Port Performance Display History Data after a while, measure screen will appear showing RadioSide Performance Monitoring data. At the end close measure screen. It is assumed that PM has already been launched and that at least 15 minutes or 24 hours (according to the set PM period) have been passed from the launch. PM launch can be carried out on port view screen as follows: with left mouse button, select the block RST on the right menu: Port Performance Configure Performance Monitoring select NE 15 m or NE 24 h click on Data Collection click on Apply
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 329 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
330 / 542
45 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Please refer to chapter 41 on page 311 for an introduction to the basic concepts of equipment maintenance. Preventive maintenance is a periodic set of measurements and checks. This maintenance discovers those devices whose function has deteriorated with time and therefore need adjustment or replacement. Typically, digital equipment requires no routine maintenance. The equipment allows to assess the quality of the connection links or counting the errored events and obtaining performance data. The Performance Monitoring Application, described in para.46.5.7 on page 345, allows this function.
45.1 Preventive Maintenance every year

It is suggested to carry out the following operations yearly: [1] Mechanical checks Check that: the power supply units, the coaxial cables, the waveguides, the mounting fixtures are connected correctly. Grounding check Check that the racks, subracks, and modules are grounded. Power cables check SAFETY RULES DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by 48 V dc. DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals. Make these operations: Check that the power cable is perfectly safety grounded. Make sure that the subrack has been tightly fastened to the rack with screws, to guarantee grounding (the rack is connected to the station ground). [4] Operative checks Visual check: During the normal operation, check the led normal condition, as specified in Tab. 59. on page 337 Checks by Craft Terminal Refer to the specific attachment of the LineUp guide (REF.[D] or [E] on page 524) N.B. some suggested checks are indicated in para.44.4 on page 328.
[2] [3]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 331 / 542
45.1.1 Preventive Maintenance for Fans Assembled Units (if equipped)

The MTBF of the Fans Assembled Unit equipped below BaseBand shelf (and, if equipped, below 1650SMC shelf) is about 20 years, provided that Environmental Conditions regarding sand and dust are in the limits specified by Recc.ETS 300 019 Class 3.1 (see point 13.7.2 on page 101). Even though the operating environment is compliant with these limits, it is suggested to carry out the following operation every three years: pull out Fans Assembled Unit and clean fans removing dust and sand. In the case of worse environmental conditions, perform this operation more frequently.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 332 / 542
46 TROUBLESHOOTING 46.1 Introduction

This chapter explains the troubleshooting operations to be carried out to identify faulty units: General flowchart of corrective maintenance Alarm acknowledgment and attending TroubleShooting starting with visual indications TroubleShooting via Craft Terminal on page 334 on page 335 on page 336 on page 340
If not yet done, please read N.B. in para.43.3.1 on page 322. The Corrective Maintenance general flowchart (Fig. 135. on page 334) includes both troubleshooting operations and replacement/repair procedures described in following chapters of this section. The handbook parts that should be read before starting this chapter are: chapter 12 on page 35 chapter 21 on page 121 System Description System configurations, to take into account the actual system configuration Operative information on equipment boards System cabling (if problems on cabling can be suspected) Maintenance Policy Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts First Level Maintenance
chapter 23 on page 167 chapter 24 on page 205 chapter 41 on page 311 chapter 43 on page 317 chapter 44 on page 325
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 333 / 542
46.2 General flowchart of corrective maintenance

START Alarm acknowledgment and attending (para.46.3 page 335)
TroubleShooting starting with visual indications (para.46.4 page 336)
Other measures
TroubleShooting starting via Craft Terminal (para.46.5 page 340). Identification of a unit to be replaced. Unit replacement all units except transceiver (chapter 47 page 347) transceiver (chapter 48 page 369)
System check via Craft Terminal try again with another unit N Fault repaired ?
Y If possible, restore replaced unit in the system and perform system check via Craft Terminal, to verify that is really faulty N Fixed fault ? Y
possible intermittent failure
Restore spare part in the system and perform system check via Craft Terminal Send back faulty unit to Repair Centre together with Repair Form compiled (chapter 49 page 395) END Fig. 135. Corrective Maintenance general flowchart
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 334 / 542
46.3 Alarm acknowledgment and attending

Please refer to Fig. 135. on page 334, for the position of this step inside the corrective maintenance general flowchart. (1) OR of all URGENT alarms (red) (2) OR of all NOT URGENT alarms (red) (3) ATTENDED alarm (yellow) (4) OR of all ABNORMAL conditions (yellow) (5) OR of all INDICATIVE alarms (yellow) (7) Lamp Test Pushbutton (8) Alarm storing Pushbutton (Attended)
(6) bicolor led: red on: Card failure alarm green flashing: SW download in progress (internal or toward other boards) off: normal condition
Fig. 136. System Controller front view (particular) 46.3.1 Alarm acknowledgment The need for Operator intervention is notified: locally (in front of the equipment or in the station) when: on SYSCO board (see Fig. 136. above) one of the leds (1) (2) (3) (4) (URG/NURG/IND/ABN) lights up or the same alarms, propagated through the Station Alarms cable, operate the TRU lamps (see para.44.3.1 on page 326) or similar remote device and/or when the alarm LEDs listed in Tab. 59. on page 337 are not in normal status.
remotely (in a TMN maintenance center) when the OS acknowledges the presence of problems in the station.
When the local Operator decides to manage the problem, he should carry out the alarm attending operation (see para.46.3.2 below). This operation has the scope to notify locally in the station and remotely to the TMN maintenance center that a local operator is attending the problem. 46.3.2 Alarm Attending See Fig. 136. above: the detected alarm condition can be stored through pushbutton (8) on the System Controller unit. This operation will turn OFF the LEDs URG/NURG (1) (2) and will light up the yellow LED ATTD (3) on the System Controller unit (Attended). a possible new alarm condition (following the Attending) will turn on the LEDs URG (1) or NURG (2). when the fault has been repaired, the yellow lamp (if the alarm had been attended) or the red ones (if the alarm had not been attended and no further alarms had occurred in the mean time) will turn off. 05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 335 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
46.4 TroubleShooting starting with visual indications

Please refer to Fig. 135. on page 334, for the position of this step inside the corrective maintenance general flowchart. Some problems may be localized looking the LEDs indicated in following Tab. 59. Refer to Fig. 137. herebelow to carry out this procedure. In any case, the inspection through the Craft Terminal (if possible) is recommended before doing any unit replacement. N.B. Before starting this inspection, perform lamp test (para 23.3.2.1 page 174). START N one or both PSF green led off ? Y
any PSU green led off ?
verify circuit breakers on TRU (see para.23.7.1 on page 200) Y
PSU switch on ? N
problem solved? N
PSU probably faulty
PSF probably faulty why ? solve problem
SYSCO card fail on (led (6) red)? N perform lamp test (para 23.3.2.1 page 174)
OK ? Y
carry out procedure in para.46.4.2 page 339
try login NE by Craft Terminal N carry out procedure in para.46.4.1 page 339 Y
login successful ?
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
carry out procedure in para.46.5 page 340
Fig. 137. TroubleShooting starting with visual indications
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 336 / 542
Tab. 59. Normal condition (no alarms) of LEDs on equipments units
TRU SHELF
UNIT TRU
FIGURE Fig. 199. on page 482 all
LED
NORMAL STATUS OFF
BASE BAND SHELF board area

UNIT System Controller Service RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY (09) Modem (09) PSU (09) PSF (01) FIGURE Fig. 134. on page 327 Fig. 87. on page 177 Fig. 89. on page 179 Fig. 93. on page 183 Fig. 82. on page 171 Fig. 82. on page 171 LED (6) bicolor (10) red (1) red (1) red (2) green (4) green NORMAL STATUS OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON
BASE BAND SHELF access area

UNIT Additional Housekeeping FIGURE Fig. 108. on page 203 LED (1) red NORMAL STATUS OFF
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
UNIT FIGURE LED (1) green (2) red NORMAL STATUS ON OFF
Transceiver (09) (0 9)
Fig. 102. Fig 102 on page 195
FAN SHELF (01)

UNIT FANS Assembled (01) FIGURE Fig. 105. on page 198 LED (1) red NORMAL STATUS OFF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 337 / 542
Tab. 60. , Tab. 61. and Fig. 138. herebelow sum up the information that can be seen on SERVICE and RRASTANDBY units with regard to the status of protections at radio side (refer to para.52.4.2 thru 52.4.3 (pages 445 on, for details). Tab. 60. Indications on SERVICE for Rxside protections INDICATION (1) n (2) off on 0 off on MEANING (Rx section) Rx ch n in service and no manual operation active (automatic switch active). There is a problem (local or remote) on the link. Rx ch n (MAIN) in service for Lockout local manual command Rx ch 0 (SPARE) in service and no manual operation active (automatic switch active). Rx ch 0 (SPARE) in service for Force_Switch local manual command
Tab. 61. Indications on RRASTANDBY for Txside protections INDICATION (3) n 0 Tx ch n (MAIN) protected by Tx ch 0 (SPARE). Occasional traffic not transmitted All Tx ch n (MAIN) in service. Tx ch 0 (SPARE) in service: free or engaged by occasional traffic SERVICE (1) Indication of the No of the Rx protected channel (1 digit display) (2) Manual operation of N+1 logic (yellow led) (3) Indication of the No of the Tx protected channel (1 digit display) MEANING (Tx section)
RRASTANDBY Tx
Fig. 138. Indications on SERVICE and RRASTANDBY for protections
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 338 / 542
46.4.1 Problems with the Craft Terminal Whenever the login with the Craft Terminal does not work, proceed with the following checks:
Restart the Craft Terminal (logout and switch off/on). With the Craft Terminal connected to the equipment Finterface, open the Alcatel Lower Layer Manager screen (by clicking with the mouse pointer on the Alcatel symbol menu bar). The fields to be verified in this screen are: Port COM1 Physical ON OSI or Logical ON in the MSWindows
Verify that the CT port is effectively that connected by cable to equipments F interface If Physical is OFF, the problem can be due to: CT physical port faulty SYSCOs Finterface port faulty the cable If possible, verify the correct working of the Craft Terminal and of the CTF interface cable using them with another Alcatel equipment. If the problem persists also with it, solve the problem. Otherwise, proceed with the SYSCO unit replacement, or perform steps indicated in para.46.4.2 herebelow. If OSI/Logical is OFF, the problem can be due to: FLASH CARD missing on SYSCO unit (verify) or FLASH CARD/SYSCO faulty SYSCOs Radio Controller section faulty or in abnormal condition. Proceed with the SYSCO unit replacement, or perform steps indicated in para.46.4.2 herebelow.
46.4.2 CARD FAIL red led on SYSCO Unit turned on If the bicolor LED CARD FAIL on SYSCO unit is redon (led (6) in Fig. 136. on page 335), (or it is off, but lamp test does not work) and the Craft Terminal application: responds (login successful), proceed investigating the problems through the Craft Terminal application does not respond (login unsuccessful): 1) 2) 3) 4) push the RESET button on SYSCO unit (button (9) in Fig. 85. on page 173) and wait 3 minutes; if, within 3 minutes, the Craft Terminal application responds, open the Alarm status procedure and proceed investigating the system state; if, after 3 minutes, the Craft Terminal application does not respond, replace the SYSCO unit, as described in para.47.3.6 on page 354; if the problem persists also after the SYSCO unit replacement, the failure or content corruption of the FLASH CARD must be suspected (a very extraordinary event); proceed with its replacement, as indicated in para.47.3.7 on page 356.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 339 / 542
46.5 TroubleShooting via Craft Terminal

Please refer to Fig. 135. on page 334, for the position of this step inside the corrective maintenance general flowchart. The ECT/RECT application (see para.12.8.6 on page 81) includes several types of functions for system maintenance (used in lineup operations, too), as depicted in following table: FUNCTION Alarm Surveillance Operators Controls of the protection switches Loopbacks TX mute function (local and remote) Not Intrusive BER measurements J0 Section Trace management Performance Monitoring Radio Performance Monitoring Event Log Additional information on other handbooks N.B. FUNCTION DESCRIPTION para.46.5.1 on page 341 para.46.5.2 on page 341 para.46.5.3 on page 342 para.46.5.4 on page 343 para.46.5.5 on page 344 para.46.5.6 on page 344 para.46.5.7 on page 345 para.46.5.8 on page 345 para.46.5.9 on page 346 para.46.5.10 on page 346
The actual availability of some of functions listed above depend on the SWP release and version used. F or further information, please refer to the CT Operators Handbook associated to the SWP release and version you use.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 340 / 542
46.5.1 Alarm Surveillance (1330AS) The 1330AS application embedded in the 9600LSY SWP allows the Operator to examine the alarms currently present in the equipment or in the radio link or in the SDH / PDH network. They can be selected through suitable SW filters in order to discriminate them according to the subset the Operator wants to see (e.g. NE alarms, Equipment alarms, Transmission alarms, External Points alarms, etc.). The troubleshooting operating instructions and details of the alarms for each card and relevant indications are included in the section Maintenance of the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK. The operating instructions make it possible to identify the faulty unit for all assemblies of the system. Having located the suspected faulty unit/module, replace it with a spare one (see para.47 on page 347). N.B. On the Craft Terminal (C.T.) and on the Operation System (O.S). application the URGENT (URG), NOT URGENT (NURG) and INDICATIVE alarm are named in a different way; the relationship between this two terminologies is explained in Tab. 62. herebelow.
Tab. 62. Relationship between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm severity terminology used for the System Controller unit remote alarm connector pins. Alarm severity terminology on C.T. and O.S. CRITICAL or MAJOR MINOR WARNING INDETERMINATE (not used) Alarm severity terminology used for SYSTEM CONTROLLER UNIT remote alarm connector pins URG , T*URG, T*RURG, NURG, T*NURG, T*RNURG INDICATIVE
46.5.2 Operators Controls of the protection switches In certain troubleshooting conditions, changing the state of the protection switches can be useful to fix problems. Details on protection switches and on relevant Operators Controls, for each system configuration, are given in following paragraphs: N+1 switch logic 1:N switch logic para.52.4.2 on page 445 para.52.4.3 on page 452
Such paragraphs describe the actions that can be carried out from the logical point of view. For actual operative procedures, please refer to the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 341 / 542
46.5.3 Loopbacks Loopbacks give the possibility of executing some system functional tests, like the BER test using a pattern generator connected to the equipment input/output ports, thus making fault locations and maintenance tests fast and simple. The following loopbacks can be performed: Line loopback (RRA) A Line Loopback is a loopback where the incoming signal to a physical port is looped back onto the outgoing signal (see Fig. 139. ) Internal loopback (RRA RFCOH) An Internal Loopback is a loopback where the internal outgoing signal of a port is looped back onto its internal incoming signal (see Fig. 140. and Fig. 141. )
All of these are loop and continue loopbacks (the signal is sent back and continues its path).
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH
MODEM
RT RSPI
RRA
Fig. 139. RRA line loopback
MD
TRI
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH
MODEM
RT RSPI
RRA
Fig. 140. RRA internal loopback
MD
TRI
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH RSPI
MODEM
RT RSPI
RRA
Fig. 141. RFCOH Internal loopback
MD
TRI
the residual BER values (RBER) are not guaranteed in Radio Local Loop condition on. For further information, please refer to the C.T. Operators Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 342 / 542
46.5.4 TX mute function (local and remote) With the Tx Mute function, the facility to switch off a transmitter is provided to the ECT. This facility is not available with the RECT. Operator Commands The ECT operator has the possibility to manage this functionality on the two stations of a radio link, switching off a local transmitter (belonging to the NE physically connected to the ECT) or a remote one (belonging to the farend NE). In all configurations (N+0, N+1), each transmitter is switched off independently with a dedicated ECT command. When a switch off command is executed, an indication of abnormal condition will be notified to ECT/RECT. Functional Description Both for local and remote switch off commands, the request is addressed to the local station. In order to perform this functionality on remote station, a 64Kb/s Radio Frame Complementary Overhead (RFCOH) byte is used as communication channel between the stations of the radio link. In the N+1 and N+0 configurations this communication channel is protected (1+1), as well as all the other radio service channels. The switchoff request, received by the remote station, is sent to the relevant transmitter for execution. When the ECT removes the command, the transmitter returns to be managed according to the modality active when the switchoff was been activated (with the configured power level if the ATPC is disabled, according to the standard ATPC way of working if the ATPC is enabled). Commissioning Phase In order to make the commissioning phase easier and to avoid to produce interference if the frequency is not yet properly set, the status of all the transmitters out of the factory is forced to switched off (default value). When the commissioning phase is completed, by means of ECT, it is possible to switchon each transmitter. The status of each transmitter (switched on or off) is stored in the EC Data Base and in EEPROM of the RT. Then in case of substitution of the RT, the new RT will be automatically configured with the Transmitter status stored in the EC Data Base. This configuration does not take place in case of absence of the SYSCO and the RT is switched on or off, according to the related transmitter status stored in the RT EEPROM. For further information and operative procedures about TX mute function, please refer to the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK (squelch management).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 343 / 542
46.5.5 Not Intrusive BER measurements This feature provides a radio side BER evaluation by means of B1 mismatch computation externally to the radio switching section, without any degradation on the main signal. A hop BER measurement is provided on the selected channels and on onesecond basis. This measurement is activated and deactivated explicitly by the operator. When the measurement is activated a temporal window is opened during which the number of violations are computed in order to define the BER. The temporal duration of this window is not definable a priori, it should be closed when the number of violations detected from the opening of the temporal window, are sufficient to determine the BER. When this number of violations is reached, the BER can be calculated. The parameters that the NE has to provide on request, when the current temporal window is opened, are: the duration of the current measure period the number of violations detected till the moment of the reading
A new method has been implemented to support this function. A single time interval is managed, opened and closed by the operator. BER is evaluated in this interval using as a reference period the time between the opening of the measurements and the request for reporting. Actions supported via ECTUSM Measurement Start (Open the time interval) Readout of the data (can be repeated until the interval is closed) Measurements Stop (Close the time interval). Data provided from the Equipment at the request No. of Violations in B1 since the opening of the time interval BER evaluated in the same period Elapsed time between opening of the measurement and request of readout. Time when measurements is not possible are not accounted for For further information and operative procedures about not intrusive BER measurements, please refer to the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
46.5.6 J0 Section Trace management This feature provides the ability to setup the section trace handling on the STM1 interface at Regenerator layer. The J0 byte of the RSOH is used, according to the standard 16 bytes multiframe format defined in the G.707 recommendation. The equipment supports setup, validation and monitoring of the section trace identifiers under control of the CT/OS systems interfaces. The Section trace monitoring can be enabled/disabled by operator. A single byte format is optionally supported. For further information and operative procedures about J0 Section Trace management, please refer to the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 344 / 542
46.5.7 Performance Monitoring The Performance Monitoring is responsible for quality events counting and reporting.
This paragraph concerns the monitoring of the common functional blocks supported by the LHR/LHRC NE. For the specific radio blocks: RSPI and RPS, refer to the next para.46.5.8. LHR/LHRC NE supports only the performance monitoring process with the maintenance purpose: unidirectional performance monitoring of RS associated collection periods are 15 minutes and 24 hours. For each channel both line and radio side performance monitoring are supported in the current release (in case of N+1 configuration the monitoring of the RRA spare channel is possible only if extra traffic is supported). Types of counters: Errored Second (ES) Severely Errored Second (SES) Background Block Error (BBE) Unavailable Second (UAS) Out of Frame Second (OFS) For further information and operative procedures about Performance Monitoring, please refer to the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
46.5.8 Radio Performance Monitoring The radio specific performance monitoring defines new radio specific performance primitives, events and parameters with associated requirements for data collection, threshold and history treatment. It covers the following items: the performance monitoring of the RSPI functional block; the performance monitoring of the RPS functional block; the monitoring of the RPS criteria; it is used as an estimation of the radio hop quality monitoring. Performance monitoring of the RSPI functional block Performance monitoring of the RSPI functional block is not supported by the current release. Performance monitoring of the RPS functional block Performance monitoring of the RPS functional block is not supported by the current release. Monitoring of the RPS criteria The hop section performance monitoring gives the quality of service of the radio section inside the protection one. Due to the RPS location in the second generation radio NEs, it is not possible to perform the monitoring of the hop section by means of standard methodologies. In order to provide the possibility to compare the performance of the hop section of different radio channels, a RPS Criteria Monitoring is provided. This monitoring is based on the following primitives: Early Warning Low BER High BER Signal Fail, it is generated by the RSPI functional block alarms (rx side) and by the fail of the cards that handle the signal inside the radio section (i.e. RX, DEM).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 345 / 542
A second is declared EWS, LBERS, HBERS or SFS according to the occurrence of the primitive with higher priority (i.e. in contemporary presence in one second of EW, LBER, HBER, SF occurrences only a SFS event is declared). Monitoring of the RPS criteria is supported by the current release. N.B. The RPS criteria can be monitored also in the N+0 configuration, even if in this configuration, the hop and link (outside the protection) sections are coincident.
Performance data collection and history treatment For each radio specific type of performance monitoring the performance data collection and history management are performed according to the ITUT Recc. G.784. One current register is required for 15 minutes and one for 24 hours. At least 16 recent registers are required for 15 minutes and one for 24 hours. For further information and operative procedures about Radio Performance Monitoring, please refer to the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
46.5.9 Event Log The generic events occurred and discriminated by the LHR/LHRC NE are stored in one or more Event Log files. The ELM (Event Log Manager) application embedded in the 9600LSY SWP allows the Operator to read such log files, in order to have historical data that can be useful to troubleshoot the equipment or the radio link or the SDH / PDH network, in case of multiple alarm conditions or intermittent alarms. The event log file examination is quite complex; it is reserved to Alcatel skilled personnel as a debug tool (only using filters on the unmeaningful events, it is possible to understand the meaning of the stored data). For further information and operative procedures about Event Log, please refer to the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK
46.5.10 Additional information on other handbooks

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Lineup Guide (REF.[D] or [E] on page 524) gives summary instructions on how to use many of the functions explained before, in order to carry out equipment functional checks as a whole, in particular as far as checks on radio hop are concerned. Interference investigation procedure (REF.[M] on page 527) describes in detail how to test the radio hop in order to find possible interferences. 05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 346 / 542
ED
The one second performance events are the following (listed with increasing priority): Early Warning Second (EWS) This event is defined as a one second period with at least one occurrence of EW. Low BER Second (LBERS) This event is defined as a one second period with at least one occurrence of LBER. High BER Second (HBERS) This event is defined as a one second period with at least one occurrence of HBER. Signal Fail Second (SFS) This event is defined as a one second period with at least one occurrence of SF.
47 UNIT REPLACEMENT 47.1 Introduction

Please refer to chapter 41 on page 311 for an introduction to the basic concepts of equipment maintenance. This chapter describes replacement procedures for all the units (except transceivers) of 9600LSY equipment in the LHR configuration, and and is organized as follows: Summary information on FPGA upgrade herebelow
Warnings on page 349, including: EMC norms Safety rules Cautions to avoid equipment damage Unit replacement procedures , according to the following list: UNIT TYPE PSU PSF SYSCO FLASH CARD SERVICE RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY OPTICAL MODULE MODEM FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT TRANSCEIVER REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE ON PAGE 350 352 354 356 357 359 362 364 367 refer to chapter 48 on page 369
47.2 Summary information on FPGA upgrade

Please refer to the chapter FPGA UPGRADE in section Installation of C.T. Operators Handbook for the description of this feature and its operative instructions by Craft Terminal. Some of these descriptions and instructions are repeated here for reader convenience.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 347 / 542
Tab. 63. herebelow points out the units involved. Tab. 63. FPGA list DAIANA ENTONI SCIARON NUNZIA SANDRA WILLY a) SYSCO SMA subunit of SERVICE RRASBY RRACHANNEL MODEM 128QAM MODEM 32/64QAM
FPGA
HOUSED ON UNIT
Activation of FPGA automatic upgrade condition The FPGA automatic upgrade condition set up is performed through the following commands by Craft Terminal: select LHRC subrack select SYSCO board execute Equipment Reset The execution of the upgrade procedure (FPGA download in progress) is pointed out by the following indications: the SEP (*) indication is displayed on ECT (*) SEP stands for Sfwr Environment Problem, that in this case means Firmware download in progress. the greenflashing of the bicolor led (6) on SYSCO board (see Fig. 134. on page 327) that will last until the procedure ends. The procedure can last from few minutes (no FPGA upgraded) to some hours (all FPGAs upgraded in a LHRC fully equipped system).
b)
c)
Upgrade command survival After the FPGA upgrade procedure launch, the command remains always active, even after the upgrade procedure has been completed. It means that, if you insert into the system one of the boards listed in Tab. 63. above, it is automatically subject to the FPGA upgrade process. Special conditions: Upgrade command is lost in the following cases: system power off/on RC reset SYSCO board extraction/insertion Upgrade command survives in the following cases: EC reset NE restart
d)
FPGA version check (available starting with SWP 2.0) 1) 2) 3) execute Diagnosis Log Browsing Software Trace Log confirm to see the produced log compare logged versions with those stated in the chapter V.xxx specific information of the Operators Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 348 / 542
47.3 Warnings
47.3.1 EMC norms
ATTENTION
EMC NORMS
WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA. A.4.3 ON PAGE 500 47.3.2 Safety rules The Safety Rules stated in para.A.3 on page 492 thru 498 describe the operations and/or precautions to observe to safeguard operating personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety. Please read them with accuracy before to start every action on the equipments.
SAFETY RULES
General Carefully observe the frontpanel warning labels prior to working on optical connections while the equipment is inservice. Should it be necessary to cut off power during the maintenance phase, proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream (rack or station distribution frame) Electrical safety DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by 48 V dc. DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals. Optical safety DANGER: Possibility of eyes damage: read carefully and strictly observe the rules pointed out in para.A.3.4.2 on page 496. 47.3.3 Cautions to avoid equipment damage
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Please refer to para.23.2 on page 168.
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 349 / 542
47.3.4 PSU replacement procedure For PSU view, see Fig. 82. on page 171.
1)
get the spare from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the unit to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do not touch the electronic components. ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) do not extract the spare unit from its antistatic envelope, until you have worn the antistatic protection device kit
2)
turn off (position O) the switch on the PSU unit front panel: of the spare PSU unit and of the PSU unit to be replaced ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) For the high current absorbed by the unit, its extraction/insertion with its switch in open position could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the units and backpanels connectors.
3)
extract the faulty PSU unit as follows: wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 200. on page 501) and connect its termination to a grounded structure ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges turn off the screws (one present into the extraction/insertion lever of the board, the other at bottom of the board) ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the breakage of lever operate the lever to extract the board
4)
insert the spare PSU unit ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) Please read carefully pages 169170 for the right operations and forbidden operations to carry out in order to insert the unit
5)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
now you could wear off the antistatic protection device kit
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 350 / 542
6)
if not yet done, turn on the screws fixing the board to the rack ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage) The screw tightening torque for fixing the units to the subrack must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) " 10 %
Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking. 7) 8) turn on (position I ) the switch on the new PSU unit front panel wait some minutes (software download is usually carried out toward Supervisory Units) N.B. 9) software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare units SU is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.
check the system status by LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal. ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) To connect the CT cable (at SYSCOs F interface and/or PC side): verify that the PC is switched off (if switched on, close all running applications, then switch off it) connect suitable cable to SYSCOs F interface and PC side now the PC can be safely switched on.
10 ) fill the Repair Form and return the faulty unit together with such Repair Form to the Alcatel authorized repair center (see para.49.2 on page 395)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 351 / 542
47.3.5 PSF replacement procedure For PSF view, see Fig. 82. on page 171.
1)
get the spare PSF board from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the unit to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do not touch the electronic components. ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) do not extract the spare unit from its antistatic envelope, until you have worn the antistatic protection device kit
2) 3)
if possible, switch off the TRUs circuit breaker that gives power supply to the cable connected to the PSF unit to be replaced. disconnect the power supply cable from the PSF front connector SAFETY RULES If operation indicated in previous point 2 ) has not been carried out, a TNV2 (battery) voltage is present on the interface connector (cable side); do not touch the pins when unplugged. DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
4)
extract the faulty PSF unit as follows: wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 200. on page 501) and connect its termination to a grounded structure ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges turn off the screws (one present into the extraction/insertion lever of the board, the other at bottom of the board) ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the breakage of lever operate the lever to extract the board
5)
insert the spare PSF unit ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) Please read carefully pages 169170 for the right operations and forbidden operations to carry out in order to insert the unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 352 / 542
6) 7)
now you could wear off the antistatic protection device kit if not yet done, turn on the screws fixing the board to the rack ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) The screw tightening torque for fixing the units to the subrack must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) " 10 %
Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking. 8) connect the power supply cable to the PSF front connector N.B. 9) SAFETY RULES: see point 3 ) on page 352
if switched off in step 2 ) above, switch on the circuit breaker giving power supply to the cable connected to the new PSF unit
10 ) check the system status by LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal. ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) To connect the CT cable (at SYSCOs F interface and/or PC side): verify that the PC is switched off (if switched on, close all running applications, then switch off it) connect suitable cable to SYSCOs F interface and PC side now the PC can be safely switched on. 11 ) fill the Repair Form and return the faulty unit together with such Repair Form to the Alcatel authorized repair center (see para.49.2 on page 395)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 353 / 542
47.3.6 SYSCO replacement procedure For SYSCO views, see Fig. 83. and Fig. 84. on page 172.
1)
get the spare SYSCO board from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the unit to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do not touch the electronic components. N.B. The P/Ns matching of the ESCON subunit is not important. ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) do not extract the spare unit from its antistatic envelope, until you have worn the antistatic protection device kit
2)
if the CT is connected to the SYSCOs F interface: ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) perform the logoff, exiting from the CT applications close all other running applications, if any switch off the PC
3) 4)
disconnect all cables from the faulty unit front plate. Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are present on the cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly; extract the faulty SYSCO unit as follows: wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 200. on page 501) and connect its termination to a grounded structure ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges turn off the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the breakage of levers operate the levers to extract the board
5)
extract the FLASH CARD from faulty SYSCO (see Fig. 83. on page 172)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 354 / 542
6)
spare SYSCO unit hardware presetting: accessing the handbook Hardware setting documentation (REF.[K] on page 527), get the relevant MSZZQ documents get the spare unit SYSCO and, using the above said documents to locate switches: a) set the dipswitches on ESCON subunit exactly as those of the replaced unit ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) These dipswitches must be usually in OFF position. If unproperly set, these dipswitches will reset the FLASH CARD content, and you will loose all the software herein contained (programs and system configuration data) b) set the dipswitches on SYSCO main board exactly as those of the replaced unit ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) some of these dipswitches (that define the system configuration), if unproperly set, will cause system malfunction even though hardware is not faulty. Care must also be taken to switch defining service battery voltage
7) 8)
reinsert the FLASH CARD into the spare unit SYSCO (in case of doubts see Fig. 84. on page 172) insert the spare SYSCO board in the system ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) Please read carefully pages 169170 for the right operations and forbidden operations to carry out in order to insert the unit
9)
10 ) if not yet done, turn on the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) The screw tightening torque for fixing the units to the subrack must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) " 10 %
Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking. 11 ) reconnect all cables on the front plate exactly as they were connected before the unit extraction.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 355 / 542
N.B.
software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare units SC, RC and SU, is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.
13 ) FPGA automatic upgrade condition setting & SYSCOs FPGA upgrade Please refer to para.47.2 on page 347 for summary and detailed information on this feature. After the bicolor LED redflashing condition (led (6) in Fig. 85. on page 173) ends, you must launch the FPGA automatic upgrade condition to upgrade the SYSCOs FPGA as explained in point a ) on page 348 (automatic FPGA upgrade condition, even if set previously, is always lost every time SYSCO is extracted/inserted).
14 ) check the system status by LED visual inspection 15 ) connect Craft Terminal and check the system status by its Alarm application. ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) To connect the CT cable (at SYSCOs F interface and/or PC side): verify that the PC is switched off (if switched on, close all running applications, then switch off it) connect suitable cable to SYSCOs F interface and PC side now the PC can be safely switched on. 16 ) fill the Repair Form and return the faulty unit together with such Repair Form to the Alcatel authorized repair center (see para.49.2 on page 395)
47.3.7 FLASH CARD replacement procedure For views, see Fig. 83. and Fig. 84. on page 172. The need for this replacement is described in para.46.4.2 on page 339. The FLASH CARD contains all system software. Its replacement with an empty spare FLASH CARD (see para.43.3.4 on page 324) must be done following the specific instructions (NE software download via SIBDL) given, according to the SWP used, in the: 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 Line Up guide (REF.[D] on page 524) or: 9600LSY/LHR Rel.2.0 Line Up guide (REF.[E] on page 524) or: 9600LSY Rel.1.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0 (REF.[N] on page 527) from ED.07. or: 9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 from V2.0.2 (REF.[P] on page 527) from ED.03.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 356 / 542
12 ) wait some minutes (software download is usually carried out toward Supervisory Units) After the unit insertion, you should wait about 10 minutes for the completion of software download from FLASH CARD toward the new boards SC, RC and SU (N.B.); this phase is notified by bicolor LED redflashing condition (led (6) in Fig. 85. on page 173). At the end, all red LEDs on SYSCO unit should be off.
47.3.8 SERVICE replacement procedure For SERVICE views, see Fig. 86. and Fig. 87. on pages 176177.
1)
disconnect all cables from the faulty unit front plate. Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are present on the cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly; N.B. to extract Cables 1.0/2.3, use the special extractor [see (3) in Fig. 131. on page 321] extract the faulty SERVICE unit as follows: wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 200. on page 501) and connect its termination to a grounded structure ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges turn off the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the breakage of levers operate the levers to extract the board
2)
3)
get the spare SERVICE unit from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the board to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do not touch the electronic components. If the SERVICE to be replaced houses the ADDITIONAL VOICE babyboard, verify that the spare part does really have the same babyboard (see Tab. 58. on page 322). spare SERVICE unit hardware setting: accessing the handbook Hardware setting documentation (REF.[K] on page 527), get the relevant MSZZQ documents locate the position of setting switches using the appropriate MSZZQ documents set these switches on the spare part exactly as they are set on the unit to be replaced
4)
5)
insert the spare SERVICE board in the system ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) Please read carefully pages 169170 for the right operations and forbidden operations to carry out in order to insert the unit
6)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 357 / 542
7)
if not yet done, turn on the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) The screw tightening torque for fixing the units to the subrack must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %

8) 9)
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) " 10 %
Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking. reconnect all cables on the front plate exactly as they were connected before the unit extraction. wait some minutes (software download is usually carried out toward Supervisory Units) After the unit insertion, you should wait about 10 minutes for the completion of software download from FLASH CARD toward the new boards SU (N.B.); this phase is notified by SYSCOs bicolor LED redflashing condition (led (6) in Fig. 85. on page 173). N.B. software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare units SU is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.
10 ) spare FPGA upgrade Please refer to para.47.2 on page 347 for summary and detailed information on this feature. After the SYSCOs bicolor LED redflashing condition (led (6) in Fig. 85. on page 173) ends, there are two cases: the automatic FPGA upgrade condition is active: in this case you have nothing to do, because the spare FPGA, if necessary, has already been carried out the automatic FPGA upgrade condition is not active: in this case you must launch the FPGA automatic upgrade condition to upgrade the spares FPGA , as explained in point a ) on page 348
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 358 / 542
47.3.9 RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY replacement procedure For RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY views, see Fig. 88. , Fig. 89. and Fig. 90. on pages 178180. 1) get the spare RRACHANNEL or RRASTANDBY from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the unit to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do not touch the electronic components. ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) do not extract the spare unit from its antistatic envelope, until you have worn the antistatic protection device kit 2) 3) remove protection cap, if present, from the faulty board front plate disconnect all cables from the faulty board front plate or from the optical module, if equipped. Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are present on the cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly; N.B. to extract Cables 1.0/2.3, use the special extractor [see (3) in Fig. 131. on page 321] SAFETY RULES IN CASE OF OPTICAL MODULES Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by the fiber optic transmitters can cause eyes damages. Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of units containing laser devices or cables transporting optical signals, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance documents and the general rules pointed out in para.A.3.4.2 on page 496. 4) extract the faulty RRA unit as follows: wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 200. on page 501) and connect its termination to a grounded structure ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges turn off the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the breakage of levers operate the levers to extract the board
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 359 / 542
5)
if the unit is equipped with Optical module to be recovered and mounted on the spare part, extract it from the faulty RRA board and mount it on the spare RRA board as follows:
a)
turn off the two screws fixing the module to the faulty RRA board: these screws are the same depicted for the module drawer in Fig. 89. on page 179 (do not unscrew the other two screws of the module) extract the optical module from the faulty RRA board using the special extractor [see (2) in Fig. 131. on page 321] dismount the module drawer, if present, from the spare RRA board using the same special extractor insert the optical module (you have taken from the faulty RRA board) into the spare RRA board turn on the two screws to fix the module onto the spare RRA board ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) The screw tightening torque for fixing the units to the subrack must be:
b) c) d) e)
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %

6) insert the spare RRA board in the system ATTENTION
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) " 10 %
(caution to avoid equipment damage) Please read carefully pages 169170 for the right operations and forbidden operations to carry out in order to insert the unit 7) 8) now you could wear off the antistatic protection device kit if not yet done, turn on the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) The screw tightening torque for fixing the units to the subrack must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) " 10 %
Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking. 9) reconnect all cables on the front plate exactly as they were connected before the unit extraction. N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SAFETY RULES: see point 3 ) on page 359
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 360 / 542
10 ) wait some minutes (software download is usually carried out toward Supervisory Units) After the unit insertion, you should wait about 10 minutes for the completion of software download from FLASH CARD toward the new boards SU (N.B.); this phase is notified by SYSCOs bicolor LED redflashing condition (led (6) in Fig. 85. on page 173). N.B. software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare units SU is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.
12 ) mount the protection cap, if was present, on the front plate 13 ) check the system status by LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal. ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) To connect the CT cable (at SYSCOs F interface and/or PC side): verify that the PC is switched off (if switched on, close all running applications, then switch off it) connect suitable cable to SYSCOs F interface and PC side now the PC can be safely switched on. 14 ) fill the Repair Form and return the faulty unit together with such Repair Form to the Alcatel authorized repair center (see para.49.2 on page 395)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 361 / 542
47.3.10 OPTICAL MODULE replacement procedure For OPTICAL MODULE views, see Fig. 88. and Fig. 89. on pages 178179.
N.B. 1)
In order to replace an Optical module without replacing the RRA unit housing it, it is not necessary to extract the RRA unit from the shelf. get the spare module from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the module to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do not touch the electronic components. ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) do not extract the spare unit from its antistatic envelope, until you have worn the antistatic protection device kit
2) 3)
remove protection cap, if present, from the RRAs front plate disconnect cables from the module. Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are present on the cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly SAFETY RULES IN CASE OF OPTICAL MODULES Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by the fiber optic transmitters can cause eyes damages. Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of units containing laser devices or cables transporting optical signals, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance documents and the general rules pointed out in para.A.3.4.2 on page 496.
4)
extract the faulty optical module from the RRA board in the following way: wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 200. on page 501) and connect its termination to a grounded structure ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges turn off the two screws fixing the module to the faulty RRA board: these screws are the same depicted for the module drawer in Fig. 89. on page 179 (do not unscrew the other two screws of the module) extract the faulty module, using the the special extractor [see (2) in Fig. 131. on page 321]
5)
insert he spare module into RRA slot ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) Please read carefully pages 169170 for the right operations and forbidden operations to carry out in order to insert the unit (in this case there are no levers)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 362 / 542
6)
if not yet done, fix the module to RRA turning on the two screws ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage) The screw tightening torque for fixing the modules to the unit must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %

7) reconnect cables to the module N.B. 8) 9)
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) " 10 %
SAFETY RULES: see point 3 ) on page 362
mount the protection cap, if was present, on the front plate wait some minutes (software download is usually carried out toward Supervisory Units) N.B. software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare units SU is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 363 / 542
47.3.11 MODEM replacement procedure For MODEM views, see Fig. 91. , Fig. 92. and Fig. 93. on pages 181183.
1)
turn off (position O ) the switch on the PSU unit front panel (see Fig. 82. on page 171) of the PSU corresponding to the MODEM unit to be replaced, i.e.: PSU0 for MD0 PSU1 for MD1 .... PSU9 for MD9 according to following Fig. 142. ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) The successive insertion of the spare MODEM must be done without voltage at its connector on the backplane. Only the powering on of the MODEM already pluggedin guarantees the correct startup powering timing. If you insert the MODEM with its PSU switched on, you run the risk of having subsequent indeterminate (and in some case unrecoverable) unit states. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
S Y S C O
S E R V
R R A 0
R M R D A 0 1
M D 1
R M R D A 2 2
R M R D A 3 3
R M R D A 4 4
R M R D A 5 5
R R A 6
M D 6
R M R D A 7 7
R M R D A 8 8
R M R D A 9 9
P S F 1
P S U 0
P S U 1
P S U 2
P S U 3
P S U 4
P S U 5
P S U 6
P S U 7
P S U 8
P S U 9
P S F 2
24 25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Fig. 142. PSU to be switched off/on for MODEM replacement 2) 3) remove protection cap, if present, from the faulty board front plate disconnect all cables from the faulty board front plate. Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are present on the cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly; N.B. to extract Cables 1.0/2.3, use the special extractor [see (3) in Fig. 131. on page 321]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 364 / 542
4)
extract the faulty MODEM unit as follows: wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 200. on page 501) and connect its termination to a grounded structure ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges turn off the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the breakage of levers operate the levers to extract the board
5)
get the spare MODEM unit from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the board to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do not touch the electronic components. If the MODEM to be replaced houses one or more CANCCOMB babyboards, verify that the spare part does really have the same babyboards as far as quantity and P/Ns (see Tab. 58. on page 322). spare MODEM board hardware setting: accessing the handbook Hardware setting documentation (REF.[K] on page 527), get the relevant MSZZQ documents locate the position of setting switches using the appropriate MSZZQ documents set these switches on the spare part exactly as they are set on the unit to be replaced
6)
7)
insert the spare MODEM board in the system ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) Please read carefully pages 169170 for the right operations and forbidden operations to carry out in order to insert the unit
8) 9)
now you could wear off the antistatic protection device kit if not yet done, turn on the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) The screw tightening torque for fixing the units to the subrack must be:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) " 10 %
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 365 / 542
10 ) reconnect all cables on the front plate exactly as they were connected before the unit extraction.
12 ) mount the protection cap, if was present, on the front plate 13 ) turn on (position I ) the switch on the PSU unit previously switched off 14 ) wait some minutes (software download is usually carried out toward Supervisory Units) N.B. software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare units SU is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 366 / 542
47.3.12 FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT replacement procedure [1]

Considerations about MINOR and MAJOR alarms Whenever the alarm regarding Fans Assembled Unit arises, you should be aware of the following: the alarm can be: MINOR for the failure of one fan only of the unit; MAJOR for the failure of two, three or of all the fours fans of the unit;
this condition should be considered in conjunction with: the rackhousingroom effective environmental temperature, taking into consideration that the loss of all fans can produce an overtemperature of about 20 0C inside the rack; and the temperature limits specified in para.13.7.1 on page 101.
because an excessive internal temperature could decrease the equipment overall MTBF. In conclusion: the Fans Assembled Unit MINOR alarm usually does not require an immediate intervention; nevertheless, in case of alarm, it is suggested to carry out the unit replacement without waiting a very long time. the Fans Assembled Unit MAJOR alarm requires an immediate intervention.
[2]
Replacement procedure 1) get the spare FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the unit to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do not touch the electronic components. ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) do not extract the spare unit from its antistatic envelope, until you have worn the antistatic protection device kit 2) 3) Remove FANS SHELFs front plate (see Fig. 104. on page 197) turning off the six screws wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 200. on page 501) and connect its termination to a grounded structure ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges 4) Extract the faulty FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT operating the suitable extractor [see (2) in Fig. 131. on page 321] inside the units suitable hole (see Fig. 105. on page 198)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 367 / 542
5)
Insert the spare FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) Please read carefully pages 169170 for the right operations and forbidden operations to carry out in order to insert the unit (in this case there are no levers)
6) 7)
now you could wear off the antistatic protection device kit Restore FANS SHELFs front plate (see Fig. 104. on page 197) turning on the six screws ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) The screw tightening torque must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) " 10 %
Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking. 8) check the system status by LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal. ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) To connect the CT cable (at SYSCOs F interface and/or PC side): verify that the PC is switched off (if switched on, close all running applications, then switch off it) connect suitable cable to SYSCOs F interface and PC side now the PC can be safely switched on. 9) fill the Repair Form and return the faulty unit together with such Repair Form to the Alcatel authorized repair center (see para.49.2 on page 395)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 368 / 542
48 TRANSCEIVER REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT 48.1 Choice of the procedure

Two cases must be distinguished: a spare Transceiver already assembled is available, fully equipped with internal parts exactly equal (types and P/Ns) to those of the Transceiver unit to be replaced. In this case proceed as specified in para.48.2 on page 370. Transceiver components are available as individual spare parts, as explained in para.43.3.1.2 on page 323. In this case proceed as specified in para.48.3 on page 373.
48.1.1 Transmitter specialization for a frequency plan
In both cases cited above, you must be aware that the spare transceiver/transmitter used to replace a faulty transceiver/transmitter must have the the same specialization for the frequency plan required by the Customer.
For further information, please refer to: para.31.2 on page 247 para.31.3.7.2 on page 256
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 369 / 542
48.2 Transceiver replacement with a preassembled transceiver assembly

N.B. 1) This procedure can be followed if a spare Transceiver is available, fully equipped with internal parts exactly equal (types and P/Ns) to those of the Transceiver unit to be replaced. get the spare from the spare part stock (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions) verifying: that its P/N is equal to that of the unit to be replaced that its specialization for frequency plan is equal to that of the unit to be replaced (see para.48.1.1 on page 369) ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) do not extract the spare unit from its antistatic envelope, until you have worn the antistatic protection device kit 2) turn off (position O ) the switch on the TRANSCEIVER unit front panel (pos. (I1) in Fig. 102. on page 195): of the spare TRANSCEIVER unit and of the TRANSCEIVER unit to be replaced ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) For the high current absorbed by the unit, its extraction/insertion with its switch in open position could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the units and backpanels connectors. 3) 4) disconnect all cables from the faulty unit front plate. Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are present on the cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly to extract the faulty board: wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 200. on page 501) and connect its termination to a grounded structure ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges turn off the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the breakage of levers operate the levers to extract the board
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 370 / 542
5)
spare unit check and hardware presetting: verify the correspondence between the spare unit with that to be replaced as follows:
a)
if not yet done, wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 200. on page 501) and connect its termination to a grounded structure ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges
b) c) d)
put both Transceivers on a work bench remove COVERPLATE A of both transceivers (see Fig. 94. on page 186). Store tidily cover and screws for successive mounting compare internal composition of transceivers (same types and same P/Ns) Detailed internal drawings of transceiver in the various configurations envisaged are given in para.23.4.3 on page 187. verify that dipswitches of spare unit are set as those of the replaced unit (see Fig. 123. on page 249); if different, modify settings of spare unit restore COVERPLATE A of both transceivers ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) The screw tightening torque for fixing the coverplate to the unit must be:
e) f)
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %

6) insert the spare board in the system ATTENTION
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) " 10 %
Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking or unit damage.
(caution to avoid equipment damage) Please read carefully pages 169170 for the right operations and forbidden operations to carry out in order to insert the unit 7) 8) now you could wear off the antistatic protection device kit if not yet done, turn on the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) The screw tightening torque for fixing the units to the subrack must be:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) " 10 %
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 371 / 542
9)
reconnect all cables on the front plate exactly as they were connected before the unit extraction.
10 ) turn on (position I ) the switch on the new TRANSCEIVER unit front panel (pos. (I1) in Fig. 102. on page 195) 11 ) wait some minutes (software download is usually carried out toward Supervisory Units) N.B. software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare units SU is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 372 / 542
48.3 Transceiver repair and replacement procedure

N.B.
This procedure must be followed if Transceiver components are available as individual spare parts, as explained in para.43.3.1.2 on page 323.
For the P/Ns of Transceiver internal components and other notes, please refer to section 3 on page 243, choosing the chapter relevant to your specific radio system. CONVENTIONS In the following Fig. 147. thru Fig. 154. the following conventions have been applied: connectors and cables: each connector is denoted by a number and letter (e.g. 11A); the two ends of a cable have the same number (e.g. 11A and 11B are the two connectors of the same cable); all cables are twoconnector cables, with the exception of connector depicted in Fig. 148. on page 386. The instructions given in the following for the replacement of internal components require that you consult the correct internal cabling diagram, that depends on the configuration: Tab. 64. Transceiver internal cabling diagram according to configuration
FREQUENCY REUSE DIVERSITY USAGE TR HOUSING
INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM Fig. 149. on page 391 Fig. 151. on page 393 Fig. 153. on page 394 Fig. 150. on page 392 Fig. 152. on page 393 Fig. 154. on page 394
N N Y N Y Y
LO MASTER LO SLAVE
LO MASTER LO SLAVE
the letter T indicates a screw metallic tap on an unused SMA connector.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 373 / 542
ATTENTION: CAUTIONS TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE The following rules must be strictly followed: a) Operator skills For the operations described hereafter, repair Operator must have deep knowledge and experience of electronic repair through subcomponents replacement. Protection against electrostatic discharges During operations described hereafter, repair Operator must always wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 200. on page 501) and connect its termination to a grounded structure. The screw tightening torque for fixing the subcomponents to the unit must be:
b)
c)
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking or unit damage. d) The SMA connector tightening torque for fixing coaxial cables to the subcomponents must be:
812 kg x cm (0.8 1.2 Newton x m)

Exceeding this value may result in subcomponents connector breaking. e) Coaxial cable handling Coaxial cables should be handled carefully avoiding any excessive bending which could compromise their functionality.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 374 / 542
GENERAL FLOW CHART a ) Start of procedure (page 376): Faulty Transceiver extraction from shelf Faulty Transceiver opening
Replacement of
b ) Rx or Tx Local Oscillator (page 377) c ) Diversity Receiver (page 379) d ) Main Receiver (page 381) e ) Frequency Reuse kit module (page 382) f ) Transmitter + Main Receiver (page 383) g ) Transmitter (page 388)
h ) End of procedure (page 389): Repaired Transceiver preparing for insertion in shelf Repaired Transceiver insertion in shelf and functional checks Fig. 143. General flow chart of Transceiver repair procedure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 375 / 542
a)
Start of procedure Proceed as follows: FAULTY TRANSCEIVER EXTRACTION FROM SHELF 1) on the TRANSCEIVER to be repaired, turn off (position O ) the switch on the unit front panel (pos. (I1) in Fig. 102. on page 195) ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) For the high current absorbed by the unit, its extraction with its switch in open position could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the units and backpanels connectors. 1) disconnect all cables from the unit front plate. Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are present on the cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly to extract the TRANSCEIVER to be repaired: wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 200. on page 501) and connect its termination to a grounded structure ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges turn off the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the breakage of levers operate the levers to extract the board
2)
FAULTY TRANSCEIVER OPENING 3) 4) put the Transceiver to be repaired on a work bench remove COVERPLATE A (see Fig. 94. on page 186) of the Transceiver to be repaired. Store tidily cover and screws for successive mounting.
NEXT STEP 5) the procedure proceeds according to the component to be replaced:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Rx or Tx Local Oscillator Diversity Receiver Main Receiver
go to step b ) on page 377 go to step c ) on page 379 go to step d ) on page 381
Frequency Reuse kit module go to step e ) on page 382 Transmitter + Main Receiver Transmitter go to step f ) on page 383 go to step g ) on page 388
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 376 / 542
b)
Replacement of Rx or Tx Local Oscillator The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 144. herebelow. CONNECTOR FOR FLAT CABLE (10B or 12B)
P/N and Remote Inventory
SMA CONNECTORS
A1
A3 A2
MMCX CONNECTOR Fig. 144. Spare Local Oscillator subassembly N.B. A1, A2, A3 show the position of the three screws fixing the Local Oscillator to the Transmitter. The SMA connectors are used differently according to the use as Rx or Tx LO and according to the Transceiver configuration. SMA connectors are for mounting coaxial cables by screwed connectors. The unused SMA connectors must be closed by suitable metallic screw taps. MMCX connector is used to house a cable connector that is inserted/extracted simply pushing into or pulling out.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 377 / 542
Proceed as follows: REFERENCE INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM

1)
according to Tab. 64. on page 373, get the correct transceiver internal cabling diagram according to configuration and use it as reference for successive steps
CHOICE OF UNIT TO REPLACE 2) verify which LO must be replaced (Rx or Tx). Operate on that, in the following steps
FAULTY UNIT EXTRACTION 3) 4) 5) 6) turn off cables connectors present on LOs SMA connectors (but, do not dismount metallic screw taps present on unconnected SMA connectors) pull out cable from MMCX connector pull out flat cable from suitable connector turn off screws A1, A2, A3 and extract the LO; store tidily screws for successive mounting
SPARE UNIT PREPARATION 7) get the spare LO from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the component to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do not touch the electronic components. N.B. 8) Rx and Tx Local Oscillators must have the same P/N
dismount the metallic screw taps present on SMA connectors of faulty LO and mount them on the same SMA connectors of the spare LO See point d ) on page 374 for tightening torque
SPARE UNIT INSERTION 9) position spare LO inside transmitter and fix it through screws A1, A2, A3
10 ) push flat cable into LOs suitable connector 11 ) push cable into MMCX connector (there is a locked position) 12 ) turn on cables connectors on LOs SMA connectors See point d ) on page 374 for tightening torque NEXT STEP 13 ) go to step h ) on page 389
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 378 / 542
c)
Replacement of Diversity Receiver The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 145. herebelow. SMA CONNECTOR A1 A2 CONNECTOR FOR FLAT CABLE A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
P/N and Remote Inventory
Fig. 145. Spare Receiver subassembly N.B. A1 to A9 show the position of the three screws fixing the Diversity Receiver to the PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER The SMA connector is for mounting coaxial cable by screwed connector.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 379 / 542

1)
FAULTY UNIT EXTRACTION 2) 3) 4) turn off cables connector present on Diversity Receivers SMA connector (6A) pull out flat cable from suitable connector (7A) turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Diversity Receiver; store tidily screws for successive mounting
SPARE UNIT PREPARATION 5) get the spare Receiver from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the component to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do not touch the electronic components.
SPARE UNIT INSERTION 6) 7) 8) position spare Receiver inside transmitter and fix it through screws A1 ... A9 push flat cable into Receivers suitable connector (7A) turn on cables connectors on Receivers SMA connector (6A) See point d ) on page 374 for tightening torque
NEXT STEP 9) go to step h ) on page 389
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 380 / 542
d)
Replacement of Main Receiver The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 145. on page 379. Proceed as follows:
REFERENCE INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM 1) according to Tab. 64. on page 373, get the correct transceiver internal cabling diagram according to configuration and use it as reference for successive steps
EXTRACTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER (if equipped) 2) 3) 4) turn off cables connector present on Diversity Receivers SMA connector (6A) pull out flat cable from suitable connector (7A) turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Diversity Receiver; store tidily the Diversity Receiver and its screws for successive mounting
FAULTY MAIN RECEIVER EXTRACTION With reference to Fig. 149. on page 391: 5) 6) 7) 8) remove the plate covering main receiver (8 screws); store tidily cover and screws for successive mounting turn off cables connector present on Main Receivers SMA connector (4B) pull out flat cable from Main Receivers suitable connector (5A) turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Main Receiver; store tidily screws for successive mounting
SPARE MAIN RECEIVER PREPARATION 9) get the spare Receiver from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the component to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do not touch the electronic components. N.B. Main Receiver and Diversity Receiver must have the same P/N
SPARE MAIN RECEIVER INSERTION With reference to Fig. 149. on page 391: 10 ) position spare Main Receiver inside transmitter and fix it through screws A1 ... A9 11 ) push flat cable into Main Receivers suitable connector (5A) 12 ) turn on cables connectors on Main Receivers SMA connector (4B) See point d ) on page 374 for tightening torque 13 ) position and fix the plate covering main receiver (8 screws) INSERTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER (if equipped) With reference to transceiver internal cabling diagram of step 1 ) above: 14 ) position Diversity Receiver inside transmitter and fix it through screws A1 ... A9 15 ) push flat cable into Diversity Receivers suitable connector (7A) 16 ) turn on cables connectors on Diversity Receivers SMA connector (6A) See point d ) on page 374 for tightening torque
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NEXT STEP 17 ) go to step h ) on page 389
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 381 / 542
e)
Replacement of Frequency Reuse kit module The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 146. herebelow. A1 P/N
CONNECTOR FOR FLAT CABLE (10C) A3
A2
SMA CONNECTOR (8B)
SMA CONNECTOR (9A) Fig. 146. Spare Frequency Reuse kit module subassembly
A4
N.B. A1 to A4 show the position of the screws fixing the Frequency Reuse kit module to to the Transmitter The SMA connectors are for mounting coaxial cables by screwed connector. Proceed as follows: REFERENCE INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM 1) according to Tab. 64. on page 373, get the correct transceiver internal cabling diagram according to configuration and use it as reference for successive steps
FAULTY UNIT EXTRACTION 2) 3) 4) turn off cables connectors present on Frequency Reuse kit modules SMA connectors (8B and 9A) pull out flat cable from suitable connector (10C) turn off screws A1 .. A4 and extract the module; store tidily screws for successive mounting
SPARE UNIT PREPARATION 5) get the spare module from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the component to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do not touch the electronic components.
SPARE UNIT INSERTION 6) 7) 8)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
position spare module inside transmitter and fix it through screws A1 ... A4 push flat cable into modules suitable connector (10C) turn on cables connectors on modules SMA connectors (8B and 9A) See point d ) on page 374 for tightening torque
NEXT STEP 9) go to step h ) on page 389
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 382 / 542
f)
Replacement of Transmitter + Main Receiver The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 147. herebelow. 1A 2A 4A* 3A*
MAIN RECEIVER (inside)
PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER
5B*
1B
10B 10A 2B
12A
12B
* For 3B, 4B and 5A see Fig. 149. on page 391 Fig. 147. Spare Transmitter + Main Receiver subassembly This subassembly includes just the internal cabling necessary for the basic configuration (i.e. without diversity and without frequency reuse); this internal cabling corresponds to that depicted in Fig. 149. on page 391. In few words, the procedure (that is detailed in the following) consists of: remotion from the faulty transmitter of the standard components: Rx and Tx Local Oscillators remotion from the faulty transmitter of the optional components, if equipped: Diversity Receiver and associated cabling Frequency Reuse kit module and associated cabling insertion into the spare transmitter and cabling of: the standard components and the optional components, if were equipped in the faulty transmitter
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 383 / 542

1)
PREPARATION OF SPARE TRANSMITTER + MAIN RECEIVER 2) get the spare spare Transmitter + Main Receiver (Fig. 147. on page 383) from the spare part stock (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions) verifying: that its P/N is equal to that of the unit to be replaced (N.B.) that its specialization for frequency plan is equal to that of the unit to be replaced (see para.48.1.1 on page 369) N.B. the P/N label position is shown in Fig. 94. on page 186. This P/N is just that of the Transmitter only. If you wish to verify also the Main Receiver P/N, you should dismount it and then remount as indicated here, with reference to Fig. 149. on page 391: remove the plate covering main receiver (8 screws); store tidily cover and screws for successive mounting turn off cables connector present on Main Receivers SMA connector (4B) pull out flat cable from Main Receivers suitable connector (5A) turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Main Receiver; store tidily screws for successive mounting now you can check the Main Receiver P/N (see Fig. 145. on page 379) position Main Receiver inside Transmitter and fix it through screws A1 ... A9 push flat cable into Main Receivers suitable connector (5A) turn on cables connectors on Main Receivers SMA connector (4B) See point d ) on page 374 for tightening torque position and fix the plate covering main receiver (8 screws) remove spare Transceivers COVERPLATE A (see Fig. 94. on page 186). Store tidily cover and screws for successive mounting. spare transmitter hardware presetting: verify that dipswitches of spare unit are set as those of the replaced unit (see Fig. 123. on page 249); if different, set these switches on the spare transmitter exactly as they are set on the faulty transmitter
3) 4)
REMOTION OF LOCAL OSCILLATORS FROM FAULTY TRANSMITTER With reference to Fig. 144. on page 377 (LO drawing) and Fig. 149. on page 391 (transceiver standard internal cabling) operate on both Rx and Tx Local Oscillators as follows: 5) 6) 7) 8)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
turn off cables connectors present on LOs SMA connectors (but, do not dismount metallic screw taps present on unconnected SMA connectors) pull out cable from MMCX connector pull out flat cable from suitable connector turn off screws A1, A2, A3 and extract the LO store tidily Rx and Tx Local Oscillators and their screws for successive mounting N.B. Distinguish Rx from Tx LOs, because the use of SMA connectors is different from each other
9)
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 384 / 542
REMOTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER FROM FAULTY TRANSMITTER (if equipped) With reference to Fig. 145. on page 379 (Receiver drawing) and transceiver internal cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 384, operate on faulty Transmitter as follows:
10 ) DO NOT remove cables connector present on Diversity Receivers SMA connector 6A 11 ) DO NOT remove flat cable from connector 7A 12 ) turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Diversity Receiver together with the flat cable 7A7B and the cable 6A6B connected to it; store tidily the assembly and screws for successive mounting INSERTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER INTO SPARE TRANSMITTER + MAIN RECEIVER (if equipped) With reference to Fig. 145. on page 379 (Receiver drawing) and transceiver internal cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 384, operate on spare Transmitter + Main Receiver as follows: 13 ) position the Diversity Receiver (together with the flat cable 7A7B and the cable 6A6B connected to it) inside Transmitter and fix it through screws A1 ... A9 14 ) position the flat cable 7A7B and insert its connector 7B according to cabling diagram 15 ) position the cable 6A6B according to cabling diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 385 / 542
REMOTION OF FR KIT FROM FAULTY TRANSMITTER (if equipped) With reference to Fig. 146. on page 382 (FR module drawing) and transceiver internal cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 384, operate on faulty Transmitter as follows: 16 ) DO NOT remove cables connectors present on Frequency Reuse kit modules SMA connector (8B and 9A) 17 ) pull out flat cable from connector10C 18 ) disconnect connector 8A from Transmitters front plate 19 ) turn off screws A1 .. A4 and extract the module together with cables 8B8A and 9A9B connected to it 20 ) extract the 3connector flat cable 10A10B10C shown in Fig. 148. :
10B
Fig. 148. Spare Frequency Reuse kit 3connector flat cable subassembly 21 ) if present (see Fig. 153. and Fig. 154. on page 394) disconnect connector 11A from Transmitters front plate 22 ) store tidily for successive mounting: the module together with cables 8B8A and 9A9B connected to it its screws the flat cable 10A10B10C the cable 11A11B (if equipped) INSERTION OF FR KIT INTO SPARE TRANSMITTER + MAIN RECEIVER (if equipped) Operate on spare Transmitter + Main Receiver as follows: 23 ) With reference to Fig. 149. on page 391, remove flat cable 10A10B (it is no longer necessary) 24 ) With reference to transceiver internal cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 384: a) b) c) d)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
e) f)
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 386 / 542

10A push flat cable into modules connector 10C mount connector 8A on transmitters front plate position cable end 9B according to cabling diagram
10C
insert flat cable 10A10B10C on Transmitters connectors 10A and 10B and position cable end 10C according to cabling diagram if cable 11A11B was equipped, mount its connector 11A on Transmitters front plate and position cable end 11B according to cabling diagram position module (together with cables 8B8A and 9A9B connected to it) inside transmitter and fix it through screws A1 ... A4
INSERTION OF LOCAL OSCILLATORS RECEIVER

INTO SPARE TRANSMITTER + MAIN
With reference to Fig. 144. on page 377 (LO drawing) and transceiver internal cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 384, mount the Rx and Tx Local Oscillators (previously removed from faulty Transmitter) on the spare Transmitter + Main Receiver as follows: N.B. Distinguish Rx from Tx LOs, because the use of SMA connectors is different from each other
25 ) position LO inside transmitter and fix it through screws A1, A2, A3 26 ) push flat cable into LOs suitable connector 27 ) push cable into MMCX connector (there is a locked position) 28 ) turn on cables connectors on LOs SMA connectors See point d ) on page 374 for tightening torque NEXT STEP 29 ) go to step h ) on page 389
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 387 / 542
g)
Replacement of Transmitter The spare subassembly is similar to that shown in Fig. 147. on page 383. With respect to it, the missing items are: the Main Receiver and the cables 4A4B and 5B5A that belong to the Receiver own part list Proceed as follows: REFERENCE INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM 1) as step 1 ) on page 384
PREPARATION OF SPARE TRANSMITTER 2) as steps 2 ) to 4 ) on page 384
REMOTION OF LOCAL OSCILLATORS FROM FAULTY TRANSMITTER 3) as steps 5 ) to 9 ) on page 384
REMOTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER FROM FAULTY TRANSMITTER (if equipped) 4) as steps 10 ) to 12 ) on page 385
REMOTION OF MAIN RECEIVER FROM FAULTY TRANSMITTER With reference to Fig. 145. on page 379 (Receiver drawing) and and Fig. 149. on page 391 (transceiver standard internal cabling) operate on faulty Transmitter as follows: 5) 6) 7) 8) remove the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws); store tidily cover and screws for successive mounting DO NOT remove cables connector present on Main Receivers SMA connector 4B DO NOT remove flat cable from connector 5A turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Main Receiver together with the flat cable 5A5B and the cable 4B4A connected to it; store tidily the assembly and screws for successive mounting restore the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws)
9)
INSERTION OF MAIN RECEIVER INTO SPARE TRANSMITTER With reference to Fig. 145. on page 379 (Receiver drawing) and and Fig. 149. on page 391 (transceiver standard internal cabling) operate on spare Transmitter as follows: 10 ) remove the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws); store tidily cover and screws for successive mounting 11 ) position the Main Receiver (together with the flat cable 5A5B and the cable 4B4A connected to it) inside transmitter and fix it through screws A1 ... A9 12 ) position the flat cable 5A5B and insert its connector 5B according to cabling diagram 13 ) position the cable 4B4A according to cabling diagram 14 ) restore the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws) NEXT STEPS 15 ) as steps 13 ) (page 385) thru 29 ) (page 387)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 388 / 542
h)
End of procedure Proceed as follows: REPAIRED TRANSCEIVER PREPARING FOR INSERTION IN SHELF
1) 2)
restore COVERPLATE A of repaired Transceiver (see Fig. 94. on page 186) verify that, on the repaired Transceivers front panel, the switch pos. (I1) in Fig. 102. on page 195 is turned off (position O ) ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) For the high current absorbed by the unit, its insertion with its switch in open position could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the units and backpanels connectors.
REPAIRED TRANSCEIVER INSERTION IN SHELF AND FUNCTIONAL CHECKS 3) insert the repaired board in the system ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) Please read carefully pages 169170 for the right operations and forbidden operations to carry out in order to insert the unit 4) 5) now you could wear off the antistatic protection device kit if not yet done, turn on the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) The screw tightening torque for fixing the units to the subrack must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 % 2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) " 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking. 6) 7) 8) reconnect all cables on the front plate exactly as they were connected before the unit extraction. turn on (position I ) the switch on the TRANSCEIVER unit front panel (pos. (I1) in Fig. 102. on page 195) wait some minutes (software download is usually carried out toward Supervisory Units) N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare units SU is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 389 / 542
9)
the automatic FPGA upgrade condition is active: in this case you have nothing to do, because the spare FPGA, if necessary, has already been carried out the automatic FPGA upgrade condition is not active: in this case you must launch the FPGA automatic upgrade condition to upgrade the spares FPGA , as explained in point a ) on page 348
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 390 / 542
spare FPGA upgrade Please refer to para.47.2 on page 347 for summary and detailed information on this feature. After the SYSCOs bicolor LED redflashing condition (led (6) in Fig. 85. on page 173) ends, there are two cases:
WITHOUT DIVERSITY AND WITHOUT FREQUENCY REUSE

main receiver 1A 2A
T1
4A
T3 T4
3A
T6
T7
T8
Rx LO
Tx LO
plate covering main receiver
4B
5A
5B
1B
10A
10B
2B
12A
12B
3B
Fig. 149. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 1/6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 391 / 542
WITH DIVERSITY AND WITHOUT FREQUENCY REUSE T3 1A 6A 2A 6B 4A*

T4
3A*
T6
T7
T8
Rx LO
Tx LO
diversity receiver
7A
1B 5B* 7B 10A
10B
2B
12B 12A
* For 3B, 4B and 5A see Fig. 149. on page 391
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 392 / 542
WITHOUT DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO MASTER 9A

10C T1
4A* T3
9B
3A* T6 T7 T8
8A 8B
1A
2A
Rx LO
Tx LO
5B* * For 3B, 4B and 5A see Fig. 149. on page 391
1B
10A
10B
2B
12A
12B
WITH DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO MASTER (differences with Fig. 151. above) 6A 6B instead of T1
Rx LO
Tx LO
diversity receiver
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
7A
7B
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 393 / 542
WITHOUT DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO SLAVE 11B 11A 1A 2A T1 4A* T4 3A* T6 T7 T8
Rx LO
Tx LO
* For 3B, 4B and 5A see Fig. 149. on page 391
5B*
1B
10A
10B
2B
12A
12B
WITH DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO SLAVE (differences with Fig. 153. above) 6A 6B instead of T1
Rx LO
Tx LO
diversity receiver
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
7A
7B
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 394 / 542
49 FAULTY UNIT REPAIR AND REPAIR FORM 49.1 Faulty unit sending back to repair center
Faulty unit repair must be done by authorized repair centers only. According to the policy described in para.43.3.1.1 on page 322, the units with babyboards (see Tab. 58. on page 322) must be sent back to the repair center together with their babyboards, without dismounting them from the assembly. As far as Transceivers are concerned, please refer to para.43.3.1.2 on page 323 for the definition of internal components that must be considered as replaced parts to be sent back to the repair center.
49.2 Repair Form filling

To facilitate repair operation, data on the faulty unit must be reported on the form shown in Fig. 155. on page 396. The repair form must be filledin with as much data as possible and returned to Alcatel together with the faulty unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 395 / 542
Fill in this form and affix it to the faulty unit to be returned to Alcatel
CUSTOMER NAME ORDER NUMBER/CONTRACT NUMBER
REPAIR FORM
ALCATE L
SITE
BRANCH/UNIT/COUNTRY
SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT
PRODUCT RELEASE
EQUIPMENT SOFTWARE PART NUMBER
STATION/RACK
SUBRACK
SLOT
TO BE FILLED IN BY THE SENDER
MNEMONIC
ALCATEL PART NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
FAULTY UNIT SOFTWARE VERSION
FAULT PHASE
INSTALLATION / TURN ON CLEAR FAULT
REASON FOR REPAIR

DROP IN PERFORMANCE
PRESUMED CAUSE
INTERNAL
LIGHTNING OPERATION INTERMITTENT FAULT UPGRADE/QUALITY ALERT EXTERNAL AIR COND.
MAINTENANCE
TEMPERATURE FAULT
OTHER
DATE FAULT STILL PRESENT AFTER REPAIR
NAME OF SENDER
COMMENTS
TO BE FILLED IN BY THE REPAIR OPERATOR
PROCESSING
NO FAULTS FOUND A STANDARD REPAIRING BD QUALITY ALERT I SUBSTITUTED SX NOTE : LETTERS ARE FOR FACTORY USE NOT REPAIRABLE (REJECTED) UPGRADE I MECHANICAL M V1 SOLDERING / WIRING
FAULTS DETECTED
COMPONENT C PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD V1 CORROSION V3 OTHER FL DIRT V2 ADJUSTMENT P
COMMENTS
DATE
REPAIRING NUMBER
REPAIRING CENTRE
NAME OF REPAIR OPERATOR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 155. Repair form
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 396 / 542
SECTION 5: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

It provides the secondlevel description of 9600LSY/LHR equipment.
SECTION CONTENT Chapter 51 Signal management It describes the signal management performed by equipment. Chapter 52 Hardware description It gives the detailed hardware description of the system that have not been given in the previous part of this handbook. Chapter 53 Alarm Management It gives summary and detailed information regarding the alarm management carried out by the system (Alarms provided by item HW, Remote Alarms, Station Alarms, Housekeeping).
PAGE 399
425
481
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 397 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
398 / 542
51 SIGNAL MANAGEMENT
This chapter describes the signal management performed by 9600LSY equipment.
51.1 STM1 frame structure and WST mapping

STM1 + WST (4 columns) + RFCOH (2 columns)
A1 B1 D1 B2 D4 D7 D10 S1 A1 MD MD B2 A1 MD MD B2 A2 E1 D2 K1 D5 D8 D11 M1 A2 MD MD A2 J0 F1 D3 K2 D6 D9 D12 E2 NU NU NU NU NU NU
ADMINISTRATIVE UNIT OVERHEAD
RFCOH channel (2 columns) MD: Media dependent bytes NU: Bytes reserved for national use MSOH bytes are in bypass condition
1xWST channels (4 columns)
51.2 STM0 frame structure

STM0 + RFCOH (2 columns) A1 B1 D1 H1 B2 D4 D7 D10 S1 A2 E1 D2 H2 K1 D5 D8 D11 M1 J0 F1 D3 H3 K2 D6 D9 D12 E2
1xWST channel (4 columns)
RFCOH channels (2 columns)
The Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication (MSREI) M1 is rerouted inside the STM0 frame from byte #(9,6) of STM1 frame. MSOH bytes are in bypass condition.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 399 / 542
A single WST channel (2.048 Kbit/s) is composed by 36 bytes as described in the following: Information (1 byte) WST_POH (1 byte) Information (8 bytes) P_WST Sg_stn Information (8 bytes) P_WST Sg_stn Information (8 bytes) stn stp 0 Sg_stn Information (7 bits) Information (6 bytes) WST (2.048 Kbit/s) WST_POH: P_WST: Sg_stn: Sg_stp: Information: global SDH plus WST parity (BIP8 operation) dedicated WST parity (BIP2 operation) negative stuffing opportunity positive stuffing opportunity 32 bytes 36th byte Sg_stp Sg_stp Sg_stp 1st byte
The STM1 signal with 0 WST channel is used only for special application (frequency reuse operation in 28 channel spacing). The STM0 signal with 1_WST is derived directly from the STM1 frame with 2_WST channels dividing by three.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 400 / 542
51.3 RFCOH services structure

The structure of SERVICE CHANNELS inside the RFCOH area is the following:
RFCOH column xx DSI ATPC D1 D2 D3 E1 F1 reserved for service channel reserved for service channel Monitoring channel management: 1.X EWL alarm 2.X EWH alarm 3.X HBER alarm 4.X ATL alarm [X=1 to 10number of channel] 5.1 FAIL service 0 (ATL_rfcoh1) 5.2 FAIL service 1 (ATL_rfcoh2) The decision to select the MC signal coming from ch_ 0 or ch_1 is implemented according to the local DEM alarms (and BIP4 parity code). 1.1 1.9 2.7 3.5 4.3 5.1 1.2 1.10 2.8 3.6 4.4 5.2 1.3 2.1 2.9 3.7 4.5 column yy 1.4 2.2 2.10 3.8 4.6 1.5 2.3 3.1 3.9 4.7 K0 reserved for service channel reserved for service channel reserved for service channel 1.6 2.4 3.2 3.10 4.8 1.7 2.5 3.3 4.1 4.9 1.8 2.6 3.4 4.2 4.10
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 401 / 542
51.4 SOH management

This block diagram of Fig. 156. herebelow shows some connection for SOH bytes management: the SOH_BUS (5.1 Mb/s) thats used to transport the RSOH bytes information from all the lineside channels (0,1,2, , N) towards AUX board. the RFCOH_BUS (1.152 Mb/s) towards channel_0 and channel_1 (radioside)
Available bytes with standard interface (NxG.703) and with RS385 interface (NxV11).
CH_0 CH_1 CH_2 CH_1

CH N BYPASS FUNCTION
Crossconnection matrix
RFCOH CH_0
SOH BUS
E1 F1 1.8 1.9 2.2 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.2 3.3 3.5 3.6 3.8 3.9
ATPC DSI MC E1 F1 D1 D2 D3 CH1 (#) CH2 (#) CH3 (#) CH4 (#) CH5 (#)
EXTERNAL INTERFACES
Fig. 156. SOH management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 402 / 542
In case of RRA application, the access to SOH bytes is provided by RRA itself; in case of WADM and WLT application, the access to SOH bytes is concentrated in the baseband part implementing WADM/WLT functionality.
Each RSOH_byte, if terminated, must be terminated and accessible both at radioside and lineside. The managed bytes (lineside) are the following: E1 F1 #1.8, #1.9, #2.2, #2.3, #2.5, #2.6, #2.8, #2.9, #3.2. #3.3, #3.5, #3.6, #3.8, #3.9 E1 and F1 are always connected (radioside) to specific RFCOH channels. The other ones can be connected (radioside) to 5 available interfaces. In terminaltoterminal application the passthrough mode for each RSOH_byte is provided. In WADM/WLT terminal application with radio repeater, when a specific service channel must be dropped in the regenerator, the interested RSOH byte is rerouted in the RFCOH area according with the service channel columns format (1152 Kbit/s stream): Column 1 DSI ATPC D1 D2 D3 E1 F1 Channel #1 Channel #2 MC MC MC MC MC FAIL serv + K0 Channel #3 Channel #4 Channel #5 Column 2
The selection of byte rerouting is performed by ECT/OS.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 403 / 542
RST
RFCOH
RSOH termination
E1 F1
USER INTERFACES
D1, D2, D3 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5

CROSS CONNECTION MATRIX FOR SERVICE CHANNELS
ATPC DSI MC
RSOH termination
RST
RFCOH
RSOH standard_bytes passthrough function Fig. 157. Service channels functional block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 404 / 542
RSOH standard_bytes passthrough function
The line side SOH bytes can be managed on the ten RST sections available in the maximum system configuration ( 8+0 or 7+1 ).
SOH bytes handling: Byte Handling type Access type User interface
E1 F1 MSU_RSOH N.U._RSOH D1:D3 J0
terminated terminated terminated terminated terminated terminated
Voice channel DTMF or 64 Kbit/s 64 Kbit/s 64 Kbit/s 64 Kbit/s 192 Kbit/s 64 Kbit/s
G.703 or V.11 G.703 or V.11 G.703 or V.11 G.703 or V.11 Internal towards SC Internal towards SC
MSOH
bypassed
Inside the RRA unit the passthrough function of RSOH bytes is provided, in order to transmit channels coming from ADM line equipment in transparent mode through the radio system.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 405 / 542
51.5 DCCR Management

The DCCR are managed by EC both in lineside and radioside. The DCCR towards lineside are provided by the connection for all the channelunits, but are managed by EC only the streams towards CH_0 and CH_1 on radioside, where they are inserted inside the RFCOH bytes.
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION
CH_0
Lineside
EPLD CK+SYNC REF
Radioside
CK+SYNC
DCCR extraction lineside & mapping in 6.48 Mb BUS
DCCR extraction
RSOH insertion
LOGIC
CK+SYNC from RFCOH radioside
EPLD
CK+SYNC
RST SECTION
RFCOH SECTION
CH_1
RST SECTION
RFCOH SECTION
CH_9
Fig. 158. DCCR management (ADM towards RADIO)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 406 / 542
CK+SYNC All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION
CH_0
Radioside
EPLD
Lineside
CK+SYNC REF
DCCR extraction
DCCR mapping
DCCR demapping from 6.48 Mb BUS & insertion line side
EPLD
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION
CH_1
CK+SYNC
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION
CH_9
Fig. 159. DCCR management (RADIO towards ADM) Notes (see Fig. 160. on page 408):
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
On RST section the DCCR are inserted/extracted by dedicated pins (192 Kbit/s) on contradirectional interface. The DCCR extracted from RST on channels 0, 1, 2 and the DCCR radioside are mapped inside the first 6.48 Mbit/s DCC frame (link 1). The DCCR extracted from RST on channels 3, 4, 5, 6 are mapped inside the the second 6.48 Mbit/s DCC frame (link 2). The DCCR extracted from RST on channels 7, 8, 9 are mapped inside the the third 6.48 Mbit/s DCC frame (link 3).
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 407 / 542
RST section (channels 0) RST section (channels 1)

MUX/DEMUX
6.48 Mb/s [link 1]
6.48 Mb/s [link 2]
SC
RST section (channels 9)
6.48 Mb/s [link 3]
RFCOH section (channel 0)

SWITCH
RFCOH section (channel 1)
Fig. 160. DCCR management Tab. 65. DCC Mapping & Interleaving The DCC frame is composed by 101.25 bytes (6.48 Mbit/s), and takes into account the information from/ to four STM1 channels: CR D1(#1) D3(#1) DM D5 D7 D9 D11 CF2 F2 DF3 x CR D1(#2) D3(#2) DM D5 D7 D9 D11 CF2 F2 DF3 xx CR D1(#3) D3(#3) DM D5 D7 D9 D11 CF2 F2 DF3 CR D1(#4) D3(#4) DM D5 D7 D9 D11 CF2 F2 DF3 DR D2(#1) CM D4 D6 D8 D10 D12 DF2 CF3 F3 DR D2(#2) CM D4 D6 D8 D10 D12 DF2 CF3 F3 x positive stuffing opportunity bytes negative stuffing opportunity bytes colored stuffing bytes empty bytes DR D2(#3) CM D4 D6 D8 D10 D12 DF2 CF3 F3 DR D2(#4) CM D4 D6 D8 D10 D12 DF2 CF3 F3 x x x x x x x x x x
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DR, DM, DF2, DF3: D1, D4, F2, F3: CR, CM, CF2, CF3: X:
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 408 / 542
51.6 ATPC Management

The ATPC functionality is fully described in para.12.5.3.2 on page 57.
Fig. 161. herebelow depicts the internal processing block diagram.
RX1 unit RX0 unit

PRX DETECTION From AGC VOLTAGE
RRA1 unit RRA0 unit

Rx failure
RFCOH EXTRACTION MICROPROCESSOR
EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER
CAN_BUS
SERVICE UNIT/ATPC
64 Kb/s
TX1 unit TX0 unit

RFCOH INSERTION
MOD On/off
MICROPROCESSOR
Rx failure
CAN BUS EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER SERVICE UNIT/ATPC
Fig. 161. ATPC management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 409 / 542
51.7 Sub STM1 framing processing

In case of multiplexing of an AU4 via AUG, the position and the justification of AU4 structure is managed by octets H1H2H3 type: H1 NDF 1 0 H2 POINTER H3 Negative justification
because the other part of the AUOH area: H1 Y Y H2 U U H3 H3 H3
is filled with octets: Y = 1001nn11 (where n is a nonspecified value) U = 11111111 In this sense, we can assume that the only managed transport situation is for an AU4 structure inside an STM1 signal, and the STM0 design is mapped with 3xVC3 structures (partially filled with the first container only) into an AU4 unit (European standard). The demultiplexing operation from an STM1 signal to an STM0 signal can be provided taking one column for each three columns group, considering that only the first VC3 inside the AU4 structure of STM1 frame contains the significant payload. The VC4 POH is maintained in STM0 frame. The fixed stuffing columns (11, 12) of STM1 frame are removed in STM0 frame. When the STM1 standard interface is formed by an STM0 signal, the AUOH row is mapped according to the previous description (H1, H2 and H3 are extracted from the STM0 format), and B2 parity calculation has to be recomputed with the following criteria: B2(#1) = B2 coming from STM0 frame B2(#2) = Y U H3 B2(#3) = Y U H3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 410 / 542
Starting from three TUG3 units, it is possible to generate the VC4 structure with the mapping of 3xTUG3, 18 bytes of fixed justification and the VC4 POH as described below:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. 86 bytes 86 bytes 86 bytes
TUG3
TUG3
TUG3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

VC4 POH FILLED BYTES 05 955.203.292 Q
VC4
261 bytes
Fig. 162. VC4 generation from 3 TUG3
3DB 02839 AA AA 542
411 / 542
During the multiplexing/demultiplexing of the STM0 signal for the transmission in the radio section of the first TUG3 tributary, it is necessary to consider the following multiplexing structure, provided in SDH European hierarchy:
3rd TUG3 3rd TU3: unequipped All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
2nd TUG3
2nd TU3: unequipped
STM1
AUG
AU4
VC4
TUG3
TU3
VC3
C3 = 34.368 Kbit/s
X7
TUG2 TU12 VC12 C12 = 2.048 Kbit/s
So, when we speak of STM0 signal transmission we intend a nonstandard interface, based on a single TUG3 container (the first) coming from the mapping of an AU4 partially equipped. The 2nd and 3rd TUG3 are always considered as filled with TU3s unequipped container.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 412 / 542
STM1 multiplexing structure with 3xTUG3 carrying VC3 container inside an AU4 unit VC4 POH
1st TU3 pointer
1st VC3 POH
H1 H2 H3 H1 Y Y H2 U U H3 H3 H3
H1 H2 H3
H1 H2 H3
3xVC3 (interleaved)
H1 H2 H3 H1 H2 H3
1st VC 3 VC3
Where: Y=10010011 U=11111111 Fixed stuffing bytes NOTE: In case of AU4 pointer = 0 (NDF=0110 and SS_bits=10) the default value for AUOH row is: AUOH = H1 Y Y H2 U U H3 H3 H3 = 68 93 93 00 FF FF 00 00 00 In case of 3xVC3 mapping structure, the TU3 pointers for the unequipped containers are fixed to: H1 H2 H3 = 68 00 00 (NDF=0110, SS_bits=10, pointer=0, pointer offset=0)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The STM0 frame is defined as that frame obtained from the STM1 one, by reducing its capacity to one third of it. The SOH bytes are divided into triplets, and the first byte is taken while the other two discarded. The Higher Order container is a VC4/3, carried in an AU4/3.
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 413 / 542
The most important advantage of this solution is the possibility to transmit only the significant part of an STM1 signal sub equipped on a radio equipment, without any multiplexing/demultiplexing operation or pointer processing; using the radio network element as a pure regenerator NE.
RST RREI RPI RF branching RF branching RPI RREI RST
NNI: RST: RREI: RPI:
network node interface regenerator section termination radiorelay equipment interface radio physical interface Fig. 163. Sub STM1 terminal functional block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 414 / 542
For hardware convenience it is defined a new entity: AU4/3 carrying a VC4/3, being them structured as an one third of an AU4. The AU4/3 mapping carries VC3, VC2, VC12 by two pointer levels (AU_level and TU_level, cascaded); moreover, fixed stuff columns in their mapping into AU4/3 are in fixed position with respect to the VC4/3 carrier.
STM1 / STM0 frame processing algorithm:
RPS
RSOH termination
MUX
B1 calculation:
the calculation is made over all bytes of the frame after scrambling and the result is inserted in the next frame before scrambling.
WST & services Insertion on STM1 frame Div by 3 Services insertion on STM0 frame
Filling all 0 bytes for columns Nx2 & Nx3 (except A1, A2 and AUOH row) M1 change position B2(#5.1) compensation B2 compensation B3 compensation
RPS
RST section
RFCOH section
STM0 / STM1 frame processing algorithm:
RPS WST & services extraction on STM1 frame MUX
B1 handling:
the byte is recovered from the SDH frame after and is descrambling compared with the the calculation over previous elapsed frame
RSOH insertion and B1 calculation
Services extraction on STM0 frame
Interleaving of all 0 bytes for columns Nx2 & Nx3 Rewriting A1, A2 Rewriting AUOH
RPS M1 change position.

(M1 is moved in the original position [#9.6] and 00 configuration is inserted in [#9.4] byte) B2 compensation B3 compensation
B2 (#1, #3) compensation

RFCOH section RST section
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 415 / 542
51.8 SOH handling in normal operation condition

SOH handling in normal operation condition according to the default hardware configuration:
SOH BYTES A1 A2 B1 E1 F1 D1 D2 D3 J0
TX SIDE Refresh Refresh insert insert insert insert character or multiframe insert insert Bypass
RX SIDE Refresh Refresh insert insert insert insert character or multiframe insert insert Bypass
NOTE
All the RSOH bytes are managed one by one
M.S.U. NU_RSOH MSOH
All the MSOH bytes are in a fixed bypass condition without any possibility to be managed.
This operation is involved in Radio Section Termination area (RST) as in the following block diagram:
TX_SIDE SIGNAL FLOW
Line side
RST
RPS
RFCOH RRA
RSPI RADIO
Radio side
RX_SIDE SIGNAL FLOW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 416 / 542
51.9 Alarms detected in RST section

Alarm
Consequent action MSAIS MSAIS MSAIS OFS count
LOS (loss of signal) LOF (loss of frame) TIM (trace identifier mismatch) OOF (out of frame) MSAIS (multiplex section AIS) MSRDI (multiplex section remote defect indication) TIM:
when J0 byte, extracted from SDH stream received, is different from the data written in J0_register by microprocessor interface (according to the regenerator section trace algorithm), Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) alarm is detected and the AIS condition is activated. the Multiplex Section Remote Defect Indication is used to return an indication to the transmit end that the received end has detected an incoming section defect or is receiving MSAIS. MSRDI is generated by inserting a 110 code in positions 6, 7 and 8 of the K2 byte before scrambling. the Multiplex Section AIS indication detect an incoming AIS signal. MSAIS is generated by inserting a 111 code in positions 6, 7 and 8 of the K2 byte before scrambling. the Out of Frame Second (OFS) is declared when the STM1 frame alignment process is in the OOF state. This parameter is used as additional performance parameter.
MSRDI:
MSAIS:
N.B.
The proprietary management of K0 channel (Radio Channel Identification) inside the RFCOH section is the same of J0 in RST section. The detected alarm is the following: Alarm RCIM (Radio Channel Identifier Mismatch) Consequent action MSAIS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 417 / 542
In the following diagram is indicated the functional representation of the system with the alarms indication as reported to ECT/OS: LOS LOF
TIM (JO)
TX_LOS TX_FAIL MOD_LOS MOD_FAIL
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH
RRA channel
RSPI
MOD + TX
LINESIDE
RADIOSIDE
TX FAIL (#) TX DEGRADED (#) TIM (JO) LOS LOF RCIM (K0)
RX_LOS RX_FAIL DEM_LOS DEM_FAIL
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH
RRA channel
RSPI
RX + DEM
(#) referred to optical interface.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 418 / 542
In the following diagram is indicated the functional representation of the system with the primitives for the performance monitoring as reported to ECT/OS.
OOF
EB (B1)
TL
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH
RRA channel
RSPI
MOD + TX
RADIOSIDE
LINESIDE
EB (B1)
PSA
RL PSR OOF FEC
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH
RRA channel
RSPI
RX + DEM
Legend: EB: OOF: TL: Errored Block Out of Frame Transmitted level, is the level of the estimated transmitter power at the transmitter output. The parameter is represented by two values: an integer fixed value expressed in [dBm] defining the transmitted power value; an integer offset value expressed in [dB] representing the variation with respect to the nominal value. Received level, is the level of the estimated received power at the input of the receiver. In 2 release both value will be reported. The parameter unit shall be expressed in [dBm] and represented by the rounded nearest integer. Protection Switch Actual, represents any actual switch from a protected (working) channel to a protecting (standby) channel Protection Switch Request, represents any activation of a switch initiation criteria which may lead to automatic switches from a working channel to a standby channel and viceversa.
RL:
PSA: PSR:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 419 / 542
51.10 Regenerator Section trace management

J0 expected (line side) K0 transmitted (radio side) J0 transmitted (radio side) K0 expected (radio side) J0 transmitted (line side) J0 expected (radio side)
RST sink
RST source
RPS
RFCOH source
RFCOH source
RPS
RST sink
RST source
RRA channel (TX side)
RRA channel (RX side)
Action to P: J0 mismatch alarm (with MSAIS insertion in frame) J0 received value
Action to P: K0 mismatch alarm (with MSAIS insertion in frame) K0 received value J0 mismatch alarm (with MSAIS insertion in frame) J0 received value
NOTES: J0 is represented by an integer of 15 digits (multiframe mode9 or one byte (insert character mode). The default value for J0 is 0000 0001 (unspecified Regenerator Section Trace). The methodology of J0 management is described in the following para.51.10.1 on page 421. K0 is represented by 6 bits (inside a RFCOH byte). K0_mismatch alarm is detected after 3 consecutive frame of erroneous K0 received, and it is used as channel switching criteria. In the system without protection, J0 only is managed. K0 transmitted and K0 expected are fixed to the default value (K0 = 000000). In a repeater configuration only K0 management is performed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 420 / 542
51.10.1 J0 management The J0 byte located at # (1, 7) byte in an STM1 is allocated to a Regenerator Section Trace. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a Section Access Point Identifier so that a section receiver can verify its continued connection to the intended transmitter. Within a national network, or within the domain of a single operator, this Section Access Point Identifier may use either a single byte (containing the code 0255) or the Access Point Identifier format as defined in clause 3/G.831. At international boundaries, or at the boundaries between the networks of different operators, the format defined in clause 3/G.831 shall be used unless otherwise mutually agreed by the operators providing the transport. A 16byte frame is defined for the transmission of Section Access Point Identifiers where these conform to the definition contained in clause 3/G.831. The first byte of the string is a frame start marker and includes the result of a CRC7 calculation over the previous frame. The following 15 bytes are used for the transport of 15 T.50 characters (international Reference Version) required for the Section Access Point Identifier. The 16byte frame description is given in Table 4/G.707 reported herebelow: TABLE 4/G.707 16byte frame for Trail APId Byte # 1 2 3 : 16 1 0 0 : 0 X X X C1 X X Value (bit 1, 2, ,8) C2 X X C3 X X C4 X X : X X X X C5 X X C6 X X C7 X X
NOTES 1 C1C2C3C4C5C6C7 is the result of the CRC7 calculation over the previous frame. C1is the MSB. 2 0XXXXXXX represents a T.50 character. In the case of interworking of equipment implementing the STM identifier functionality (see N.B.) and equipment employing the Regenerator Section Trace function, the latter shall interpret the pattern 0000001 in J0 as Regenerator Section Trace unspecified. This unspecified Regenerator Section Trace can also be used if no use of the Regenerator Section Trace is made. N.B. STM identifier: C1 In earlier versions of the Recommendation, the content of bytes located at S (1, 7, 1) or [1, 6N+1] to S (1, 7, N) or [1, 7N] was defined as a unique identifier indicating the binary value of the multicolumn, interleave depth coordinate, c. It may have been used to assist in frame alignment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 421 / 542
51.10.2 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) detector The Trail Trace Identifier is a 16_BYTE or 1_BYTE string used in SDH to detect misconnections inside a communication network. A receiver has to validate the received string, in order to be sure that it has not been corrupted by line errors, and compare it with an expected value, in order to verify that it is connected with the right transmitter. If this is not the case, the receiver has to declare a TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch) alarm. The 1_BYTE string is made by a single byte (containing the code 0255), while the 16_BYTE frame is structured as previously described. In the following, the algorithm to detect the TIM condition is described: this algorithm is applied at all SDH layers in which Trail Trace Identifier feature is defined, so it is suitable for processing byte J0 (section trace) and bytes J1, J2 (VCi path trace). The algorithm behavior is shown in the following Fig. 164. :
DATA
16_BYTE
t, f, d
COMB
t, f, d
t, f, d
TIM1/16 machine
TIM 1/16 alarm
1/16
1_BYTE t = true f = false d = dontcare

valid CRC7
TIM
TIMX machine
valid CONST
TIMX alarm
Fig. 164. TIM algorithm Incoming data are at the same time checked in order to find the standard 16_BYTE string with multiframe alignment word and CRC7, or a fixed 16 times repeating 1_BYTE string. The preset 16/1 is needed to tell the system if a 16_BYTE or a 1_BYTE string is expected. After validation process (correct CRC7 and multiframe for the 16_BYTE string, same value 16 times for the 1_BYTE string), the received string is compared with the expected one. If the preset 16/1 is set to 16, the comparison with 1 is always false; if the preset 16/1 is set to 1, the comparison with 16 is always false. Each output (that can assume three possible values: false, true, dontcare if the received string has not been validated) of the two comparisons is sent, through a COMB function, to a state machine (the TIM1/16 machine) with four states: alarm, not alarm, and two intermediate states. False causes the state machine moving towards the alarm state, true causes the state machine moving towards the not alarm state, dontcare leaves the machine in the state it is. In parallel, further control is performed by the TIMX machine, in such a way that if for 8x16 times neither a fixed string nor a correct multiframe alignment word plus CRC7 can be found, the TIM alarm is anyway declared (this feature is not required by standards at now). The TIM algorithm described is fully compliant with the standard promptness requests about maximum detection time and is able to detect all possible crossmisconnections: expected 1_BYTE string, with a different 1_BYTE or a 16_BYTE string received; expected 16_BYTE string, with a different 16_BYTE or a 1_BYTE string received; expected 1_BYTE or 16_BYTE string, with a random string received.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 422 / 542
Here below, TIM algorithm is described in more details: a)

16_BYTE DETECTOR As it can be seen in the following Fig. 165. , the 16_BYTE detector internally consists of four functions: a multiframe aligner in order to synchronize the machine itself to the 16_BYTE frame; a CRC7 extractor, in order to calculate the CRC7 from the received frame; a mismatch detector, in order to determine whether a received 16_BYTE frame is different from the expected string; a command generator, which drives the TIM1/16 machine, depending on the outputs of the preceding two functions.
CRC7 detector 8
valid CRC7
DATA
Multiframe Aligner
sync
Command Generator Mismatch detector 8

match
t, f, d
DATA EXP
1/16
Fig. 165. The 16_BYTE machine b) 1_BYTE DETECTOR The 1_BYTE detector internally consists of four functions: a mod 16 counter, in order to generate an independent sync; a 16 byte integrator, which detects whether the received bytes are of the 1_BYTE type; a mismatch detector, in order to determine whether a received 1_BYTE is different from the expected one; a command generator, which drives the TIM1/16 machine, depending on the outputs of the preceding two functions.
8
DATA
16 byte integrator MOD 16 counter

sync
valid const
Command Generator Mismatch detector 8

match
t, f, d
DATA EXP
1/16
Fig. 166. The 1_BYTE machine
51.10.3 K0 management The K0 bits were defined in RFCOH section to perform a proprietary regenerator section trace internally to the switching section. K0 is represented by 6 bits (inside a RFCOH byte). K0_mismatch alarm is detected after 3 consecutive frame of erroneous K0 received, and it is used as channel switching criteria.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 423 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
424 / 542
52 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 52.1 Introduction

This chapter describes in detail the functional operation of 9600LSY/LHR equipment. This handbook gives no detailed information on 1650SMC equipment. For this purpose, please refer to 1650SMC specific documentation (see para.C.2.4.2 on page 530) with the following exception:
In the application for 9600 LSY, the FAN SHELF used for 1650SMC is not that described in the 1650SMC documentation, but that described in this handbook.
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this chapter are: chapter 12 on page 35 System description
Information given in this chapter is organized as follows: Power Supply subsystem: Equipment Control subsystem that includes: Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture: System Controller unit description: Flash Card description: Additional Housekeeping unit description: para.52.2 on page 426 para.52.3 on page 430 para.52.3.1 on page 430 para.52.3.2 on page 435 para.52.3.3 on page 441 para.52.3.4 on page 442
Baseband subsystem: para.52.4 on page 443 that includes: Interconnection general block diagrams: para.52.4.1 on page 443 N+1 switch logic para.52.4.2 on page 445 1:N switch logic para.52.4.3 on page 452 RRACHANNEL STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST : para.52.4.4 on page 454 RRASTANDBY STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST : para.52.4.5 on page 456 STM1 optical module: para.52.4.6 on page 459 MODEM STM1 1WSTandSTM0 0WST: para.52.4.7 on page 460 Service and Additional Voice unit: para.52.4.8 on page 464 Transceiver subsystem: that includes: Interconnection general block diagrams: DC/DC converter module: Transmit and Service module: Receive & IF Rx module: Local Oscillator module: Fans subsystem: para.52.5 on page 469 para.52.5.1 on page 469 para.52.5.2 on page 471 para.52.5.3 on page 472 para.52.5.4 on page 476 para.52.5.5 on page 477 para.52.6 on page 479
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
References to 32QAM modulation present in this chapter are for general information purposes. 9600LSYLHR version is not meant to support it.
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 425 / 542
52.2 Power supply subsystem

The Power Supply subsystem distributes both batteries BATT.A and BATT.B voltages to each user circuit in the following way: a) Primary voltage distribution with rack and TRU Fig. 167. herebelow shows the block diagram. For physical implementation, refer to: 9600LSY/LHR Installation Handbook REF.[C] on page 524 Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook REF.[L] on page 527. Primary sources BATT.A and BATT.B are connected to TRU distribution frame. From TRU box, BATT.A and BATT.B are distributed by individual cables, each one protected by circuit breakers, to the subracks (Tab. 28. on page 200 indicates the TRU breaker utilization). Power Supply distribution in the Transceiver shelf (see Fig. 167. herebelow and Fig. 111. on page 209). Power supply cables from TRU are connected to following connectors: (M2) for BATT.A and (M3) for BATT.B, by means of which transceivers TR0 to TR4 receive power through the shelf backpanel (M5) for BATT.A and (M6) for BATT.B, by means of which transceivers TR5 to TR9 receive power through the shelf backpanel
BATT. A
b)
BATT. B
TR0
TR9
TOP RACK UNIT
TRX BACK PANEL B.B. BACK PANNEL
FAN SUBRACKS
ADM BACK PANEL
Fig. 167. Power Supply distribution from Top Rack Unit and Transceiver shelf Power Supply distribution
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The ON/OFF position of circuit breakers of Enhanced TRU can be checked by system software connecting their monitoring points to some housekeeping inputs. For details, refer to the Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook REF.[L] on page 527.
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 426 / 542
c)
Power Supply distribution in the Baseband shelf Power supply cables from TRU (see Fig. 167. on page 426) are connected to following connectors:
N.B.
BATT.A cable connected to Power Supply Input connector of PSF1 unit equipped in slot 25 (i.e. on the left) of Baseband shelf BATT.B cable connected to Power Supply Input connector of PSF2 unit equipped in slot 36 (i.e. on the right) of Baseband shelf PSF unit front view is depicted in Fig. 82. on page 171 PSF1 and PSF2 position in the shelf is shown in Fig. 79. on page 160
The distribution of Power supply from PSF units to the subrack is depicted in following Fig. 168. : each PSF unit receives also the power supply voltage from the other PSF; after filtering: BATT.A and BATT.B primary voltages are distributed through the backpanel toward the Power Supply units PSU0 .... PSU9 (slots (E) in Fig. 79. on page 160) converted voltages are distributed through the backpanel to units SERVICE and SYSTEM CONTROLLER in the shelf (respectively in slot (A) and (B) in Fig. 79. on page 160), and, through its cable, to ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING unit (see para.23.8 on page 203)
The distribution of Power supply from PSU units to the units MODEM and RRA/RRAS is depicted in following Fig. 168. : PSU units are grouped in even/odd 2units groups (i.e. PSU0+PSU1 , PSU2+PSU3 , ..). Each PSU pair converts and then distributes, through the backpanel, power supply to the correspondent pair of RRA and MODEM. In particular: RRA/RRAS units receive power supply from both PSU units; if equipped, optical module receives power supply from the RRA/RRAS where it is equipped; each MODEM unit receives power supply only from correspondent PSU unit ( where n = even and n+1 = odd): MODEMn from PSUn MODEMn+1 from PSUn+1.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 427 / 542
+5.3 V + 3.5 V PSU0 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. RRA0 (or RRAS) OPT MODULE MODEM0
+5.3 V
+ 3.5 V OPT MODULE
RRA1 PSU1 +5.3 V + 3.5 V MODEM1
+5.3 V + 3.5 V PSU8 RRA8 OPT MODULE MODEM8
battery A BATT.A
battery B
+5.3 V
+ 3.5 V OPT MODULE
PSF1 BATT.B PSU9 +5.3 V + 3.5 V
RRA9
MODEM9
BATT.A ADDITIONAL HOUSEHEEPING SERVICE
BATT.B
PSF2
+ 3.5 V M184
+5.3 V
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
SERVICE BATTERY
N.B.
dashed elements are optional or depending on the configuration Fig. 168. Power Supply distribution in Baseband shelf
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 428 / 542
d)
Service Battery to System Controller unit In addition to the voltage distributed by PSF1 and PSF2 units, the System Controller unit receives also the battery voltage by means of the cable used for Station Alarms management (see Tab. 31. on page 219). This allows the System Controller unit to manage the TRU lamps also in case of power supply missing from both PSF1 and PSF2 units.
e)
Power Supply distribution to Additional Housekeeping unit The Additional Housekeeping unit is powered as the System Controller unit (of which it must be considered an extension), as depicted in Fig. 168. on page 428. From the physical point of view, power supply is lead on the cable connecting the Additional Housekeeping unit to the BB shelf (see Tab. 34. on page 220).
f)
Power Supply distribution in the Fans shelves Power supply cables from TRU (see Fig. 167. on page 426) are connected to following connectors of Fans shelf (see Fig. 105. on page 198): (M1) for BATT.A (M4) for BATT.B As depicted in Fig. 197. on page 479, both BATT.A and BATT.B voltages are distributed to both FANS ASSEMBLED units. Inside each FANS ASSEMBLED unit, as depicted in Fig. 198. on page 480, there are two power supply units (one receiving BATT.A power supply voltage, the other receiving BATT.B power supply voltage) from which, diodedecoupled, power supply is distributed to the four fans of the assembly.
g)
Power Supply distribution in the 1650SMC (ADM) shelf Please make reference to 1650SMC specific documentation (see para.C.2.4.2 on page 530).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 429 / 542
52.3 Equipment Control Subsystem

52.3.1 Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture This paragraph describes the control subsystem hardware architecture, defines the control elements, the function partitioning among them and the external and internal interfaces managed by this subsystem. For reader convenience, the content index of this part is detailed herebelow: LHR control subsystem architecture Function partitioning Control elements Communication interfaces herebelow: herebelow herebelow on page 432 on page 434
WMSN control subsystem architecture
52.3.1.1 LHR control subsystem architecture 52.3.1.1.1 Function partitioning The functionalities performed by the control subsystem can be summarized as follows: Message Communication Function (MCF) Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF) Virtual Machine Management Function (VMMF) Physical Machine Management Function on whole equipment basis (PMMF/E) Physical Machine Management Function on unit basis (PMMF/U) Basic Functions (BF) 52.3.1.1.2 Control elements The control elements supporting the functionalities described above are: Equipment controller (EC) Radio Controller (RC) Supervisory Units (SU) The control elements logical hierarchy is depicted in Fig. 169. on page 431. The functionalities are splitted on the control elements composing the control subsystem architecture. Equipment Controller One EC has in charge the MCF and VMMF: it provides resources (physical interfaces and protocol stack) required for the communication between NE and the management systems (OS and ECT), it performs all the control and management functions of the virtual machine (info model). No protection of this control element is performed. The EC is physically located aboard the System Controller board. Radio Controller One RC has in charge the PMMF/E: it provides the resources to support the control and management functions related to the real physical machine. No protection of this control element is performed. The RC is physically located aboard the System Controller board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 430 / 542
Supervisory Units The SUs have in charge the PMMF/U and the AF. This function requires a real time processing of the data coming from the ASICs. The SU on board of each unit has the aim to provide an uniform interface towards the RC avoiding a RC dependency from the HW where the SUs are accommodated. One SU is accommodated in each unit.
OS
QB3
ECT
F EC
ISSB
RC
System Controller
CAN
Rem Inv
Local uP
Rem Inv
Local uP
SU
SU
Fig. 169. LHR control subsystem architecture
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 431 / 542
52.3.1.1.3 Communication interfaces A set of (serial and parallel) interfaces are defined as part of the control subsystem to support the communication task. They can be classified as system internal or external interfaces. All the communication links used by the different processing functions (RC and EC) to exchange data each other or to read/write data from/to the controlled objects (ASICs or other devices on board the different cards in the equipment) are defined as internal interfaces. External interfaces are defined as the communication links provided by the control subsystem towards external devices used for Operation and Maintenance functions or system debug activities. All the interfaces are reported in Fig. 170. with the association of the units supporting these interfaces.
EC
ISSB
RC SC CAN
Inv. Mem.
RRA uP
Inv. Mem.
SW uP
Inv. Mem.
SERV uP
Inv. Mem.
MOD uP
SPI SW
ASIC
SPI
ASIC
SPI
ASIC
RRAn
SERV
MODn
RT uP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Inv. Mem.
RTn
Fig. 170. LHR communication interfaces
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 432 / 542
External Interfaces The control subsystem provides the following external communication interfaces: QB3 interface F interface Qecc interface DBG interface HK/RA interface QAUX interface All the above interfaces are supported, at the NE level, by the EC processor, as part of its MCF and VMMF. The QB, F, Qecc, Qaux interfaces are available as communication links between the NE and external control equipments, as required by the TMN environment. The QB3 protocol stack requires a 10BASE2 (or 10BASET) physical layer and IEEE 802.2 / 802.3 for the data link layer. Through this interface the NE is connected to a LAN for message exchange with the OS station. The F interface is a local communication port provided to connect the NE to a local Craft Terminal station (PC or WS); this interface is implemented as a low speed RS232 port (bit rate is 38,4 Kbit/s max). Remote CT functionality is performed by routing CT messages to DCCs and viceversa. The Qecc interface is defined as a TMN related communication interface based on the use of the Embedded Communication Channels, available in the SOH portion of the SDH frame, as physical layer. Through the Qecc interface the NE can exchange management messages with a remote OS (or Craft Terminal) station. Qecc interface is implemented as a TDM serial link between the EC function and the ASICs on board of port units. The TDM channel is terminated by the MHDLC, providing for the selection of the channels to terminate and performing the standard HDLC functions. This interface uses the LAPD (ITUT Q.921) as data link layer protocol, this protocol is performed by the MCF inside the EC function. The Qaux interface is provided as an additional TMN communication interface for message exchange between the NE and a remote OS station, based on the use of a 2 Mbit/s proprietary channel. The DBG interface is a proprietary interface available for software debug activities. A local communication port for debug is required for each processor (EC and RC) on board the System Controller. The local debug ports are a low speed RS232 UART based interface, available for VT100 or equivalent debug console. An equipment network interface for debug activities should be provided as well, implemented as a 10BASE2 Ethernet channel. The EC function should provide a router function between this port and the internal ISSB bus to allow the use of this port for debugging of RC processor too. A set of traditional parallel I/O interfaces for local signaling of alarm presence, such as rack lamps, front panel LEDs and so on are provided by the EC processor. Internal Interfaces The control subsystem provides the following internal communication interfaces: ISSB (Intra Shelf Serial Bus) interface CAN interface SPI interface The ISSB (Intra Shelf Serial Bus) interface is basically an equipmentinternal Local Area Network for communications among the different microprocessors in the same shelf: the EC processor and the RC processor and other possible processors. It is a multimaster HDLCbased backplane serial bus. The CAN interface allows to connect the RC processor to the microprocessor on board the units. It is a serial broadcast bus, each node connected to the bus receives all the messages sent by the other ones. A local filtering mechanism on each node permit to manage only the messages related to the node. The maximum speed is 1 Mbit/s up to 40 meters length.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 433 / 542
52.3.1.2 WMSN control subsystem architecture The main characteristics of the WMSN control subsystem architecture are the following (see Fig. 171. herebelow): LHR and ADM equipments (1650SMC) control architecture reuse This means that from the management system point of view this equipment is seen as two different network elements (both of them with an own address). In this way the LHR and ADM hardware control architecture are reused without any modification, allowing to preserve the independence of the software developments of the ADM and radio parts. Only one F and QB3 interface The F and QB3 interfaces are present on the ADM part. The radio part sees the TMN information by means of Qecc interfaces. RECT application is used to manage both the ADM part (directly connected) and the radio part (via Qecc).
RECT
OS
QB3
ISSB
QECC EC EC
ISSB
SC
RC
ADM Controller SPI ISPB
System Controller (radio)
CAN
Rem Inv
ASIC
Rem Inv
ASIC
Rem Inv
Local uP
Rem Inv
Local uP
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
ADM part
Legend :
RADIO part
EC : Equipment Controller (MCF, SEMF: Virtual Machine) RC : Radio Controller (SEMF: Physical Machine) SC : Shelf Controller (SEMF: Physical Machine) ISSB : Intra Shelf Serial Bus SPI : Serial Peripheral & Inventory CAN : Controller Area Network bus ISPB : Intra Shelf Parallel Bus
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 171. WMSN control subsystem architecture
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 434 / 542
52.3.2 System Controller unit description Refer to para.23.3.2 on page 172 for the unit physical views and operative information.
The Equipment System Controller (ESC) unit is made with two boards: the mother board and the subunit ESCON. The block diagram of Fig. 172. is relevant to the whole unit (mother board and the subunit ESCON). The subunit ESCON performs the main functions: Equipment controller Radio controller DCCR management Remote Inventory management Station alarms management Summarizing alarms management Housekeeping alarms management
The mother board performs the following main functions: DCCR Mux /demux Alarm expansion I/0 Housekeeping /Station alarms/ Summarizing alarms with relays to Access area subrack Management of CANBUSes of baseband shelf and RT shelf Management of parallel missing card alarms Drivers and connectors for Equipment controller and Radio controller I/O circuits Management of Power Supply and Battery alarms ANDOR function Routering of SPRI register with a dedicate microcontroller.
On the board there is an 8bits microcontroller, to convert the bus SPI of ESCON into CAN 0 BBBUS, Can 1 BBBus and CanRT bus. [1] Equipment Controller and Radio Controller The functions of Equipment Controller and Radio Controller are described in para.52.3.1 on page 430.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 435 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
CAN0 BB MPC860 EN EN ISS B MPC860
N.B.
05
F RC SPI EC Local bus FPGA
Resistive Load
955.203.292 Q CAN0 BB
FPGA Can 0 Can 1 Control. Control. EXP. ALARM P I O/HK UART HC12
RTX1 RTX2 RTX3 RTX4 RTX5 RTX6 RTX7 RTX8 RTX9 RTX0 RTX1 RTX2 RTX3 RTX4 RTX5 RTX6 RTX7 RTX8 RTX9
Resistive Load
Resistive Load
CAN 0 BB and RC local debug ocal

QB3 (10base 2) QB3 (10base T and Debug_N or EC debug local)
MD1MD1 MD2 MD2 MD3 MD3 MD4 MD4 MD5MD5 MD6MD6 MD7 MD8 MD7 MD8 MD9MD9 MD0
Resistive Load
Resistive Load
SERVICE WEST and HST DRIVER not present in current release
Fig. 172. System Controller block diagram
CH2 CH2CH3 CH0CH1 CH1 CH3 CH4CH4 CH5CH5CH6CH6CH7CH7 CH8CH8CH9CH9
3DB 02839 AA AA CAN 1 Download FPGA
542
SERVICE
SERVICE Extension HST HKHK DRIVER WEST
CAN RT CAN0 BB
FPGA SPIL SPRI HC12 Router SPI
Card Missing and RT Power Supply Alarms Remote Inventory BB Power Supply and Battery filter
436 / 542
[2]
DCCR Management See Fig. 173. on page 438.
The System controller manages the DCCR at line side and radio side. In order to connect DCCR to the Controller, the FPGA inside ESCON board requires a particular bidirectional link working at 6.48 Mhz. In order to avoid slips on dropped DCCR byte, due to different frequency between the clock extracted from STMj (j=0 to 9) and the local timing used to resynchronize the resulting DCCR subframe, a stuffing mechanism is realized. The DCC mapping and interleaving is described in Tab. 65. on page 408. An EPLD performs three bidirectional links in order to insert/extract the DCCR line side of the all RRA units, and DCCR radio side from/to Service unit: On the first link 6.48.48 Mbit/s are mapped : DCCR 192Kbit from/to Service units DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRASTB0 DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 1 DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 2 On the second link 6.48 Mbit/s are mapped: DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 3 DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 4 DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 5 DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 6 On the third link 6.48 Mbit/s are mapped: DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 7 DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 8 DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 9 DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 6
[3]
Summarizing/Housekeeping Alarms See Fig. 173. on page 438. The ESCON subunit manages 9 Input and 14 Output signal alarms. By means of the alarms expansion circuit located on ESC mother board, there are 22 Input and 56 Output signals available. In 9600LSY application the following number of alarms are managed: 22 HK input 10 HK output 46 output alarms
In order to reduce the power consumption, all relays are switched off in normal conditions; the presence of active alarms corresponds always to closed contact with a common wire available to the Customer. The electrical characteristics of relays are: (V is voltage between the warm wire and the common one).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
open contact 72 v V v 2V closed contact 2 v V v 0V
I v 0.2mA I v 50mA
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 437 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
158
138 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
05
374 8 OE A CK 374
TUP INT
HK1 HK2 HK3 HK4 GA3 GA4 GA5 GA6
HK 14
HK 1316 IN 14
4 4 SEL Vcc
OUT 14
Lamp OUT 11 alarms OUT 12 OUT 13
}
0 1SEL 2
ANDOR
158 SEL
IN 68
Link 1
Link 2
Link 3
955.203.292 Q
4 4 4 8 8 374 8 OE C CK 374 8 OE D CK 374 8 Can 0 Can 1 Control. Control. 8 Can 1 374 OE F CK 374 8 OE G CK Link 2 OE E CK ESCONX
OUT 1 OUT 2
HK 58 HK 1720
E N OE B CK
GA7 GA8 GA9 GA10 GA11 GA12 GA13 GA14
Rack lamps to M184 connector of M184 to Access area (BB shelf)
158 SEL
IN 912
GA 912 GA 21,22 ORALIM
GA1 FREE GA2 TUP
PWANDOR
Link 1
DCCR TO/FROM RFCOH ( Service)
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRASTBY0 )
SPI 6.48 Mbit FPGA
From Battery Filter 1 and 2 Alarms battery

DCCR TO/FROM
Service Battery
DCCR TO/FROM
Stuffing el.store DCCR mapping RST (RRA1) DCCR extracting DCCR extracting RST (RRA2
Stuffing Stuffing el.store el.store DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA4 ) DCCR mapping DCCR mapping DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA5) DCCR extracting DCCR extracting Link 3 Can 0
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA 3)
HK5 HK6 HK7 HK8 HK9 HK10 GA31 GA32
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA6
Fig. 173. DCCR and summarizing/housekeeping alarms management block diagram

3DB 02839 AA AA
Ck + SY from main channel Sy from CK 38.88 + SY
Stuffing Stuffing el.store el.store DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA8 ) DCCR mapping DCCR mapping DCCR extracting DCCR DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA9) extracting
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA 7)
542
Ck + SY from
main channel
RRA 0,1,2,8,9 Ck + SY from Sby channel
MUXMUX
LogicLogic EPLD Daina
Ck + Sy from
Dip Switch
EPLD
438 / 542
[4]
Remote Inventory management See Fig. 174. on page 440.
The Remote Inventory function permits the operator to retrieve information about any card or module present on the equipment. The available information, written in a 64x16 bit EEPROM on board (RI device), is: construction date, code number, maker name, Cardtype, etc. (see details in the Operator Handbook). The Remote Inventory function is present in all the cards. The RI can be also present on some submodules assembled on the board (such as optical modules, microcontrollers and so on). The relevant data are transported by the CAN bus and are managed by the System Controller unit, which, besides the information retrieved from the units RI device, add the slot identifier (ID) information. The System Controller unit can also manage the visual indications of the board (LEDs) and some I/O parallel commands/contacts/alarms that can eventually be transferred by means of the CAN bus. The agent microcontroller on each unit manages the Remote Inventory, with the exception of Power Supply Units (PSU) and Battery Filter units (PSF), that are supported by ESC Agent. The Remote Inventory of units submodules (CANCCOMB modules, Additional TPHDEV and Optical interface) are supported by the respective Agent Unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 439 / 542
CAN 0 BB
SERVICE
HST DRIVER
If unit TPH
Add.
If unit TPH
Add.
additional TPHDEV
MD0
MD1
MD2
MD3
MD4
MD5
MD6
MD7
MD8
MD9
IF unit IF unit IF unit IF unit IF unit IF unit IF unit IF unit IF unit IF unit IF unit IF unit IF unit IF unit IF unit IF unit IF unit IF unit IF unit IF unit If unitIf unit If unitIf unit If unitIf unit If unitIf unit If unitIf unit If unitIf unit If unitIf unitIf unitIf unit If unitIf unit If unitIf unit
CANCCOMB MODULES
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
Optical If unit interface
OPTICAL MODULES
HC12 ESC Agent
N.12 Enable
PSU0
PSU1
PSU2
PSU3
PSU4
PSU5
PSU6
PSU7
PSU8
PSU9
ESC Unit
Battery filter 1 Battery filter 2
CAN 0 BB Remoty inventory Bus Enable Clock Data input Data output +3.3V gnd Missing
EEPROM
N.B.
SERVICE WEST and HST DRIVER not present in current release Fig. 174. Remote inventory subsystem architecture
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 440 / 542
SERVICE WEST
Extension HK
52.3.3 Flash Card description Refer to para.23.3.2 on page 172 for the unit physical views and operative information.
The FLASH CARD contains, after the system SW loading and system configuration carried out through the Craft Terminal: a) b) the whole Equipment software programs (susceptible to be downloaded toward the Supervisory Units); the software images of FPGAs housed in the following boards: SYSCO, SMA subunit of SERVICE, RRA (CHANNEL and STANDBY) and MODEM, susceptible to be downloaded toward them; refer to para.47.2 on page 347 for details; the system configuration data. Such configuration data set is named MIB and can be saved as a file in the Craft Terminal (or OS) environment, as well as can be restored in the Flash Card retrieving this file from the Craft Terminal (or OS); the routing configuration data, that is, according to the Craft Terminal Men (N.B.): Configuration Comm.Routing 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Local configuration Systems local address OS. configuration NTP server configuration Interface configuration OSI configuration IP configuration LAPD configuration Ethernet configuration RAP configuration MESA configuration IP Static Routing configuration OSPF AREA configuration IP Address configuration of point to point configuration OSI over IP IP over OSI
c)
d)
7.
Tunneling configuration
All those listed parameter are NOT stored into the MIB file because considered unique to a particular system in a network and are NOT meant to be reproduced on other systems in the same network because will cause conflicts in the supervision network centre. N.B. This list is merely for general information only. Refer to the C.T. Operators Handbook for a more precise list.
The presence of the FLASH CARD as individual part simplifies the maintenance procedure in case of failure of the System Controller, as explained in para.47.3.6 on page 354 and para.47.3.7 on page 356.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 441 / 542
52.3.4 Additional Housekeeping unit description Refer to para.23.8 on page 203 for the unit physical views and operative information.
The Additional Housekeeping (HKDEV) is an optional unit. By its use, other 18 HK Inputs become available, besides those already available with the System Controller unit. Fig. 175. herebelow shows the unit block diagram. (M1) is the connector for getting the 18 HK Inputs (for pinout see Tab. 45. on page 241). The connector (M2) is linked by cable to connector (M179) of Baseband shelf (see Fig. 109. on page 206). By this cable the unit: receives power supply is connected to the System Controller unit by CAN 0 BB bus sends the Card Fail and Card Missing signals to the System Controller
A red led on the front indicates the failure of Additional Housekeeping unit
M1 SUBD 25 pins female
18 Housekeeping Inputs CEPT INTERFACE
3.45 V 5.3 V M2 SUBD 9 pins male HKDEV Card Fail

led
Remote Inventory
HC12 mP
HKDEV Card Missing Can 0 BB
Fig. 175. Additional Housekeeping block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 442 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Select by ECT FPGA 1 9 HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/s from Access Area NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s from Service 9
05
RRA
SRS RFCOH
1
52.4 Baseband subsystem
52.4.1 Interconnection general block diagrams
955.203.292 Q
STM1
O/E
RST
MOD
IF to TR
DCCR 5.1 Mb
The RFCOH and one WST can be protected only two channels
From RRA 2/8/9
5.1 Mb
F QB3 PIO Switch logic N+1
SC SERVICE
DCCR
Protected second WST use with Modem/ RRA Protected 1x2Mb/s in future release EOW 64 Kb DSI,MC,ATPC
DCCR 5.1 Mb
5.1 Mb
STM1
The following Fig. 176. and Fig. 177. show the unit interconnection block diagram respectively for Tx side and Rx side configurations, with regard to the transmitted/received signals and the internal signal and message exchange.
Fig. 176. Block diagram of Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Tx side
3DB 02839 AA AA
O/E
MUX RFCOH
RST
MOD
542
IF 0 to TR0
RRA Stby
Ktx FPGA Select by ECT
HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/s from Access Area NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s from Service
443 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Select by ECT FPGA
05 9 9 1
HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/sto Access Area NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s to Service
955.203.292 Q
RRA DEM
RFCOH APSE RST O/E
STM1
IF from TR
The RFCOH and one WST can be protected only two channels
5.1 Mb RRA 2/8/9 DCCR 5.1 Mb
Protected second WST Modem/ RRA in future release

Protected 1x2Mb/s Switch logic N+1 DCCR EOW 64 Kb
SC
QB3 PIO
DSI,MC,ATPC 5.1 Mb 0
SERVICE
5.1 Mb
DCCR
Fig. 177. Block diagram of Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Rx side

IF from TR
3DB 02839 AA AA
DEM
RFCOH
542
MATRIX
RST
O/E
STM1
RRA Stby
HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/sto Access Area FPGA Select by ECT NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s to Service
444 / 542
52.4.2 N+1 switch logic Please refer to para.12.2.3 on page 39 for an introduction to N+1 protection architecture.
[1]
Block diagrams Following Fig. 178. and Fig. 179. show the switch logic block diagram respectively at Tx and Rx section.
DL1_Tx
IN CH 1
Delay 0255 bit
LRST1
to Sciaron
Delay 0255 bit
RFCOH1
MOD 1
TX 1
N.U. DL2_Tx
Delay 0255 bit Delay 0255 bit
IN CH 2
LRST2
to Sciaron
RFCOH2
MOD 2
TX 2
N.U. DL3_Tx
IN CH 3
LRST3
to Sciaron
RFCOH3
MOD 3
TX 3
N.U. DL4_Tx
IN CH 4
LRST4
to Sciaron
RFCOH4
MOD 4
TX 4
N.U. DL5_Tx
IN CH 5
LRST5
to Sciaron
RFCOH5
MOD 5
TX 5
N.U. DL6_Tx
IN CH 6
LRST6
to Sciaron
RFCOH6
MOD 6
TX 6
N.U. DL7_Tx
IN CH 7
LRST7
to Sciaron
RFCOH7
MOD 7
TX 7
N.U. DL8_Tx
IN CH 8
LRST8
to Sciaron
RFCOH8
MOD 8
TX 8
N.U. DL9_Tx
IN CH 9
LRST9
to Sciaron
RFCOH9
MOD 9
TX 9
N.U. Sciaron
N.U.
DLA_Tx
Delay 0255 bit
IN OCC
Delay 0255 bit
LRSTA
Delay 0255 bit
RFCOHA
MOD A
TX A
N.U. 1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 178. Switch logic at Tx section
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 445 / 542
KR_SWC 1
OUT CH 1
M.E.
Delay 0/255 Delay 0/255
LRST1
M.E.
da DTxRx
RFCOH1
DEM 1
RX 1 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
KR_SWC 2
OUT CH 2
M.E.
LRST2
M.E.
da DTxRx KR_SWC 3
RFCOH2
DEM 2
RX 2
OUT CH 3
M.E.
LRST3
M.E.
da DTxRx KRA_SWC 4
RFCOH3
DEM 3
RX 3
OUT CH 4
M.E.
LRST4
M.E.
da DTxRx
RFCOH4
DEM 4
RX 4
KR_SWC 5
OUT CH 5
M.E.
LRST5
M.E.
RFCOH5
da DTxRx
DEM 5
RX 5
KR_SWC 6
OUT CH 6
M.E.
LRST6
M.E.
da DTxRx
RFCOH6
DEM 6
RX 6
KR_SWC 7
OUT CH 7
M.E.
LRST7
M.E.
RFCOH7
da DTxRx
DEM 7
RX 7
KR_SWC 8
OUT CH 8
M.E.
LRST8
M.E.
RFCOH8
da DTxRx
DEM 8
RX 8
KR_SWC 9
OUT CH 9
M.E.
LRST9
M.E.
RFCOH9
da DTxRx
DEM 9
RX 9
Allarmi
KR (09) SWC
Sciaron
OUT OCC
M.E.
LRSTA
M.E.
RFCOHA
DEM A
RX A
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 179. Switch logic at Rx section
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 446 / 542
[2]
Switching criteria Switching criteria are the pieces of information that the switching logic is able to get, reading them directly from channels or demodulators, and that describe the status and functionality of the channel itself and the signal processed by them. These criteria (for MAIN and SPARE) are: criterion arising for line error rate= 106>EW>109 . It is generated by the local demodulator and/or by remote regenerators by which it is retransmitted criterion arising for line error rate= 103>LBER>106. It is generated by the local demodulator and/or by remote regenerators by which it is retransmitted criterion arising for line error rate >103 originated by Demodulator criterion arising for line error rate 103 criterion arising for internal failure of DEM unit MODEM unit missing criterion arising for LOF_R (Loss Of Frame at radio side) and LOS from DEMi criterion arising for DEMstandby LOF_R (Loss Of Frame at radio side) and from
EW
LBER HBER DEM Pfail DEM Card fail MODEM Missing RRA Fail_i RRA Fail STBY RRA Card fail RRA Missing LOS_STBYn MOD Card fail LOS_M LOS_RRAn OCC_KO
criterion arising for internal failure of RRA unit RRA unit missing (alarm that inhibits the switch) loss of received signal. Detected by RRA, Rx side (via StBy from Spare) criterion arising for internal failure of MOD unit loss of received signal. Detected by MOD on signal from RFCOH loss of received signal. Detected by DTxRx on signal incoming from CHTn Only for 1:N configuration (N+1 & Occasional). OR of TIMA + LOFA_L + LOSA_L (criterion used to switch the reference signal on the spare)
Following Fig. 180. and Fig. 181. show alarm detection respectively at Rx and Tx section.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 447 / 542
KR_1
RRA1 Card fail
LOS1_R DEM1 Card fail
OUT CH 1
LRST1
M.E.
Delay 0/256
DEM n
M.E.
RX n
RFCOH LOS1_R LOF1_R EW1 RRA1 fail LBER1 HBER1
Delay 0/256
LOS_STBY
DEM1 P fail
RRA n
Alarms SWC
KR (09)
Sciaron
RRA
Card fail
LOS
A
_R
DEM
OUT OCC
M.E. Delay 0/256 Delay 0/256
Card fail RX 0
LRSTA
M.E.
RFCOHA
LOF
A
DEM 0 _R EW A LBER A HBER A DEM A P fail
KRRA_RIS
RRA SPARE
RRA
fail
Fig. 180. Rx section alarms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 448 / 542
CRC1 fail
INIG1
ENTONI
TIM1 LOF1_L LOS1_L O/E Card fail TIM1

IN CH 1
RRA n
MOD1 Card fail
LOF1_L
Delay 0 255 bit
LRST1
RFCOHn
Delay 0 255 bit
MOD n
TX n
LOS1_L A Sciaron
LOS1_M
SCIARON
LOS_RIF
LOS_RRA 9 LOS_RRA 8 LOS_RRA 7 LOS_RRA 6 LOS_RRA 5 LOS_RRA 4 LOS_RRA 3 LOS_RRA 2 LOS_RRA 1
K_OP_n
LOS_RRA 1 INIG 1 LOS_RRA 2 INIG 2 LOS_RRA 8 INIG 8 LOS_RRA 9 INIG 9
OCC_KO INIBER
A
2 1 8 9
Delay 0 255 bit
K_OP (0 9)
MODA Card fail TIM

IN OCC
A
LOF A _L
Delay 0 255 bit
LRSTA
RFCOHA
Delay 0 255 bit
MOD 0
TX 0
LOS A _L OCC_KO
LOF A _ L TIM A LOS A _ L
LOSA_M
O/E Card fail
RRA SPARE
Fig. 181. Tx section alarms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 449 / 542
Forwarding of switching criteria to switching logic is carried out through a serial frame and according to the block diagram of Fig. 182. herebelow.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. ENTONI
Modem 1 DATA DATA MD C.F. MD Missing RRA 1 RRA 1 Missing Modem n DATA DATA MD C.F. MD Missing RRA n RRA n Missing Modem Stby DATA DATA MD C.F. MD Missing RRA Stby SYNCH CK SYNCH CK SYNCH CK
RRA Stby Missing RRA n Missing RRA 1 Missing
Fig. 182. Switching criteria forwarding to switching logic
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 450 / 542
[3]
Operators control at Rx side Definitions (see also Fig. 178. on page 445): Ch n = MAIN channel (RXn) Ch 0 = SPARE channel (RX0) On protection switch the control by operator (O.C.) is envisaged through commands Lockout, Force_Switch and Manual_switch via Craft Terminal: Command Lockout Force_switch Automatic_switch Manual_switch Priority 1 2 3 4
Command Lockout is connected to the status of channel MAIN efficient, therefore this is put in service independently from the alarm criteria status. Command Force_Switch is connected to the status of channel SPARE efficient, therefore this is put in service independently from the alarm criteria status. Command Manual_switch forwarded to SPARE channel puts channel 0 in service. N.B.: Command Lockout has greatest priority with respect to command Force_switch; therefore it forces Ch n in service even if command Force_Switch is active for it and/or any switching criteria are present. Command Force_Switch has greatest priority with respect to automatic operation; therefore it forces Ch 0 in service, independently from any active alarms, through a nonhitless switching. Command Manual_switch has low priority and is executed only if there are no alarms on the channel to be put in service. Commands Lockout and Force_Switch activates ABN condition. Command Manual_switch does not activate ABN condition. [4] Displays for Operator (Rx section) In N+1 configuration, with reference to Fig. 138. on page 338: [5] execution of command Lockout causes display (1) to show n and led (2) to turn on execution of command Force_Switch causes display (1) to show 0 and led (2) to turn on
Operators control at Tx side Not envisaged
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 451 / 542
52.4.3 1:N switch logic Please refer to para.12.2.3 on page 39 for an introduction to 1:N protection architecture.
[1]
Block diagrams As point [1] on page 445
[2]
Switching criteria As point [2] on page 447
[3]
Operators control at Rx side On received channels the control by operator (O.C.) is envisaged through commands Lockout, Force_Switch and Manual_switch via Craft Terminal: Prio rity Description Command connected to the status of channel EFFICIENT, therefore the channel put in lockout is NOT protected by spare. Furthermore, if lockout command is sent to a channel presently spare, this is immediately unswitched with no alignment check by the following modality: when Rx section of switch logic receives the lockout command on channel n it can perform two actions: 1 ) if channel n is presently not protected, the system configuration changes dynamically excluding such channel n from the list of protectable channels. 2 ) if channel n is presently protected, the protection is removed, after which action 1 ) is performed. The dynamic configuration will be updated as soon as the lockout condition will be removed. Command connected to the status of channel FAULTY, therefore the channel n for which force_switch command is sent, is protected by the spare, whichever the alarm status of the spare may be. Command force_switch is carried out as follows: when Rx section of logic SWC_N1LH receives the force_switch command on channel n it can perform two actions: 1 ) if channel n is presently not protected, switching channel n to spare is executed, sending at the same time to the Tx section of the remote station the command for switching to spare the same channel n. 2 ) if channel n is presently protected, no other measures are taken. The force_switch command is not executed if: the switching logic is frozen the DSI message exchange with the remote station is unavailable channel n is inhibited at Tx side.
Command
Lockout
Force_switch
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 452 / 542
Command
Prio rity 3
Description Normal working condition. No manual operations active. Command manual_switch is carried out as follows: when Rx section of logic SWC_N1LH receives the manual_switch command on channel n it can perform two actions: 1 ) if channel n is presently not protected, switching channel n to spare is executed, sending at the same time to the Tx section of the remote station the command for switching to spare the same channel n. 2 ) if channel n is presently protected, no other measures are taken. The manual_switch command is not executed if: the switching logic is frozen the DSI message exchange with the remote station is unavailable
Automatic_switch
Manual_switch
[4]
Displays for Operator In 1:n configuration, with reference to Fig. 138. on page 338: display (1) can show: the No n of the protected channel at Rx side or 0 when spare is free and/or is used by occasional traffic stream led (2) can be: on, to indicate that a manual operation is active (Lockout, Force_switch or Manual_switch) off, to indicate that automatic switch is operative (absence of manual operations) display (3) can show: the No n of the protected channel at Tx side or 0 when spare is free and/or is used by occasional traffic stream
[5]
Operators control at Tx side Not envisaged
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 453 / 542
52.4.4 RRACHANNEL STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST description [1] General

Refer to para.23.3.4 on page 178 for the unit physical views and operative information. RRACHANNEL performs the following main functions: Electrical CMI NRZ and NRZCMI conversion RSOH line side Extraction /Insertion from/to Service Unit DCCR line side Extraction /Insertion from/to Service Unit RFCOH radio side Extraction/insertion from/to Service Unit DCCR radio side Extraction /Insertion from/to Service Unit Unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction Hitless Switch Serial BUS (Insertion on parallel wires of Modem/ RRA alarms) On the front of the board the following interfaces are available: the STM1 electrical interface (it is fixed on the board and cannot be extracted) one red led to indicate the card failure On the RRACHANNEL unit it is possible to insert the optical interface module (refer to para.52.4.6 on page 459 for its description). [2] RRACHANNEL description See Fig. 183. on page 455. An electrical CMI /NRZ conversion is performed with LOS input alarm generation in Tx section. In the receive section the complementary operations are performed. The RRA uses two ASICs: one implementing: the Input/Output RRA Section (Regeneration Termination Adaptation according to G783) and the Hitless switch, performing the RPS (Radio Protection Switching) function the other, implementing: the RFCOH Insertion/Extraction function and the unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction function. All these functions are bidirectional. Delay cells, placed in TX sides, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two signals. The delay can be set with one bit step in the range 0 to 256 bits. Delay cells, placed in RX side, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two signals. The static delay equalization is obtained by means an automatic procedure to facilitate the approach during field installation. At RX side, whenever both paths are aligned, the phase comparator generates an OK command, indicating that a switching operation can be performed. The Switch command comes from the logic switch placed on the service board. Inside the ASIC, the loopback connections are present, as described in para.46.5.3 on page 342. The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) is managed by the ASIC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The alarms, commands, and every other information regarding the communication with System controller are organized in the registers of SPI and converted by Microcontroller in Can 0 BBBus. The FPGA download uses Can 1 BB bus.
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 454 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
DCCR RSOH Equalizer CMI/NRZ SEL
TCXO
05
RFCOH Vcxo A
vcxo To modem RFCOH Delay 256 bits 0256
2 * 2Mbit WST
To RRASTBY
delay
955.203.292 Q
38.800 Mhz
Signal input
Electrical STM1
LOS input
Switch Optical
ASIC
NRZ+CK MUX MUX RX RX TX TX
loopback loopback G.A CERBERO . .
To modem RFCOH TX TX
Loopback only local
RST RST
NRZ Loopback only local
2 * 2Mbit WST
RFCOH RFCOH
Optical STM1 Optical Interface

NRZ+CK
DEMUX A.L.S TX delay PhasePhase comparcompar vcxo RX
NRZ CK
DEMUX TX RX
RST
RST
ElasticElastic mem Delay mem Delay . 0256 32bit 32bit 256 0 Elastic Elastic mem mem . 32bit 32bit
RX From Modem
38.88 Mhz 38.88 Mhz
From Modem
NRZ CK
Missing
TCXO
WST1 FAIL Switch
vcxo
SEL RSOH DCCR KRn Ok Bit 155.520 Mhz Pat
Ok
TX fail /degrade (only optical)version
38.88 Mhz Kofin From RRASTBY
LOS_ R RFCOH KAIS 12 RRA MISSING NRZ 2Mbit WST protected. From/to Service Red led
Fig. 183. RRACHANNEL block diagram SPI NRZ/HDB3

68HC012
3DB 02839 AA AA
can
542 Can 1BB Can 0BB
WST1 LOS
Parallel Serial Fast alarms
RRA ALARMS
Parallel wire alarms
RRA ALARMS
HDB3 1 * 2Mbit WST unprotected. Parallel alarms from Modem
Serial Bus To Service
455 / 542
52.4.5 RRASTANDBY STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST description [1] General

Refer to para.23.3.5 on page 180 for the unit physical views and operative information. The RRASTBY unit performs the following main functions: Electrical CMI NRZ and NRZCMI conversion RSOH and DCCR line side Extraction /Insertion to/ from Service Board RFCOH radio side Insertion/Extraction to/from Service Board TX/RX distributor Switch of the reference signal Unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction In N+0 configuration there are two possibilities: 1) 2) RRASTBY unit forced to be used as RRA unit Use RRA unit instead of RRASTBY
On the front of the board the following interfaces are available: the STM1 electrical interface (it is fixed on the board and cannot be extracted) a onedigit display to indicate the number of the channel protected (1... 9) one red led to indicate the card failure On the RRACHANNEL unit it is possible to insert the optical interface module (refer to para.52.4.6 on page 459 for its description). [2] RRASTBY description See Fig. 184. on page 458. An electrical CMI /NRZ conversion is performed with LOS input alarm generation. In the receive section the complementary operations are performed. The RRASTBY uses an ASIC and a FPGA: one implementing: the Input/Output RRA Section (Regeneration Termination Adaptation according to G783) and the Hitless switch, performing the RPS (Radio Protection Switching) function the other, implementing: the RFCOH Insertion/Extraction function and the unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction function. All these functions are bidirectional. Delay cells, placed in TX sides, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two signals. The delay can be set with one bit step in the range 0 to 256 bits. Delay cells, placed in RX side, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two signals. The static delay equalization is obtained by means an automatic procedure to facilitate the approach during field installation. The Mux insert one of nine streams (38.88Mbit/s) from RRA 1 to RA 9. From Switch Logic the unit receives the Keta command that selects, by MUX, the transmit channel to be paralleled toward the standby path.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 456 / 542
At RX side the unit receives a 155 Mbit stream from RFCOH section (this signal comes from standby demodulator) and sends it by splitter to the respective RRA1/RRA9 unit.
Inside the RRASTBY there are the loopback connections, as described in the Equipment controller sub system chapter. The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) is managed by the ASIC. The alarms, commands, and every other information regarding the communication with System controller are organized in the registers of SPI and converted by Microcontroller in Can 0 BBBus. The FPGA download uses Can 1 BB bus.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 457 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
From RRA1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 DCCR KOP
FPGA
Delay 256 0
RSOH 38.800 Mhz
LOS_RIFn
05
Equalizer CMI/NRZ
Electrical STM1 SEL

TCXO
Delay 0256 Vcxo A
955.203.292 Q Switch Optical Signal I/O NRZ+CK

MUX RX TX ASIC RST TX delay vcxo 38.88 Mhz RX
Phase compar Elasticmem Delay 0256 32bit Elasticmem . 32bit
LOS input
. TX 1 * 2Mbit WST RST
RFCOH
To modem NRZ Loopback only local
Optical STM1 Optical NRZ+CK

. DEMUX
A.L.S
loopback
RFCOH
RX
Interface
NRZ CK From modem
Missing
TCXO
SEL 155.520 Mhz RSOH
38.88 vcxo Mhz
LOS_ R RFCOH Switch RRA CARD fail Red led NRZ 2Mbit WST protected. From/to Service
Fig. 184. RRA STANDBY block diagram

SPLITTER
TX fail/degrade (only optical version)
FPGA
FPGASCIARON KAIS 12
To RRA1..RRA9
3DB 02839 AA AA
Serial Fast alarms Serial
SPI to ASIC & FPGA
542
RRA MISSING Fast alarms

RRASTBY ALARMS
SeeTable RRASTBY DATA ALARMS
68HC012
NRZ/HDB3
can
1 * 2Mbit WST unprotected. Parallel wire alarms RRASTBY ALARMS
Can 1BB
Can 0 BB
Serial BusTo Service FPGA Parallel alarms from Modem HDB3 1 * 2Mbit WST unprotected.
458 / 542
52.4.6 STM1 optical module description See Fig. 89. on page 179 (physical view) and Fig. 185. on page 459 (block diagram).
The STM1 optical module is the optical physical interface for the STM1 cards. Different types are available according to the connector type, fibre and optical power range. Each module contains two optical components (Tx and Rx), two level adapters, the remote inventory and the ALSrestart pushbutton. The RX optical component converts the 155.52 Mb/s STM1 optical signal into electrical, recoveries the clock, detects the LOS alarm. The TX optical component converts the electrical signal (data & clock) into optical, detects the Laserfailure and Laserdegrade alarms. Receives the Lasershutdown command from the controller and the ALSrestart command from a front pushbutton.
OPTICAL INPUT
EDR Rx Opt. Module Level ECKR Adapter
DATA RX CLOCK RX
LOS
EDT ECT OPTICAL OUTPUT Tx Opt. Module Level Adapter
DATA TX CLOCK TX
Laser Fail Laser deg. Laser Shutdown ALSRestart o o Remote GND Inventory Rinv TO CAN BUS
OPTICAL MODULE
Fig. 185. STM1 optical module block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 459 / 542
52.4.7 MODEM STM1 1WST and STM0 0WST description [1] General
Refer to para.23.3.6 on page 181 for the unit physical views and operative information. The modem performs the following main functions: Terminal / repeater Modulator Terminal / repeater Demodulator XPIC / Base Band Combiner On the front of the board the following interfaces are available: Demodulator first IF input Second IF input XPIC or IF diversity Third IF input XPIC from cross polar receiver (has to be utilized when reuse and diversity are used contemporaneously) IF Modulator Output The second and third IF input are associated to optional baby boards. One red led is also present to indicate the MODEM card fail. [2] Modem description In a single ASIC the following parts are implemented: MLC code and decoder, Mapping 32/64/128QAM (different modems are envisaged for different modulations: one for 32/64QAM. the other for 128QAM), Digital filter, BSE, FSE, XPIC and Base Band combiner. The main functions are described in the following, according to MODEM block diagram (see Fig. 186. on page 463): I/O The input/output interface, composed by NRZ signal and CK signal, is internal interface. The signals come from/to RRA unit / RRA STBY or DROP in repeater configuration, no external access is available. The input/output signal is converted in four parallel streams; because of different transmission capacities planned, the streams have, accordingly, different rates. MLC code error The MLC 6,5/7 coding scheme employs a set of binary codes of decreasing Hamming distance combined with nested signal constellations of increasing Euclidean distance. Each code selects one of the two subsets into which the corresponding constellation level is portioned. In this way a more efficient use of redundancy is possible, since more powerful codes protect points a low Euclidean distance, while less powerful codes are used for points at larger Euclidean distance. The coding scheme uses both convolutional and blocks code. The convolutional codes are the powerful ones in the scheme, while the block codes is a simple parity check. The first level code/decoder convolutional is obtained by Viterbi decoder for the code 2/3 The second level code /decoder convolutional works with an other Viterbi for the code 7/8 The Third level has a Wagner decoder for code 24,23 To reduce the effects of burst errors due to the convolutional code, a suitable interleaving technique has been implemented. The structure of the interleaving is based on the introduction of distinct delay chains on the parallel signal stream. The two signals, the in phase channel and the quadrature channel, after MLC code QAM mapping they are sent at 1/T frequency to a 36 taps digital shaping filter. The two filtered signals come out from the ASIC at 2/T frequency. ASIC output signals are converted into analog signals by two D/A converters (10 bits) and, then, a Butterworth filter (7 poles) filters them.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 460 / 542
BB/IF Side modulation Two IF (140 MHz) inquadrature carriers are modulated by the two filtered signals by means of two balanced mixers. Then, modulated carriers are summed in order to generate a 128 QAM CROSSmodulated signal. First IF/BB Side demodulation First IF (140 MHz) signal (from main Transceiver) is BB converted by means of two mixers that are controlled by a carrier recovery circuit. Converted signal is, then, filtered by two Butterworth analog filters that have to guarantee proper NFD for different modulation formats (poles number =9, cutoff frequency fco=0.55 0.65/T). Two A/D converters sample filters out coming signals. Second IF and third IF A baby board called second IF and third IF carry out the same function of the first IF main. Second IF is applied from diversity or cross polar signal. When diversity and copolar are contemporaneously used, a third IF input is connected to crosspolar main receiver. Clock recovery A Gardner synchronizer that controls a VCXO, which provides a sampling signal at 2/T frequency, performs clock recovery. Gardner algorithm is implemented in ASIC Modem Equalizer cable for space diversity system
1IF Maim
Delay 1
The delays adjustment is Self acting by ECT
2IF diversity
Delay 2
3 IF cross Main 0 Delay 3

Every IF can be delayed a maximum 7x Ts/2 at Ts/2 step , compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two signals diversity. An automatic procedure by ECT set the difference of the delays respective First and Second IF. There is not automatic procedure for delay of the third IF.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 461 / 542
XPIC When the frequency reuse is requested the XPIC cancellers the crosspolar interference. On each way in dual polarization the IF signal is baseband converted, filtered and sampled by A/D converters at 2/T frequency. Samples taken at t=KT are distinguished from those taken at t=(KT+T/2) by XPIC S/P converters by means of 1/T frequency clock signal. XPIC is adapted by means of error signals coming from equalizer and its central coefficient is left spare for phase errors recovering. XPIC output signal is sent to equalizer way adder. XPIC way ASIC receives algorithm switch control signal and deep fading reset signal from equalizer way ASIC. Base band Combiner Space diversity is based on the simultaneous reception of the transmitted signal at two vertically separated antennas, its effectiveness depend on the fact that the correlation between the two fields is low if the antennas are well separated. The baseband combiner, which operates on the coherently demodulated signals is based on the minimization if the mean square error at the decision device. The scheme is the same of XPIC with these difference: the central coefficient is constrained, we have one Clock recovery by a Gardner synchronizer for each IF signal. An estimation of the power of the signal at the output of the two FSE is calculated. The clock that has the grater power is selected Gardner algorithm is implemented in ASIC Modem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 462 / 542
Equalizer (FSE/DFE) Into ASIC are implemented a synchronous equalizer (BSE Baud Spaced Equalizer), and a Fractionally Spaced Equalizer (FSE). FSE consists of a dual structure FIR filter and two mixers. Filtering section is 4D structured, (i.e. it consists of four 19 taps filters), DFE consist of four 1 tap decision.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
VCXO A Los_M Data/ ck S/P S/P 90 FIR QFIR Q D/A 140Mhz
XO
05
, Elasticinterleaverinterleaver Rate Rate encoderMLCencoderMLC , store adapter adapter mapper mapper FIR I + D/A Squelch Main
DELAY DELAY DROP DROP
Electronic fuses
+5.3 +3.45 v
955.203.292 Q
Mir Pseudo Pseudo random random A/D + VCXO B 140Mhz Decoder Elastic Elastic P/S DecisionDecision MLC memory SUM
From RRA or RRASTBY or DROP
IF out Mod
IF MAIN
vco
90
T/2
Delay Delay and and Equal
to RRA or RRASTBY or DROP

Data/ck
DROP MISSING
DEM loss T/2

A/D
Card fail,missing and Remote Inventory
2 Squelch
Clock select
gardnergardner
VCXO C
Mhz
MODEM CARD fail

Red led Modem Alarms
A/D A/D gardner gardner 90 90 A/D A/D Delay and and EQUAL.
B&W CorrCorr . vcos vcos carrier TO TO carrier
Parallel wire alarms
Fig. 186. MODEM block diagram

T/2
A/D A/D 90 90 A/D A/D
T/2
Second IF
Second IF loss
Agent Modem
3DB 02839 AA AA ASIC

Card fail,missing and Remote Inventory
542
spi Baby boards alarms 68HC12 can
ALARMS, SQUELCH CONTROL
Third IF
3 Squelch Can 0BB
Third IF loss
463 / 542
52.4.8 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit description [1] General

Refer to para.23.3.3 on page 176 for the unit physical views and operative information. The Service Terminal performs the following main functions: N.B. Insertion/Extraction and termination of RSOH bytes Rerouting of RSOH bytes on RFCOH bytes Protection and management of RFCOH bytes System service channels and telephone services management I/O service channels and telephone services I/O DSI, ATPC, MC bytes, DCCR Switch logic N+1, 1:N I/O protected WST channel Switch and SW logic for WST signals The RFCOH bytes and 2 x 2Mbit/s WST can be protected only on the two channels selected by ECT from the couples shown in the following table: Tab. 66. Channels protectable for RFCOH bytes and 2 x 2Mbit/s WST N+1 Terminal 0,1 0,9 1,2 8,9 1,9 N.B. 2 X (4+1) WEST (N.B.) 0,1 0,4 1,2 3,4 1,4 2 X (4+1) EAST (N.B.) 9,8 9,5 8,7 6.5 8,5
Configurations not available in current release
On the front of the board are provided the following connectors and led: Phone Jack (EOW ) Reset button One red led that indicates engaged line One green led that indicates free line One red led that indicates SERVICE card fail One display that indicates the protected Rx channel One yellow led indicating the manual operation of switch logic N+1 Input /output 2 x 2Mbit protected WST
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 464 / 542
[2]
Service Channels The characteristics of service channels are given in para.13.2 on page 83.
The service channels (see Fig. 187. on page 466) are managed by a FPGA able to provide on external interfaces (programmable by ECT) the RSOH bytes from/to line side channel (channel 0 to 9) and also RFCOH bytes protected in 1+1 from RRA units. Eight channels are be provided towards Users. In particular: One (omnibus channels on E1 byte), one telephone jack and three analog party lines 3 x 64 kbit/s V11 or 2 x 64 kbit/s and 1 x128 kbit/s , V11 (Sw configurable for connection to 1 or 2 bytes) 3 x 64 kbit/s G703 1 x 9600 kbit/s V24/V28 Data channel
The service unit manages a TPH byte only to/from the RFCOH byte protected in 1+1 or to/from external connection. The desk telephone TPH, by HD selection, can be sent either into RFCOH byte or toward ADM in format G703 (see block diagram). E1, F1, D1D3 bytes are always accessible both at radio and line side, while a maximum of 5 bytes line and radio side may be accessed chosen between the remaining RSOH bytes. At radio side, the service channels (comprehensive of DCCR, monitoring channels, ATPC, DSI bytes) are dropped/inserted in 1+1 protected mode (splitted at Tx side and switched at RX side). The Tx service alarm (ATL RFCOH) is remotized by means of monitoring channel (with 1+1 protection) to be used with ATL and HBER remote alarms as minor switching criteria, while demodulator alarm and HBER alarm are considered major switching criteria. By means of a matrix function it is possible: to address to service the lineside user interfaces RSOH bytes from different RRA and/or RFCOH bytes (7 bytes) on RRA used for 1+1 protection; to reroute RSOH bytes to RFCOH and viceversa.
The alarms, commands, and every other information regarding the communication with System controller are organized in the registers of SPI and converted by Microcontroller in Can 0 BBBus. For the detailed description of RSOH, RFCOH and DCCR management, please make reference to para.51 on page 399 (Signal Management). [3] 2Mbit Way side traffic See Fig. 187. on page 466. The FPGA, after HDB3/NRZ conversion, splits the 2Mbit/s asynchronous digital stream. The two channels (N.B.) are inserted/extracted to/from a selected couple of RRA units among the those specified in Tab. 66. on page 464. To minimize the errors during the switching operation a make before break switch is adopted and particular care is taken in switching logic.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
In this release, only one channel can be used (see Fig. 87. on page 177).
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 465 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Open on 1st SERVICE unit in 4+0/4+1 E/W configuration
05 DCCR 192kbit Dip switch

Radio Radio Rerouting A side side Rerouting A
MATRIX MATRIX MATRIX MATRIX DEMUX DEMUX
SERVICE CARD fail RFCOHRX/TX # 0 RFCOHRX/TX # 1 RFCOHRX/TX # 2 RFCOHRX/TX # 8 RFCOHRX/TX # 9 To /from RRA 0/1/2/8/9 Like RFCOH frame
RFSOHRX/TX # 59
# 04
955.203.292 Q
Line side Line side
FPGA
K RR
K RR
Red led
E1 E1
MUXMUX
FPGA NTONI E COMBO
M U X // D E M U X
I/O Line
I/O TPH TPH TPH
NRZ G703 NRZ RZ NRZ
I/O Radio
DSI,ATPC,MC
DCCR 192kbit
SPI service AIS I/O Insertion WST Los 1and 2

68HC012
Additional
ALARMS, CONTROL
V
COMBO
ANA ANA LOG LOG
NRZ, CK, 64, SYNC
Hd command
Fig. 187. SERVICE block diagram

V28 V11 G703
Out Loudspeaker
CAN 0 BB SERVICE MISSING
3DB 02839 AA AA
EOW RJ11 3 x 64 kb/s 3 x 64 kb/s TPHTPH 3 3 x Party LinesKb/s 64 Kb/s Party x Line 1x 1x 64
To M190 BB Access Area
DUAL LINE INTERFACE 1 To ADM 2x2 Mb/s
CAN 1 BB
542
1x 9600Kb/s
466 / 542
[4]
Switch Logic N+1 and 1:N For the implementation of N+1 and 1:N Switch Logic at system level, please refer to previous para.52.4.2 on page 445 and para.52.4.3 on page 452. This function performs the hitless switch, by processing the propagation alarms coming from demodulators. The Tx and Rx functions, respectively in station A and station B of the link, must be connected by 64 Kb/s (DSI channel, see Fig. 188. herebelow) to exchange information for Tx signal parallel before RX switch. The 64 Kbit signal is processed in Switch logic. Station A SWC A Station B SWC A
CH 1 5,1 Mb DATA IN SERVICE
CH 1 5,1 Mb DATA IN SERVICE DATA OUT
DATA OUT
5,1 Mb SPARE A
5,1 Mb SPARE A
Fig. 188. DSI channel implementation The Switch logic N+1/1:N is carried out inside FPGA and performs the following functions (see Fig. 182. on page 450 and Fig. 189. on page 468): gets the switching controls from the regular and standby channels determines the weights of various channels: priorities and simulations protects and releases the channels in N+1 configuration, using two service units in 4+1 E/W configurations (this latter function not used in current release) performs the lookout and incoming inhibit manages the freezing operations manages the manual forcing at the receive side.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 467 / 542
The following figure shows the input/output of the switch logic: J=0 to 9 channel units n=1 to 9 channel units
FPGA
Switch commands
Agent Service Mod FailJ EWj LBERj HBERj SWITCH LOGIC KRRA To RRASTBY KOP Korifn To RRA 1/9 KRPS K_OPMAN Logic Output Modem J 9 Modem J =09=0 DEMfailj DemCARD fail j Modem missing j Los Mod j RRA fail j RRACARD fail j RRA and RRASTBY RRAmissing J=0 Los R side Dem j n=1 LosStbyn OK pat n Ok bit n Los_ Rifn RRASTBY FROM RRAJ K display RX Serial/Parallel FAST SERIAL BUS
SW forcing
DSI 64 kb/s to/from EPLD
Yellow led
Fig. 189. Input/output command signals of the Switch logic
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 468 / 542
52.5 Transceiver subsystem

52.5.1 Interconnection general block diagrams Please refer to: para.12.4.3.2 on page 43 for an introductive description Tab. 23. on page 165 for the transceiver equipping rules para.23.4 on pages 184 thru 195 for the assembly drawings and operative notes.
The transceiver operates from 4 to 13 GHz. Different P/Ns are envisaged according to the operating frequency and the modulation (32QAM or 64/128QAM). Each Radio Transceiver is equipped with the following modules (see Fig. 190. on page 470 for the transceiver configuration without Rx diversity, and Fig. 191. on page 470 for the transceiver configuration with Rx diversity): transmit & service module receiver & IF Rx module (main & diversity) DC/DC converter Local oscillators RX and TX
Fig. 192. on page 471 shows the signals exchanged among Transceiver internal modules. For maintenance and installation purposes each Radio Transceiver unit must be considered as a unique block. A RI (remote inventory) identifies the unit Transceiver, the Local oscillator Tx and the Local oscillator Rx, via software. RI is housed in the service TX. A pin No_missing is available.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 469 / 542
OL TX MON +VB GND VB
RI
RF MON
SERVICE TRX
IF IN Canbus No_missing L.O. Sync .
RI
P
OL RX MON
OL RX RI
RF RX
RX IN
IF OUT
Fig. 190. Functional block diagram of Transceiver without Rx Diversity

OL TX MON +VB GND VB
DC/DC CONVERTER
OL TX RI
RF TX
RF OUT
RF MON
SERVICE TRX
IF IN Canbus No_ missing L.O. Sync .
RI
P
OL RX MON
OL RX RI
RF RX RF RX MAIN RF RX DIV.
RX IN
RX IN
IF OUT
IF OUT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RF RX
Fig. 191. Functional block diagram of Transceiver with Rx Diversity
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 470 / 542
DC/DC CONVERTER
OL TX
RF TX
RF OUT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
V Battery
IF
+5V
Canbus
+V Battery
DC/DC
05
RF
+5V 12V PRX Measurement Squelch 4 Bit Remote inventory Manual gain control Manual/Auto RX command OL+/ command
adj +7V +8V 4 Bit control for +7V adj
52.5.2 DC/DC converter module
955.203.292 Q
RX
Main
TX & SERVICE MODULE
IF OL Main MON
OL
OL Diversity
+3.3V +8V +15V 12V Squelch Alarm loss loop Alarm low level 3 Bit dati control 4 Bit Remote inventory
RF
+5V 12V Measurement
Diversity
Squelch 4 Bit Remote inventory
RX
Fig. 192. Signals exchanged among Transceiver internal modules
DC/DC converter receives primary voltage from the shelf backpanel and supplies to Service module the following voltages: +5V, +8V, +7Vmax (digitally adjustable from 4V to 7V). See Fig. 192.
3DB 02839 AA AA
IF
OL TX
OR alarm module
542
Manual gain control Manual/Auto RX command OL+/ command
MON
MW
+3.3V +8V +15V 12V Alarm loss loop Alarm low level 3 Bit dati control 4 Bit Remote inventory
OL
RF
MON
471 / 542
52.5.3 Transmit and Service module [1] General Transmit and Service module here described includes the following hardware components (depicted in Fig. 95. on page 187: RT CONTROL AMPLIFIER UP CONVERTER DELAY LINE Fig. 193. herebelow shows the module block diagram. IF input connectors are 75 1.0/2.3 Siemens, microwave output connectors are SMA 50. Coaxial cable connects Tx output to branching filters. Return loss of TX output is guaranteed by dropin isolator. Transmit & service module performs the following functions: management of all transceiver functions by mean of service module IF amplification upconversion of IF input signal to RF frequency linear microwave amplification
DC/DC +5V +8V +7V adj 4 Bit for 7V +5V +3,3V RXmain +5V 12V OL+/command Squelch Remoteinventory Manual gain control Manual/auto +5V 12V +8V +15V OL TX +8V +3,3V +15V 12V Alarm loss loop Alarm low level 3 bit dati control Remote inv . Can bus In IF IFblock OL RX +8V +3,3V +15V 12V Alarm loss loop Alarm low level 3 bit dati control Remote inv . Squelch
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
+5V MW +8V Power. red Drain fet finale PTX meas . TempMeas . . Attenuator com .
+5V
RX div .
12V OL+/ command Squelch Remote inventory Manual gain control Manual/auto IF detectorlevel OL+/OL command
Fig. 193. Transmit and Service module block diagram
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 472 / 542
[2]
RT CONTROL RT control performs the following functions:
DC power distribution of the following voltages to different modules: TX amplifier : 12V, +5V, +8V, +15V ,+7Vmax. RX module: 12V, +5V. OL module : 12V, +3.3V, +8V, +15V Gain and output power of amplifying chain control Cable losses recovering Input IF level control OL+/ for upconverter setting
A microprocessor controls all the functions of Transceiver, besides it holds a Remote Inventory made with an E@PROM. Controlled functions are: Tx module linearization and temperature compensation of transmitted power. warning management protection vs overtemperature management of BER measure management of ATPC function with power consumption control setting of Tx Pout . ON/OFF by software command. Selection of LO+ or LO condition.
In Tx module the signals incoming/outgoing from microprocessor are: RF detector level output RF Attenuator command series RF Attenuator command parallel PTx Measurement Temperature Measurement Manual/Automatic TX command Tx Temperature alarm IF Tx detector level OR alarm module 12V +8V +15V +7V (digitally adjustable) OL+/OL command Presence reference negative voltage Switch command for +8V ATPC control LO module warning management. Selection of frequency. ON/OFF by software command. Selection of Master/Slave condition (for RxLO only)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In LO module the signals incoming/outgoing from microprocessor are: Alarm loss loop TX Alarm low level TX Dati
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 473 / 542
Rx module
In Rx module the signals incoming/outgoing from microprocessor are: PRx Measurement Manual/Automatic RX command Squelch command Manual gain command OL+/OL command [3] DC/DC converter warning management. voltage control with ATPC command for power consumption reduction.
AMPLIFIER, UP CONVERTER AND DELAY LINE The block diagram of upconversion and amplification unit is shown in Fig. 194. herebelow. REVEALED
xn
T
IF Vatt
MONITORED
OUT RF
LO
n = 2 for C band 4 for 11 & 13 GHz Fig. 194. Block diagram of upconversion and amplification unit 1) IF TX The IF amplifier line accepts signal from 120 to 160 MHz with an input matched to 75 W. It recovers cable losses (up to 30 m), therefore the incoming signal level can change from 12 dBm to 4 dBm ( standard input level is: 5 dBm). IF signal is splitted and used to drive the circuits of Power consumption reduction. These circuits include a delay line to synchronize the envelope resulting command with RF signal on final Fet drain. The output IF signal is held constant with an AGC circuit and with a power splitter 2 way 90_ is possible to select L.O. condition ( USB or LSB).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 474 / 542
warning management. linearization and temperature compensation of field received indication. Selection of master/slave condition. Selection of LO+ or LO condition. ON/OFF by software command. squelching.
2)
UPCONVERSION The mixer is implemented in MMIC technology developed in Alcatel.
In the same package are placed an SSB mixer, with four IF quadrature input signals, and a x2 frequency multiplier. The IF input level is 11 dBm +0 / 1 dB, and LO power is 15 dBm 1 dB For 11 and 13 GHz frequency band the multiplying factor is x4, obtained with a third MMIC placed in the same package. On the same substrate and using the same technologies ,the RF chain is completed with an active variable attenuator and a power amplifier, both realized in MMIC technology. 3) LINEAR MICROWAVE AMPLIFICATION The RF output of upconverter is feeded into the input of power amplifier. This is realized with two discrete transistor (GaAs Mosfets internally matched). Final Fets have an output power of 4/12 W. At the output, before the dropin isolator, a double microstrip directional coupler will provide two signals, one for monitoring and one for AGC detector. The circuits are implemented on a duroid metalbacked substrate.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 475 / 542
52.5.4 Receive & IF Rx module [1] General

RF IN
T
Vatt IF
Fig. 195. Block diagram of Receive & IF Rx module
xn
LO
n = 2 for C band 4 for 11 & 13 GHz
Receive & IF Rx module performs the following functions: low noise amplification of RF incoming signal signal variable attenuation following the incoming signal variations downconversion to IF signal IF amplification.
The RF input of the module is connected to the branching by coaxial cable with SMA connectors/50 .The return losses are guaranteed by dropin isolator. The connectors for IF signals are 75 1.0/2.3 Siemens. [2] FRONT END The RF incoming signal is amplified by a first stage ultra low noise HEMT amplifier. A variable attenuator, driven by the AGC voltage, allows a protection against up fading propagation. A second stage contains a GaAs MMIC amplifier. The downconversion from RF to IF frequency is performed by the same micromodule used in upconversion function. It has four IF outputs signal in quadrature. A MMIC multiplier x2 doubles the L.O frequency (x4 in 11 GHz version). The LO power is 15 dBm 1 dB. The four outputs are connected with hybrid 90_ and 180_ to create IF signal ; by properly connecting hybrid 90_ is possible to select LSB or USB. [3] IF Rx IF block amplifier contains two attenuators for AGC, controlled from a filtered detector. Then a IF filter reduces the signal level of adjacent and alternate channels. The IF section supplies alarms for low field, for RFRx failure and a measure of received signal level. Another function controlled by IF section is the squelch of RX for low fields
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 476 / 542
52.5.5 Local Oscillator module [1]

General LO scheme for 9600LSY application includes the following functions: TX LO module Rx LO module, selectable master or slave option for H/V reuse applications. A block diagram of the module is shown in the next Fig. 196.
Master Slave
Lock Alarm
Power Alarm
Switch Position
Output Power Detection
Logic
Ext. VCO Power Detection Diversity Output
Switch Position Lock Detect
VCO
Switch
X2 Multiplier
Splitter
Main Output
VCO Output External VCO
Fig. 196. Block diagram of Local Oscillator module
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 477 / 542
[2]
TRANSMITTER LO MODULE The module houses on the same multi layer board the Synthesizer, the Switch and the Multiplier. It has two RF outputs port, named main and diversity and a monitor VCO output, moreover, for the synchronization in master slave configuration, it makes available its VCO signal and can accept an external VCO signal. 1) Synthesizer The synthesizer is a single narrow band loop filter with a BiCMOS technology IC used for PLL function, a low phase noise VCO and a 2 order active loop filter. The signal is obtained locking the VCO frequency with a stable frequency reference TCXO. At the output theres RFIC in order to achieve a good isolation from external circuits. The Synthesizer makes available the Lock Detection status. Multiplier The multiplier is composed by monolithic input buffer, a BJT active X2 multiplier, bandpass filter, RFIC amplifier and power splitter. To avoid dangerous emission, the output power is delivered only when the VCO is locked. The unit makes available the output power detection External VCO Input Power 5 dBm + 5 dBm Master/Slave Configuration The Transmitter LO Module can run only in Master configuration, at the start up the Switch is connected at the external VCO and only when its VCO is locked, the Switch must connect the internal VCO
2)
3)
[3]
RECEIVER LO MODULE 1) 2) 3) Synthesizer As that of Transmitter LO Module Multiplier As that of Transmitter LO Module Master/Slave Configuration In Master configuration the LO runs with its internal VCO . At the start up, the Switch is connected at the external VCO and there is no power delivered at the output ports; when its VCO is locked, the Switch must connect the internal VCO and give power at the outputs. This setting does not to be modified by alarm during the running condition. A buffer (Frequency Reuse kit module) is present between the output of the external VCO and the MASTER/SLAVE input, with the aim of increasing insulation. In Slave configuration the LO runs with external VCO. At the start up, the Switch is connected at the external VCO, after the start up time, if is not detected the VCO external power, the Switch must connect the internal VCO. During the running condition, in the case of lack of VCO external power, the switch must connect the internal VCO; when the power of external VCO is back, the Switch must reconnect the external VCO.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 478 / 542
52.6 Fans subsystem

The following Fig. 197. shows the block diagram of a fans shelf equipped with two FANS ASSEMBLED units. Fig. 198. on page 480 shows the block diagram of one FANS ASSEMBLED unit. Please refer to: para.12.4.6 on page 52 for an introductive description para.22.3.5 on page 166 for equipping rules para.23.6 on page 197 for assembly drawings and operative notes point f ) on page 429 for the power supply description.
The FANS ASSEMBLED unit includes a microprocessor to manage together with the System Control subsystem, through the CAN bus: the Remote Inventory its logical address according to the position of the DIPSwitches present on the Fanshelf front panel the unit alarms (internal PSU failure, individual Fan alarms).
FAN B
FAN D
FAN B
FAN D
FAN A
0/1
FAN C
FAN A
FAN C
0/1
LED
CAN BATTERYA
LED
CAN TERMINATION BATTERYB
Fig. 197. Fan subsystem block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 479 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
P RI
FAN ALARM
PSU ALARM
CAN
FAN A
FAN B
PSU
BATT. B BATT. A
PSU
LED FAN C FAN D
Fig. 198. FANS ASSEMBLED unit block diagram
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
480 / 542
53 ALARM MANAGEMENT
This chapter gives summary and detailed information regarding the alarm management carried out by the 9600LSYLHR system: Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SYSCO) herebelow Visual indications on page 482 Station Alarms on page 482 Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms on page 483
53.1 Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SYSCO)

All the alarms detected are collected and processed by the System Controller unit in LHRC shelf. Alarms provided by item HW They can be displayed by Craft Terminal as indicated in para.46.5.1 on page 341. External Alarms Some input housekeeping signal are available on equipment connector; see para.53.4 on page 483 for details. By Craft Terminal, each input housekeeping signal can be characterized for severity. For further information and operative procedures, please refer to the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK. Relationship between Alarms and their severity (Urgent / Not Urgent) See Tab. 68. on page 487.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 481 / 542
53.2 Visual indications

53.2.1 Centralized Equipment Alarms All the alarms detected on the units are collected and processed by the System Controller unit in Baseband shelf which gives centralized optical indications by means of LEDs on its front coverplate. Specifically (see Fig. 134. on page 327): Red LED URG (1): detection of an URGENT alarm Red LED NURG (2): detection of a NOT URGENT alarm Yellow LED ATTD (3): alarm condition ATTENDED (see para.46.3.2 on page 335) Yellow LED ABN (4): detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Yellow LED IND (5): detection of an INDICATIVE alarm 53.2.2 Alarm visual indications on units Besides the LEDs of Centralized Equipment Alarms described in para.53.2.1 on page 482, some other equipment units are provided with specific alarm LED on their front coverplate, indicating the failure of the unit. Tab. 59. on page 337 lists such LEDs and indicate their normal status (alarm absence). 53.2.3 Status of radio protections Visual indications detailed on page 338 allow to check the present status of radio protections.
53.3 Station Alarms

Some equipment alarms processed by the System Controller unit are carried to Baseband shelfs connector M184 and then lead by a cable to TRUs connector M8 in order to switch on/off the TRU alarm lamps. The four alarm lamps on TRU are depicted in Fig. 199. herebelow. RED (1) RED (2) YELLOW GREEN Fig. 199. Station Alarms on TRU Their management is as follows: The RED (1) lamp is activated in case of urgent (URG) alarm and a relevant telealarm is released (this last function is excludible). The RED (2) lamp is activated in case of non urgent (minor) alarm and a relevant telealarm is released (this last function is excludible). The YELLOW lamp is lighted up in case of manual storing of alarm events (see para.46.3.2 on page 335). In this case the RED lamps are switched off to be ready to other new alarm indications. This YELLOW lamp is lighted up in case of ABNORMAL condition, together with led (4) of System Controller unit (see para.53.2.1 on page 482). The GREEN lamp is activated by the buzzer input. By presetting, it is possible to change this alarm criteria and to drive the activation with the presence of the service voltage.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The signals sent to TRU are also available for Customer applications on other TRUs connectors (see para.24.8.7 on page 236 for connectors, connector pinout and signal description).
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 482 / 542
53.4 Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms

Summarizing and Housekeeping alarms, processed by the System Controller unit, are made available to Customer by means of relay contacts whose interface access is described in para.24.8.8 on page 236. The following Tab. 67. gives the relationship among remote alarms, housekeeping outputs and alarm primitives. Tab. 68. on page 487 gives the relationship between Remote and Station Alarms. Tab. 67. Relationship among remote alarms, housekeeping outputs and alarm primitives Remote alarm TOR TAND TUP URG NURG IND ABN TORC TANC Opt STM1 module fail/missing INT Refer. ANDOR ANDOR GA2 GA4 GA5 GA6 GA7 GA8 GA9 GA44 Remote Alarm primitives VBATT1 failure or VBATT2 failure VBATT1 failure and VBATT2 failure SYSCO card fail or missing or of all urgent alarms or of all not urgent alarms or of all indicative alarms (severity = Major or Critical) (severity= Minor) (severity = Warning or Indeterminate)
or of all the abnormal conditions PSF1 or PSF2 card fail PSF1 and PSF2 card fail or of the following alarms: STM1 Opt. X (X = 0,..,9) module fail STM1 Opt. X (X = 0,..,9) module missing or of all the internal alarms card fail, card missing, equipment mismatch, RC unreachable, battery fail/missing, LAN alarm, transmitter Failure, transmitter Degraded software mismatch, software processing error, housekeeping alarm, unconfigured equipment or of the following alarms: FANSL X (X = 1,2) card fail (ADM cooling) FANSL X (X = 1,2) card fail (LHR cooling) or of the following alarms: Service card fail Service card missing TPHDEV card fail TPHDEV card missing
GA10
FANS card fail/ missing SERV card fail/ missing
GA12
GA13
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 483 / 542
.. continues Tab. 67. Remote alarm RRA card fail/missing Refer. GA16 Remote Alarm primitives
N+0: or of the following alarms : RRA X (X = 0,..,9) card fail RRA X (X = 0,..,9) card missing N+1: or of the following alarms : g RRA X (X = 1,..,9) card fail RRA X (X = 1,..,9) card missing RRASBY 0 card fail RRASBY 0 card missing or of the following alarms : MD X (X = 0,..,9) card fail MD X (X = 0,..,9) card missing or of the following alarms : TRI X (X = 1,..,10) card fail TRI X (X = 1,..,10) card missing LO Y (Y = 1,..,20) card fail LO Y (Y = 1,..,20) card missing RX Y (Y = 1,..,20) card fail RX Y (Y = 1,..,20) card missing or of highBER of all channel X (X = 0,..,9) or of lowBER of all channel X (X = 0,..,9) or of the following alarms: PSF1 card fail PSF1 card missing or of the following alarms: PSF2 card fail PSF2 card missing or of the following alarms: PSU X (X=0,..,9) card fail, PSU X (X=0,..,9) card missing or of the following alarms: Second IF X.1 (X=0,..,9) module fail, Second IF X.1 (X=0,..,9) module missing or of the following alarms: Third IF X.2 (X=0,..,9) module fail, Third IF X.2 (X=0,..,9) module missing
MD card fail/missing
GA15
TRI card fail/missing
GA11
HBER LBER PSF1 card fail/ missing PSF2 card fail/ missing PSU card fail/missing Second IF unit card fail/missing Third IF unit card fail/missing Tab. 67. continues ...
GA17 GA18 GA 40
GA 41
GA 30
GA 42
GA 43
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 484 / 542
.. continues Tab. 67. Remote alarm

Refer.
Remote Alarm primitives
CHX_affect (X = 0,..,9)
CH0 = GA 20 or of all alarms related to channels X (from 0 to 9) and CH1 = GA 21 affecting the traffic: CH2 = GA 22 equipment alarms: CH3 = GA 23 RRA X card fail CH4 = GA 24 RRA X card missing CH5 = GA 25 STM1 Opt. X card fail CH6 = GA 26 STM1 Opt. X card missing CH7 = GA 27 MD X card fail CH8 = G A28 MD X card missing CH9 = GA 29 Second IF (X.1) card fail Second IF (X.1) card missing Third IF (X.2) card fail Third IF (X.2) card missing TRI X card fail TRI X card missing LO X.Y (Y = 1, 2) card fail LO X.Y (Y = 1, 2) card missing RX X card fail RX X card missing PSU X card fail PSU X card missing sfwrEnvironmentProblem (RRA X, MD X, TRI X) communication alarms: LOS (STM1 Opt. X) LOF (STM1 Opt. X) transmitterFailure (STM1 Opt. X) transmitterDegraded (STM1 Opt. X) LOF (RRA X, rsCTPBid line/radio side) modulationFail (MD X) modLOS (MD X) demodulationFail (MD X) demLOS (MD X) rxFail (RX X) txLOS (TRI X) txFail (TRI X) incompatibleTxPower (TRI X) LOF (RRA X, radioSPITTPBidR1) HBER (MD X) LBER (MD X) TIM (RRA X) RCIM (RRA X) atpcLoop (RRA X) atpcIdentifierMismatch (RRA X) rxDivFail (RX Div. X) demDivLOS (Second IF X.1) demXpicLOS (Second or Third IF X.1 or X.2)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 485 / 542
.. continues Tab. 67. Remote alarm CHX on protection (X = 1,..,9) Refer. Remote Alarm primitives
CH1 = GA 31 for each channel, it will indicate if the switch is on protecting CH2 = GA 32 channel (in the N+1 configuration only one channel can be on CH3 = GA 33 protection) CH4 = GA 34 CH5 = GA 35 CH6 = GA 36 CH7 = GA 37 CH8 = GA 38 CH9 = GA 39
end of Tab. 67. N.B. Concerning the management of the remote alarms for N+1 configuration, only the alarms raised by the boards of the allowed channels are considered.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 486 / 542
Tab. 68. Relationship between Remote and Station Alarms N.B.

For the alarm meaning refer to Tab. 67. on page 483 Remote Alarm TOR TAND TUP URG NURG IND ABN TORC TANC HW HW HW SW SW SW SW SW HW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW URG/NURG/IND INT URG/NURG/IND INT URG/NURG/IND INT (note 1) URG/NURG/IND INT (note 1) URG/NURG/IND INT (note 1) URG/NURG/IND INT (note 1) URG/NURG/IND INT (note 1) URG/NURG/IND INT URG/NURG/IND INT URG/NURG/IND SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW RURG/ RNURG RURG/ RNURG RURG/ RNURG RURG/ RNURG RURG/ RNURG RURG/ RNURG RURG/ RNURG RURG/ RNURG RURG/ RNURG RURG/ RNURG SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW NURG INT URG INT URG/NURG/IND INT (note 1) SW HW SW ABN RNURG RURG RURG/ RNURG SW SW HW SW Consequent Remote Alarms NURG URG URG INT SW HW HW Station Alarm TOR RNURG RURG RURG RURG RNURG HW HW HW SW SW
Opt. STM1 module fail/missing INT FANS card fail SERV card fail/missing RRA card fail/missing MD card fail/missing Second IF unit card fail/missing Third IF unit card fail/missing TRI card fail/missing PSF1 card fail/missing PSF2 card fail/missing HBER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tab. 68. continues ..
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 487 / 542
.. continues Tab. 68. LBER CHX_affect (X=0..9) CHX on protection (X=1..9) end of Tab. 68. (note 1) A CHX_affect consequent remote alarm is generated according to the channel affected by the primary alarm. SW SW SW URG/NURG/IND SW RURG/ RNURG SW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 488 / 542
SECTION 6: APPENDICES
SECTION CONTENT Appendix A SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling It describes the equipment labelling and the norms mandatory or suggested that must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment. Appendix B Information on former version TRU It describes the former version TRU (no longer equipped in new supplies) and the relevant interconnections with LHR system. Appendix C Documentation guide It contains all information regarding this handbook (purpose, applicability, history) and the Customer Documentation set it belongs to, in particular the list of the handbooks the Operators should have in order to carry out the required operations. Appendix D List of symbols and abbreviations
PAGE 491
511
515
535
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 489 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
490 / 542
APPENDIX A : SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING
A.1 : Introduction
This appendix describes the equipment labelling and the norms mandatory or suggested (see also point 3 ) on page 17) that must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment. The stated norms apply both to the operations described in this manual and to those described in the related manuals listed in para.C.2 on page 522. This chapter is organized as follows: Compliance with European Norms Safety Rules including: General Rules Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command Dangerous Electrical Voltages Harmful Optical Signals Risks of Explosions Moving Mechanical Parts Heatradiating Mechanical Parts Equipment emitting RF power Specific safety rules in this handbook herebelow on page 492 on page 492 on page 493 on page 494 on page 495 on page 497 on page 497 on page 498 on page 499 on page 499 on page 500 on page 500 on page 500 on page 500 on page 501 on page 501 on page 502 on page 502 on page 503
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) including: EMC General Norms Installation EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation EMC General Norms Maintenance
Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges Suggestions, notes and cautions Labels affixed to the Equipment including: Labels specific for 9600LSY Equipment General use labels
A.2 : Compliance with International Standards

Refer to chapter 13 on page 83.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 491 / 542
A.3 : Safety Rules

A.3.1 : General Rules Before carrying out any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance operations carefully read the related Handbooks, in particular: Installation LineUp or Commissioning Maintenance chapter of the Technical Handbook
Observe safety rules When equipment is operating nobody is allowed to have access inside on the equipment parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools In case of absolute need to have access inside, on the equipment parts when it is operating this is allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or Technical assistance is meant : personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience necessary to be aware of the danger that he might find in carrying out an operation and of the necessary measurements to reduce danger to minimum for him and for others. The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts. The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts no specified is not permitted. The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which give access to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong exclusively to the service personnel. For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any inflammable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings, inscriptions etc. It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.
The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety, i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged. Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER. To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream (rack or station distribution frame). The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and statement:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SAFETY RULES
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 492 / 542
A.3.2 : Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.
The labels are fully compliant with International Norms ISO 38461984. The symbols or statements are enclosed in geometric shapes: ISO 38641984.
CONTAINS A SYMBOL STATEMENT INDICATES FORBIDDANCE (WHITE BACKGROUND WHIT RED RIMBLACK SYMBOL OR STATEMENT) IT IS A COMMAND (BLUE BACKGROUNDWHITE SYMBOL OR STATEMENT).
CONTAINS A SYMBOL INDICATES WARNING OR DANGER (YELLOW BACKGROUNDBLACK SYMBOL AND RIM)
CONTAINS A STATEMENT PROVIDING INFORMATION OR INSTRUCTION. (YELLOW BACKGROUNDBLACK STATEMENT AND RIM)
The labels have been affixed to indicate a dangerous condition. They may contain any standardknown symbol or any statement necessary to safeguard users and service personnel against the most common ones, specifically: dangerous electrical voltages harmful optical signals risk of explosion moving mechanical parts heatradiating Mechanical Parts microwave radiations
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 493 / 542
The symbols presented in para.A.3.3 through A.3.8 are all the possible symbols that could be present on Alcatel equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the equipment this handbook refers to.
A.3.3 : Dangerous Electrical Voltages Description specific for 9600LSYLHR/LHRC A.3.3.1: Electrical safety: Labelling The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc).
As far as electrical safety is concerned, this is a Class I equipment, then the label associated to it states that the equipment must be grounded before connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:
WARNING ! Ground protect the equipment before connecting it to manins Make sure that power has been cut off before disconnecting ground protection.
A.3.3.2: Electrical safety: general rules carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where a.c. or d.c. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rules: a) b) Personal injury can be caused by 48 V dc (or by 220 V ac if envisaged in the equipment). Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body. Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 494 / 542
A.3.4 : Harmful Optical Signals Description specific for 9600LSYLHR/LHRC

A.3.4.1: Optical safety: Labelling If the assembly or unit is fitted with a laser, the labels comply with the IEC 608251 and IEC 608252 International Norms. According to the stated norms, the presence of a laser with Hazard Level 3B or higher is indicated by the following warning label in compliancy with the IEC 82511993 International Norms:
As far as optical safety is concerned, this equipment is fitted with Hazard Level 1 laser type, thus the above symbol is not present. For this equipment (fitted with Hazard Level 1 laser type) no other labels regarding the laser characteristics are present, with the exception of that (optional) specified in para.13.8.4 on page 103.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 495 / 542
A.3.4.2: Optical safety: general rules For operations limited to 9600LSYLHR/LHRC equipment, no specific cautions regarding optical safety must be observed. Nevertheless, if you operate also on other equipment where laser labels are affixed, observe the following cautions: On handling optical equipments or units or cables always check that laser labels are properly affixed and that the system complies with applicable optical standards.
DANGER! Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by

the fiber optic transmitters can cause eyes damages. Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of units containing laser devices or cables transporting optical signals, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rules: a) b) c) d) Laser radiation is not visible by the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen, laser radiation may be present. Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable or connector, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. All optical connectors, terminating either fibers and transmitters/receivers, are provided with protective covers that must always be used, as soon as possible, when any optical link is disconnected for installation/test/maintenance purposes or whatever operation. Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable by means of magnifiers/microscopes, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. A magnifier/microscope greatly increases the damage hazard to the eyes. Never point an unterminated optical fiber splice, cable or connector to other persons, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. Always remove electrical power from near and far optical transmitters before disconnecting optical links between the transmitter and the receiver. Wearing of laser safety goggles or eyes shields is recommended for every person working on optical devices, whenever the above listed rules cannot be followed.
e)
f) g) h)
A.3.4.3: Optical safety: equipment specific data

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Refer to para.13.8 on page 102.
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 496 / 542
A.3.5 : Risks of Explosions A.3.5.1: Labelling and safety instructions

This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signalled by the following label:
Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down flow (batteryemitted hydrogen). A 417IEC5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that the openings must not be covered up.
A.3.6 : Moving Mechanical Parts A.3.6.1: Labelling and safety instructions The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been stopped.
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 497 / 542
A.3.7 : Heatradiating Mechanical Parts Description specific for 9600LSYLHR/LHRC A.3.7.1: Labelling and safety instructions The presence of heatradiating mechanical parts is indicated by the following warning label in compliancy with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:
carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where heatradiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule: a) Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 498 / 542
A.3.8 : Equipment emitting RF power Description specific for 9600LSYLHR/LHRC

Reminder from site preparation procedure: The site must be compliant with ICNIRP guidelines or local regulation if more restrictive. The following rules should be strictly applied by Customer: Non authorized persons should not enter the compliance boundaries, if any, for the general public. Compliance boundaries, if any, related to Electro Magnetic Field exposure must be marked. Workers should be allowed to switchoff the power if they have to operate inside compliance boundaries Assure good cable connection. Install the antenna as high as possible from floor or area with public access (if possible the cylinder delimitating the compliance boundaries, if any, or the cylinder corresponding to the transmission area directly in front of antenna with the same diameter as the antenna, more than 2 meters high). Install the antenna as for as possible from other existing equipment emitting RF power. Anyway remind that someone standing in front of the 9600LSY antenna may cause traffic shutdown Place the relevant stickers: On the site when applicable (when people can cross the compliance boundaries and/or the transmission area of the antenna, i.e. roof top installation): Warning label Do not stand on the antenna axis On the mast (front side): EMF emission warning sign (Yellow and black) to be placed at bottom of antenna, visible by someone moving in front of the antenna (roof top installation) On the antenna (rear side): EMF emission warning sign, placed on the antenna.
EMF emission warning sign
A.3.9 : Specific safety rules in this handbook Specific safety rules are specified in the following chapters: chapter 45, para.45.1 on page 331 chapter 47: para.47.3.2 on page 349 para.47.3.5 on page 352 para.47.3.9 on page 359 para.47.3.10 on page 362
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 499 / 542
A.4 : Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)

The equipments EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination, grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic units, presence of dummy covers, etc.). Before starting any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance work refer to the Technical Handbook, specifically to Handbooks: Installation, LineUp or Commissioning Maintenance chapter in this Handbook
The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this handbook by the symbol and term:
ATTENTION
EMC NORMS
A.4.1 : EMC General Norms Installation All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use only cables and connectors suggested in this technical handbook or in the relevant Plant Documentation, or those specified in the CustomersInstallation Norms. (or similar documents) Shielded cables must be suitably terminated Install filters outside the equipment as required Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper dia. and impedance Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before having cleaned and decrease it. Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and decrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.) Screw fasten the units to the subrack. To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.
A.4.2 : EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers, ESD connector protections, etc.) To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given
A.4.3 : EMC General Norms Maintenance

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean and decrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.) Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well. Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 500 / 542
A.5 : Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges

Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary measures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminated the maintenance and monitoring operations. Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges, to this concern the following warning labels have been affixed:
Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the installation/maintenance phases. Workers are supplied with antistatic protection devices consisting of: an elasticized band worn around the wrist a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack.
ELASTICIZED BAND COILED CORD Fig. 200. Antistatic protection device kit
A.6 : Suggestions, notes and cautions

Suggestions and special notes are marked by the following symbol: Suggestion or note.... Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol: TITLE...
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(caution to avoid equipment damage) statement....
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 501 / 542
A.7 : Labels affixed to the Equipment

This paragraph indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification and serial labels affixed to the equipment, with the exception of those already mentioned in para.A.3.2 (page 493) thru A.5 (page 501). The label description is grouped as follows: Label specific for 9600LSY Equipment, herebelow General Use Labels, starting on page 503.
A.7.1 : Label specific for 9600LSY Equipment LABEL POSITION
ALCATEL
9662 LSY
12345
1111111
Certificato Omologazione ITALIA
ISCTI/2/1/01/044000 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SYMBOL OR WRITING
ALCATEL
MEANING Alcatel Logo Equipment Acronym European Community Logo Notified body Not harmonized frequency logo Electrostatic Device Logo
9662 LSY (example) CE 12345 (example) !
1111111 (example) A ISCTI/2/1/01/044000 (example) xxxxxxxxxxxxxx (example)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Factory identification Factory identification bar code 128 Omologation certificate number (optional) Omologation certificate number (optional)
Fig. 201. LSY equipment identification label
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 502 / 542
A.7.2 General use labels Fig. 202. thru Fig. 207. illustrate the most common positions of the labels on the units, modules and subracks. Fig. 208. thru Fig. 209. illustrate the information (e.g., identification and serial No.) printed on the labels. The table below relates the ref. numbers stated on the figures to the labels used. Labelling depicted hereafter is for indicative purposes and could be changed without any notice.
Tab. 69. Label references Ref. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Name of Label Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) Item identification label item on catalog Label identifying the equipment Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N.) + CE mark Serial number of item specified on catalogue + Subrack ESD mark Omologation certificate number (optional)
On contract basis, customized labels can be affixed to the equipment. Standard labels can be affixed to any position on the equipment, as required by the Customer. However, for each of the above are applied the rules defined by each individual Customer.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 503 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 69. on page 503
955.203.292 Q
Fig. 202. Largesubrack labels
ABCD
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
504 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED 7 5
Fig. 203. Smallsubrack labels
05
955.203.292 Q
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 69. on page 503.
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
505 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ABC
05
xxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 69. on page 503
955.203.292 Q
Fig. 204. Labels on units with standard cover plate
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
506 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ABC
05
955.203.292 Q
Fig. 205. Modules label
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 69. on page 503.
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
507 / 542
NB.1
ABC
NB.1 = The label is present on the p.c.s. component side NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 69. on page 503
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 206. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 508 / 542
NB.1
ABC
NB. 1 = The label is present on p.c.s. components side or rear side on the empty spaces.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 69. on page 503 Fig. 207. Back panels internal label
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 509 / 542
FACTORY SERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE (format 128; Module = 0,166; EN 799; Subset B/C)
Fig. 208. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + space + ICS ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + ICS BAR CODE (format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2) ALCATEL FACTORY PART NUMBER + SPACE + CS
ACRONYM
SERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE (format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 209. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 510 / 542
FACTORY P/N + CS
APPENDIX B : INFORMATION ON FORMER VERSION TRU

This appendix describes the former version TRU P/N 3DB00734AA (factory P/N 593.230.032) and the relevant interconnections with LHR system. This appendix is addressed only to Customers having installed it in their system, instead of the new enhanced TRU P/N REF.[3] in Tab. 11. on page 146. N.B. In case the new enhanced TRU is installed in your system, ignore this appendix and make reference, for this kind of information, to the: Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook (REF.[L] on page 527)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 511 / 542
B.1 : T.R.U. connectors

M8 M6 M7 M5 M4 M2 M3 M1 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Alarm Extension
Box TRU
2A 1A 3A
4A 5A
6A 1B
2B 3B
4B 5B
6B
Front view
T.R.U.
Front view
M9
Rear view
T.R.U.
DC input and distribution

M10
b b+
b b+
a a+
a a+ Rear view without cover
Legend on page 513 Fig. 210. Former version Top Rack Unit connector numbering
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 512 / 542
Legend for Fig. 210. : a)

(a) (a+) (b) (b+) (a) (a+) (b) (b+) :

Primary BATT.A and BATT.B. Power Supply input and distribution frame (N.B.)
b)
(M7) :
for usage see Tab. 31. on page 219; pins connected in parallel to connector (M8)
c)
(M6) :
for usage see Tab. 33. on page 220; pins connected in parallel to connector (M8)
d)
(M1) to (M5) and (M10) :

RM Interface connections; pins connected in parallel to connector (M8) . Pinout in Tab. 70. herebelow.
e)
(M9) :
Power Supply, alarm and service connections (N.B.)
f)
(1A) to (6B) :
Output Power Supply connectors/breakers toward the user shelves indicated in Tab. 28. on page 200. For the physical connection from connector/breakers to the user shelves, make reference to para.24.4 on page 218.
N.B.
For further information on TRU unit (in particular for hardware presettings), please refer to OPTINEX rack specific documentation.
B.2 : Station Alarms

Station alarm interface access is provided in TRU unit, connectors (M1) to (M5); see Fig. 210. on page 512. Tab. 70. Station Alarms Connector pinout of former version TRU for LHR PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ALARM +VSERV C RATTD ABN RURG RNURG VSERV CH TOR GND
MEANING +Service battery Alarm storing command Yellow LED switch on Alarm storing Yellow LED switch on Abnormal condition Red LED (1) switch on Urgent alarm Red LED (2) switch on Not Urgent alarm Service battery Green LED switch on buzzer VBATT1 failure or VBATT2 failure GROUND
MANAGED BY HW/SW
HW HWSW SW HWSW HWSW HW HW
1 5
6 9
8 9
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 513 / 542
B.3 : Power supply distribution connections

N.B. For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.24.3 on page 211.
Tab. 71. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS CABLE TYPE N. 1 1 A 1 1 1 1 CABLE SIDE (A1) & LABEL Sub. RT / M2 Batt.A Sub. RT / M3 Batt.B Sub. RT / M5 Batt.A Sub. RT / M6 Batt.B Sub. B.B. / M1 Batt.A Sub. B.B. / M2 Batt.B (N.B.1) (N.B.1) (N.B.1) (N.B.1) (N.B.3) (N.B.4) CABLE SIDE (A2) & LABEL (N.B.2) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 1A T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 1B T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 2A T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 2B T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 3A T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 3B
Tab. 72. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT CABLE TYPE B N. 1 1 CABLE SIDE (B1) & LABEL Fans Unit down (up) / M1 Batt.A (N.B.5) Fans Unit down (up) / M4 Batt.B (N.B.5) CABLE SIDE (B2) & LABEL (N.B.2) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 5A T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 5B
Tab. 73. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT CABLE TYPE B N. 1 1 CABLE SIDE (B1) & LABEL Fans Unit down (up) / M1 Batt.A (N.B.6) Fans Unit down (up) / M4 Batt.B (N.B.6) CABLE SIDE (B2) & LABEL (N.B.2) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 6A T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 6B
Tab. 74. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL FOR WMSN CABLE TYPE A N. 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CABLE SIDE (A1) & LABEL ADM CONGI / C1 ADM SERGI / S1 (N.B.7) (N.B.7) CABLE SIDE (A2) & LABEL (N.B.2) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 4A T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 4B
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
see Fig. 111. page 209 see Fig. 210. page 512 connected to Power Supply input connector of PSF1 (see Fig. 79. page 160) connected to Power Supply input connector of PSF2 (see Fig. 79. page 160) connected to Power Supply input connectors M1/M4 (see Fig. 105. page 198) of BBs FANS shelf (see POS.(E) in Fig. 71. on page 152) connected to Power Supply input connectors M1/M4 (see Fig. 105. page 198) of ADMs FANS shelf (see POS.(L) in Fig. 71. on page 152) refer to 1650SMC documentation
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 514 / 542
APPENDIX C : DOCUMENTATION GUIDE

This appendix contains all information regarding: this handbook, herebelow the Customer Documentation set this handbook belongs to, on page 522
C.1 : Handbook guide

This paragraph contains all information regarding this handbook and is organized as follows: Handbook applicability Purpose of the handbook Handbook history herebelow on page 516 on page 517
C.1.1 : Handbook applicability This handbook applies to the following product-releases: PRODUCT 9640LSY 9647LSY 9662LSY 9667LSY 9674LSY 9681LSY 9610LSY 9611LSY 9613LSY FREQ.RANGE 3.6 4.2 3 6 4 2 GHz 4.4 5.0 4 4 5 0 GHz 5.9 6.4 5 9 6 4 GHz 6.4 7.1 6 4 7 1 GHz 7.1 7.7 7 1 7 7 GHz 7.7 8.7 7 7 8 7 GHz 10 10.7 GHz 10.7 11.7 10 7 11 7 GHz 12.75 13.25 12 75 13 25 GHz RELEASE 1.00.00 2.00.00 1.00.00 2.00.00 1.00.00 2.00.00 1.00.00 2.00.00 1.00.00 2.00.00 1.00.00 2.00.00 2.00.00 1.00.00 2.00.00 1.00.00 2.00.00 ANV P/N 3DB 00581 AAAA 3DB 04272 AAAA 3DB 00584 AAAA 3DB 04274 AAAA 3DB 00587 AAAA 3DB 04276 AAAA 3DB 00590 AAAA 3DB 04278 AAAA 3DB 00593 AAAA 3DB 04280 AAAA 3DB 00596 AAAA 3DB 04282 AAAA 3DB 04288 AAAA 3DB 00599 AAAA 3DB 04284 AAAA 3DB 02270 AAAA 3DB 04286 AAAA FACTORY P/N 522.171.110 522.171.120 522.171.210 522.171.220 522.171.310 522.171.320 522.171.410 522.171.420 522.171.510 522.171.520 522.171.610 522.171.620 522.171.920 522.171.710 522.171.720 522.171.810 522.171.820
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
in the following configurations: LHR Regenerator related WMSN (LHR + 1650SMC)
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 515 / 542
C.1.2 : Purpose of the handbook This handbook belongs to the Customer Documentation set envisaged for the equipment specified in para. C.1.1 on page 515. Please refer to para.C.2 on page 522 to have the list and description of such Customer Documentation set. With reference to equipment configuration stated in para.C.1.1 on page 515, this handbook provides the following pieces of information: system description on two levels: first level and detailed level, both from system, hardware and software points of view system Technical Specifications system hardware structure: item Part Numbers and equipping rules (provisioning) unit operative hardware description: access point description (usage of led, pushbuttons, switches and connectors for Customer use), connection rules N.B. this handbook does not contain detailed information regarding: hardware setting options, that are included in the handbook 9600LSY Hardware setting documents (REF.[K] on page 527), that must be always available to the Operator in charge of the equipment installation, commissioning, troubleshooting and repair, as it contains the information necessary to carry out the hardware setting of the equipments units branchings, that are included in the handbook: 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Branching drawings (REF.[B] on page 524), that must be always available to the Operator who needs this kind of information
system cabling spare parts provisioning preventive maintenance procedures corrective maintenance and unit replacement procedures (N.B.) N.B. In any case, the C.T. Operators Handbook must be always available to the Operator in charge of the equipment troubleshooting and repair, as it contains the information necessary to carry out troubleshooting through the Craft Terminal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 516 / 542
C.1.3 : Handbook history C.1.3.1: List of the editions and modified parts
The following Tab. 75. indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition. Legend: n = new part m = modified part blank= part unchanged
Tab. 75. Handbook history HANDBOOK EDITION FRONT MATTER Preliminary information Handbook applicability, purpose and history Handbook structure SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling Quick Guide SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 11 12 13 21 22 23 24 Introduction to the 9600LSY radio system family System description Technical specifications System configurations Equipment part list and provisioning Operative information on equipment boards System cabling 01 n n 02 m 03 m 04 m n n m m m m m m m m m n m m m m m m m m m m m m n m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m 05 06
SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATION
SECTION 3: FREQUENCY PLANS, TRANSCEIVER P/N & HW SETTING 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 310

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Introduction 9640LSY 9647LSY 9662LSY 9667LSY 9674LSY 9681LSY 9610LSY 9611LSY 9613LSY
table continues
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 517 / 542

n n n n n n m m m m m m

n n n n n n n n n n n n n m m m m m m m m
table continues Tab. 75. Handbook history SECTION 4: MAINTENANCE 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 51 52 53 A B C D Maintenance Policy Set and use of EOW functions Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts First Level Maintenance Preventive Maintenance Troubleshooting Unit replacement Transceiver repair and replacement Faulty unit repair and repair form Signal management Hardware description Alarm Management SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling Information on former version TRU Documentation guide List of symbols and abbreviations n m m n n m n m m m m m n m m n n m n m m m m m m m
HANDBOOK EDITION
01
02
03
04
05
06
SECTION 6: APPENDICES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 518 / 542
SECTION 5: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

n n n n n n n n m m m m m m m m m m m m m m n n n m m m
C.1.3.2: Notes on draft editions Ed.01ADRAFT created on October 23th, 2001 is the first NEITHER validated NOR officially released issue. C.1.3.3: Notes on Ed.01 Ed.01 created on November 15th, 2001 is the first validated and officially released issue. C.1.3.4: Notes on Ed.02 Ed.02 created on April 18th, 2002. The following main changes have been done: in Chapter Physical Configuration : Part List has been updated; descriptions regarding equipment provisioning and unit operative information have been updated and improved in Chapter Technical Specifications : Branching Interface description has been added, and Environmental characteristics description has been improved Chapter Maintenance has been improved with revised and fully new parts, in particular with regard to information relevant to Spare Part Set, Preventive Maintenance and Corrective Maintenance (troubleshooting and unit replacement procedures) the new Chapter Documentation Guide has been updated to list and describe new handbooks in the new Chapter SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling : information regarding equipment labelling has been updated in Chapter Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes : the list of enclosed documents has been updated C.1.3.5: Notes on Ed.03 Ed.03 created on September 27th, 2002. The following main changes have been done: throughout the handbook: new items added: Frequency Reuse kit, Kit Loudspeaker (P/N and operative information) elimination of High Power Transceivers important changes and improvements regarding Transceivers: operative information in chapters Physical Configuration and System Cabling description in chapter Functional Description spare part list and fully new repair procedure in chapter Maintenance in chapter Physical Configuration circuit breaker values updated Chapter Technical Specifications updated in section Frequency Plans & Part Numbers: new chapter for 9610LSY, new Transceiver for 9681LSY in Chapter Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes : the list of enclosed documents has been updated.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 519 / 542
C.1.3.6: Notes on Ed.04 Ed.04 created on June 29th, 2004 is the fourth validated and officially released issue. This edition has been fully revised; major changes are: handbook structure has been changed, shifting less used information (from operative point of view) toward its end, in the new sections FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION and APPENDICES. all chapters of section SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS have been modified for: 64QAM modulation, supported starting from SWP 2.0 Version 2.0.2 the use of the new WTD ETSI rack (2200mm or 2000mm high) instead of Optinex rack in chapter Technical specifications, besides changes for 64QAM modulation, the characteristics regarding the 99% power channel bandwidth and Emission Designator have been specified chapter Equipment part list and provisioning has been modified for: rack, enhanced TRU subrack, items for 64QAM modulation and other items equipping rules of FANS shelf and FANS assembled units in the rack chapter Operative information has been modified for: Cautions to avoid equipment damage information TRU breaker types detailed TRU shelf cabling information in chapters Operative information and System cabling has been removed, because already included in the Installation Handbooks section Frequency plans, transceiver P/N & HW setting has been updated for the following: addition of Transmitter specialization for a frequency plan information, previously missing addition of detailed instructions for Transceiver hardware settings, because the only usage of their setting documents (MSZZQ documents) was not fully clear to many Customers the usage of 64QAM modulation in some frequency plans of 9640LSY, 9647LSY, 9667LSY and 9611LSY correction of some frequency plans (in particular 9647LSY Channel plan Spain UN56) section Maintenance has been greatly improved, adding and changing the following: new chapters Maintenance Policy, Set and use of EOW functions, First Level Maintenance Corrective Maintenance has been split in 4 main chapters, with improved operative instructions in whole handbook, the term transceiver has been changed to transmitter, when applicable, to distinguish the transmitter subassembly from the transceiver assembly. chapter Documentation guide has been updated for new handbooks section HW SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES has been removed, because the previously annexed documents are now separately available in the new handbooks 9600LSY HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION and 9600LSY/LHR BRANCHING DRAWINGS.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 520 / 542
C.1.3.7: Notes on Ed.05 Ed.05 created on February 8th, 2005 is the fifth validated and officially released issue. This edition has been done to introduce some corrections and improvements; major changes are: in section System description and technical specifications : in chapter Technical specifications, update of Characteristics applicable to 64QAM systems in section System composition and configurations : in chapter Operative information , additional information for Cautions to avoid equipment damage in section Frequency plans, transceiver P/N & HW setting : in chapter Introduction , propaedeutic explanations regarding the Alternative center band frequencies (normal and interleaved channels) have been improved with additional examples in chapter 9674LSY , frequency plans ITUR F.385 Annex 3 L&H and ITUR F.385 Rec. 1L corrected in section Maintenance : chapters Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts and Unit replacement improved chapter Transceiver repair and replacement corrected and improved in section Appendices : in chapter Documentation guide information regarding Documentation set description updated. Errors found in previous edition have been corrected. Revision bars point out major (listed above) and minor (not listed above) modifications with respect to previous edition. Revision bars in correspondence of empty lines or empty table rows, point out parts eliminated or shifted in other places of the handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 521 / 542
C.2 : Documentation set description

The 9600LSY system can be supplied in the basic configurations (LHR, LHRC and WMSN) introduced in para.11.5 on page 33. This paragraph contains all information regarding the Customer Documentation set this handbook belongs to: 9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0 productreleaseversion handbooks for LHR version on page 523 9600LSY Rel.2.0 productreleaseversion handbooks for LHRC version Documentation of 9600LSY Rel.2.0 for both LHR and LHRC versions Optional handbooks and CDROMs including: 1320CT platform additional documentation Handbooks and CDROMs of 1650SMC on page 529: on page 529 on page 530 on page 531 on page 531 on page 532 on page 534 on page 525 on page 527
General on Alcatel Customer Documentation including:
CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation Product levels and associated Customer Documentation Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers
The list of handbooks given in the following is valid as at the issue date of this Handbook and can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook. Some of the handbooks listed in the following may not be available as at the issue date of this Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 522 / 542
C.2.1 : 9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0 productreleaseversion handbooks for LHR version This paragraph lists and briefly describes the handbooks making up the documentation set envisaged for the LHR version of 9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0 product releases. Please refer to following para.C.3 on page 531 for a general description of Alcatel Customer Documentation system. The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the LHR version of 9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0 system is modularly composed by different handbooks. Tab. 76. herebelow lists the handbooks. The [REF] indication in Tab. 76. is relevant to the handbook brief description given in tables Tab. 77. and Tab. 80. thru Tab. 82. in the following. Tab. 76. 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 product release handbooks TECHNICAL HANDBOOKS 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Technical Handbook 9600LSY Hardware setting documents 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Branching drawings REF [A] [K] [B] NOTES
INSTALLATION AND LINEUP HANDBOOKS 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Installation Handbook Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 Line Up guide 9600LSY/LHR Rel.2.0 Line Up guide 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Expansion procedures Interference investigation procedure OPERATORS HANDBOOKS 9600LSY Rel.1.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0 9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 V2.0.0/V2.0.1 9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 from V2.0.2 DOCUMENTATION CDROM DCP 9600LSY 1.0/2.0 CDROM [Q] [N] [O] [P] in alternative according to SWP version used [C] [L] [D] [E] [F] [M] in alternative according to SWP version used
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 523 / 542
Tab. 77. Handbooks related to LHR version only

REF
HANDBOOK 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Technical Handbook
ANV P/N FACTORY P/N 3DB 02839 AAAA 955.203.292 Q
NOTES this handbook
[A]
To be used in the 9600LSY/LHR Regenerator configuration. Provides information regarding Equipment description, composition and maintenance (together with handbooks REF.[O] or [P] and REF.[E]) 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Branching drawings 3DB 02839 CAAA
(without Factory P/N)
[B]
Contains the detailed drawings of the various configurations of branching envisaged for 9600LSY/LHR Regenerator configuration. N.B. This documentation is integrated in Technical Handbook REF.[A] till its Ed.03. From its Ed.04 it is no longer present in the Technical Handbook. 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Installation Handbook 3DB 02840 AAAA 955.203.302 S
[C]
To be used in the 9600LSY LHR Regenerator configurations. The Installation Handbook provides information regarding Equipment installation, according to Alcatel Installation Engineering Dept. rules. N.B. When the TRU P/N REF.[3] on page 146 is employed, the handbook REF.[L] must be used for proper installation and configuration. 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 Line Up guide 9600LSY/LHR Rel.2.0 Line Up guide 3DB 02841 AAAA 955.203.312 K 3DB 02841 CAAA
[D] [E]
N.B. NB
N.B. In alternative according to SWP version used. To be used in the 9600LSY LHR Regenerator configurations. The Lineup Guide provides information regarding equipment line up and preventive maintenance procedures, according to Alcatel Installation Engineering Dept. rules. 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Expansion procedures [F] 3DB 02841 DAAA
To be used in the 9600LSY LHR Regenerator configurations. This handbook explains how to expand the number of channels of a LHR system both from hardware and software points of view, according to Alcatel Installation Engineering Dept. rules.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 524 / 542
C.2.2 : 9600LSY Rel.2.0 productreleaseversion handbooks for LHRC version This paragraph lists and briefly describes the handbooks making up the documentation set envisaged for the LHRC version of 9600LSY Rel.2.0 product release. Please refer to following para.C.3 on page 531 for a general description of Alcatel Customer Documentation system. The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the LHRC version of 9600LSY Rel.2.0 system is modularly composed by different handbooks. Tab. 78. herebelow lists the handbooks. The [REF] indication in Tab. 78. is relevant to the handbook brief description given in tables Tab. 79. thru Tab. 82. in the following. Tab. 78. 9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 product release handbooks TECHNICAL HANDBOOKS 9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook 9600LSY Hardware setting documents 9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Branching drawings REF [G] [K] [H] NOTES
INSTALLATION AND LINEUP HANDBOOKS 9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook 9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Line Up guide Interference investigation procedure OPERATORS HANDBOOKS 9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 V2.0.0/V2.0.1 9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 from V2.0.2 DOCUMENTATION CDROM DCP 9600LSY 1.0/2.0 CDROM [Q] [O] [P] in alternative according to SWP version used [I] [L] [J] [M]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 525 / 542
Tab. 79. Handbooks related to LHRC version only

REF
HANDBOOK 9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook
ANV P/N FACTORY P/N 3DB 02839 BAAA 955.203.293 R
NOTES
[G]
To be used in the 9600LSY/LHRC Regenerator configuration. Provides information regarding Equipment description, composition and maintenance (together with handbooks REF.[O] or [P] and REF.[J]) 9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Branching drawings 3DB 02839 DAAA
N.B.
[H]
Contains the detailed drawings of the various configurations of branching envisaged for 9600LSY/LHRC Regenerator configuration. N.B. This documentation is integrated in Technical Handbook REF.[G] till its Ed.01. From its Ed.02 it is no longer present in the Technical Handbook. 9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook 3DB 02840 BAAA 955.203.303 T
[I]
To be used in the 9600LSY LHRC Regenerator configurations. The Installation Handbook provides information regarding Equipment installation, according to Alcatel Installation Engineering Dept. rules. N.B. When the TRU P/N REF.[3] on page 146 is employed, the handbook REF.[L] must be used for proper installation and configuration. 9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Line Up guide 3DB 02841 BAAA 955.203.313 L
[J]
To be used in the 9600LSY LHRC Regenerator configurations. The Lineup Guide provides information regarding equipment line up and preventive maintenance procedures, according to Alcatel Installation Engineering Dept. rules.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 526 / 542
C.2.3 : Documentation of 9600LSY for both LHR and LHRC versions Tab. 80. Additional handbooks for installation, commissioning and maintenance purposes
REF
HANDBOOK 9600LSY Hardware setting documents
ANV P/N FACTORY P/N 3DB 02839 EAAA

NOTES N.B.
[K]
Contains the hardware setting documents for both LHR and LHRC configurations. N.B. This documentation is integrated in Technical Handbook REF.[A] till its Ed.03. From its Ed.04 it is no longer present in the Technical Handbook. N.B. This documentation is integrated in Technical Handbook REF.[G] till its Ed.01. From its Ed.02 it is no longer present in the Technical Handbook. Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook 3DB 02840 CAAA
[L]
To be used in the 9600LSY LHR/LHRC Regenerator configurations, when the TRU P/N REF.[3] on page 146 is used. Interference investigation procedure 3DB 04165 EAAA 955.203.374 Z
[M]
Describes the measurement procedure for the interference searching in the various RF bands used by Alcatel Radio Transmission products.
Tab. 81. Handbooks related to the specific product SWP management and local product control REF [N] HANDBOOK 9600LSY Rel.1.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0 ANV P/N FACTORY P/N 3DB 02838 AAAA 957.207.022 A NOTES
To be used with: SWP REG.9600LSY R.1.0 (3DB 03179 AAAA) Provides 9600LSY/LHR screens and operational procedures for Equipment SW management and maintenance. [O] 9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 V2.0.1 9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 V2.0.2 on 3DB 02838 BAAA 957.207.023 B 3DB 02838 CAAA
for SWP version V2.0.1 for SWP versions V2.0.2
[P]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To be used with: SWP REG.9600LSY R.2.0 (3DB 04401 AAAA) in association with both LHR and LHRC configurations. Provides 9600LSY/LHR/LHRC screens and operational procedures for Equipment SW management and maintenance.
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 527 / 542
Tab. 82. Documentation on CDROM REF CDROM TITLE DCP 9600LSY 1.0/2.0 CDROM [Q] ANV P/N FACTORY P/N 3DB 02831 AAAA 417.200.017 D NOTES Ed.05 on
Contains, in electronic format (Acrobat pdf), handbooks REF.[A] to [P]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 528 / 542
C.2.4 : Optional handbooks and CDROMs C.2.4.1: 1320CT platform additional documentation
Documentation to be used depends on the Q3CTP/K Version, that is displayed when, on the PC, you select the 1320CT application for its launch. The Q3CTP/K Version embedded in the SWP is also specified in the Operator Handbooks paragraph ECT SW SubComponents of chapter (in Section SWP DESCRIPTION AND VERSIONS) related to the SWP version you use. Tab. 83. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform Usage according to Q3CTP/K Version HANDBOOK P/N q1.3.x and t 1.7.x ED.03 q1.7.x and t 3.0.1 N.B. q 3.0.1
1320CT Rel.1.x Basic Operators Handbook 1330AS Rel.5.0 Operators Handbook 1330AS Rel.5.1 Operators Handbook ELM Operators Handbook 1320CT Rel.3.x Basic Operators Handbook AS Rel.6.5 Operators Handbook ELB Rel.2.x Operators Handbook N.B.1 N.B.2 N.B.3
3AL 79186 AAAA
3AL 71079 AAAA
3AL 71109 AAAA 3AL 37953 AAAA 3AL 79551 AAAA
3AL 88876 AAAA
3AL 88877 AAAA
Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT (Craft terminal) of Alcatel InfoModel Network Elements. Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm Surveillance software embedded in the 1320CT software package. In 1330AS Rel.5.1 Operators Handbook, information about Historical Alarms and Network Element Symbols Management (Physical Network Management) are not valid for Craft Terminal. They are used by Network Management only. Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log Management/Browser software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
N.B.4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 529 / 542

ED.04 on X X X X X X X
2,3 4 1
Tab. 84. Documentation on CDROM for 1320CT platform Q3CTP/K Version 1.x HANDBOOK ANV P/N Factory P/N 3AL 79549 AAAA 417.100.031 3AL 79552 AAAA 417.100.032
DCP1320CT BASIC CDROM
3.x
DCP 1320 CT 3.x CD_ROM EN
Contain, in electronic format (Acrobat pdf), the 1320 CT Operators Handbooks (see Tab. 83. on page 529)
C.2.4.2: Handbooks and CDROMs of 1650SMC 1650SMC has its own: Technical Handbook Installation Handbook Commissioning Handbook CT Operators Handbook CDROM containing the above cited handbooks.
Their P/Ns are not indicated here, as they depend on the Product release and Software Package version.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 530 / 542
C.3 : General on Alcatel Customer Documentation

This paragraph describes in general the Alcatel Customer Documentation system, details the association between the product levels and the associated documentation, and explains Customer Documentation characteristics as well as the policies for its delivery to Customers. This paragraph is fully applicable to the 2nd generation Radio Product families of Alcatel WTD (Wireless Transmission Division) only. C.3.1 : CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation a) Definition Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as plantindependent and is always independent of any Customization. Plantdependent and/or Customized documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to commercial criteria as far as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned N.B. b) Plantdependent and Customized documentation is not described here.
Aims of standard Customer Documentation Standard system, hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibility and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating, and maintaining the equipment according to Alcatel Laboratory design and Installation Dept. choices. In particular: N.B. the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the explanation of the manmachine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it; maintenance is described down to faulty PCB location and replacement. No supply to Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is envisaged.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 531 / 542
C.3.2 : Product levels and associated Customer Documentation See Fig. 212. on page 533.
a)
Products A product is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of performances and services that it is meant for. E.g. 9600LSY is a product (STM1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Link). Product-releases A product evolves through successive product-releases, which are the real products marketed for their delivery at a certain product-release availability date. A certain product-release performs more functionalities than the previous one. E.g. 9600LSY Rel.1.0 and 9600LSY Rel.2.0 are two successive product-releases of the same product. A productrelease comprehends a set of hardware components and at least one Software Package (SWP); as a whole, they identify the possible network applications and the equipment performances that the specific product-release has been designed, engineered, and marketed for. Configurations and Network Elements In some cases, a product-release includes different possible configurations which are distinguished from one another by different Network Element (NE) types and, from the management point of view, by different SWPs. E.g. 9600LSY Rel.2.0 includes various configurations with two NE types: Regenerator 1+0/1+1/2+0 with NE type LHRC; Regenerator N+0 (n=max 8) / N+1 (n=max 7) with NE type LHR. SWP Releases and Versions See Fig. 211. herebelow. A SWP is identified by the configuration name and by the version number (tree digits). The versions first digit corresponds to the productrelease number first digit; the second digit identifies, together with the first, the SWP release. The third digit of the SWP version identifies the Patch Level of the SWP Release. SWP version SWP Release Product Releases first digit SWP evolution for bug fixing purposes or minor additional features (same SWP Release within same ProductRelease) SWP evolution for major additional features (new SWP Release within same ProductRelease) Product Release) (N.B. see next page) SWP evolution for additional features (new SWP Release of a new ProductRelease) 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 2. 0. 0. 0. 1. 0. 0. Patch Level
b)
c)
d)
7 9 7 2 7 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 211. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 532 / 542
N.B.
Sometimes, different SWP Releases (within the same ProductRelease) are commercially distinguished by different names, e.g. : SWP version 1.0.x 1.1.x 1.2.x SWPRelease commercial name 1.0 1.0B 1.0C
e)
Customer Documentation A product-release(configuration) has its own set of standard Customer Documentation, usually formed of several handbooks, i.e., in general: System and Hardware documentation: one (or more) Technical Handbook(s) an Installation Handbook a LineUp Guide or Commissioning Handbook Software documentation: a Craft Terminal Operators Handbook, associated to the specific SWPRelease other Operators Handbooks (typically those associated to the SW platform embedded in the SWP) PRODUCT
PRODUCTRELEASE 1.0
evolution
PRODUCTRELEASE 2.0
ALTERNATIVE CONFIGURATIONS CONFIG.A CONFIG.B
PRODUCT LEVELS DOCUMENTATION CONFIG.A System & HW Documentation
SWP REL.1.0
evolution
SWP REL.1.1
SWP REL.1.0 SW Documentation
SWP REL.1.1 SW Documentation
Fig. 212. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 533 / 542
C.3.3 : Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers a) Standard supply

Handbooks and CDROMs are standard commercial items and are ordered and delivered as any other Alcatel commercial item. Handbooks and CDROMs are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer to. The number of handbooks or CDROMs per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level. b) Productdocumentation consistency Equipment description and layout are always general, i.e. they never describe the actual composition of the equipment supplied to Customer (this task is entrusted to plantdependent documentation). Detailed hardware documentation concerns actually supplied units and is coherent with the production issue of such units. Softwareassociated handbooks are coherent with the supplied SWP release. Copies of the handbooks regarding a specific productrelease previously delivered can be required specifying P/N and edition. c) Inadvance supply Whenever handbooks or CDROMs are delivered before the relevant equipment delivery, there is the risk that their contents might not agree with the characteristics of the equipment which will be delivered: the more they are in advance the less are they likely to agree. d) Supplying updated handbooks and CDROMs to Customers Supplying updated handbooks or CDROMs to Customers who have already received previous issues is subject to commercial criteria. By updated handbook delivery, we mean the supply of a complete copy of a new issue of the handbook (supplying erratacorrige sheets is not envisaged). e) Copyright notification The technical information of the handbooks and CDROMs supplied to Customers is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent. f) Supply to Customers of Customer Documentation source files Presently not envisaged.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 534 / 542
APPENDIX D LIST OF SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Tab. 85. List Of Symbols N.B. This Table Lists Some Symbols Whose Interpretation Could Be Doubtful. MEANING AND COMMENTS In this handbook it is not the division symbol. It means from .. to ... E.g.: <value1> <value2> means: from <value1> (included) to <value2> (included) A polarization symbol like this: POLARIZATION can be assumed as either horizontal SYMBOLS Once you have decided a polarization (e.g. H or vertical H ) ) V V
SYMBOL
the opposite direction symbol will be opposite polarization (e.g.
Tab. 86. List Of Abbreviations ABBREVIATION A AC ACSE ADC ADM AE AF AGC AIS ALS AMI ANSI AOW API APS ASE ASIC AT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MEANING Alternate Current Association Control Service Element Analog to Digital Converter Add Drop Multiplexer Access Enable Atomic Function Automatic Gain Control Alarm Indication Signal Automatic Laser Shutdown Alternate Mark Inversion American National Standard Institute Additional Order Wire Access Point Identifier Automatic Protection Switching Application Service Element Application Specific Integrated Circuit Attend alarm Far Terminal Alarm Asynchronous Transfer Mode Automatic Transmitter Power Control
ATL ATM ATPC
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 535 / 542
Tab. 86. List Of Abbreviations ABBREVIATION ATTD AUG AUn AUX ATTendeD Administration Unit Group Administrative Unit n (Order) AUXiliary B BB BBE BCA BER BIPx CAN CCDP CFRD C/I CK CMI CMISE CPU CRCn CRU CSW CTP DA DC DCC DCC/M DCC/R DCN DEFEC DEM DF DIV DM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MEANING
Base Band Background Block Error Common Battery Dial Pulsing (Telephone Set) Bit Error Rate Bit Interleaved Parity x C Controller Area Network (communication protocol patented by Robert Bosch GmbH) CoChannel Dual Polarized (Frequency reuse) Component Failure Rate Date Carrier to Interference ratio Clock Code Mark Inversion Common Management Information Service Element Central Processor Unit Cyclic Redundancy Check n Clock Reference Unit Common SoftWare Connection Termination Point D Distant Alarm Direct Current Data Communication Channels (D1D12) Multiplex Section DCC (D4D12) Regenerator Section DCC (D1D3) Data Communication Network FEC Decoder Demodulator Dialog Failure Diversity Degraded Minute Defect Second Department of Trade and Industry Dual Tone MultiFrequency 05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 536 / 542
DS DTI DTMF
ED
Tab. 86. List Of Abbreviations ABBREVIATION

MEANING E Error Block Errored Block Count Equipment Controller Embedded Control Channel External Communication Service Equipment Craft Terminal Equipment Engineering Equipment Failure Electronic Industries Association ElectroMagnetic Compatibility Equipment Management Function Engineering Order Wire Equipment Protection Switching Error Second European Telecommunication Report European Telecommunication Standard European Telecommunication Standard Institute Early Warning Early Warning High Early Warning Low Excessive BER F Front End Far End Block Error Forward Error Correction (Code) Far End Receiver Failure Failure Unit Failure rate Failed Switch Request Count Failed Switch Request Duration G General Alarm Ground Benign Ground Fixed Ground Mobile H High Bit Error Rate High level Data Link Control
EB EBC EC ECC ECS ECT EE EF EIA EMC EMF EOW EPS ES ETR ETS ETSI EW EWH EWL EXCBER FE FEBE FEC FERF FIT FR FSRC FSRD GA GB GF GM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
HBER HDLC
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 537 / 542
Tab. 86. List Of Abbreviations ABBREVIATION HET HEW HK HPT HPC HS HST ID IDU IEC IF IRC ISO ISPB ISSB ITUR ITUT LAN LBER LC LED LEW LHR LHRC LO LOF LOP LOS LPA LPT LS LSY MC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MEANING High Early Warning HouseKeeping High order Path Termination High order Path Connection High Speed Hot StandBy I IDentifier InDoor Unit International Electro technical Commission Intermediate Frequency International Radiotechnical Commission International Standard Organization Intra Shelf Parallel Bus Intra Shelf Serial Bus International Telecommunication Union Radiocommunication International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication L Local Area Network Low Bit Error Rate Loss of Configuration Light Emitting Diode Low Early Warning Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Compact Local Oscillator Loss Of Frame Loss Of Pointers Loss Of Signal Lower order Path Adaptation Lower order Path Termination Low Speed Long haul SYstem M Monitoring Channel Message Communication Function Mean Dawn Time Loss of incoming pulses
Heterofrequency (Radio system configuration)
MCF MDT MIR
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 538 / 542

MEANING Multi Level Coding Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit Modulator Multiplex Section Multiplex Section Adaptation Multiplex Section Alarm Indication Signal Multiplex Section OverHead Multiplex Section Protection Multiplex Section Remote Defect Indication Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication Multiplex Section Termination Mean Time Between Failures Mean Time To Repair N Not Applicable Nearend Defect Second Network Element Nearend Errored Block Count Network Element Function Application Noise Figure Net Filter Discrimination Not Urgent Non Return to Zero Not Urgent O Office Craft Terminal OutDoor Unit Out of Frame Second OverHead Operation and Maintenance Russian Regulatory Body Out Of Frame Operation System Overflow Order Wire P Personal Computer Plesiocronus Digital Hierarchy Physical Interface
MLC MMIC MOD MS MSA MSAIS MSOH MSP MSRDI MSREI MST MTBF MTTR NA NDS NE NEBC NEFA NF NFD NG NRZ NURG OCT ODU OFS OH O&M OIRT OOF OS OVF OW PC PDH PI
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 539 / 542
Tab. 86. List Of Abbreviations ABBREVIATION PLL PM POH PSA PSAC PSAD PSR PSU QAM QOS RAPS RC RCIM RCT RECT RES RF RFCOH RL RLTS ROSE RPI RPS RRA RRR RRT RS RSOH RSPI RST RTF RX SA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MEANING Performance Monitoring Path Overhead Protection Switch Actual Protection Switch Count Protection Switch Actual Duration Protection Switch Request Power Supply Unit Q Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Quality Of Service R Radio Automatic Protection Switch Radio Controller Radio Channel Identifier Mismatch Remote Craft Terminal Remote Equipment Craft Terminal Radio Equipment and Systems Radio Frequency Radio Frame Complementary Overhead Received Level Received Level Threshold Second Remote Operation Service Element Radio Physical Interface Radio Protection Switching Radio Regenerator Adaptation Radio Relay Repeaters Radio Relay Terminals Regenerator Section Regenerator Section Overhead Radio Synchronous Physical Interface Regeneration Section Termination Remote Terminal Failure Receiver/Received S Service Alarm Security Block System Controller Space Diversity
Phase Locked Loop
SBL SC SD
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 540 / 542

MEANING Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Synchronous Equipment Management Function Synchronous E1 Regeneration Section Severly Errored Seconds Synchronous Equipment Timing Source Signal Failure Sub Network Connection Protection Section Overhead SOH Failure Synchronous Physical Interface Synchronous Path Sink Synchronous Radio Synchronous Radio Modem (Assembly) for Repeater Synchronous Radio Modem (Assembly) for Terminal Synchronous Radio baseband (Assembly) for Terminal Synchronous Radio baseband (Assembly) for Repeater Synchronisation Status Message Standby Synchronous Transport Module N (Hierarchic level) 51 Mbit transmission bit rate Supervisory Unit Switch T TeleAlarms Turn Around Time Terminal Connector / Tandem Connection Transversal Electric Mode Trace Identifier Mismatch Transmitted Level Transmitted Level Threshold Second Transmission and Multiplexing Telecommunication Management Network Termination Point Telephone TRansceiver Top Rack Unit Trail Termination Point Tributary Unit n (Order) Tributary Unit Group n (Order)
SDH SEMF SERS SES SETS SF SNCP SOH SOHF SPI SPS SR SRMR SRMT SRST SRSR SSM STBY STMN STM0 SU SW TA TAT TC TEM TIM TL TLTS TM TMN TP TPH TR TRU TTP TUn TUGn
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 541 / 542
Tab. 86. List Of Abbreviations ABBREVIATION TX U UDR UG UHM UHR USK UT VCn VCO VF VHM WADM WLT WST XPD XPIC XPI XPIF XPOL Transmitter/Transmitted U Unavailability Unpressurized Rectangular Waveguide Type Urgent Alarm Urban Haul split mount terminal Multiplexer Urban Haul split mount terminal Regenerator Stackable Unit Unavailability Time V Virtual Container n (Order) Voltage Controlled Oscillator Voice Frequency Virtual Hardware Machine W Wireless Add and Drop Multiplexer Wireless Line Terminal Way Side Traffic X Cross Polar Discrimination Cross Polar Interference Cancelled Cross Polar Interference Cross Polar Improvement Factor Cross Polar/Polarization MEANING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
END OF DOCUMENT ED
05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 542 / 542
Technical Handbook
Alcatel 9600LSY
STM1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0
LHR version
955.203.292 Q Ed.05
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.05
Documentation set for 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Handbook 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Technical Handbook 9600LSY/LHRLHRC Hardware setting documents 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Branching drawings 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Installation Handbook 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 Lineup Guide 9600LSY/LHR Rel.2.0 Lineup Guide 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Expansion procedures Interference investigation procedure 9600LSY Rel.1.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0 9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 (version V2.0.1) 9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 (from version V2.0.2) ANV P/N 3DB 02839 AAAA 3DB 02839 EAAA 3DB 02839 CAAA 3DB 02840 AAAA 3DB 02841 AAAA 3DB 02841 CAAA 3DB 02841 DAAA 3DB 04165 EAAA 3DB 02838 AAAA 3DB 02838 BAAA 3DB 02838 CAAA in alternative (according to used SWP) d in alternative (according to used SWP) this Handbook
For further information and 1320CT handbooks, see chapter DOCUMENTATION GUIDE in section APPENDICES
When supplied on paper, this handbook is divided by registers, for an easier access to the information herein contained:
CONTENTS
FRONT MATTER SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATIONS SECTION 3: FREQUENCY PLANS, TRANSCEIVER P/N & HW SETTING SECTION 4: MAINTENANCE SECTION 5: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SECTION 6: APPENDICES
REGISTER 1 2 3 4 5 6
955.203.292 Q Ed.05
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0 LHR version TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

fase step
COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N: 955.203.292
Q Ed.05 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.05
ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (FED/PED)

No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 544+4 = 548 DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du ks): 189.930 kbyte COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE: HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY: SERVONO 6 SEPARATORI NUMERATI DA 1 A 6 6 REGISTERS NUMBERED FROM 1 TO 6 ARE NECESSARY STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING No pagine (facciate) No pages TARGHETTE - LABELS FRONTESPIZIO - FRONT PARTE INIZIALE - FRONT MATTER INSERIRE SEPARATORE 1 - INSERT REGISTER 1 SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INSERIRE SEPARATORE 2 - INSERT REGISTER 2 SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATIONS INSERIRE SEPARATORE 3 - INSERT REGISTER 3 SECTION 3: FREQUENCY PLANS, TRANSCEIVER P/N & HW SETTING INSERIRE SEPARATORE 4 - INSERT REGISTER 4 SECTION 4: MAINTENANCE INSERIRE SEPARATORE 5 - INSERT REGISTER 5 SECTION 5: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION INSERIRE SEPARATORE 6 - INSERT REGISTER 6 SECTION 6: APPENDICES TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES: TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS: 544 272 489/542 542/542 397/542 488/542 309/542 396/542 243/542 308/542 119/542 242/542 25/542 118/542 2 1/542 24/542 numerate numbered da from a to
INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
RELEASED 3DB 02839 AAAA TQZZA 4 Y 1/ 4
955.203.292 TQZZA
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
Site VIMERCATE Originators E.CORRADINI WTD 9600LSY REL.1.0/2.0 LHR TECHNICAL HANDBOOK Domain Division Rubric Type Distribution Codes : : : : 9600LSY REL.1.0 & 2.0 LHR TECHNICAL HANDBOOK 9600LSY/LHR REL.1.0/2.0 TECHNICAL HDBK Internal : External :
Approvals Name App. Name App. V.RODELLA C.COLOMBO M.FRECASSETTI
S.SOLIMENA
WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY Labels are done according to A-Italy binder format. Source files and printable files of this handbook are archived in ePDM: Source file: ALICE 6.10 ARCHIVED BY GAPI 3.9.1 Printable file: PDF file must be opened with ACROBAT Reader Version 5.0 at least. (N.B. : it has been created with ACROBAT DISTILLER 6.0)
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.05 9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0 STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LHR version TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ED
05
955.203.292 TQZZA
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0

STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System
LHR version TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

955.203.292 Q Ed.05 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.05
VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0

STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System LHR version TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
955.203.292 Q Ed.05 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.05
VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0
STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System LHR version
955.203.292 Q Ed.05 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.05 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK VOL.1/1
STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System LHR version 955.203.292 Q Ed.05 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.05 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0
VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0

STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System LHR version
955.203.292 Q Ed.05
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
ED
05
955.203.292 TQZZA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
RELEASED
955.203.292 TQZZA
FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT
3DB 02839 AAAA TQZZA
4/ 4

Radio Ip Alcatel

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Radio Ip Alcatel

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

9600LSY/LHR REL.1.0/2.

SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . .

050208 040629 011115 DATE

S405011401 S404062101 validated CHANGE NOTE

S.SOLIMENA ITAVE V.RODELLA ITAVE G.CONSONNI ITACO APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

E.CORRADINI ITAVE E.CORRADINI ITAVE E.CORRADINI ITACO F.BUTORI, G.MAISTO ORIGINATOR

9600LSY REL.1.0/2.0 LHR TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 1 / 542

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 2 / 542

SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 3 / 542

SECTION 3: FREQUENCY PLANS, TRANSCEIVER P/N & HW SETTING . . . . 243

05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 4 / 542

SECTION 4: MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 5 / 542

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 6 / 542

SECTION 5: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 7 / 542

52.5.5 Local Oscillator module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.6 Fans subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 6: APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 8 / 542

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 9 / 542

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 10 / 542

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 11 / 542

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 12 / 542

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 13 / 542

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 14 / 542

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 15 / 542

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 17 / 542

HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 18 / 542

SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING

Harmful optical signals

Moving mechanical parts

Heatradiating mechanical parts

Equipment emitting RF power

Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges: TOPIC WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT

Device sensitive to electrostatic discharges

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) Other Labels affixed to the Equipment

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 19 / 542

have details on system cabling

get item P/Ns

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

05 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 542 20 / 542

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10